g0 ^^^% ^i^' ^ 



>.,«y ^ 









x- '' ; * 4 s s A b 











/ *> 



IT 



*■ .8 Si * H*» y. »■ «a e» « <» 







^0* 















vwf> A G^ . ^W*^ A G ^ <* */?. s* A G 



** sS ^° .. <r "/TIs^ a g ^ ^/7ftS 



: ^.o^ 



V ^ ■< ° o f -P 



^^ 













95/ y o 





'"/7ft s^ a g <v ^TTTT* ' a g ^ * * ft s cT . 



^0« * 



<& 






&<3* 



s A b *"■ * -i * * s s ^0 V > '',.,s^ A" < 

r : %.<* «*■• 

o^,^^V ^°^iL^V G °^^% 



^ 



oF 



tf 



n ^ A^ 









^ °^ 






F 



s" a<^ 







A G <* *<f..'s* A G ^ *< 






<*,* # *^ 










0> y o»>. 

/• -% v v * ^ * ° /■ ^ v v ^ ^ o r ^ V> si- v * ° /• 'V 



^^ 






V 







r ' ^ A^ ^^#A V ^ A^ ^j 



^ ^ 

cS A 



^•.^ 



A % ^ A^ -" 




' » « ^ 



Vd* 



r# 







o, % 






P 



$ o 



U \ 



<!. 



% AT s ^ » * ' 



^ ^0^ 








r <p 



^ 



'+ 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2011 with funding from 
The Library of Congress 



http://www.archive.org/details/lifeworksofchrisOOdock 



the life and works of 
Christopher Dock 



ONLY 1000 COPIES OF THIS WORK 
HAVE BEEN PRINTED, OF WHICH THIS IS 



,INTED,,OF WH 
3. JL ^■ ■ - , ' - ' 



THE 

Life and Works 

of 

CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

America's Pioneer Writer on Education 



A TRANSLATION OF HIS WORKS 
INTO THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 



BY 

MARTIN G. BRUMBAUGH, Ph.D., LL.D. 

Superintendent of Schools, Philadelphia 



WITH AN INTRODUCTION 
BY 

Hon. SAMUEL W. PENNYPACKER, LL.D. 

Ex-Governor of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania 



PHILADELPHIA & LONDON 

J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY 

1908 



LIBRARY of CONGRESS! 

[wo Copies rtec_ vj.. 

MAY 16 1908 
I 

uuyyritfiH entry ' 



10LAs»4 

\ %o 1 1 31 

\ ■ copv a. 



AXc. Mi. 



r 



COPYEIGHT, 1908 

By J. B. Lippincott Company 



Published May, 1908 



Printed by J. B. Lippincott Company 
The Washington Square Press, Philadelphia, U. S. A t 



/ 



6*>7 



INTRODUCTION /Z, 

Twenty-five years ago the name of Christopher 
Dock, the pious schoolmaster on the Skippack, was 
unknown to the reading world, and the light of local 
fame, extending from Germantown to Goshenhop- 
pen, which in the eighteenth century gave a genial 
glow to his life, had faded to an almost imper- 
ceptible ember. To-day it is no exaggeration to say 
that any treatise upon pedagogy which should omit 
recognition of his important labors would be re- 
garded as a failure, and his reputation as a leader 
in educational development in America is univer- 
sally recognized. 

Many learned authors have vied with each other 
in doing homage to the memory of one so worthy. 
To have written the earliest American book upon 
the subject of school teaching is a fact sufficient in 
itself sooner or later to attract the attention of men 
of letters, but that fact is much emphasized when 
the study of his essay discloses that he was far in 
advance of his time and that in his methods of 
teaching and of enforcing discipline he forecast 
what more recent experience has proven to be 
correct. 

Moreover, he was virtuous in life, sweet in dis- 
position and lovable in character, so that when the 
simple people who surrounded him, grown to ma- 
turity, sought to impress upon their children an 
example of modest merit, they ever recurred to the 
conduct of the pious Schoolmaster. 



INTRODUCTION 



Recently the Mennonites of Pennsylvania have 
been introduced into modern literature in a ro- 
mance, the motive of which is an effort to show their 
disregard for learning. It is rather remarkable that 
the dawn of our science of pedagogy and the most 
extensive literary production of the American colo- 
nies were both due to the efforts of these interesting 
people. Dr. Martin Gr. Brumbaugh, the able Super- 
intendent of the public schools of Philadelphia, 
has assumed the congenial task of gathering into 
this volume all of the works of Dock, in order that 
they may have a wider circulation among the read- 
ing public. It is fortunate for the future fame of 
the venerable Schoolmaster that his accomplishment 
has been appreciated by one so entirely capable of 
doing him justice and whose industry has left no 
source of information uninvestigated. 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 

I. Introduction 3 

II. Life of Christopher Dock 11 

III. The Schul-Ordnung 27 

IV. Translation of the Schul-Ordnung 89 

V. Geistliches Magazien — Four Numbers 159 

VI. Translation of the Geistliches Magazien 191 

VII. Schriften with Translation 239 

VIII. Hymns with Translation 255 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 

pag a 

Bench and Table used by Dock in his School in 
Germantown 14 

Table used by Dock in his School in Germantown 14 

Title Page of Second Edition of the Schul-Ordnung 16 

Two of Dock's Manuscript Hymns 18 

The Alphabet Schriften 240, 248 

The Peace Schriften 249 

The Penitential Schriften 250 

The Prayer Schriften 251 

Specimen of Pupil's Schriften, by Jacob Harley . 252 



LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



THE LIFE OF 

CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

To the sturdy German stock that came to the 
Colony of Pennsylvania in the first half of the 
eighteenth century we are indebted for more of the 
initial influences that have made for the progress 
and prestige of our American civilization than many 
historians record or know. By a strange perversity 
they have accepted one from another the traditional 
misconception of these people for which Benjamin 
Franklin and Provost William Smith are largely 
responsible. It is the exception, not the rule, to find 
among historians and chroniclers, a rare spirit, 
imbued with insight and sympathy, who patiently 
investigates the actual conditions of this Pennsyl- 
vania-German civilization and records its virtues as 
well as its frailties. Such a rare and gifted his- 
torian is the Honorable Samuel W. Pennypacker, 
ex-Governor of the Commonwealth and President 
of its Historical Society. 

To Governor Pennypacker many of the younger 
men, who love, as he does, the great Commonwealth, 
are indebted for inspiration, guidance and knowl- 
edge concerning life in Colonial Pennsylvania. To 
him the writer gratefully acknowledges his indebt- 
edness for a first acquaintance and for many facts 
that have to do with the simple but significant life 

and work of Pennsylvania's pioneer author-edu- 

11 



12 THE LIFE OF CHEISTOPHEE DOCK 

cator, — "the pious Schoolmaster on the Skippack," 
Christopher Dock. 1 

Dock's birthplace in Germany is unknown. 
Some time between 1710 and 1714, he came to Penn- 
sylvania, attracted no doubt by the religious free- 
dom enjoyed here by his brethren of the Mennonite 
faith. To this religious body he was early attached 
and in its communion he lived and died. He prob- 
ably came here to farm. But his pious spirit was 
early concerned for the better education of the chil- 
dren of his German neighbors. He was encouraged 
to teach by Christopher Saur and other leaders 
among the Germans of Colonial Pennsylvania. 

Of his education and career in Germany no reli- 
able data can now be given. There is a tradition 
that he had been drafted into the Army and that he 
was discharged because of his religious convictions, 
which led him to refuse to bear arms. 

Not later than 1718, Governor Pennypacker 
thinks in 1714, Dock opened a school among the 
Mennonites on the Skippack in what is now Mont- 
gomery County. He believed he was divinely called 
to teach; and, although the compensation was ex- 
ceedingly meagre, he continued this school for ten 
years. At the expiration of this period he engaged 
in farming. On September 28, 1735, he purchased 
of the Penns for £15 10s. a tract of 100 acres in Sal- 
ford Township, now Montgomery County. Upon 
this tract he lived for many years. 

On February 22, 1702, Matthias Van Bebber, a 



1 Hon. Samuel W. Pennypaeker's Historical and Biographical Sketches, 
Philadelphia, 1883. 



THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 13 

Dutch merchant, who came to Grermantown in 1687, 
secured from Penn by letters patent a tract of land 
containing about six thousand one hundred and 
sixty-six acres. This is the famous Bebber's Town- 
ship which in 1731 became the possession of Hen- 
drick Pannebecker. 2 By deed, dated June 8, 1717, 
Van Bebber conveyed to seven trustees one hundred 
acres of this ground, stipulating therein that "it 
shall be lawful for all and every the inhabitants of 
the aboves'd Bebber's Township to build a school 
house, and fence in a sufficient burying place upon 
the herein granted one hundred acres of land there 
to have their children and those of their respective 
families taught and instructed, and to bury their 
dead." This Van Bebber did in consideration of 
"the true love and singular ejection he the said 
Matthias Van Bebber bears to them and all theirs." 
These provisions, as Governor Pennypacker points 
out, are "without precedent in our Annals, and have 
never beemfollowed elsewhere." 

The school thus provided was conducted by Chris- 
topher Dock, and it was here in 1750 that he wrote 
the Schul-ordnung, and in 1764 the several articles 
that Saur published in the Geistliches Magazien. It 
is significant to note that Saur solicited contribu- 
tions for his Magazien from few American authors. 
Two alone were regarded by the great printer as 
possessing the necessary qualifications to produce 
articles of sufficient worth for this important pub- 



2 For a most interesting sketch of this township see the article 
Bebber's Township and the Dutch Patroons of Pennsylvania by Hon. S. W. 
Pennypacker, in The Pennsylvania Magazine, Vol. xxxi, No. 121. 



14 THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

lication. One of these was Dock; the other, Alex- 
ander Mack, a Bishop of the Dunker Church in 
Germantown and a man of rare piety and literary 
power. It is probable that Mack, like the younger 
Saur, was a pupil in Dock's school in Germantown. 

During the ten years devoted to farming Dock 
could not wholly neglect the children. For at least 
four summers, in sessions of three months each, he 
taught school in Germantown. His school was con- 
ducted in the old log meeting house of the Mennon- 
ites, the ground for which was deeded by Arnold 
Von Vossen February 10, 1702-3, to Jan Neuss, on 
behalf of the Mennonites. 3 The teaching of this 
school had far-reaching consequences. Here Dock 
enrolled among his pupils the only son of the great 
printer to the Germans of Colonial America, Chris- 
topher Saur. Young Saur, who was born in 1721, 
was then in his teens. The method of Dock attracted 
the attention of the elder Saur, who as early as 1749, 
impressed by the great skill and ability of his son's 
teacher, urged Dock to write a treatise on his 
method of organizing and conducting a school. 4 
This treatise Saur wished to publish for the guid- 
ance of less gifted teachers and of parents who by 
knowing how a good school is conducted might the 
better bring up their own children. 

Dock was averse to the suggestion, holding that 
it was sinful to do anything for his own praise, 
credit or elevation. Saur then resorted to diplo- 

8 Hon. Samuel W. Pennypacker, The Settlement of Germantovm, 
Philadelphia, 1899. 

* See the writer's History of The Brethren in Europe and America, 
Mount Morris, 111., 1899. 




BENCH AND TABLE USED BY DOCK IN HIS SCHOOL IN GERMANTOWN 




TABLE USED BY DOCK IN HIS SCHOOL IN GERMANTOWN 



THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 15 

macy. He wrote to Dock's warm friend, Dielman 
Kolb, a prominent Mennonite minister, urging the 
importance of his request and submitting a series of 
questions on school administration which he desired 
Dock to answer. Through the influence of Kolb 
the modest teacher was led to make reply to these 
questions. The manuscript of the Schul-ordnung 
resulted. 

Dock completed the Schul-ordnung August 8, 
1750. The manuscript was given to Saur with the 
stipulation that it was not to be published during 
the lifetime of the author. For nearly a score of 
years the manuscript lay unused. In 1758, the elder 
Saur died, and his son, Dock's pupil, succeeded to 
the large publishing interests of his father. 

Finally, in 1769, some " friends of the common 
good" succeeded in overcoming the author's scru- 
ples and secured his consent to its publication. This 
was, no doubt, an easier task after Saur had pub- 
lished in the Geistliches Magazien a number of arti- 
cles written by Dock. But alas ! the manuscript, so 
long unused, was nowhere to be found. Saur feared 
it had been sold along with some waste paper. 
People began to intimate that Saur really did not 
wish to publish it and had purposely put it away. 
Saur advertised its loss in his newspaper and offered 
a reward for its return. Dock, with characteristic 
modesty, sent a messenger to Saur to say "that I 
should not trouble myself about the writing, it had 
never been my opinion that it ought to be printed in 
my lifetime, and so I am very well pleased that it 
has been lost. ' ' After more than a year had elapsed, 



16 THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

8aur found the manuscript in a place where he and 
his employees had thoroughly searched and it was 
at once published in the form in which it is herein 
reproduced. 

The demand for the pamphlet was so great that a 
second edition was printed in the same year — 1770. 
A copy of this second edition is in the Library of the 
German Society of Philadelphia and the title page 
is reproduced herewith. The copy of the first edi- 
tion from which the reproduction in this volume was 
made is in the library of the writer. 

The German Mennonites of Ohio, in 1861, re- 
printed the second edition at the office of their 
church paper, "The Gospel Visitor," at Columbia 
in that State. Governor Pennypacker records in his 
"Historical and Biographical Sketches" the fol- 
lowing interesting incident attending the publica- 
tion of this third edition in the German language : 
"A careless printer, who was setting type by 
candle light, knocked over his candle, and burned 
up one of the leaves of the original. The work was 
stopped because the committee having the matter 
in charge could find no other copy. Finally, in 
despair, they wrote to Mr. A. H. Cassel, of Har- 
leysville, Pa., who, without hesitation, took the 
needed leaf from his copy and sent it to them by 
mail. Mirabile dictu! It was scrupulously cared 
for and speedily returned. It is difficult to deter- 
mine which is the more admirable, the confiding sim- 
plicity of a book lover who willingly ran such a risk 
of making his own copy imperfect, or the Roman 
integrity which, being once in the possession of the 



(sine 



\; 



tj&\ 






<Davimtcn fceutltdj t?ercjcfrelt ttntfy auf we.tifc 

SBefpe i>ie &mt>er nid)t nut in &enen in <5d)u- 

fen get"Dof>iUif(),cn £cforen 6eft?n<i raigebrad)^ 

fonfcern cd\d) in t>cr gefjre Dcr ®ottfdi\$e>nt 

\vot)i untmidjtet werDen mojjcn, 

Slug £iebe ;n Dem menfcbftdjen ©cfefclec&t aufgtfegt Dur$ Den 
roofjlcrfatrncn unD lang gcubten (5cfculm#inr/ 

ffmftopi) S>ocf, 



ltnt> Diu*d) einige j^unfce &e$£emeiner95cflett< 
fcem 2>tticf ubergeben. - 



5)te 3^ ei ^ e Edition; 



L 



' # (gfe * wi a it t o rv n: ^ : 
©e^iicfMin^auffnDentep (S&stffepi) 6mtiv '177c 




TITLE PAGE OF SECOND EDITION 



THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 17 

only leaf necessary to complete a mutilated copy, 
firmly resisted temptation.' ' 

The first translation into English was made by 
Governor Pennypacker and appears in the above 
recited volume under the caption, " Christopher 
Dock, the Pious Schoolmaster on the Skippack, and 
His Works." This present volume is the next 
attempt to give the modern student an insight into 
the rare spirit of this unique teacher. It is, more- 
over, the first time that all of Dock's literary re- 
mains, with translations, have been collected and 
published. 

Dock was not only a great teacher and author 
Of pedagogical works, but he was the composer of 
many beautiful hymns. These will be found in the 
volume ; and, to reveal his skill as a penman as well 
as his accomplishments as a hymn-writer, I here- 
with reproduce one of the most beautiful of his 
existing manuscripts. 

The elder Saur was an ardent admirer of Dock's 
teaching ability. When he found that Dock ob- 
jected to the publication of the ScJiul-ordnung until 
after the writer's death, Saur formulated a plan to 
pay tribute to Dock's worth in a manner not offen- 
sive to the religious convictions of the pious school- 
master. This resulted in Saur publishing in his 
almanac for 1752 an article in the form of a dia- 
logue. In this article Saur, in discussing with a 
" Newcomer" the advantages of life in the Colony 
of Pennsylvania, pays high tribute to two great 
teachers whom he knew intimately. Although the 
names of these teachers are not given, Saur clearly 



18 THE LIFE OF CHEISTOPHEE DOCK 



had iii mind Ludwig Hoecker and Christopher 
Dock. Hoecker was an intimate friend of Saur, 
worshipped with him in the Hunker congregation 
in Germantown, and regretted Hoecker 's removal 
to Ephrata in 1748. The following extract from the 
Almanac gives Saur's estimate of these two really 
great teachers of the Germans in Colonial Pennsyl- 
vania : 

11 New-Comer. A matter that is of very great importance 
to me is, that, in Germany, one is able to send his children 
to school to have them instructed in reading and writing. Here 
it is well nigh impossible to get such instruction; especially, 
where people live so far apart. 0, how fortunate are they who 
have access to a good teacher by whom the children are well 
taught and trained! 

"Inhabitant. It is true. On that account many children 
living on our frontiers grow up like trees. But since the con- 
ditions are such that few people live in cities and villages as 
they do in Germany, it is natural that one meets with certain 
inconveniences. Where is there a place in this world where 
one does not meet with some objectionable features during his 
natural life ? 

"New-Comer. But this is an exceptional want, for if 
children are thus brought up in ignorance it is an injury to 
their soul 's welfare, — an eternal injury. 

"Inhabitant. That is true, but, alas, how few good school- 
masters there are ! I myself have had many and known many, 
but few good ones have I seen. Yet, I remember two, in my 
life-time, who had many good qualities. The one spent most 
of his time in secret prayer and heartfelt sighing that God 
might direct and keep the hearts and minds of his pupils. He 
taught them their letters faithfully. He observed also their 
natural dispositions. If he found the child ambitious, he would 
praise it so that it learned its lessons fairly well. He would 
promise that it should yet lead the class, but he asked God 












Q 





















<£*?• ^wd/*^ 



*' anf+4 






- U '/ < .^.^7 



SPECIMEN OF DOCK'S MSS. 




4* 






ttr fry*/ ***-*** c*r* *s-«~m /y*-i&** 



iff-. Sj. ey^A ~~/ZJ- ,X. i^puLydJU 






(ttfta-a-** / 



*-%*-*^G~*''?** ** 



'*/**£ 



-JZ^J£r^*?-7~^ ^J&7& l&f-fy -r ~ <?—? . 



Aw 



ASt>-*J'/ >, 



Sfr/r// -*f&<* du3k£Zs Jrte/j2%& /^Z/^}^& ? . 



SPECIMEN OF DOCK'S MSS. 



THE LIFE OF CHEISTOPHEE DOCK 19 

to take the Devil's haughtiness out of the child's heart, to 
convert it and give it the lowly spirit of Jesus. After it had 
reached the head of the class he would tell it alone and in 
private that haughtiness came from the Devil, but humility 
was a quality of Christ's spirit for which the child should 
frequently and heartily join him in prayer to God. Thus he 
kept such children in his love. To those who were miserly he 
frequently gave a penny when they studied diligently and if 
they admired their gift he would tell them that money was the 
root of all evil, pointing out examples to them. He described 
for them deceptive riches and the subsequent disappointment 
if man is not rich in godly things. To the voluptuous and 
"Lecker-Mauler" * he sometimes gave a sugar pretzel, when 
they learned well. But he also told them that luxuriousness 
was a sin, that those who belonged to Christ crucified the flesh 
with its lusts and evil desires. He impressed them so earnestly 
with these maxims that almost all the pupils loved him. If 
any failed in the performance of duty, he would say: 'I no 
longer love you,' (Ich habe dich nicht mehr Lieb). Then they 
wept until he comforted them. The ill-intentioned, who were 
not affected by the promise of a penny or a cooky, he threat- 
ened with whipping. These then studied out of fear. With 
some he had to use the rod, but in each case he endeavored, 
first of all, to win their favor and thus secure obedience through 
love that they might not only learn their letters, but that they 
might be able to seek, find and know Jesus Himself. 

"I remember still another one who, out of the love of God, 
loved his pupils as if they all were his own children. They, 
in turn, loved him dearly. Whenever he was obliged to reprove 
the children for ill-behavior, he did so with grievous words 
coming from his wounded heart, so that he frequently softened 
their hearts ; and when they were about to cry, tears crept into 
his eyes. He studied out many plans so that he might not need 
to resort to the rod. On going to and from school the children 
went quietly and orderly without stopping to play, loiter and 



1 Sweet-toothed, dainty-mouthed. 



20 THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

quarrel. The children of the poor he taught as willingly with- 
out pay as he taught others for pay. Those who learned to 
write, he induced to correspond with one another. The pupils 
were required to show him the letters and he pointed out for 
them the places where improvements should be made. He also 
told them that this was no ordinary matter. For those who 
could not compose a letter, he set copies so that they might 
apply their minds to good thoughts for the improvement of 
their souls. He regarded it indifferently whether he received 
the tuition fees or not and did not treasure up for himself 
anything but a good name and a clear conscience. 

"New-Comer. Such Schoolmasters are few in number, and 
here in the woods one must be satisfied if only they teach the 
children to read and write; and it is very deplorable that, 
during the winter in severe weather, young and tender children 
cannot well be sent to schools a great distance from home. In 
the summer time one needs the children at home to work, and 
here in the woods the schools are closed during the summer. I 
have often thought that this was a great need in this land and 
I know of no remedy to suggest. ' ' 

In 1738 Dock gave up his farm and returned to 
teaching. The remainder of his life, thirty-three 
years, he devoted to his pupils. He opened two 
schools, one in Skippack and one in Sallf ord. These 
he taught three days each alternately. He encour- 
aged the pupils in each school to write letters to the 
pupils in the other school. These letters usually 
took the form of questions relating to some incident 
in the Bible. Dock acted as letter carrier between 
the schools. This was one of his devices to promote 
constructive language exercises by his pupils — a 
practice that has found many imitators. 

Dock has given by indirection the only adequate 
picture of a colonial school. It is not difficult to 



THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHEB DOCK 21 

construct from his writings a picture of life among 
the Germans of Penn's Colony. One can vision the 
children busy at home, preparing for the day's 
duties; their march over hill and valley to the 
school ; their entrance ; the routine of the day's work 
with the teacher; and their hearty " good-night" as 
they turn again to their homes ; the round of even- 
ing duties, and their weary footsteps as they move 
half asleep to their rest. One can vision their con- 
duct in the home, on the street, in church and at all 
places where a child might be seen. In this multi- 
form detail of child life he points out in simple 
precepts right conduct and proper behavior. And 
in all this he steadfastly holds up the religious life 
as the goal of all study, the perfection of all 
learning. 

The writing of illuminated texts was common 
among the Grermans of Colonial Pennsylvania. For 
this work Dock was peculiarly gifted, and the writ- 
ing of these Schriften was a prominent feature of 
his school exercises. To this work of skill with 
his quill pen he added the additional ability of 
drawing in colors or writing with ink designs of 
birds and flowers. These designs were used as re- 
wards for meritorious work on the part of his 
pupils. To possess one of these evidences of the 
teacher's favor was the ambition of many of Dock's 
pupils. 

In the list of Schriften found in this volume I 
have included all that are known to be from the 
pen of Dock. One, by his pupil, Jacob Harley, is 
included to show the result of Dock's teaching. 



22 THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

These Schriften were written in sets. They con- 
stituted the earliest recorded mottoes used to adorn 
the walls of a schoolroom. In Dock's school more 
than twenty-five of these Schriften were so dis- 
played. They were also used to adorn the walls of 
the homes of his pupils, as well as to serve as "copy" 
for the writing lessons. They are usually produced 
in many colors. Unfortunately the reproductions 
cannot show the artistic blending of colors found on 
the originals. With one exception the originals 
here reproduced are in the possession of the writer. 
The exception is part of the "Alphabet Schrift," 
which may be seen in the rooms of the Pennsylvania 
Historical Society. The preservation of these rare 
and curious manuscripts is due to the foresight and 
industry of Abraham H. Cassel, whose father was 
a pupil in Dock's school. 

In the translation care has been exercised to 
render as literally as possible the meaning of the 
author. For this reason the English text is not in- 
frequently broken and archaic. This is especially 
true in the translation of the poems. It was thought 
that the reader would prefer to approach as nearly 
as possible the spirit of the author. In this literal 
rendering of the text grateful acknowledgment is 
made to Miss Harriet Boewig, of Philadelphia, and 
to Dr. S. E. Weber, of Cortland, N. Y. Their un- 
selfish devotion to a theme they loved made easier 
my labors in editing this pioneer schoolmaster's 
pious and practical works. 

Dock had two daughters, Margaret, wife of 
Henry Stryckers, of Salford, and Catherine, wife 



THE LIFE OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 23 

of Peter Jansen, of Skippack. The death of his 
wife and the marriage of his daughters left him 
alone in his old age. He then made his home with 
Heinrich Kassel, a Mennonite farmer on the Skip- 
pack. It was Dock's custom each evening after dis- 
missing his pupils to remain in his schoolroom to 
pray. With the roll of his pupils spread before 
him, he would kneel and ask God to forgive him for 
any act of injustice or of neglect toward any pupil 
in his school. He also asked, as he pronounced each 
pupil's name, that God would help him on the 
morrow to do the best things for each one. 

One evening in the autumn of 1771, he did not 
return from his school at the usual time. A search 
was made and he was found in his schoolroom on 
his knees — dead. Thus ended in prayer for his pupils 
a life singularly sweet and unselfishly given to the 
welfare of those whom he believed God had divinely 
appointed him to teach. 

M. G. BRUMBAUGH. 

Philadelphia, Jan. 18, 1907. 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 

FACSIMILE REPRODUCTION OF THE 
FIRST EDITION OF 1770 



Sine 
Sinfiiftige unt> gritoMfd) aBgefaffte 




r&ttttitt 



; 



©avumett fceutttd) twgefiett ttrivt>, auf it>eTc^e 

2Bef(3e Me ginHt ntcfet nut in benett to ©dju* 

fen gefto&ttKdjen €efjren frefleng angebracljf, 

fonfcern auc& to i>er Celjve Der ©ottfeKgfett 

toofjl xxntmifyM mttm m&gem 

2iu$ £iebc ^i t>em menfc&fidjen ©efc&fecfct migefegt turc& ten 
n>o&ferfa^rnen unD (ana geubfen ©c&ulmtflfarj 

Sljnftopf) Socf- 

Utft tox$ etotge greim&e &# gemeinen 25e#ett$ 
fcem SDrucf utwgeben. 



<E>etrmatttOtt>tt: 

©emicft unD ju fto&ett &ej) Sfcriftopl) <5aur, 1770. 




B R3? fSH jra psa «a *£«?&*! &#&?? &#*;# & 

©efie&tet £efet! 

j$© tft unftrettig erne ber grofmt <pflt<fjfett 
tuekfye ©tern unb 23orgefe£te ju befovgert 
fyaben, if>re Sfmber unb Untergebene gote 
lid) ju erjiefjen unb ju tegteren, ti?er£&e^ alletbingS 
Uttfern gtJften gleifj unb ©crafaft etforbert auf 
eine aw ja btepfacfce SBetfe: &or erfi, foHen wit 
fte anfe&en ate t&eute <Pfdnbet bte ung »on ©Dtt 
wttautt ftnb, tttcfet ba^ fr>i? ttut tnit i^nen fptelen^ 
unb unfere fletfc^lfcf;e <J?go£ltrf)fett an ifjnen fyabett 
fotlen, fonbern to$ wit alien 3{e$an$un>enbenfdjufc 
i>ig fmb, fte aufjujie^en fn bet gucfyt unb dxtnafc 
nung jum £gttn, Spbef. 6, 4. getoignnfFenbe, ba£ 
itrir tton allem wa£ un$ am>erttauettfr, aucft tt>et* 
SKecfyenfcfcafft geben mflffen, fcarnt welcbem t>td 
gegebert iff (tvelcfcerletj e$ auci)tft) bey fcem tvitb 
man aucb *>telfucbefi*£uc. 1^48* @tn gottfefiger 
Setter fcfomttf, bap (Sftem an ifyxen £tnbern bte 
#5tte unb tm Qimmtl tfetbteuen Unnen, je nacfc 
bem fte fofdje erjte&en. ipterju ge^otet bann }tt>e^ 
ten£ nicftt nut etne dufferltdje gmtafjnung : iTtcbfc 
fo metne Kmbcr, tl^ut mcbt fo ubei/ fine bet alte 
9>ttefter <?(t tWr « 95**$ <Sattt. *, X3. jc. auc6 
nicf)t etn fteteg jantf en obet fdjfagen, ate n>oburd> 
bte SJtnbet nut jum 30m getet$et roetben, fonbettt 
eine etnfte (Jtmafmimg jum $&tn, tnit geWttget 
Sft^tfgung n>ann bteStmafjnungen ntcfcf fanldng* 
lid) fmb $a$ 355fe ju unterbrucf en, unb unumgfing* 



30 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

23 o t v e D e. 

ltd) em gutet 2BanDel in Der ©ottfettgfeit; Datw 
bofe ©cempel ^er^erben mefjr, ate alle gute Srmafc 
uungen erbauen fotmen. ^mberfefteu fcfyatff auf 
Die, wldje ifjnen twgefeit ftnb, e£ fetjen <£itern, 
Cefcts oDer ©djulmetfler. fyitx nun feineg fcon Den 
Wetoen ju drgew, n>eld)e£ mtt fo tyojjer ©traffe be- 
legt ift, Watty, 18, 6; io. et*fort>ert e$2>rftten$/ em 
unermttDete£ ©ebdt fcor 4tci> feibft unb for Me an* 
terttauete 9>fdnDer, Dap ©Dtt Dod) fein ©eDepen 
Daju geben rootle, Dap fofrfje ju feinen gfjren erjo* 
gen iverben mogen: ©cum ob nrfr and) alien Sleip 
amvenbeten, Das ©ute Dutd) gute ©rmafjnungen 
in mtfere SugenD ju pflanfcen, unD Dutdj forgfdlfc 
ge Sudjt Ju beaiefien, fo mup Dodj ®Dtt Dag ©e* 
Det)en Daju. geben, fonft nrirD Docp ntdjts Draufh 
Dann ttrir Kniten unfein ^inbem Dod) feme anDere 
$er$rtt geben, ®£>tt abtt (an e£ t&un; wit foUen 
Derfjafben ernftltd) bet) tftm Datum an^aften mttei* 
nem tag unD nddjtiaem bdten unD flefjen, unD roann 
Dtefe£ etnmaf ba$ £)auptn>ercf unD fcodjfter Sfetfs 
aller CEltern unD Sorgefefcten rourDe, if>re ^inDer 
unD ?(nfcertraute fo ju <&Dtu$ Crljren ju erjtefreu, 
unD e£ mtt ifenen fo ju mad)en nrie Der^?©* fcfton 
im alien 'SunD e£ DenftnDentSfwel auferfegtJjafe 
te, $&uti) SOtof 6,\>. 6.7. unb btefelPombteicb 
btr £>eute gcbtete foil: bu $u i^erjjetr m\)mm, unb 
foil fte bemeit IMnbew etnfdyatffm/ unb bwot* 
rebett xvcrnn bu ttt bewem i^aufe %e(l obet auf 
bem tDe#e gefrefi/ warm bu bicbmebcrleaefj o^ 
bet: mffiebeft. <5o nmtDe man in roetug yatyren 
erne gan$ anDete SBeft fefcen. UnD ob e£ fcponnic^t 
in Der gltern SEJlac^t ift ityren ^tnDern neue §er* 
$en ju fc^affen, fo tt>urbe if;re SitbeitDo-c^ nicfttun^ 
gefegnet bletbeu, fottDern (BOtt tvurDe aucb Da$ 

©eDet;eu 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 31 

©ebepen ju tfjremSfeip fc^eitdett, unb fofte es bep 
iillem tfjtem gteipunb benen fjeilfamen 3udjttgun* 
gen t>er @uat>e ©Dtteg ot)ngeacbtet/ bennod) be*} 
etntgen mi|ratf)en, fo batttn fte bodj t()te ©eeleti 
gerett et ym naturttdjen Cebett ge^t e£ gememigs 
ltd) fc, nrie eine ipauf^altung eingericfytet iff/ 
unb iva£ ^auptJ^c&Ucft in berfelben getneben tinrb, 
eg fep orbentlW)/ obet unorb&tfltd)/ t>a^ tmrb man 
fetjen, baf$ e$ benen &tnbern tfjre gan$e fieben^ 
Sett eintgetmaflen an()<ingef/ba()er bet weife <5a* 
iomon n>o(){ fagen mag im 2x Sap. feiner ©ptucfye 
*>. 6. JPic man ettteit &nabeit 0eiv<Stmet/ fo la* 
get er ittd)t bapon warn wait with* ©olte ntrf)t 
audj eben fo tvo^l t>tet gute& unb 6ef6tber(fd)e$ 
jum SKetcf) ©Dttegunbginpflanfcung bet*@D(fe^ 
furdjt bon Sugenb auf ( onnen in fte etngepflan&et 
roerben? ft>anntf)nen bet) alien ©elegenfjetten Sit 
Cafret uerljafft unb abfdjeu(td), bfe Xugenben unt> 
Ne ©oftfeftgfett (jingegen, in gebu()tenbet jporfj* 
aefctunguovgefteft wutbe? Safjer foften ©tern be* 
fonberg barauf fe(;en ju tt>a^ fcot ©efellfdjaften (te 
ifjre ^tnbet 4 unb 2fnbefofjIene gefjen laffen, unb 
Ijauptfad)lid) was fte fcor ©rfjulmetfter uor fofd)e 
anneljmen, benn tvag fte t>on benfefbigen febenunb 
Jjoren, pttfget fidj gav ttef to tf>re jam ©emut&e 4 ; 
tin. 

SMefeS fjatte metngeltebferSaferwofjIemgefe* 
fjen,unb Jjattebabet fd)on tw fcftiet jtt)an^fg3apt 4 en 
em 33et*Iangen, to$ bod) biefem gjtangef fo Diet 
mogltcfj, mod)te abgebofffen tverben, unb n>et( tfjnt 
ein folder SJtamt befannt roar, ber genriplidj mx 
ganfjem jperfcen ftd)£ (ieffe angelegen fepn ber S?tn* 
bet* -Seffes ju fucften nad) <£ee( unb Cetb, obet 4 ber 
fiuffern Ce^re na% unb bte ©ottfeltgfett jugietd) 

2f 3 fo 



32 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

23 o t x e b e. 

fb btel m5gfid) n>ote mtt einjuflopen, unb f?dj ttac^ 
t>em SKatb bes 2(poftete qpauti lit *, fc. 7> aliens 
(jalben ju einem guten feotbtlb batgeftellet ^at 
unb and) fcon ©Dtt nut befonbete^Jaben tyietp 
amsgetuftet tvat, fo n>av et toetlangenb tttoat fdjttft* 
lid)e£ fcon fetnet <5djuf*£>tbnung $u (jaben, umes 
butd) Den S)rurf befrwt ju madjen, batmt ftdj auc& 
anbete ©cbulmetftet, benen e£ Datum ju tfjun (ft 
i^re SUnbet n>of>l an$ufu()ten, unb felbft Die ©abe 
ntd)t fo teid)lid) fyaben, batinnen ettca$ ftnben m6= 
gen, bap jte nod) 6e(Ter untertic&tet ttetben, unb 
anbete, benen e$ fo gletc&gultig tfi, ob fte Die £ttts 
bet etn>a$ letnen obet ntd)t, tt>ann fte nut tbt©efb 
(jaben, fofdjei? ju einet 35efd)amung bienen nt&ge, 
n>anu fte fefjen, bap bte gltetn bod) and) nuifen 
arte ettte roobi eingetid)tete ©d)ule foil gefftljtet 
tvetben, unb bann enb(td) aud) Die &tmx felbft }u 
betidjten, nrie man mtt ben Ktnbetn ju fcetfabten 
f)at bte man getne m$ gutes fetnen wofte, tt>eif 
Dod) triefe (?ltetn (jiet ju £anU if)te Sinbet 9tot(> 
fjafbet felbft letnen mufFen,(unb nod)fciele e$ lte6et> 
tbun fof ten, ate ifjte ^tnbet ju fofcben ©djulmeiftetn 
fd)irfen, bte mtt einem lafterfjaften Ceben befletft 
ftnb,) biefe unb nod) mefor anbetc $5ettad)tungen 
i)ai>m bann meinen geliebten Rattz ba^tn ben>o* 
gen an etnen fetnet guten Steunbeju fc^retbett, tvte 
in fofgenbem 35tiefe ju erfe^en. 

@o lieffe ftd)3 bann audj bamafc bet t&ert&e 
Steunb £>ocf gefallen fold) SBetd ausjufetttgen, 
ba e£ abet fetttg toat, f onte et ftdj nldjt entfdjltef* 
fen es bem ©turf ju iibtt^bm f au$ einet gennffen 
^(obtgfett bap e£ m&djte angefefjen wetben ate 
incite et ftd) eine 5()tens©dule auftitfeten, unb 
moc^te if;m sumSdjaben geteic^en/ unburn foic^et 

Utfacfte 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 33 

23 o x x e b e. 

Urfacfcewegen wolte er nicfjt, baf* eg betjfeinem &* 
ben fofte gebrucft tverben, unb fo blteb eg neunje* 
f>en SaJjre (iegen, big enbltrf) einige SBo&fofinfdjet 
Ueg gemeinen 55eften ; ifjn ^nf?(in^f(J batben $u t>er* 
nritligen, bap eg in ben ©rucf mod)te gegeben n>et^ 
ben ; welcfjeg er bann juiefct gettyan, unb wurbe W* 
fe ©djrifft tm fcorigen 3^ Jum brucfen uberge* 
ben. Unb nacfjbem id) eg gelefen, unb trieleg SQet^ 
gnngen barinnen gefunben, toerfpracf) idj eg jn bru* 
(fen; efjetd) eg aber in bieSfvbett nefjmen toxttt, 
tt>urbe eg *>erlegt, t>a$ icfj eg nid)t nueber ju finben 
tmifte,unb meinete, eg tvdre etwan uor tvetp tya* 
pier v>erf auft n>orben, n>efm>egen id) eg in ber get* 
tung befant mad)te unb eine SSeioljnung barauf 
fe§te, n>er mirg nrieber brddjte, nnb ba ltd)g (ange 
nid)t ftnben n>oIte/ fo feblete eg ber) einigen ni^tan 
argen ©ebancfen, afg fyatte tdj ztm$ barinnen ge* 
funben M^ mix md)t gefaflen, nnb Jjdtte eg mtt 
gleig auf bie &titt geraumt: Siefeg mufte id) fo 
eine geraume gzit tragen, nnb f)attt niefttg jumeis 
ner 9led)tfertigung afg mein guteg ©ettriffen. ©er 
Stumor biefer ©^rifftabertt)arbaru6ernicfttt?er^ 
legen M$ feine ©djrijft nicbt in Dm ©rucf t ornmen 
folte; fonbern troftete mid) mtt einer 35ottfdjaft- 
bie er mir fagen ttepe, ba$ i$ mid) nidjt bttum* 
mern folte n>egen bent 23erluft folder <5d)rifft, eg 
ware niemaWg fein ©inn gercefen, M$ eg bep fei* 
nem fieben in ©rucf fommen folte, unb fo ware er 
gar tvoljl ju frieben, to$ eg fcerfofjren ware. S)a 
id) aber n>ie eg fdjemet, meine <5djmad) lange ge* 
nug getragen Ijatte, fo funbe jtdj J>ief^ ©djrifft nne* 
ber, an einem folcfren Drt, too id) unb meine Ceute 
jutjor mancljma&l forgfdltig gefudjt fatten, ofjne 
ettoag babon ju feljen, nadjbem fte uber ein 3afjr 
2( 4 verlofjren 



34 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

23 o t* r e b t 

mlotytn gen^efen, unb alfo fjabe i$ nun feinett 
fernetn 3fttffd>ub marfjen tvollen, frnbern ubevgebe 
jte btr lieber Cefetv fo nue jte ber aufticfctige, alien 
SJlenfefoen rooljl nwnfc&enbe Stumor aufgefeftt W, 
ju aller 95tenfd)en 33efien, benen eg in bte fcdttbe 
tommen mag/ unb ftdjs baju tvotlen btenen fa (Ten, 
nnt) tft fjoffentftcj) rein ©djabe gefdjefyen, ba$ e$ 
fo lange fliUe gelegen Ijat* 2)ann es n>dt#, \x>a\m 
eg bamafyte gebrucft worben, meiietdjt bet; Deimt 
metften bepgelegt unb fcergefien tvorben, Dap man 
ju biefer gett n>emg mefyr.bafcon ttntfte, t>a e£ boefr 
ju unferer Sett genripfiaj fo noting, ober nod) no* 
tfjigei: tft,ate jemafjte jut)or: ©ami btegrfal^rung 
mwtfft eg, bap ir»te bag gnbe btefeg SBelt^auffg 
ftd) ndfjert, fo nimmt atttfy bte ©otgloftgfett urn 
ba£ ©ute uberfjanb, unb bte SDtenfcfoen getatljen tn 
g5ttlirf)en 2)ingen, unb nu$ltd)en Unterrid)twtgen 
inetne fotdje ©(eicfcgultigfett, a(^ egtpofjl faum tn 
benen getten £Ioa mag gemefen fet>n, fcon t\)e(d)en 
eg ^eipt: fieacbtetefts mcbt Unb man jte^et fafl 
allewegen, ba$ unenbftd) mef)r gletp angewenbet 
toixb f bit &tnbev in bet ©letdjfteHung ber 2Be(t, 
into unnufcen ©tngen ju unterrtdjten, alg in nutyU 
d)en,unb $ur ©ottfeligfett retfcenben 23errtdjtungen. 
Sap bann btefeg Wetne SBercf feinen ern>ftnfd)£ 
ten gtt>etf , rooju eg ju er ft if! betlangt, nnb twit bent 
SUttljor fcerfatfet worben, erlangen moge, unb ba 
eg lange auggeblteben, bann urn fo triel fotgfdlfc 
get moge angett>enbet wrben, tftbag berfcltdje ttmtt* 
fcben eureggetreuen mtb aBerSDlenfcpen Jpet)ltt>ftn* 
fdjenben Sreunbeg, 

<£f)tifiop§ ©aur, 

emnamonm ton n 3K«fc 1770* 

Sfofag 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 



35 





gteunt? SDielman Mb, 

%?& ift mir fcfecn manc&mal in Den ©ebancfen gefegen/ tier* 
gangen, unD roieDerfommen? nebmlid), Dag Du mir fofleft 
efnma&t roann Du geit ^aft auffcb^etben, 3>ie 2irt unD 
< 3Beifc ; rme Der S^unD 3)oc£ ©cfeule Hit ? ^Gte er Die £inDer 
in Dte (Scfcule aufnimmt? ^Gfe er mit t)erfd>ieDenen, aucf) »er* 
fcfcieDeneguiJt bait? < 2Bie er ftemitgreunbiicfcfeit unD £iebe trac* 
tirt/ Dag lie ifrn u'eb ^abeti/ unD furc&ten ? 3)ag (te einanDer lieb 
baben. 5luc&t)onib«mSrief*535ecbfc(mtfeinanDer. 95Bte er fte 
t>om ©cftwafcen $ur (grille •gen>6fjnet? *2Bie erffe mit (gcbam ge* 
roobnet Daf (te ffet§t3 (ernen ? 2tucr) rote er ifenen fmDlicbe QMlDe* 
tformabfec/ Damie Re |tcf> uben ? 3>n (gumma : £$ mare mir lieb, 
roann Du mir e£fur$, oDer umfMnDlidv befcbriebejt: auf folc^e 
^eife, Dag/ wanner etmafolte aug Der geif gejjen/ man eine Q5e* 
fcbreibung son iftm macfcen ftae: tt>eiB @Ott jum $ret)g/ tbeilS 
anDern (gcbulmeiftern $ur ^ef>re ; unDDenen *ftad)fommenDen sum 
Unferrkbt; rote eine ^ugen&fonne toobl erjogen unD gefernet roer* 
Den. SSBelcbeS rbo^l twbrf if!/ Dag man e$ Drucfe/ e$ fei; mit fei* 
ner QSeroilfigung nocf> bet> feinem£eben/ oDer bernacr) : roemgffemS 
mdcfete icb e$ nac5 ^eutfcplanb fcbicfen/ roann erg nicbt gem bep 
£eibe$*£eben geDrucft fdbe. 3cb bafteeS i)orem>a$ wicbtigeS/ roei* 
len ttief Daran gelegett ifa tvte Die 3ugenD im Q3uebftaben unD 
©of f eSfurcbt unterroiefen roirD. 'SSeil Du nicfrt Die SeDer gebrau* 
cben Fonfefc babe icb Diet) gerne t)crfcf>onet ; nun aber foit Du feine 
(Sntfd;u(Digung babm, al$ ftann Du franc? biji 3d) babe nur 
etlicbe ^untfen gemelDet/ Die mir fo ^bm ftnD eingefallen : Du niirfl: 
e3 umftdnDlicb mac&en; unD icb Dencft/ e$ fei) fern ^uncft feineS 
Q5etragen$, mit £inDem unD %\ttn, Der nicbt anmertf ens roertb 
fep. SBomit tcr) Diet) unD Deine grau fccrfeftcD gruffe : unD bleibe 
eucl) mit SMenft in $kbt fcerbunDen. 
©ermantonw/ Den 3ten Slug. 1750. (Sbriffopb ©aur. 



%t 



SSor* 




36 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

©otfforD/ Den 8fen2luguff 1770. 

§5orcrinncrung \>$ &erfafier& 

Salutem, tkhxvcttl)et 5i*Uttb* 

\%t QtQmmxtiQm Seifen ben"c5te/ Dagicf) beutegefoiffer 
Urfacb rocgen, Den greunD 2>. & $u befuc&co binge* 
ndtbiget rcorDen/ n?elc|)er mir $u erfennen gegeben: 
t>a§ ibm ncmlic^ ein ©cbrctben Don greunD (Ebriftopb 
(gaurju Ijanbenfommen; Der 3n&a(t Deffcn fe»> uberftaupt, n>e* 
gen meiner @d)ul*Uebung/ t>ag er gerne gctt)ifFe.$?ad)rtcbt (jdtte: 
s&on Der 2lrt unt> SDBeife/ n>ie Kb nicbt nur Die £inDer aufnefcme; 
fonfcern aucj)/ roie id? btg^cr Die Ovegel imD OrDnung unfer i&nen 
eingericbtet. @o bat ficfr greunD J)iefmann gegen-midfr alfo er* 
Hart : Da jj er Dem greunD ©aur ju (teb gerne fclcbe #ebe$ * 35e$eu* 
gung erroeifen tootte; rceilen fym aber metne ©c&uUUebungen 
nfcbt in alien ©tucfen befant feijen/ unD Defroegen nifyin feinem 
S&rm6gen tfunDe foldjem £3ege(jren ©enttge $u tbun; trie e$ ton 
greunD ©aur an ibn begebret. 211$ batgreunD £)telmann an 
micb begefjret, ic& folte Diefe Q3urDe t)k ifcm auferlegt fep, auf met* 
ne ©c&uftern nebmen, ttnD greunD ©aur auf fein £5ege&ren Sftafy 
xifyt geben : 'SBeldjeS id) greunD ©aur ; unD greunD SDielmann 
iu ikb nicbt ganfc abfcbfagen fan; jeDocb befinDe icb DigfallS t>er* 
fcbieDene ©cbrourigfeiten; rooruber icfj mtcb twfcer etroaS erf IcU 
ren mug. 

<2Ba^ anbefangt Dagjemge ju bertc&ten/ roaS greunD ©aur ati 
gr« 3)te(mann, unD gr. 2)te(mann an mid; begefjrt, fold;e$ f onte 
ju einem %(jeil oijnfd;n>er ibun, milm mir metne tdgltcbe Uebung 
mit Der 3ugenD befier befannt/ al$ einem anDern. 3)ie ©cbroie* 
rigfeit aber Die id) DigfalS bterubet befiinDe/ tft Diefe: &a§ e$ Da* 
Durcb DaS Sinfejen baben nmrDe, al$ ob id) mir felbft S)or ; oDer 
bet) Der SZOeuyetn 2lnfvben/5ttteflatum^unD|ltncfenDe^^n@au^ 
le aufrtcbten tooffe/ twfcbeS mir, tvann e$ in Der ^bat fo n>dre/> 
tor ©Ott unD alien frommen £fjriften*#er$en gan& feine£bre/ 
fonDern Dtelmefcr ©pott unb' ©cbanDe. cerDienef, unD mir auc& $u 
meiner ©eelen «£enl unD @e(tgfeit ntc&t nufclidj fe»n fo'nte. €* 

tvare 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 37 

• X 3 X ■ • 

wdre nut gutter »or t>fe @igen * 2kk: 2(ber, Da8 faffe Der #<£Dv9t 
feme wn mir fci>n. UnD tveilenfcbon par w.el frommc «£er£en Don* 
Diefem Dtduber uberfallen> tt)orburcf?fie»eriobren/ n>ag fteDurc&Die 
QtoaDe ©OtteS erarbeitet batten. Qa felbft t>er roeife @alomon> 
Dev feineS gtekben nicbt Ijatte in S&eiSbeit/ Ovetc&f^um/ &bt unfr 
«&err(icbfeif/ roekbeS er alleS »on ©Ott erlangefe t>urc&^ ©ebdr> 
cnD nocb mebr ate er gebeten. (gumma: er roar Dure!) ©dttlicbe 
€r.leud)tung in€rfdntnig/ 923Jet^^eit unD QSerftanb Dermafierifeocfr 
f oromen/ Da$ feineg gfcicben nkbt roar/ er grunete n>ie Die 95dume 
aii ben ®affer*$$acben. Q3on feiner SBeiSljeit, unD was er da* 
Durcb getturtfet, fwDet (Icb nad> Der £dnge ju lefen im i 9$ud> Der 
$6n. »om 3ten bifj ju @nDe De$ i qfen Capites. 3eDocb nacbDem 
ftcb (gafomo t>urc&Die (gigenliebeuberroinDen feat laffen/ fo ift strau 
Diefer fcb5ne SSaum annocb in (SfereunD^errlicfef ett Da geftanDeh: 
aber Die gigeniiebe bat Durd) ibre 93rutb fo M Dvaupen*9?eftec 
aitfgebrutjjet/ Dag fciek »on (Salomon^ erften gruebfen DaDurd) 
pnD mid tvorDen/ roelcbea ©Oft ubel befallen; al$ ju fefen 1 95. 
Der $$nige im 1 1 (lap. 

£)tefe8 tflin alien memenQSerridjtungen unD Uebungen mit Dec 
SugenD, Da$ fcfenjerelle^emicijtiveicbe^miraufDem^^eniiegt/ 
unD aHeg iiberroieget m$ jtcbtbar ift/ e$ babe 9?amen n?ie e$ ftoffe t 
nemd'eb/ tvte kb meine£au(?b<rttungregierenunD fttbr en mdge/Da§ 
icb Dermaking au& ©naDen em aut Seugnig unD Slfteftatum er* 
kmgen moge> t>ori Dem groffen *£>irten Der ©cbaafe ; twlcber tuft 
in bit z6^aht fang Die jungen £dmmergen fcertraut/ mieroobi (fe 
mir febon 36 3abr an&ertrauet, Durcb cinm 95eruff Den niemant) 
befier roe$ ate icb;n?eilenid; aber bier ju £anD Diefen 95eruf jebett 
Safer betrfeit gefe^et/ n?oruber icb aucb in rodbrenDer gett- Die ftra* 
fenDe «§anD <&Ottt$ gefublef/ Die mir Docb @Ott fet) ^)ancf bt> 
ber jum befren geDienet; Der $(*:rr tvoKe e^ in ©naDen iiberfefeen 
voa$ icb in folcber Qtit wrfdumct an Der 3ugenD. 

3a^ nun ferner Da^ an mid) wrfongte ^egeferen betrifff/ fo 
ftebe id) biermnen mie inmm\ tieffen ^bfll/ troein bobe^ ©ebur* 
ge ftorlieger, welcbe^ icb befteigen foil/ fo. Dag icb nieiwr ©eit§ 
»iei (ieber in Diefem %f)a\, in Der ©nfamfeit; bk tvenige ^age 
De^ £eben^ $ubringenft>o(fe/ n?an^ nacb @Ottt$ ^illengefcbeben 
fdnte; a(^ Diefen 5Serg ju itd^n. 3cb boffe; Der greunD ttirt) 
micb begreiftn Bnnen. ^Beilen kb aber Den greunD in feinem 
©ctreibenfo »ermercfe/ Dag e^ if>m uber&aupt inDiefer@acbeum 

Die 



38 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X 4 X • 

bie€f>re ©Otteg, tint) urn eine gute Sfuferjfeljung ber 3ugenb $u 
tfrun ijVfo fan unb will tdt> micj) nicbt n>egern, nac5 bem $?aag 
tneiner gertngen ©aben mit Beirut ragen/ n>a6 in meinem 33erm5* 
gen iff. 3nfonberbeif, roeifen icb biefe fterblicfee $utte batb^ bocjj 
tjlg ©Oft bef ant, tvann icb ft'e abfegen mug. 2Jcb ! eg folte ja billig 
alien $Jmfdjen OW angelegen feim, t)te Sfjre ©Otte^ unb Dag 
allgemeine Q3efte ber €D?enfd>cn ju befdrbern; wtyt& ung frier m 
geif, unb auc(> in gmt^FctC glMfefig macfcen fan. $ier$u werben 
n>ir ja in £. @c&rt jft fo ernftlicl) an titkn Orten ermabnet, tcl> 
twill nur ber $urfce nacb bier anfubren tvag ung Der •§. 2lpo|lel 
5)etrug f)iet>on tnfeinen (Sc&ri jften nacbgelaffen $ur$ef)re.i $et.4; 
t>. io. ii. mit biefen Morten: Unb Dienet einanber/ cin jeglicber 
mit Der ©abe t>ie er empfangen fcat, a(^ t>te gufen $augf)alter ber 
mandbetlei> @5nat>en ©aben ©Otfeg. @o jemanb rebet, bag erg. 
rebe alg ©Otfeg 3Bort. (go jemanl) ein Stmt feat/ bag erg ffeue 
alg aug bem QSermdgen, bag ©Oft barreicbet; auf bag in aUm 
$)inQm ®Ott gepriefen roerbe burcfe 3£fum <£&rift/ wlcbem fet> 
(£j)re unb ©en>alt t>on ^mi^Feit $u groigfeif, 5lmen. 

©eliebtfr greunb, biefe SSermafrnung ^ 2ipoflelg t>erpfffc&fct 
micb sum $reig ©Otteg aucb meinem ^dcbften §u bienen mit bee 
&abt bit icb »on ©Oft empfangen (jabe, fo fern id) aucf) a(g em 
treuer «&aug&alter s>or ©Oft erfunben roerben will ; tvelc^eg n>ie 
tbm gemelbf, bag aorgeffecfte gtel ill roornacf) icb micf)fe&ne,uni> 
folcfjeg $u erlangen mirlieber few ftirb, alg alleg wag ftcbtbar iff. 
S)ierceilen mir berouft, bag icj) aug unb t>on mir felbft nicfrfg »er* 
mac* aug eigenen 5trdften $u tbun bat wefentlicf) gut iff/ ofrne 
©Otteg gndbige #ufffe unb ^epffanb, unb feineg £♦ ©eijleg 
5?raff unb ©tdrcfe/ unb bag alfe meine bejlen ^Dfeercfe uni)ollfom* 
men ftnb/ fo gebe tcb biefe meine btg&er gefu^rte @cI)ul*Uebun.c) 
mit ber Sugenb auf folgenbe Conbition/ fage \§, ubergebe eg fo 
an ten greunb, fwbet er etn?ag barinnen tw$ jur ^bre Q)€>ttt$ 
unb su Suferbauung unb Sftufcen beg gemeinen Q5cflen geretcjen 
fan, fo Kill ic&, bag eg ber greunb gfeicftfalg an feinen beborigen 
43rt befldtfigen foil, unb &Ott geben, m$ ®Ottrt tft.^f. 1 1 s, 
». i. 5iucf> fle^e ferner alfo, fo ber greunb annocf) bet> meinec 
£ebeng^geif mir unb meinen ©cbulern einige nu^licfee 5lnn?eifung, 
(woburcb Die (£fjre (30ttt$ befdrbertwerben fdnte) anjeigenwilf/ 
fo bin icb meiner <&tit$, fo tvillig alg fcl;Olbig, bafltelbe in £kbt 
anjunetmen. 

Urn 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 39 

• x $ x m 

Urn nun ju M SreunD SMefmannS fetncm QSegefiren an mi# 
$u ge(aegeti/f6nte icbfogleicb Den2lnfang macben, obne etnxtffon* 
lien roeitern £5ericbt $u tbun: roeilen aber £>cr greunD <£brifap!> 
(gaur an SDtelmann be^e^ret/ t>on affem 35ericbt ju baben, aud) 
»on Dem QSrieftoecbfel Der ©cbuler gegen einanDer; fo mug tc& 
greunD (gaur bieruber ctne"ri Q5orbericbt tbun, Damit manned an 
fofcben ^uncften fommt/er einen Siuffd&lug Da»on bat. 

SftacbDeme iq>, rcie oben gemelDet: Die (Scbul auf @cf)ipbacb 
tvelcbe icb jeben 3abr beDienet, auf ^^ett gefefief, unD $eben 3abr 
auf Dem £anD ^erooljner, unD nacb meinem geringen 33erm6gett 
Lauren Arbeit whan, fo baben ftcb in Der3eitt>erfcbieDene©ele* 
aenbeiten sum (gcbulbalfen bwtwfletban, unD bep mir DigfallS 
angefucbt; big e$ enDlicb wieDer Da$u gefommen, Dag icb in Denen 
btyptn ^aunfebipg (gcbipbacb unD (SotforD, in jegu'eber <£aun* 
febtp rodcbentlicD Drep %ag ©cbul gebalten, SDieroeilen mir abet 
Da6 (gcbuNjalten in Dicfem £anD febon corner befanftvar/ Dag e$ 
tt>eit anDerg Damit beftetc alt in ^eutfcblanD, Da Die (Scfeule auf 
fofcben ^feilern fiebet, Die Der gemeine $?ann nicbttt>oblum|loflfen 
fan/ wnn icb mir Dann ju ©emutfj fubrete, Die ^fficbten mlfyt 
Diefer ^erujf in fid) l?dlf, unD icb mir aucb Den ernften Q3orfa£ ge* 
faffet, Diefen $flicbten treulicb nacbjuleben, fabe aber ancl) Denser* 
Dorbenen guftanD Der 3ugenD an, unD Die »ie(e SJergernifie Diefer 
SSSelt, ttoDurcb Die SugenD terDorbcn unD gedrgerf rcirD »on Den 
2Jlten, unD betracbtete Darneben meine eigene UnrourDigf eit; aucb 
fcintoieDerDieimgki^e^icbtigfeit Der gltern in Der 5tinDer3ucbt, 
Da einige, mit &br unD £eben, ibrer $mber *£>et?l unD ©eligfeit 
t)on ganfcem £er£en fucben, unD alien gleig anroenDen, Die €bre 
©OfteS, unD Dag «&ei;( ibrer $inDer ju befdrDern. 3)a bmgegen 
aber anDere ganfc contra mit &&r unD &ben fi'nD: ibren 5?inDem 
mit bo* fen <&empem uorgefcen; tvoDurcb e$ Dabtn fommen fan, 
t)ag nicbt nur jtvifeben Dem (gcbufmetfter, unD iftnbern Diefer un* 
gleicben 3vtnDer gucbt/ fo fern er anDerS feinen Q3eruff treu unD 
aufricbtia tier <&Ott unD SWenfcften fubren n?iU, aucb unflfeicben 
€m|tunD Sucbt*9vut^en fubren unD gebraucben mug; tvorau^ 
Dann foa(eicb Dem <Sc(nimieifter Diefer 9^ame suaeei^net n>trt>, et 
gebe nacb ©unfl; er ftalte Da^ erne j^inD barter, ait tat anDere; 
twlcbeger aucb in Der ^bat Q3en)i(|en^ fjalben urn Degtuegen t^uti 
mug, Damit Die tfinDer guter S(rt, nicbt Don Den ^mDern bofer 2lr£ 
t>erDorben tvcrDen, ©pnflen i(l tf freplic& m$ ©$uimeifter$ 

*fli*f,, 



40 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X * X • 

*Pflic()f/ unpart&etjifd) W UWr un*> «i*w nacb (Buntf iinb 2(nfc 
|>en ju wrricbten/ Dag arme 35etfe(*.ftinD in ©rtnD/ ftimpen tint) 
£dug roann egfonftcjuterSlrr/ oDer ftcbunferroeifen laffenroill/mug 
i&m fo lieb few (roann er aucb febon in Diefem &ben feinen ^3fen^ 
ntncj Daooc befommen foffe/) a(g Deg 9veicben ; roo»on cr cine retell 
lic&e S3elobnuncj in Diefem £eben $u getwten ; Deg armen j?tn^ 
t)c^ retcbe 33efobnuncj folgt in jenem &bcn, @umma/ eg folte $u 
toeitlduflftej fallen^ ade *Pf!icbten $u befebreiben/ fo einem ©cfeul 
tneifler obliegen/ freulicb an Der QucjcnD aug$uuben ; aber nod? 
toeitldujftiger i(! eg in befebreiben/ alle ^BiDerrodrtigfeiten bit ifyn 
fcegroegen $u #aug befucben/ tt>ann cr gerne feinen Wcfcten ge* 
mag Ijaugbalten roill. 2llg tcfr Diefeg alleg in grrodgung genom* 
wen/ fo babe id) febon ooraug gefeben ; folte unD roolte id> etnoa^ cr^ 
baulicfeeg augricbten an Der 3ugenD ; Dag eg mir DigfalgfdglicbunD 
ftunDlicb b<W n6tf)iQ ware/ mit SbaoiD meine 2lugen aufjubeben 
in Den Bergen urn £ulffc/ $f. izi, fo fern icb etroag in Diefem 
guitanD/ roie eg nun $ur %tit in DerSSSelt fteljet augricbten roolfe 
|um ^3reig ©Ofreg/ unD Der SugenD ibrem bejten/ unD alfo babe 
id) mid) roieDer in Diefe Slrbeitgeftelft/ unD bigberDarinnen ge|ian» 
ten; icb rounfebte $roar ; Dag icb eg roetter bdtte bringen Fonnert/ 
fcoc& ftabe aucl) Urfacb/ Dem grofien @43tt berfclicb $u DancfenDag 
ct mir cjebolffen/ Dag icb eg fo twit bringen f 6nncn. 

^35a^ nun greunD ©aurg erfte Srag betrifft/ nefymltcl)/ tt>ie ic& 
DietfinDer jur (Scjnilaufnefjme? @o(cj)e$ gefebiebet auf folgenbe 
£Beife. €rftlic!) roirD eg son Den anDern ©cbulern bewiflfommt 
mit reicbung Der £anD/ bann roirD eg oon mir gefragt/ ob eg aucb 
fleifftg lernen unDgefjorfam fct>n roolle? roann eg mir Dann folcl)eg 
Derfpricbt: fo roirD if)m Dann oorgefMt roie eg ftcb twbalten mug/ 
unD roann er Dag % $b € orDentlicb nacb einanDerfacjen/ unD aucb 
in Der ^J3robe alle tjerlancjfe ^5ucbf!pben mtt Dem Sei^pncjer roeifen 
fan, fo tfynt man i%n ing 2lb. ^OBann er bafjin Fommt/ fo ijt i^m 
Der Q^ater einen pfenning fcbulDicj/ unD Die buffer mug i&m$tt>et> 
€t)er baden t>or feinen §leig; unD folcfee ^elo^nuncj roirD ibm 
n>ann eg votittt, nemltcb in \>k %la\wn fommf/ u. f- w. ^Bantt 
eg aber ing (efen fommt/ fo bin id) ifem (roann eg fleifficj cjeler* 
net/ unD in folder %tit, Die i^m beflimmt roirD fan/ ) ein 
Seurjnig fcf;u(Dicj; unD am ertfen ^acj/alg Diefeg $inD jur ©cbu( 
Fommt/ fo befdmt eg einen gettul/ roorauf nur Diefe geife ftebet: 
(S^iffiS; einen $eng. ) Oiefen Settul befomt eg/ Dag eg jur ©cbul 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 41 

• X - 7 X ' • 

ill aufeenommen afg etn ©cbiiler; Darneben nrirD iftm aber awfr 
t>orge(Wr: fo feme eg trdg im lernen/ oDer fonft ungeborfam fepn 
«>urDe/ folcben ftinDern tour&e ibr Scugnig roieDer genommen/ 
n>enn (te (icb aucb fewer/ in feinem ©cue? unterroeifen (affen n>ofe 
(en unD (forria, serbleibcn, folcbe roerDen a(^t)ann »or alien <Sd)U* 
to/ t>or faul unD untucbtig auggerujfen ; unD ibnen gefagt/ Dag 
folcbe in eine anDere febarffe 3ucbt*(Scbule geboreten: algDann 
frage icb &a$ $inD nocbmablg/ ob eg fleiflTta, unD geborfam fepn 
will? roann eg Dann folcbeg mit 3a beantroorfet: fo jeige icbibm 
ten Ort tt>o eg fid) nieDerfefcen foil/ ift eg m ftnab, fo frage icf> 
unterDen©d>uljungen: tjtegein 93?dgDlein/ fo frage icb untec 
t)enen €9?d9t>c&en : roelcbeg ficb unter alien Diefeg neuen@cbul* 
£inDeg annebmen/ unD eg lebren unD unternjeifen will? nacbDeme 
nun Da^ $inD fremD oDer befanf/ oDer nacb Dem 5lnfeben> ange- 
nebm oDer nicbr anaenebrnaugftebet/nacbDemojfenbabren (tcbaucfr 
dffterg siel oDer roenig Die beraug treten ; urn Dag $inD $u fernen; 
finDen ficb him fret?n>iliige/ fo frage icbt roer urn eine $orfcbrifo 
oDer Qiogel/ folcbe unD folcbe 3«r &<*$ ^fo& untertveifen mill? 
Dann feblet eg nicbt leicbt. SMefeg fo »iel jut *ftacbricbf# tt)ie icf> 
Die tfinDer $ur ©cbul aufnebme. 
gernerer SSericbt roegen QSerfammlung Der £inber jur (gefcuf. 

©o gefebiebet Diefe Qfrrfammfung folcbergeflalt, roeilen einige 
bier $u SanD einen fernen 2£eg/ einige aber nabe $ur ©cbule b# 
ben/ fo/ Dag Die ©cbuler nicbt fo gfeicb auf bejtimmfe geit unt> 
©loefenfeblag bepfammen fepn fttonen, alg roie an Denen Orten 
roo Die SQ?enfd)en in einer @tat)t oDer 3)orjf betffammen tvobnem 
@o ift Die 2£eife unD QSerorDnung/ Dag Die erften, roann ibrer 
eflicbe bepfammen ftnb, alle Die im^eftament lefen fttonen/jtcbauf 
cine SSantf nieDerfefcen ; jeDocb t>k $naben befonDerg auf eine 
£5ancf/ unD Die SOMgblein aud> befonDerg. &enen tvirD fogleid) 
tin dtyittl aug Dem ^(foment ju fefen aufeegeben/ welcbeg (te 
unuberlernet Der Ovet?f>e nacb lefen/ in roabrenDer £tit f6reibe id) 
iljnen coo welcbe nun ibren ^erg obne gebler ^elefen/ Die fefcen 
ficb an Die Qlafcl unD fcbreiben ; Die aber cjefeblef/ muffen njieDerju^ 
rucf ficb $u unterft an Die 55ancf fe^en. 3n rodbrenDer 3eit n>aS 
ton (gcbufern fomt/ fe§e ficb $u untcrft an Die Q5ancf ; wag (icb 
tt)ie gemelot/ fret? macbt fegt fid) an Die ^afeO folcbeg conrinuireC 
big fie alle bet)fammen ; roer Dag Uhtt uberbletbt auf Der ^ancf/ 
batift tin faulcr ©cbuler. 

<%$ann 



42 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



• X 8 X @ 

2Gann (te Dann bep(ammen (InDunD infttirt, ob <?e ftcb cjetoafcfjen 
unD gefdmmr, fo n>trD ibnen eia 9)?orgem@efancj oDer ein^fafm 
Su ftngen aufeegeben, unD mit ibnen gefungen unt> gebdtet; auc^) 
fo met it)nm begreifflicb fan cingepflanfeet fterDen, uber Dag ©ebctc. 
Deg £(£rrn, unD seben ©ebott (nacb t)cn ©aben fo (&0%% mit> 
fletbetfef) Degivecjen cine (Srinnerung unD ©rnta&nunjj an (te getban* 
£»>mn gang Fletaen, roerDen Furfce ©^bdtlctn unD (gprucbe t>or*> 
gefprocben. (go Diet gur Stfacbricbt roegen Q3erfanunfang Der 
<gd)u(er. 3eDocb Dienet roegen Dem @eWt nocb Diefe (Erffnrung: 
<2Seilen dlefe 5vinDer tuaS (te $u #aug i>or ©ebdter gelernet, nur 
tnic balben Shorten, unD in folcbec ©efcbroinDigfett augfprecben, 
tnfon&crbettt)agQ}atcr*ot)eifUnfer^ater/ roelcbe ©ebatg*gorm 
Der «S©x3gfuS feme 3unger gelebrer, tint) alleg in (id) begreifft 
Don ©Oft ju erbitten, mag ung an Setb unD (geelndtbig tjh 2l(g 
(jabe tm ©ebrattcb folcbeg @5ebat fnienD ifenen felbft $>or$ufprecben, 
nwfcjjeg fie allefammt FnienD mir (aut nacbfpredjen. $?acb »er* 
ricbreter ©efang unD ©ebdr^^Uebun^^ begeben fteb Dfe/enigen fo 
fcbretben, rrieDcr an fofcI;e Uebung. SDiejenigen aber, fo nicbr im 
^ejiament ben ©ammluncj Der @cbul mit lefen fonnen, baben 
tie Sett tiber grift gebabt ibre Suction $u lernen/ folcbe foerDen fo 
gfeic^ nacb Derricbtetem ©ebdt tjorgenommen, ibre Section aufeu* 
fagen. ^Belcbe Dann t'bre Section tvobl f 6nnen/ Die beFommen mit 
^reiDen eine o auf Die #anD, big i(t t>ag 3eid;en/ Dag er nid;t$ 
gefeblt: Die aber ibre Section nicbt fertig fonnen, fo, Dap Die gcb* 
(er uber 3 gefojfen (tnD, foldbe tverben prucfgetwefen, urn Die Sec* 
tionnocb befie? $u lernen, big Die Fletnen alfe aufgefagt baben: 
f ommt Dann iin folcber unD unD feblet roieDer fo mi ate 3 fo 
tt>irD eg nur mit Diefem $£ort geoffenbabret an Die (gcbuler, Dag 
fcer 3 gefeblf: fo ruffen atie uber ibn aug, gaul! unD algDann 
ttnrb fein *ftame aufgefd?rieben. S&etrift nun Diefeg iin $tnD, eg 
mag aucb fonff »on ^afur few, Dag eg Die Dvutbe furd)tet oDec 
nicbt furd)tef A fon?eigicb Docb aug grfabruncj, Dag Diefer bloffe 
@cf)all Der ^inDer ibnen roeber tbuf/ unD fie mebr ^um lernen an 
treibef; al^ tuann icb ibm aUwit Die Ovutbe »orba(ten unD cjebrau* 
^en rpurDe. 9IBann Dann foicfceg ^inD/ in folcbem gall greunD* 
in Der ©cbule bat Die eg lernen Fdnnen unD ttollen/ Die roirD e^ 
fleifijger befucben, alg ju»or. 5^ie Urfacb i(l Diefe: n>irD fein 9to 
me nicbt auggetban Deg $ageg big Die ©cbul ju £nDe, fo f)abm 
We ©cbuler gren&eit; Deg faulen @*«erg ^arnen aucb aufsu* 

(cfcreiben 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 43 

9 X » X • 

fcbreften unl> mit nacb -Saug $u neljmen; pnM ftc!)$ akt: ba§ 
t>a$ $inD funftig feme £ccrion tvob( fan/ fo tvtrt) fcin 9?amc aber* 
maf)!d Den @cJ;ulern befant gemacbt/ unD $u erfennen gegeben : 
Dag cd fcine Section ftobl cjefont babe* unD nicbtd gefebfet. 2U& 
Dann ruffen fie gfciffig! 6ber iff?n au§. %ann Diefed gefebeben: 
fo tvtrD fcin $?ame an Dcr faulen (gcbuler^afel audgelofc&et; 
unt) Die uorige €0?tfKt5at ill wrgeben. 

9)©a^ Die $inDer befrijfr fo im buebftabieren (InD: folcbe roe** 
Den aucb faglicb auf Die Sprobe gejlelit rcegen Dev Siudfprack 
^B3c(cber ob fie roobl im buebfiabieren beo Dem Siuffagen/ roo ein 
SH3ort mebr aid eine @plbe bat/ ailed im audfprecben nacbfyolen rniifc 
fen r fo pnDet fi'cbd Docb $umeilen in Dcr ^robe. Dag fie, ob ffe 
tvobl Die Q3ucb)laben orDenflicb tvijfen $u nenncn, aber twgen Qite 
manglung Der 2(udfpvad) nicbt fobalD and lefenfonnen gefe^tmer^ 
Den. gu Dem gnjecf Dcjlo eber $u f ommen/ fo mug Dad &inD fet* 
nc Cecfion nocbmabld repctieven; unD folcbed gefebiebet auf folgen* 
De 2lrf. &&$ 5?inb gibt mir Dad £5ucb: 3d? bucbflabicrc/ unD e£ 
mug audfprecben: fan ed aber nicbt gefd[m>inD Damit fort/ fomuf? 
cin anDered feined gleicben Die tofpracbe tbun; DaDurcb bdret eS 
Docb/ unD (ernet Den UnterfcbeiD/ n>te ed ftcb im audfprecben nac& 
Dem SSucbtfaben/ unD nicbt nacb feiner eigenen CD?c^nun0 ricbtea 
mug. 

%8a$ Die % 05. <£. ©cbuler anbelangt/ folcben Die 35ucbfta* 
btn am erfhm befannt 511 macben/ marc Der ndcbfte <2Geg/ ibnen 
crfllicb nur cine EKeifje aufeugeben/ urn folcbe wr*unD f>tnterrodrt^ 
$u (erncn tmD ju prufen/ urn fie Den Q3ucbftaben beffer nennen unD 
fennen ju (ernen ; Damit fie Dad a b c nicbt juerft audroenDig ler* 
nen/ mtm man nur m 5tinD in Der (Scbul fdtfe. £at man aber 
mebr Dergleicben: fo lag icb fie Dad a b c nacb einanDer auffagen/ 
aber wann Dad $inD aufgefagt f)at, fo fracje icb ed ; Ob ed mit 
nicbt Den Q5ucb|Taben (melcben icb Dann fagc) mit Dem ginger 
Jeigen f5nnc? fwDe icb/ Dag Dad $inD bloDc ODer unnjiffenD; fo 
frage icb m anDered feined alcicben/ oDer fo t)iel ibrcr finD. 5Ge^ 
cber ginger Den SSucbftaben am erflen aiutiQtt, fofdjen Sincjer 
crgreiffe icb wit Der «£>ahD/imD balte Dcnfeiben fo (ang> bid icb »or 
folcb itinD cincn ©tricb mit^reiDe gemacbt; aldDann fraaeid) 
roieDer nacb einem anDcrn %5utf)ftabM f u. f. f. ^Gelcbed ^inD nun 
t>en ^ag ubcr Die meijten (gtriebe bef ommen fatf Dad bat aucl> 
Die mciflcn S5uc6(iabcu anaejeigt; fo(cf)em bin icfc aucb efroaS 

^3 i$m% 



44 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

$ )( i* X & 

Mjufticj/ ettva tint 23(um auf papier gema6fet/ oDer einen Q3o* 
#eL ©inD fte aber mebrentbeite g(eicj)/ fo gefyen ft in^ £00$/ fo 
Qkbt eg Defto roeniger 33erDrug. feurcj) Diefe ^rajrin n?irD nicbt 
mtr Denen alf^u b(6Den ibre QMobigfeit ( n>e(d^c^ eine groffe £m* 
fcernig im (ernen/) em>a$ benommen/ fonDern aucb Die £uft unD 
ttebe/ urn gem in tie @cl;uf $u geben twmebret. (go »ie( jut 
Iftacbricbt auf fein £5cgebren/ itn'e id) Die ^inDer $ur @cfni( auf* 
-nebme : aucl) mie r>or Dent ©ebdt ben 93erfamm(ung Der 5£inDer ; 
unD aucl) nacb £>em ©ebdt Die ©cbuUUebung fortgefeljt n>irD ; 
oucf) Durd) tt»a^ »or Eiffel/ Die allju unacbtfamen unD forgfofen 
2ur 2lcl)tfamrat unD (gorge if)re Section roobl $u (ernen angetrie* 
btn roerDen; auc& roie Den a(I$u QMfoen fo t>iel mog(icl) £5et)()iilf* 
fe gefcbiebef. 

gufernerer gortfefcung Dienef sur sftac&ricbt: ®afo roenn Die 
f (einen DaS erftemaf)( aufgefagt, fo gebe idj Den $;eftament @d)u* 
iern roieDer tin (lapitti ju (ernen auf. 2Ba$ Sprung unD Q5riefe 
iicfet/ ftfcen befonDerg; roaS rennet Detfgleicben* ginDeid) aberun* 
ter Den fleinen Dag fie im (efen fo roeit gefommen/ Dag fte aucf> 
balD tucbtig ttti ^efcament $u£efen ft'nD/ fofdje tverDen Dann Denen 
<£cftament * ©cbufern angejeigt Dag fte probteren roolten/ roann 
ftcb em guter £efer unterDen %eftament*@crju(ern ibrer annefrmen 
wolte/ mitUntenveifung: DiealSDann Darju geroilligt/ Dietreten 
jjeraitf/ ergreiffen gemelote (gcbuler ben Der #anD/ unD fefcen fte 
neben ftcb ; roann DiefeS gefcbetyen/ roirD ibnen tin (£apire( auSge* 
t\)ti\t, fo. Dag jeglicbem z Q&rS $u (ernen $ugctbei(et roerDen. gin* 
Det ftcb aber. Dag man nocb tin unD anDerer llebung benoffyigef/ 
(a(S @prfic& unD (lapittl $u fucben/ oDer @prucl) auSroenDig ju 
lernen/ ben tuelcber Uebung g(eid)fa($ tin jeDer einen SSerS (efen 
mug/) fo t()et(t man ibnen nur einen Q3er$ au$/ roefcbeS Dann De* 
neti/ Die probieren im^eftamenfju (efen ; aucl; nicl)t ju fcfrroer fd(t* 
ginDet ftcl)^ Dann/ Dag fofcbe ©cf)uler in Der ^robe fitf) roob( unD 
f eifllg in €r(ernung ibre^ jugetbeilren 3}erfeS befunDen ; fo roirD 
ibnen eine ^Bocbe jur ^robe gegeben,* in mlfytt SSSocbe fte if>re 
Section im a b c 35ucf)/ mit Den fleinen (ernen unD auffagen muf* 
fen/ aucl) mit Den ^eftament*©cbu(ern ibren Q5er5 (ernen unD 
auffagen mujTen. &alttn fit Die ^robe tvobl au^/ fo fommen fte 
Die ndcbfie 'SGocbe Darnacbau^ Dem a b c Q5ucl) in^ ^eftament/ 
unD Dann rmrD ibnen er(aubet/ Da0 fcbreiben aucb mit an -^anDju 
m&rwn; tve(cbe aber Die ?3robe nicjt au^(ten> mWen noct> eine 

flefefcfe 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 45 

• X *3 X # 

tyWt gelt 6et> twett a b c <3d)iten t>erbfetbcn, ebe tie ftieber 
jur *)3robe fommen. 9?aebDem Die %eff anient *@ct>ufcr aufge* 
fagt, roerDen Die fleinen aucb n>ieDer fcorgenommen. SIBann Diefe£ 
gefdjeben, fo twrDen fie Dann an DaS uorgelefene GCapitel erinnert/ 
unD $u mein, unD ifjrem ilnterridjt Die Darinnen entbaltene £ebre 
$u beDencfen gegeben : rceilen e6 al&Dann nicbf fefylet, Dag folc&e 
&brftu tfe an anDern =Orten £. ©cbrijft aud) befdjrieben, fo tver* 
Den folcbe aufgefucbf nnD gefefen; unD nad;gebenD$ tin ©efang 
aufgegeben, tvelcbeS Diefe £cbrftucfe aucb in jtcb baft. 3(1 nad£ 
Dem nod) grit ubrig, fo roirD t^nen fdrnflidj ern fur$ ©prucbto 
miSroenDig 511 lernen aufgegeben t $?acbDem DiefeS gefebebw, mu> 
fen fieibre ©c&rifften aufiveifen, tvelcbe/ nacbDeffl lie uberfebenunt) 
numerirf, tvirb Dem crjien in Der Summer ein bait 'SGort $u buc&* 
ftabieren aufgegeben: fan erS nic&t, fo fdllt eSaufDen atenunfr 
fo fort, meld^r e$ fan, Der empfdngt feine (gdjvifft; unD Dann. 
fommt ttieDer ein barf 92Borc auf Den erften, unD DiefeS continuirt 
big fie alle ibre ©cbrifften Durd) bucbflabieren empfangen. 

$£t\Un Die ivinDer i(jr 0)?itfacj^lfen ben ficb baben, roitb tb* 
nen nad; Dem €ffen eim flunDe grepbeit &erg6nnetj Dicftetlen fie 
aber ojemctniglid) Diefe Srepbeit migbraud;en/ wann man niefce 
ftets ben ibnen ifl; fo mug; fo (an<j id) ibnen twfebreibe, einer 0* 
Der jtveen im alten ^ejf anient cine n^licbe •Siflorie, (oDerau* 
#ftofe unD Den ^Jropfjeten, oDer au6 (Salomon/ oDer ©iracfc* 
©prucben) lefen, big Die ©cbuf angcljcf. 

(£3 Dienef aud) Diefetf jur $?ad)rid)t: twilen jftnDer Stfotljftak 
Un au$ Der ©cbuf fragen, unD man ibnen aud) folcbeS erlaubert 
mug, mill man nid)t tmn tlnratlj unD ©effancf in Der ©cbul fja* 
ben. UnD aber DaS @5cfcbret) urn ©rtaubmg binautf $u geben, Den 
gan^en $ag continuiret, aud; tvobf obne Sftotb binautf fragen/ 
Dag jiiroetfen z big 3 Drauffen Die geit mit fpielen $ubringen, {& 
fyabz Diefe^ ju uerbuten, einen ^?agel an Den <£biir**})fofteri cm 
gefcblagen, moran m bolfcem «&dcf (ein fcdngt. ^Betdbcm Dann efe 
tua^ »on nof^en ijl, Der fiebct nacb Dem £>dcf(eirt, ob e5 an Der 
<£btn: bdngt: mann Da^ ^dcflein Da banger, fo ift Der *pag auc^ 
Da Dag e^ Darf ftnau$ gcben obne gefragt, Dann nimrm t$ Da5 
«5dcllefrt unD gebet fttnau^, fommt ein anDcrS Dem n?a^ »0n n6* 
tben, DaS Darf aucb meifer nicbt fragen: fonDern tifieUt ftcb att 
Die ^:bur/ fo balD Der fommt mit Dem ^atflein, fo nimmt ed fol* 
$t$ »on Dem anDern, unb S^bet fcinau^/ bleibt $>a$ ^dcflein tvaS 



46 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 
• X 14 X @ 

$u fang, fo bringet t>te Sfotb befien, ber an bet %f)iir toartef, fol* 
dX$ an$u$eigen: bann tmrb gefra^t/ roer am k%tm brauffen ge* 
ivefen? ber tveig bann,~roer ijm ben *]3ag abgenommen; fo, bag 
?etner ju lang serroeilen fan. 

Urn bie unroiffenben bk Siffern unb 3alj(en$ulernen: fofefereibe 
i<$ ifenen auf bie sftoten*QMantf Oelcfee Ijdnget bag fte alle ba* 
rauf fe&en fonnen) biefe 3iffer*3abl 

1234567890 
tvett Don einanber &or,bag man anberegiffern bar&or unb baxbin* 
ter fe^en f an, bann fe£e icb eine o &or bag 1 unb bebeufe tf>nen^ 
bag ob n?ol)l bk o t>or 1 fle&etbennocfr nicbtg an ber gabl termed 
ret toctbc/ bann I6fdje td> bk o ©or bem 1 autf unb fefce fte Winter 
bag 1 fo matfjt eg 10 aug; fofgen jroep $M fo ftnbg 100 fofejen 
breo fo ftnbg 1000, u. f. n>. folcfeeg $eige tc5 ibnen burcb alle bie 
fcorgefefcte Sifter* ga&l. 2£ann biefeg gefefeefren, fo roirb &u ber 
crften gifter 1 nocb 1 sugefefct, fo (tnbg u. foirb aber $roifd?en bie 
11 eine o gefefct, fo finD^ 101, roirb aber bie o $u binterjt befun* 
ben/ fo fi'nt) eg 1 10. auf bergleicften 2lrt unb SSBeife geije icb n>ie* 
bet burd) corgefe^fe giffern mit tfenen burcb. ^£ann biefeg gefebe* 
%va f fo gebe men ttm$ $u fucben auf, eg fep im ^effament, pber 
©efang*QMid); bk bann am fertigften bamit ftnb, bit fyabtn »or 
ifjren gleig bepmir, ober $u #aug etwaZ ju erlangen. 

^Beileh aucbtm lefen (urn tterjtanblicl) ju lefen) nfaljig ijr,ba§ 
nian roobl auf bk Comma acbtung gebe, unb aber bk im lefen 
nod) nicbt rcobl beroabrt ftnb, folcbeg $u febroer fait, alg babe beg* 
falg folcbe 2}erorbnung. <E5o jemanb untet ben ^efiament @cbu* 
!ern nicbt fort liefet, fonbern bait fiifl ebe er bin fommc roo bag 
©rricblein ober $uncf tlein fte&et, bag ift i gefeblt, toieberum tt>cr 
iiber folcbeg obne cinjubatteii fort liefet, ift gleicfcfalg £, tt>er em 
<2£ort $ttoet;mabl fpricbf, iff 1 ate bann roerben alle Seller unb in» 
fonber()eit, n?ag ein jeber gefeblet bat angemercfet. 20ann ft'e banti 
alle aufgefagt bobtn, fo muflTen alle bit, fo gefe^lt bo^tn berau^ 
treten, unb nacbbem bk ^eblerfe»?n,ineine 9veibcf!eben; bie bann 
nicbtg gefeblt baben, bk rucf en binter bk ^afel jufammen ; bk an* 
bem fe^en ficb wieber ju unterfl an bk ^afel. 

SSSaS nun bag ^5rief tvecbfeln gegen einanber betrift, fo i(! bk* 
(eg $u mercfen, bag icb iz Safer fang jtuet) ©c&ulen mie febon ge«> 
melbt uerfeben, unb aucb 4 @ommer (nebmlicO 3 9)?onat bie ic& 
twgen bw Srnbte frep 6af^) in ©ermantottw @ctu( gefealten/ 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 47 

• X ** )(• 

ate baben Die (Scbuter in (gcbipbad?/ toann i$ ttieDer nacjj bee 
©cbul in ©oflforf gegangen QSriefe mifgegeben/ n>ann id) roieDer. 
Surucf gefommen, fo baben Die ©ollforter ©cbtiler De$gleid?ett 
getban, Die @acj>e n>ar fo eingericbter, Da$ Die ^c&retbcr fo in 
gleicbem©en>icbtftunDen einanDer gefdjrieben. ^Bar e$ aber, Da$ 
JSernacb einer bm anDern ubertuogen/ fo febrieb er an einen anDern 
toelc^em er Dacbte gleicb ju roerDen. £>ie Ueberfcbrift rear nur Die* 
fe$: $?einen freunDlicben ©rug an *ft. 3ft. ©cr 3 n W* DeS 
griefs tt>ar ein f urged SXeimgefy oDer tin ©prucb au$ Der $&& 
bel ; nebfl Dem rourDe ttm$ t?on ibrer ©cbuMJebung (was (termor 
einen 2)entf fprucl> »or Diefe 2Bocb/ unD roo er befefcrieben/ unD 
Dergleicben) angefubrf/ aucb gabetroan Diefer, /enem in fetnetit 
©cbreiben eine grage auf ; melclje er gern mit einem (Sprud) au£ 
»&. ©cbrifr beantroortet bdtte. 3$ $n>eifle nicbt/ roann $roe» 
@cJ?ulmeifter/( fie m6d)fen gleicbfalte an einem Ort roobnen oDer 
nicbt/) id) fage: roann (te folcbe 2kbt gegen einanDer bdtfeti/ unD 
roolten aucb gern £tebe unfer ibrer 3ugenD pflan^en/ Dag, fo fern 
e$ in fterfcf. 2ubt $u ©Off; unD Dem genteinen £5eften Der 3u* 
$mb ind SGertf gericbtet rourDe/ eg £iebe gebdljren rourDe, 

@o t>ief rodre in (gtucfroeig #ir 2lnleitung unD 5infubrung/Die 
SugenD Die £5ucbfraben $u lernen, unDroie fie Darinnent)on©taf* 
fel ju^faffel/ ibre ^ritte unD ©cbrifte fbun mufien, ebe man fie 
$u Dem gwecf" bringen fan. Den man $ur (S&re ©Otte$ unD iijrent 
#et)l im 2lugenmercf bat/ roelcbes jule£f folger. 

£Ba$ nun feine $tt?epfe grage oDer $5egebren anbefangt: nem* 
licb/ ^05ie mit swfcbieDenen/ aucb serfcbieDene gucbt/ unD nacfr 
Dem C0?aag Der Ueberfretung/ aucb bit ©frajfe wrmebret oDe* 
wrminDert tvirD? 

<3olcbe$ roolte Dem greunb $u Iteb &ergftcf> gerne in alien ©ii* 
cf en au$ treuem «&er£en ojfenbabren : roeiien aber- Diefed alle^/ ei> 
nen folcben roeifen^egriff in (ic()f>dlf;fo tveig id) tveqen Der ^eit* 
lauffigfeif nicbt roobl; n>o icb anfangen oDer enDen foil, ©ie Ur* 
faefce fommt Daber, rueilen Der t>erDorbene $\iftanb Der QucjcnD 
fid) in fo t>ielen ©ingen offenbabref; unD Die 2lergerni|fe Dedglei^ 
tf)*n mannigfaltig jtnD/ woDurcb Die ^uQmb gedrgert rm'rD »on 
Denen Die alter ate fie fi'nD/unD roeilen ©Oft fefbjt be^euget: i ^ 
CO?of. 8/ 0-31. ©ag bat Didjfen unD tracbten Ded menfcblicbert 
^er^en^ fen bog t>on3ugenD auf/fo Dag auSDiefer unreinen^uel^ 
le/ ( t»o mtitf tqglic& Dure!) dure ^inpflan^ungen Daran gearbeitefc 

85 3 tvirD/ 



48 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X ** X • 

jwrb fc>a$Q$dfe ju unterbrucf en unD ju Ddmpffen) n>eni^«5offnun^ $ur 
$5efferiwg fcerautffliefien/ Da$ QSerDerben ift ju grog/ unt) mcftret 
ftct> su Dicfer geit nod) tdQlid> auf all€rf>ant> ^Beife/ Dag icb e$ fo 
gar Da»or anfebe/ Dag e$ ganfc nicfct mebr su(dnglid) if} au$ eige* 
ncn 5?rdfften etroatf $u wrbeffern. <2$o Der «§(£rr nid&t DiefeS 
$aug Wfft bauen/ fo roerDenmoblumfonft Daran arbeiten alle,Dte 
t)aran bauen. 3)ie£anDplatfcb/#age|nftraucbunD SSircfenftotf, 
jtnD roobl SMtei Dem bpfen 5iu$brucb $u roebren/ aber fie finD fej* 
ne €0?itfel DaS bog&afttcje «£>er§ $u »erdnDern/ mlcbeS un$ alle* 
fammt »on $?atur nad> Dem gall in folder gigenfdjafft baft/ Dag 
tvtr me"br jum 35ofen aB jum guten geneigt/ fo (ang Dag «§er& in 
folcbem 3uftwi> unwrdn&erf bleibf, unD nic&t burd> @>Otte$ 
©eijit erneuert roirD. SeDocb/ obroobl Der<Saameaudjtoon3ugen& 
auf in Dem $?enfcben Dag er sum £56fen geneigt/ fo fdnte t$ Doc& 
fo n>eit nicbf in Demfelben $tir 5(utfubung f ommen/ -voann unfer afe 
ter ©cbaDe rccbt erfant unD gefubiet nmrDe/ fo nwrDen tr>tr aucO 
fcabin mit (Srnft arbeiten/ Dag Derfefbe nicfct nur eon wis aliein/ 
fonDern aucb t>on unferem *ftebem$?enfcben/ unD son unferer 3u* 
genD auggerottet unD &erti(get mxbw m6d)te; roeilen Djefer oXtt 
©cbaDen unD @cblangen*Q3ig einerlep ift/ fo rourDen mir aucfc 
allefamt Denrecfcten 3BunD*5tr^t -feorDiefe <2BunDen mit <£rnft 
fucben/ unD aud) DieCWittel/ t)k er ungDorfolcben ©cbaDen $u ge* 
braucben tturorDnef/ t>or un$ unD unfere JugenD jum ©enefung& 
Sftittel antuenDen/ tt?ei[enn;irobne Dtefe ©enegmittei nicbf jurnxuV 
Ten SXube fommen fonnen/ fonDern Den nagenDen 'SBurm/ Dec 
Durcb Diefen ©cbtongen £5ig alljeit DaS ©eroiffen nagef/ fublen 
gu unferem erpigen QSerDerben. ©O^ rpoKe un$ allefamt in 
©naDen bepjfrben/Dag roirDie QSerbeifiung/ ein$ufommen$ufetner. 
fKube, nicbt fcerfdumen unD unfer t einer Dafointen blejbe/ 2imen. 

^Beifen mie gemeiDt/ alle i>orfaHenDe^egeben&eifen$unxifldufc 
(ig fallen rourDen/ fo mill id) Dod) Dem greunD etfidje antigen j 
Un&'aucb Die Sftiffel Die icb gegen foldje anjuroenDen gefucl?t5abe; 
tr?c(d)e Vitrei aber Den (gcbaDen nicftt bejlen fo"nnen. 3>m 
•S<£rrn aller «&^rren ; Dcr al(e£ in feiner ^5anD bat, unD urn Deflfen 
i^ulffe unD 35et>ftanD man in fokben gdlien Urfad) fat ber^iicbsu 
bitten/ Dem gebiibref auci) Die Sbre/ rpann man (ieijet unD fpubret/ 
Dag cfftaS $ur ^efferung anfcbldget. 

^r(]Iicb/ iff bey fcieien ^inDem Da^ fiiidjen unD fcftmdren fo ge? 
Wkt roelcbe^ in fo »ie{ fc^aaDbaren Morten fic^ auf alier^anD 

?Jrt 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 49 

• X 17 )( & 

2(re unb 2Betfe offenbabret: ©o fern nun Di'cfem Uebel unb bflfeft 
©eroobnjjeit nicbt mit (grnft geme&ret nrirb/ fo i>erfducrc fokber 
©auerteig Den ganfcen %ei$, al$ roerben bie/enigen ©djul *.£in* 
t>er fo bierinnen fcbulDig befunben twrben erflltcb unferfucbet/ obfte 
aucb biefeS wrftunDen mag fie fprecben/ Da e$ bann 6ffter$ ganfe 
f tar an Den <&ag f ommf/ bag fte e$ nic&t wrfleben n>a$ e$ m ftd> 
bait/ fragt man fie aber, ob fie Die S&orte felbften erbacbt/ obec 
»on jemanb anbers gebfat battel fo ^et^t e$ ftcb rbieDer be^ t>ie* 
len ^tnbern, Dag £)er/ oDer £>ie fo fasten: gragt man fte ferner: 
SOBarum fte Dann folcbeS aucj) fasten? fo if! gemeiniglicb n>iebe* 
turn Die Slntroort: $£eil 3)er oDer 3Me fo fagten* @o fmbet |td> 
bann bet) utelen Die Untt>ijjenbeit/ bag fte nicbt n>tffeti/ roarum fte 
e$ tbun: ©olcben tuirb Dann t>orge|Wt Dag fte ftd^ tt>o5l in 2lcb£ 
nebmen/ unD bergletcfcen SGorte nicbt meljr fprec&enfolten/ Dag e$ 
tviDcr ©Otte$ SOBort unD SQMenfep; aucb wann fte 3)en/ obec 
S>ie/ Don roelcben fie Dtefe S(uc|)c gebdret/ notft mebrmals fjfoen 
tvurDen; fo folten fte ifjnen fagen: ©ag felbige bierinnen ftc&D op? 
pelt Derfunbigten/ fte fetjen baruber in ber ©cbule in ©traff fon> 
men/ twtlen ftefolcbe glticbe ton i(>nen gelernet. QSerfprecben bann 
fo!cbe^inber f ba§ fte bergfeicben SBorte nicbt mebr gebraucbet* 
ttollen/ fo fommen fte bag erftemal fren; ftnbt ftcb$ akx f bagnacjj 
bem fte geroarnet ftnb/ felbige bannocb bet) folcber bdfen ©emobn* 
fait wrbarren/foroerDenfolcbe nacbDem man Der ©acbe getr-ig 
tfc Dag fte ftcb ttieDer mit folcben Shorten aerfcbulDet/ eine Sett* 
lang auf t>k (Straff* Q5ancf alleine gefefcef/ unb $um Seicben Dafj 
biefelbe in ber (Straff finD r bag 3oclj am #alg fragen. Qjerfpre* 
<ben fte t>ann bag fte funfftig furjtcbttger fet)n molten/ fo fommen 
jte mit etlicben «&anbtfreicben fret)/ fommen fte roegen folcben glu* 
cbenmieDeraufbie@fraff*25ancf/ fomirbbie ©trajfe wrmebref/ 
fommen aucb ntcbt fret) obne ^Siirgen/unb jemefjr fte ftcb »erfcbu^ 
t>m^ jemebr ISurgen fte ftellen muften/ t>a bann t>k ^urgen btefe^ 
in acbt ju nebmen f)ab^ bag fte felbige an t'br Q}erfprecben erin* 
nern/ fte aucb t)ermabnen ; mit attem €rnfl forgfdltig ju fm unt> 
ficb s>or ©traffe $u buten. S)iefe^ if! ber gaum unb ©ebig fa 
man ibnen roegen folcfeet b6fen ©emobnbeit in ten 9)?unD legen 
mug/ aber ba$ fyx% ^u dnbern/ bat mug t>on einer bobern «&ant> 
fommen/ unb mit ernflltcbem gleljen ben bem gefucbt tverben/ Der 
$erfc unD ^teren pritffet; aucb mug ibnen/ unD alien ©cbufem 
3ur 2Garnung au« ©OtteS 2$ort torgeftelt tverbm; 28a^ Die* 

$4 fe$ 



50 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

® )( 18 X $ 

fe$ aM (fo man mutbroiUig Darinnen verbarret/ unt> big anggn* 
De Dartnnen befunt)en nrirD,) t>or ein fcbrcereS ©etDtc&t bat/ unt> 
Dag Die ^enfcben muffen CRecbenfcbafft geben am jungften©ericbt/ 
Don einem jegficben unnufcen 9S5ort DaS fte gereDet fcaben. @ol* 
cbe unD Dergleicben ©pviicbe muffen (t'e auffucben unt> lefen ; audj 
roirD ibnen $u fernerer Sebr ein SieD oDcr ^falm $u ftngen aufgo* 
geben, Die Daffelbige gleicbfallS bejeugen. 

Ob nun roobl *]3ennfi)h)anien t)on Diefer anflecfenDen unt) bofen 
gtftigen ©aicjje/ t>or Dtcfem nicbt fo angeftecft getoefen al$bte£an* 
t>er/ Die febon lange Durcb Den blutigen 5frieg bedngftet unt) uber* 
$ogen ftnb/ Da Dann unfer Den rauben uno ungejogenen ©olDaten 
weDer gucbt nod) (grbarfeit beobad;tet rm'rD, fonbem obne emiQtn 
©cbeu unt) gurdjt tor ©Otc nod) Sftenfcben mit <2Borten/ <35e* 
berDen unD Sjercf on alierbanD bdfc @tucfe autfuben, rooburcb Die 
arme unfcbulDige 3ugenD gedrgert tvtrD/ unD fuicben unD jcbn>6rett 
fo gemein tvirD Dag e$ be» wkn nicbt mebr s>or ©unDe gebaUen 
it)irD; fage ben fcielen 2(lten : 3)ie arme unfcbulDige 3ugenD (ebret 
fo(cbe$ nacbfagen, (leftnDunDtverDen/ roie un$ alien befannt/ in fol* 
tbemetenDen guflant) auf Diefe 2Be(t gebobren; Da fie nicbt fprecben 
f s nnen/fo, Dal man fle Degroegen gar nicbt befd)u(Digen fan, aftf roarr 
Diefelbcn folcbe b6fe (gigenfebafften fcon fcbdnDiicben Morten mit 
ouf Die 'SOelt bringen, acb nein! roann fie fprecben lernen/ fo ler* 
nen fie Die 'SBorte nacbfagen Die fte $ut>orgeb6ret/ Der QSerflanD ift 
nicbt Da, fte roiffen nicbt ob e$ bo$ ocer gut iff roa$ (te nacbfagen. 
UnD tvetlen wk semelDt, Diefetf £anD unccr got tlicbem ©cbufc big* 
l)er t)on 5frieg$»erbeerungen befreyet, aucb fciele&on Den ertfengin* 
tDobnern unD 2lnfdngern in Diefem Zanb folc&e 50?enfcben roaren, 
Die ©Ott t)or Siugen batten unD in feiner gurcbt tvanDelten, fo 
$at man aucb $u Der Seit toenig unfer 3ung unD 2i(t ton Dcrglei* 
dben Morten gcboret. 2lbcr je. mebr fid) 9)?enfcben nacb Diefem 
ta\\\> begeben/je mebr aucb folcber SOBaare mit fommt,unDob)te 
allbierfcbon nicbt fcor^auffmann^^Baar gultig erfannt roirD^ 
fo wirD e^ Docb fo oermifebet, Dag (te ie (anger je mebr gebraucbet 
tvirD; ju groflfem ©cbaDen Der nacbfommenDen 3ugenD» 

gwenten^/ offenbaret ftd) Da^ tkftt QJerDerben aucb an Der 3u* 
genD, Dag/ tuann (te tint 50?i(fetbat begangenunD (ieDegroegen an* 
gefprocben roerDen/ fte folcbee gemeinigiicb mit £ugen verbergen o* 
D«r suDecfen roollen; StBefcbeS/ fo e^ nicbt mit (Srnff an Den ^in* 
Dem bejlraffet unDfo[cbe^@cb(angen^iftnicj)tabgen;o!)netroirD/ 

(te 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 51 

• X *? X • 

fte DaDurdj m$ jettficbe unD eroige Q&rDerben geratbcm wegroegen 
(£lfcrnunD<3>d;ulmeitfer, fo fern fte Derarmen&mfcr ibr #et)(unD 
©eltgfett $u beforDernfucben, unD ftcl> folcbedmit (Srnft angelegen 
fepn lafjenfcbulDig fwD/Diefed frujjjcittg $u wrfjutcn. 3n?ar t'fl t)tc* 
fe b6fe ©erooljnbeif fcbon febr ait, vtim ftcb folcbe gletcb nacb Dem 
gall an 2{Damd erjlgebobrnen ©obn Dem Cain an <£ag gegeben, 
aid Derfelbc n>egen feiner groffen ©unDe Die er an feinem frommeti 
Q5ruDer «§abel audgeubet/ Don ®Ott gefraget nmrDe: 3Bo ift 
Dein$5ruDer«£>abel? fo antroortefe er n>iDer fein beffer Stiffen 
unD ©erotgen/ unD fpracl): 3d) fteig nicbt/ foil tcb meined £5ru* 
Derd #uter fe»n.-i SSucb C0?of. 4/t). 9. ©0 Dag man freraudfe* 
fcen fan ; Dag (tcb t)tefcr <Scblangen*(gaamen Furfc nacb Dem Sail 
geoffenbabret/ unD nocb tdglicb grucbte sum 3;oD unD sum <$er* 
Derben bringet/ twlcbed ©tern unD ©cbulmeifter febroer $ur <2$er* 
anttvortung fteben n>irD/ tvairn fte nicbt ibre an&ertraute 3 u 9 en & 
DigfaUdmit(£rn|tDa»onfucben ab$ubalten. ^Bit febrmirDiefedoffc 
am«£>er6en tieget, tveig niemanD beffer aid tcb: S)i$ betjfommen* 
De ©cbufcr SieD miro etn>ad Da&on an %ag (egen. €d bejeuget Der 
*&£rr 3®u0 felbfien Sob. 8/ 1>. 44* t>ag Der ^eufet Der £ugen 
$>ater fet?, UnD mikn $u Der getf t>it @cbrifftgele(>rten unD $ba* 
rifder roelcbe/ ob fte roobl dufferlicb Den ©cbein hattm wn ©ott* 
feligHett/ aber ailed m$ fte thdun nicbt tn Der ^a&rbeit $ur £bre 
^Otted gefebabe/ fonDern ibre eigene <£bre fucbten ; fo fdjmucfcett 
fte ibre ©acbe mit £ugen gegen t>k ^abrfteit, roetwegen fte(£br> 
ffud tt>tc in gemelDten QSerd $u feijen, wit folgenDen Morten an* 
fpridjt: 36* fci>D »on Dem QSater Dem <£eufei/ unD nad) eureS 
SSaterd £uft wollet t&r tbun. SDerfelbige if* tin $fckDer Pon 2ta* 
fang, unD ifi nicbt beflanDen tn Der SSSabrbeit: 5Denn Die SJCabr* 
j)eit ift nicbt tn t'bm. ^enn er Die £ugen reDet/ fo reDet er t>on fet^ 
nem eigenen> Denn er i(l ein ^ugner^ unD ein Q}ater Derfelbigen. 
@o (auten Ded «§(grrn 3£fu eigene ^Gorte. 3^6«nned Der 
gauffer nennet fte urn folcber Hfrn €igenfcbafft millen Otterge^ 
jucbte^ ate in feben O^attb* 3^ t>. 7. ?^an lefe ferner unD betracbtc 
mtt €rn(l unD SinDacbt bat 23. (Ja^ S0?att6dt/ fo roirD man §n* 
Den/ wad Die fugenbaffte unD ebrfucbtigen ^udubungen »or ^elje 
nacb (tcb ftbtn. 5)er(e^te2(udfprucb DerS&ebe/ttirD in Dem 3 3 1>. 
mttfolgenDen ^Borten audgefprocben: 36r ©cblangetv ibr Ot^ 
terngejucbte/ tt»te tvollt tbr Der bcMfcben QSerDammnig entrtnnen? 
(So nun tpie gemelDt, falcfce boge 3n>eige unD $Pan$.en an Der 

$5 s 3 u 9wi> 



52 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X » X • 

3ucjent> mit ©rnff geDdmpffet unD an flatt Deffen ttm$ cjuteS &t* 
pflantyt, aucf> <&Ott ber|lic& Darum erfucbet roirD, Dagerjum 
pflfan^en unD beaieffen fein cjndDicjeS ©eDeoen geben ivollc/ fo t(l 
•Soffnung, mit Der #u1ffe (&Ottt$ eftvaS gufe$ an t>cr 3fugenD 
ju t'brem $5e|fen in$ 2Bertf $u ricbfen. £)ann Die SugenD an (tc& 
felbfi ifiallejeitam meitfen £uentfcbu(Dtgen; Denn fteiftroieSBSacb^ 
tn tuelcbeS man allerfet) gormen Drucfen fan. Mfitt man abet 
folcbe b6fe SBurfcef auSfcjjtagen unD un&erbinDert fere roacjjfen/ fo 
roerDen g(eicbfali$ folcbe bdfegrucbte an Denerroacbfenen 35dumen, 
Dertfebe an fotcben erroaebfenen $?enfcben jum QSorfcbein fommen, 
Die Dem SBefje unD ^6Hif4)en geuer jugeeignet trerDen. 3)enn Die 
2(tt i(l t>em Q5aum febon an Die SOBur^el gefegt/ Dag/ n?e(cbetf 
QSaum nicbt gute grfidjte bn'ngcf/ foirD abgefjauen imD in$ geuer 
geroorjfen. %lm ift Die £ugen eine fofcbe grucbt/ Die in$ geuer 
gebdret. @ie ijl audj Der ©cbfupffroincM n?orinnen ftcb DieanDe* 
ten ©unDen fcerbergen/ Dag man jte nicfrr fefecti nocb ftnDen folfr 
tatnittin Q5etruger feine QSetrugerepforttreiben fan, unDDannocb 
ein ebr(icber$?annfetv oDerDat>orgebaftenfepntt>iu"> fofebmiicfet er 
feine ©ac&e mit £ugen* Stag cine #ure Docf> Die Qfyxt ate tint 
SfunAfrau baben unD bebalten mll f Darju gebraudjt fie Die £ugen. 
gin 3)ieb/ $#rDer unD ^ebrecber macbts tbm fo ; unD toamt nicbt 
offenbare S^niffe genug aorbanDen fint), iverDen roobl bit ©a* 
cben mit £ugen fo aerDecf t unD wrtbeiDiget merDen ; Dag man Dig* 
falls »or Der %£dt Dannod) em ebrlicber Qtiann bleibet. 2lber roo 
nicbt in S^'t Der ©naDen fofc|)e ©unDen t>or ©Ott Dure!) fterfcfi* 
c&e QSuffe bereuet unD befennet n>erDen, fo n>irD folder ©cblupjf* 
tvmcfei nicbtS wrbergen fonnen, DaS <£nbe ttirD Die Salt fragen 
ttiujfen. $)ann tver feine Sftiffertjat feugnet/ Dem njirDS nicbt ge* 
(inaenr 5Ger (te aber befennet unD !d§t/ Der njirD ^3armber^icjlett 
ertanaen. ©prucfeh). (galom. 2, t>. 13. 1 Cp. 3ol>- x / »* 8. 9. 

<2£aS nun Die €D?tttet belanget/fo^en ubfen 5(u^brucb ju ftrnDem 
Da§ er nicbt uberljanb nebme, fo felje icb jtvar/ toa§ e6 nicbt in menfdj* 
(icben j^rdfften tfebef Die ^DBur^el tm §5runD ju eertiicjen: ©Oft 
flliein/ Durcb feine$ & @eiffe6 ^rafft mug Diefen ©eecjen in unS 
au^fubren. JjeDennocb ift ^reDicjern unD Q3or|lebern/ 0tern unD 
©cbulmeifterB ibre tyfliifyt, erfllicb an ibnen felbft/ an ibrem^deb* 
pen unD 9frben*$}enfcben/ unD aucb an Der 3ugenD ju arbetfen/ 
Diefen befiecften 3^ocf DeS gleifcbeS nicbt nur $u b^fien/ fonDem 
aud; aufyujie&en/ fo mi fit Durcb ©Otted ©naDe wrmocjen tn$ 

2Gerd 



THE SCHUL-OKDNUNG 53 

• X 21 X • 

2£ercf $urid)fen: UnD ifi nacfr meiner (grfdntnig Da$ ertfeunD 
n6fl)igfie sfiliml, tin berfclicfjeg unD inbriintf igetf ©ubdt $u ©Ott 
urn #u(ffe unD Q3ct>flanD ; aucfr roeilen Die Unn>iffen()eit unD De* 
UmwfianD nocb bep Der 3«5^ Dag fiebatf groffe QSerDerbett 
ntcbt begreiffen Fonneti/ fo ill t>on ndfljcn fie erfKid) tn fcer^licfcet 
£iebe ju erinnern: ^elc&c (Sigenfcbafften un$ $u ©Oft fu&ren/ 
unD n>e(d)e un$ Don ©43tt abfuferen 5 roelcbe etnen ©erud) De$£e* 
beng jum £eben, unD roefcbe etnen ©erucb Detf 'SoDeS sum %oDe tti 
firfj baben* <2Bie Die gufen £igenfd)afften torn gufen (jer/ unDaucft 
roieDer nacf) Dem guten juflieffen/ unD tvieDer in iljren guten Ur* 
fprung fuftren/ unD n>ie tm ©egent(jet(Da$ Q56fe/ urftmingud)i>om 
b5fen f ommt unD gum bo" fen fu^ret, aucfc roieDer $u feinem bdfet* 
Urfprung fdferet; unD Dag Das ©ufe mit ©utem beloljnet tverDe/ 
unD DaS Q36fe mtt 23dfem. £)ag <&Ott t>a$ Wtfe ©ut unDDe* 
Urfprung alleS guten fep: SDer <&atan aber, feije Der b6fe geinD 
tuoDurdb afleS befe gefiifftet roerDe; unD rote ©Oft etn ©Oft Der 
2Gabrfjeit fei>, atfo fene bingegen Der (Satan einQSater Der£ugen5 
Dag man Derowgen Die ( 2Ba5r^ett (ieben/ (tcb aucb mit €rnft btt 
2Babr()eitbej!eigigen miijle mit SGorten unD ®ercfen/ tt>annn>if 
ju ©43tt tn Den «&immel fommen unD etm'g glucf fefig fet?n mU 
twt DannDer Sugneribr^beilfepe Die «&6He unDDerfeurtge^fubL 
c&Santx man folcfee unD Dergleidjen grmafonung mit iljnen tn$ 
^JBercf sertcbtet/ fo iff man aucfr ft&ulDig Die Seugniflfe beiu'get 
©cbrifft tfcnen befanDf $u macfren Die fo(cbe$ kjeugen. gerner/ fo 
tat man n&bigibnenDiefetf tvorsuflcUeti, Dag/ fo fern fie funfftigfjitt 
nid;t ©orge tragen murDen fid) t>or folcben b6fen (gtucfen $u &u? 
ten/ fonDern un&orficbfig/ oDer tt>of>l gar mutljroittig Dergfeidjeti 
freiben tvurDen/ Dag man fie Dann Digfalte ntd&t Durffte ungefirafffe 
fcingefjen iaffen/ roolte man anDer* feme <See(e erretten. ginDtfic&S 
Denn/ Dag nacb gctoebener S&arnung Dergleicben Uebertrettungsum 
^5orfd)ein f ommt, Dag foI<be ojfenbabr/ unD Der ©cbuier Dennoc^ 
fo(d)'eg mutfetDtDtg fcugnet/ fo tvirD Die ©traffe Der UebertretfunjJ 
tn jmen ^5ei( getfteilet/ unD Die ^ugen n?irD am erfien/ unD au^ 
am ftdrtften gej^rajft/ e^ tvirD aud) »or etne J!ugen fein. 55urgean* 
genommen; »or Die Uebertrettung nacb Dem fie itf, mirD Doi Die 
©traffe Durd)^urgfcbafft geminDerf/ oDer o&neS&urgenaufQSer* 
fpre^en fic& Funftig in ad?t su nel>men gar gefc^encfet; aucfe n>er* 
Den nac& gefcbeftener ©traffe, DiegeDrobete ©traffenuber folcje 
fiJRtfTdtftat in (Ktligw ©c&rifft wie&erbokt. 

Sal 



54 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X u X • 

£)af? ©feljfentotu* ftc& aucl> frufj$eifig bet> ctficben^fnbern offcn* 

bafjren, unD tuann fte in folder tyat ergri (fen, fo tvolfen fte (kb aud) 
gememigltcb Der £ugen beDicnen/ geben Dor, DiefeS ober j'cneS babe 
e$ ibnen gegeben oDer Dertaufc&et/ oDer fte batttnti gefunben : UnD 
feiefetf roirD offtmabte fo wrroirrt Durcb einanber t>erDref)et/ Dag 
man genug $u tbun finDet fo(d;e$ tvieDer $u reefct $u bringen. 2il$ 
babe Diefetf $u Derbuten folcfee QSerorDnung gejJeKfy Dag fctn 5vint> 
in Der @d;u(/ aucb auf Dem ^Beg oDer$u £aug,obne CSorroiffen 
ttiein, unD ibret (£(tem cttva^ fcerfebencfen oDer wrtaufeben foil, 
aucb tvann fte etiva^ in Der ©djul/ oDer auf Dem 235eg, oDer roo 
e$ fei;n mag ftnDen tvurDeii/ (0 foiten fte t$ mix ansei^en : SDann 
tva3 |ie funDen, DaS gef>6rc ibnen nocb nicbtuor eigentbumlid) $U/ 
fonDern Dent/ Der e$t>er(obren; matin ftcbaber nicmanD ftnber,nacb« 
Dem e£ etne 3eit fang befant gemad)t rcorDen fetv altfDann geb6* 
ret e$ Dent/ Der e$ gefunDen. S)urcb DiefeS Wlittd babe e$ Dod> 
@43tt (ob t>af)itt sebrac&f/ Dag DigfalB roenig $u beftraffen Dor* 
fommr, 

£)ie eigene ©jrfucbt betreffenD/ fo oflfenbaret ftcb fofdjeS aud) 
bei> Den $inDern, (te ift aber Dod) nicbt $u t>erg(eid?en in Der $8}aa$r 
wie (te ftcb bet) Den ertvaebfenen unD alten ojfenbabref, ba offterS 
urn cine bfofie @>ren|Meunb ^tfuf, fcic(5?rieg unD Q3(utt)crgie|7en 
angericbtet rotrD, nicbt nur unter bofjen ^tanDeS ^erfonert/ fon* 
fcernaucb unter $?enfcben &om germgen &tan\>, e$ erbebet ftcb 
efft Dig fall^ groffer ©treit/ /a nur DaS ein&tge ^Bortlein 3>t*, 
bringt offtmabte (Streit/ aud) wobi gar <Sd;(ag Daqu: 2iber 
unter $inDern ift Diefem Uebel t>iel feicbter $u fteuren: ginDet ftcb 
em 5tinD, ttelcbeS Die OberjMe befifyen roill, unD feinen bebortgen 
Ort tertdffet/ unD ftcb mit ©eroalt einDringen mil DaS oberfle 3U 
fet)n ; obne einigeS fXed;t Dar^u tteDer int fd)reiben/ (efen u. D. g. 
fo mtrD e^ anDern ^ur ^Garnung gan^ untm an gefe^t/ bi$ e$ 
Durcb feinen g(eig rcieber an Den Ort fommt/ Den eg wrDienet; 
n>ann Die £inDer Diefe^ einmaM nyiffen, fo iff Der (Sacfre fd)onge=> 
^olffen. ^SQer mill aber Die 2l!ten fo tueit fterunter bringen roie Die 
^inDcr, tvann (te (ifynad) ©)rifti£eljr nicbt fe(b|l ernieDrigen ml* 
(en? tfftatrfj. 20, ». 2^.27. c. 23/ 1>. 12. £uc. 14/t). n. c. 18/ H* 

€0?tt Der 5vinDer ibren @treitbdnDe(n ijl e^ gleicbfalld fO/ fte ftnD 
aucj) t)iel beffer ^ur Qjereinigung ju bringen ate Die 5i(ten. ^Bann 
tie $inDer unter etnanber in UnjufrieDenljeit fommen/ eg fei) in Det 
<Sd)uloDcr auf Dem ^Ceg, unD e$ roirD unterfucbt/ unD bcfunDen/ 
Dag in Der @ad> auf bei;ben ©eiten gefefc(et/ unD einetf fo n?obl in 

@c&u(& 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 55 

3§& X *3 X ® 

@cbu(D fet) al$ i>a$ anDere, fo n>irt> i&nen $re tteberfteffunc] auf 
bet;t)cn (Seifen,unDaucbDieDe$roegen wrDienfe ©traffe aorgejMt 
unD einemjeDenDie feine juerfanDf/ fo fern fie ficb nicbt tvieDermit 
dnanDer in Der@$utei>erfracjen. £ieraufn?irD ibnenancjefagt: <5o 
fern fte nicbt geneigt rodren (ic& mit einanDer $u wrfobnen, fo foU 
ten fie (tcb focjleicb t>on DenanDern(Sc&u(ernabfonDern, unDfo(an& 
neben einanDer auf Der (Straff* Q3ancl: fi£eu/big fie ficb mit einan* 
t>er Dertracjen/ roo nicbt/ fo tvurbe Die Digfaltf fcerDiente ©traff? 
folcjen. 2Jber e$ fommt feiten Darju Dag (k fid) abfonDern/ unD auf 
Die @tra|f *Q5ancf fommen: ©iereicfjen (ieber einanDer Die «£anD/ 
unD Damit tft Die @acb aufeefjoben, unD Der Q3roccg f)at tin gnb. 
©efcbdbe DiefeS fo (eicjt unter Den 2ilten/ unD rodre aucb fo balD 
tercjeben unD tterojeflTen roie bet; Den £inDern/ fo rourDe 

SDurcb proceffen Der Q3eutel nicbt (eer 

2)em 2lDt>ocaten Der Q5eutel nic()t fdjroer* 
&a$ nacjenD ©eroiffen f dm aucj) $ur Ovu&/ 
Siebe unD grieD fdm aucf; Da$u; 

€$ brdcbte nicbt fo mi gequdi 

Q3or &ib unD (SeeL 

€$ roirD ferneran micl)becjeljret/ nac& 3n(ja(t feineS ©cfrrerbenS 
einen £5ericbt $u rfnm, nebmficfc: Surcb tuefcr>c $?ittel icj) Die 
$inDer t)om ©cbmd&en ab, unD $ur (grille bringen fan. 

•gierauf antroorte: £)ag fofd;e$ Denen 5?inDern Die fcbroereffe 
Section ift, roeicbe (k fcbroeriid) aug frepem SfBtden lernen roollen. 
& rodbret fang bit fk fprecben (ernen, unD roann fie eg einmabC 
f onnen, fo roollen (k ficb nicbt (eicbt Das>on abjjalten (affen. 2Bei* 
(en man aber unter Den 5vinDern in Der (gcbul nid^t^ orDentltcbeS 
erbauen nocb jur 35efferuncj pflan^en fan, e$ fep Dann, Dag Da$ 
SKeDen feine grit, unD aud) oat @cbroeicjen feine Sett baben mug/ 
unD aber folcbe OrDmmg fo febtwr bet) Den $inDem fddt ficb Da* 
rein fc&icfen $u (ernen; unD e$ febeinet, roir 2i(ten Uttm Diefe &cti* 
on felbfi nod) nicbt redjt fertic] cjeiernet, Dag reDen unD febroetcjett 
feine £tit Ijaf, Die roir ung offt bejfer in acbt nebmen folten in re* 
Den unD febroeigen; aud) lafttt ficb Da^ fieine ©lieD Die gunge fo 
leic&t nicbt $d&men, man fan e^ auc& nicbt mit Der Ovutften ^ucbti* 
gen rote Die anDem ©It'eDer am Ztibt ; unD Die CDtfffetbaten Die mit 
Shorten cjefcfeefeen/ roerDen Durcb t>k gunge eerricbtet, nacb 3n* 
fcalt unD innerlicfter QSefcbaffenbeit De^«&er^en^ Sftlattb. i2 f x>.2$. 
Ob nun roofcl bty Denen ^inDem \>a$ reDen unD fprec^en roeicbe^ 

fie 



56 THE WOEKS OF CHEISTOPHEE DOCK 
® X *4 X « 

fie unferefaanber tretben, bet; t>te(en nicbt autffobdfem QJornebmen 
entftebef/ fo fan man Doa) nidjtg frucbtbarficbeS au^rtcbtcn, oDer 
c^ mug n>ie gcmelDt/ reDen unt) fcferocigen fetnc Seit 6aben. Urn 
fte nun bar^u ju bringeti/ babefebon garttiel $D?itfel unDSHSege an 
ibnen probieret/ roelcbe $tvar cine Sett tang gut gelban/ n?ann eS 
ctber jur ©eroobnbeit n>ort)en, fo babe tvieDer etmad anDerS tn£ 
SBercf gericbtet fte baDurcb in@fille su bringen : S0?eine OrDnung 
xmD £Beife ttomit icb ftebigber $ur (grille gebracbt, iftDiefe : 

@r(tlicb/ n>ann ibnen ibre Section aufgegeben ift, fo lernen fie 
Dtefelbe nacb bieftgem, n>ie aucb nacb Sngellanb* ^Sraucb unt) @5e* 
roobnbeit mit tauter @timme/ urn jte Dann fdmflicb am (ernen $u 
balten/ gebe tcb tn Der (gxbulebinunD ber/ bjgicb Dencfe fte baben 
geit genug gebabr ibre Section $u (ernen : 2i(6Dann tbue tcb timn 
©treid> mit Dec Dtutbe an Die 9?oten bland: oDer <£afel, fo ifttf 
mit einmabl (till/ Dann fangt Der erffe an aufoufagen: SUSDann 
mug ciner ate 'SGdcbter (melcber Daju tterorDnet tvtrb) auf etne 
^ancf ODer fonjf erbabenen Ort jleben in Der (gcbul/ Dag er (te aU 
le uberfeben f an ; Diefer mug a(Ie mit 33or*unb 3"namen an$eigen/uni> 
nacbDem er fte angejeigt/ aucb auffebreiben t)k Da plauDern oDer 
taut (emetv .oDer fonft efroaS treiben Datf uerbotten i|h ^etlena* 
ber befunDen, Dag/ njann man (te nacb Der 9ve»be $u ^debtern 
braucben n?ill einige nacl; ©unft oDer Ungunft anjeigen/ aid roer* 
Den Diejenigen abgeftelt Die bierinnen untreu erfunDen rcorDeti/ unD 
fommen aucb funfftig nicbt mebr an Diefe ©telle/ etf fen Dann/ Dag 
fte (tcb felbtf anmeiDen unDt>erfprecbenfunfftig treuc 2lufftcbf $uba* 
ben/ Dc^gleicben/ roann einer twgen Sitgen auf Die ©trafbancr* 
f omt/ fo rcirD folcber aucb nicbt $tim2Bdcbfer geff ellf,e$ rodre Dan Dag 
er fid; tim geraume3eittvob(t>erbalten/ DagmanDerglekbennicbtS 
an ibmgefpubret: ^amiDarmDte^cWmiteinemtreuenS&dcb* 
ter beftellt tft/ fo rcirD ee {till, Dag man (te fan 2luffacjen tafien/aucl) 
fonfl ettvaS erbaulicbetf \\)it t'bnen Dornebmen/ nacb fcerricbtetem 2luf* 
fagen fiebet e$ fo ; will man eSDarben (aflenfo&ergtgt man6/tvann 
aber folcbeg etlicbemabl gefcbeben/unDt)erfpubrtmirD/Dagg'ec^gc* 
ring acbten/ fo muflfen Diej'enigen fo Der^Bdcbter ange^eigt berau^ 
irettenunD nacb Der 0\et>5e auf Die (gtraff* Q3ancf f\tyn f Dann 
n>kt> ibnen Die ^[Gal>l gegeben/ ob fie lieber tiw$ nacb DemanDem 
DaS ^ocl) am ^al^ tragen/ oDer lieber ^anD(lreicb b«ben rooUen, 
aber fte ermdblen felfen bat 3ocb/ fonDan (irecfen gemeiniglicf) 
^ie £anD au^ nacb Der Dvutbe* 

®iefe$ 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 57 

• X *r X • 

SiefeS iflauffein Q5egebrenbie 9?adjricbt tt>f c ic5> ftc t>om fd&tt>dU» 

£en jur ©tille bringen Ian/ eg feat aber bet) mix Die $?ei)nuncj 
ganfc unb gar nicbt/ Dag icj> permit /emanb anDcr^ cine 3vegul 
t>orfcbreiben tvottC/ n>ornact> cr ficl> rcgulircn folte : 2Kb nctn ! eg mag 
DigfaUS ein /cDer in feiner -Saugbaltung fftun/ unb btefelbtge fub* 
reti/ n>ie er eg am beflen tor ©Oft unD 9)?enfcben ju t>eranm>orten 
gebencf et. <§o!fe mir aber meine bigber gefubrte ©cbul < Uebung 
Die id) bier auf Q5egebren/ unb nicbt aug eigenem %riebe befcbrie* 
bm babe ; Darinncn »or unregelmdgig angenommen roerben ; rcei* 
len fie in wrfcbiebenen £)ingen gegen t>te gettutynlicbe Ubung in 
^eutfcbfonb unD anDern Orten ifo benen gebe fo mi jur *ftacb* 
ricbt: £)ag eg in ^ieft^er *pro&infc unter ben frepen (Sinroobnern 
in ^3ennft)li)anien/ aucb gleicbfallg in terfcbiebenen SDingen unter* 
fcbteben ifc roag Die (gcbul betrifft : 3)ann roelcbem ber <Scbu(bien|l 
Durcb t>ie bobe Obrigfeit befldtttget i(t in ^eutfcblanb/ unt) u)nt 
bet .©cbulftubf wftgefefeet/ ben fan ber gemeine 50?ann nicbt Ui&jt 
t)erfe^en/ baber eg aucb nicbt fo (eicbt mit ibnen in ©efabr ftebeC 
vox $?enfcben, rcann fie febon ttm$ ju febarff geben mit ber 3u* 
genb. Sebocb befenne frerv ob k\) febon auf gemeibte bobe 93er* 
orbnung befldtttget tvdre/ fo rcdre eg bocb in SGabrbeit in folcber 
^efebflffenbeit t>amit f Dag/ ob man roobl Die Wlatyt t>on @Otc 
unb bober Obrigfcit bdtte Die ©cbdrffe $u gebraud;en, fo ijt fie 
bocb riur $ur Q3efierung gegeben/ unb nicbt §um QSerberben. $?un 
bringet eg t>k (grfabrung bepm ©cbulbalten/ bag ein $inb roef* 
cbeg bloDe ijl/ fetched tt>ann eg mit ©cbdrffe/ eg fep in forfeit 
ober mit febarjfer 3ucbt*Diiitben betfrafft roorben/ bag baffelbige 
5?inb baburebmebr folte »erborben alg gebeffert twrben; foil nun 
etroag an fokbem #inb terbeffert twrben fo mug eg burcb anbere 
Qftittd gefebeben. 3)egg(eicben/ ein $inb bag bumm iff) roirb 
burcbg fcblagen mebr tterborben alg gebeffert. <£in ^inb/ b<\$ ju 
«Saug ju t>tef mit <Scb(dgen tractirt n?irb unb berfefben getvobnt 
ifc fo(cbe^ tDirb in Der <25cbu( nicbt mit @cb(dgen ju recbt gebracbt/ 
fonbern nocb mebr toerborben. ©oil nun folcben $inbern ttroaS 
jur ^efferung gereicben, fo mug eg burcb anbere $?itfef gefcl>eben, 
_^Gag ftartndcfige ^inber (inb, t>k bad ?S6feju treiben feinen 
©cbeu tragen, folcbe mufien mit febarffer 3ud;t«0vutben beimge* 
fucbt; xmb Darneben aucb mit ernjier ^rmabnung a\i$ ®Otte$ 
^33ort angefprocben njerben; ob man babtircb etn?a ba$ «§erfc tref* 
fen mocbte. 5iber bk blfom unb bummen im Uxmn f mufien burcb 

anbere 



58 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



• X *« )( • 

anDere Eiffel gebeflTert roerDen, rooDurcb felbige fo t>fet m6glid> 
frcpmutbigcr gemacbt/ unD fie t?tc £uft feibficn $um (ernen antreibt* 
SJBann e$ Dann mit Den $mDern fo roeit fommt,Dann fatlt eS Den 
5?inDern \mb Dem @cbu(meifier nicf;t mefjr fcbroer, Dann tt>ann a(* 
k Diejenigcn, Die mit mir in folcbem SSeruff fieben recbt errodgen, 
tt>ie teener folcbe junge @e«len in Den 2(ugen ©OtteS (inD; unD 
Dag mir aucl) Degtvegen son unferem £augbalten rcerDen Died)* 
nunc) tbun muflTen, fage foldje: ob fie tvobl Die €0?ad;t baben git 
jiraffen, fo roerDen fie Docb mit mir t>ie( lieber Dabin arbeiten, Dag 
«$ mit Der 3U9M& in Den gutfanD f ommen mocbre/ Dag fie DaSje* 
niae au$ freproilliger ftebe f6un/ tt>orju man jte fonfien mit Dec 
Diutben antreiben imif/'bann \>a$ SGort SDu foft unD mufi, unD 
Da$ £Bort 3d) folg mit £uft, fu&rtr nicbt einer(et) 'Sbon, auf Den 
le^ten 3Uang braudjt Der ©cf>u(mctflet feine Diutlje/ unD ift Iteb* 
ticber su Wren unD feicbter ju wrantroorten. *})f. 1 10, r>. 3. ftcljcf* 
alfo: 9M) Deinem ©ica tt>irD Dir Dein 33o(cf tvilligiici) opffern 
im f>cilt<3en (gcbmucf. <2Ga$ nun in (eiblicbenunDgeitfiidjen Q3er* 
ricbtungen tvilitd gefd)id)t, Da$u fyatmanfeinen 3roang nod^rei* 
ber n6tbig. gerner fiebet *Pf. 3 2 /t>- 8. 9. alio; 3d) will Did) un< 
ternjeifen/ unD Dir Den 2Beg $eiacn, Den Du tvanDeln (off: Sdjroill 
bid) mit meinen 2lugen (eiten. <Set)D nic^t roie SXog unD hauler/ 
trie nicbt wrfidnDig jtnD : SBelcben man gaum unD ©ebig mug 
in$ SOtaul lecjeti; ivann fie nicbt 511 Dir tvolien. #ier ift abermabl 
ju crftbcn/ Dag Diejenigcn Die fid) untermeifetv unD mit Den 5iugen 
leitenla(Ten,Die baben folcben gaum unD ©ebig nicbt n6tbig. SOlan 
fiebet fofcben UnterfcbeiD an Den unt>ermwfiftigen ^bieren : £)er ei* 
tie gubrmann braud)t nicbt Da$ balbe f>arfe $uruffen, (jeififeln unD 
fcblagen an feinen *j3ferDen, ate iin anDerer tbut/ unD fubret Dod) 
cben fo febrocr, ja &un>ctlen fcbrcerer uber Q3erg unD ^bal, fo roobl 
al$ Der anDere: UnD nad) wricbteter Arbeit/ babentf Die tDilligen 
^)3ferDe unD aucb Der gubrmann am (eicbtefien gebabt; Die ^>ferDe 
baben Die (gcbf&cjeam n>enigfien gefubfet, unD Der gubrmann bats 
nicbt notbig gebabt fii mitfirenger ©trajfe 511 tractieren, fk baben 
rDtUia getban, mae anDere Durd) Die (Scbdrffe baben tbun mu(fen. 

QBa^ nun ferner »on mir begebret n?irD an Den greunD ju be* 
rid)ten/ nebmlid): 92Bie icbDie ^inDer in^iebe tractiere/ Dag fie 
micb n\b baben, unD aud) furcbten. 

^)ierauf antmorte fo »ie(: 2)ag fcfcrnir tva6 Dtefer ^3uncf ten in 
ftcb &dlt;facje/ Dag id) mir Digfal^ tm geringficn nicfjtf su eignen 

fan/ 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 59 

• x *$ x m 

fan: 3dj (afte-eS ju>r erne <)an$ «nt>etbterite @n^c t>crr ©Off/ 
fo biermnen etroag fruc&cbarlicbeg srotfctfen mir unt> bet* QugenD 
(eg fei> im femen/ unb aucfj in einicjen Uebungen $ur @5ortfeu'3* 
feit)aug#eMettt>irb. (£r|llicr; fcabe icf) eg bem lieben ©Ort 
fjcrfcu'cf) ju Dancfen/ Dag nacfrbem icfe $u fofcDem SSeruff »oni(j«i 
wrorbnet bin roorben/ er mir aucfr Die ©nabe mit^ctjeilet f>at^ 
bag td^ cine fonberlicbe &ebe ju ber 3ugent> Ijabe; bann n>4re 
biefe ft'cbe nid^t^ fo rodre eg eine uncvtrdg(icl;e $a(l unter folc&eji 
3>uc$MiD/ aber.Die £iebe fr4gt> Mb tvirb ntc&t mube* $dtte eine 
naturlidje Gutter feine £iebe ju iijren- 5?inbern/ Dag $inber gie# 
fteiv «>ag cine gutter »on ber ©ebmt an/ burcfj atterfyanb 3«f«^ 
(e an ibrem $inb auguben mug/ folte eine unerfra#lid?e faff 
fepn/ aoer t>ie Sicbe/ roeklpe fte $u tyren $inbern trdget/ mac(>e$ 
biefe £a(l leic&t/ roann ber 2JpofM <))aulug feine Zkbt ge$en bte 
©cmeine $u Cfcbeffalonicl) recfet an <£ag ^eben trill/ fo brucfterS 
mit fo^cnben £Borten aug/ 1 ^effl */ 1>. i. big $u (Snbe be£ 
i3ten Serfeg. 3m 7. Mb 8ten ©er$-fwijfeic&t er fcine £iebe 
ctnetr $?urterlfebe, roann er fpricbt: @feicl)tt>ie erne 2imme ifyre? 
$inber pflegef/ alfo fatten toir $er£eng *ufl m- wci)/ unb ma* 
ren willia eucf> mifjufyetlen/ nid)t allem bag gttangelium @K>£* 
U$r fonbern aucl) unfer £eben ; batum/ bag rcir eud) lieb Ijabeit 
gewonnen. 9#etn roeitfyer greunb. SDiefe ^Borte b^ 2lpof!eI$ 
bruef'en eme folcfee 2kbt aug, bienic^t nur ttifliij roar txtf&an* 
gefium./ fonbern audj ba^ £eben mitjutfyeifen t 2iber ift eg rao&J 
pet? alien ^rebi^ern in ber fogenanten (Sbriflenfyeif/ son ber 2(po* 
uef/ big auf biefe geiten/ fo in beg 2fpofte[g @ei(l in jjerfclidjjct 
Jiebe/ unb in foment (gtanbe geblteben ? 2$ fjaben ;a alle an 
ben tforgemelbren ®orten beg S(po(]e(g etn furfreftficf) ^orbi(i) 
Sef>abt: 3a er ruffet ung (\Um su/ unb fpricfyt: gol^et mir/ (ie* 
Ben $5ruber, unb fc&ec auf bte/ bit alfo roanbeln/ mie ibr un£ 
5abt $um QJorbiibe. tytylip. 3, v* 17. SBie eg aber in ber 21* 
poftel geit cjeftanben/ unb roie eg auf gegenrodrcige g«t in bet 
fo genanten ^rijlenbeic ftebet/ fonnen bte am bejlen einfe^crtf 
Denen bie $UQm bt$ <&t\ftt$ er6ffnec (inb, 3d) _t-t>x££ eg babe^ 
(affen/ unb meinen ©inn bem Sreunb auf fein ^ege^ren Jier* 
mit an ^ag geben/ icr) jwetjle nic&t/ bergreunbfcat gute Sibjlc^* 
ten ber Sugenb ^um ^5e(len« ©efc^t nun> eg n?are eine nafur* 
lid)e gutter/ bk gleic^fallg folcbe 2lb(tcf)ten/ roegen ifytet gefu^r* 
ten Sitbtf «3u$t mit iferen^inbern Jdttt/ fo/ bag (te folcbe^ 



60 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

& X *« X » . 

genre fdjrifftfic!) fcerfaffen »o.fce, nrie fte tl>re $inDer erjogen; Dar* 
mit nacb ibrem 2lbjterben Die 2Baage in glekbem 2luSfcblag blet* 
bm mocbte : 3)ie linker abev befdmen nacj> if>rer gutter abff er* 
ben eine ant)ere Gutter/ Die miivDe gar feicfrt ju t)en ^inDern fa* 
gen : (Sure t>orige Gutter bat euct> nad) ibrem (Sinn gcjogen^ 
id) aber, nwDe eucb nad) met'nem ©inn jie^en unD regieren.UnD 
t)ann f$nre Das roenig belften, roas Die »orige Gutter au3 (outer 
iicbe $u Der$inDer ibrem ^efteninSSSSercfgericbtet: 3eDocbDie 
gutter \)tt DaS il)re getijan, gleicbroie Der Spojtel Dag feine, mit 
Den QBorten: $o(get mix, lieben £5ruDcr, unD feftet ouf Die, Die 
fllfo roanDe(n,wie ibr unSf>abt$um 93orbi(De. 5Die nun nad) 3n* 
|>a(t gemelDten i7ten ». nid)t folcjen tvotten, fonDern fieber Dem 
©egentbeil fofgen, tuie Der 18. uno 19* *>. an$eiget; tveMjeS Der 
2lpo|M febon Dajumafel mit roeinen fagte, fo(d)e fofgen ibrem 
©inn. SeDocr; f>atte Der Slpoflel Da$ feine getfyan, unD feine 
©ecie evrcttet. 

3$ babe n>ie gemclDt/ Dem SveunD auf fein 33egef)ren, nem* 
licb: SSSie id) Die 5vinDer mit £t?be traetiere, Dag fte rnicf) fieb ha* 
ben unDaucr) furcbten, ju erfennen gegeben; Dag id) mirfelbfl 
DigfaliS nid)t6 jueicjnen fan. 3)ie £iebe ift eine g6ttlid)e SiDur* 
cftmg, nacboem man fie begebrt, unD son ^et^enDarnacfe tfrebet> 
fan man Derfelben Durd) ®=OtteS ©naDe tbeilftafftig roeiDen, 
tiadjDem man fie beroafyrt unD gebraucbt, fan fie serminDert oDer 
Dermebret njcvDen. SeDocb fan man rcof)l fo t>iel 9?ad)rid)t ge* 
ben:56uvcb roelcbe ©genfefcafften man forDerlid) cDer IjinDerd'dv 
^ortbeit oDev QSerlufi baben fan/ an Der £iebe. 3)te s6tt(td>en 
gugjlapffen, warm man Der redtfen £tebc nacf) fpubren roill/ Die 
be$eugen$, Da§ feine Siebe allgemein fen, unD ftd) an alle ©efdjdpf* 
fe mittbeilet, er laffet feine ©onne aufgeben iiber £55fe unD©u* 
te, unD lajfet regnen uber©ered)te unD Ungered)te : @o fern nun 
Der $?enfcb Der £iebe ©OfteS roill tfyeilbafttig roerDen, unD Da* 
rinnen roaebfen unD junebmen, fo mug er folcfren gugjf apffen nad)* 
folgen ; t>k roerDen ibn in Der £iebe (eiten unD fubren, t>on einer 
Ciebe $ur unD in Die anDere ; Durd) 35errad)tung Der ©efeb^pffe^ 
imD drbaltung Derfelben. 

<Da^ groflfe ^Gercf Der £tebe in (Srldfung DeSmcnfdju'cOen ©e* 
fcblccbte, \\t aucb ins allgemeine gefc^eben, rodre e^ aud) in^ all* 
gemeine t)on ung ?D?enfcbenfinDern angenommen, geglaubet/ unD 
in Der flebe Denen Sugftapffen (£l)ri|ti nac^getvanDelt, fo rourDen 

tvir 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 61 

® X *7 )( '• 

wir aud) burd) Die £iebe %i(li t>efl aegriinbet Herbert/ bag n>it 
<wc& mitatfen JSeiligen begreiffen fonten: SIBelcbea Da fet> t>te 
$5reite, unD Die £dnge, We ^ieffe unD Die $6be, folder unenblt* 
cften £iebc/ unD tvurDen aud) erfennen unD erfabren, Dag <£bri* 
(turn lieb l>aben befier fei>, Denn alleg roiffen* <£f>rigi guggapffen 
$u fol^en/ gnD alie Cljrigen beruffen, unD folcfjem ju folgen itt 
Der £iebe, i>ac er un$ etn QSorbtlD gefaffen. i $et. i, t>. ai. Sol). 
13, t). 13. 14. if. 16. 17. unD anberer Orten mefcr. 

@o rcir nun im ©egentbeil undju Dem alien befennen, fofgett 
aber Denen Sugfapfftn t>ev <2$eltr in S(ugen*£ug, 3leifcbe$*£uft 
unD fydprtigen £eben, fo nwDen mtt tvent^j S&JacbStljum in bet 
£iebe <&Otte$ $u ^offen Ijaben/ e& fet) n?er e$ rooUe/ er fct> aud> 
t)on <tof(m betitult n?teer tvolle^ unD wanner auc$ Den 2tf(erd)rig* 
licbgen 'Situl »or Der ^eit bdtte. SDann fo jemanD Die $Bdt 
iicb l>at/ in Dem ill nicbt Die £iebe De$ QSaterS. 1 3fab. */». ij. 

&iefe S(Be(t*£iebe ig ntc^t rein, 

©ie fujjrf auc& nicbt in$ 2ll(gemein, 
(gie fubret nur in$ $?ein, unD SDefn. 
©0 fang Da$ €Q?eiii/ unD 2)ein geeljrf/ 

(go lang bleibt Diefe £ieb betodbtt 

$ommtg ©gen*£ieb, unD @)r $u nafv 
(go ig gletcb $rieg, unD Siufrubr Da. 
3)er naturlicbe £iebesfuncfen, n>efcpen Q343ft nacb Dem galf nidfjt 
gan£ erfofeben lagen, fonDern ftct> in t>ernunfftigen, unD umoer* 
nunpgen (£reatuven> nad> il>rer Sftatur unD gigenfebafft fcften 
unD fpubren (4(1/ folcber toirD auc&DurdjDieunorDentu'djeSfcelt' 
ikbi, intnelen SMngen gefcbtt>dd)t unD untetDrucft* %tf) n>tU nut 
anfubren, Die naturlicbe £tebe unter naturltcfyen SOJenfcben : S)ie 
Durcb Dtefen £iebetffunc£en in ibren ^erfcen entjunDet werben/gdj 
ebelicb mit einanDer ju eerbinben, folc&e, folange Diefernaturlic&e 
£iebe$funcfen jmifeben bepben (Sbeleuten Die Oberbanb behalf, 
fo n)irD foldje £tebe nicbt feerminDert, fonDern ttermebret, fo, Dag 
fte in folcbem 33anD je Idnger )e mebr an einanDer t>erbunDen/ 
mit einanDer leben, $inber jeugen, unD ge aucb mit einanber er* 
ndbren ; Dann Diefetf ig ibnen in Diefer naturd'eben £iebe etnge* 
pgan^et, aucb unter £et>Den; unD Dergleicfeen 9^a^ionen. £)ann 
obne Diefe^, fdttte fi^ Da$ menfebn'ebe ©efcbledjt nic&t in =Orb* 
nung termebren. <£i ig auc^ Den unternunfftigen toaturen erne 
naturlicfre Vitbt eingepflanget, ibre Sunken ju ernd^ren. €bri* 

€ a gen 



62 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X *8 X ® 

(ten (jaben ntd&t nur bag naturltc&e Suncffein, t'bre Jtinbcr $u er* 
$ieben, fonbern fie aucb nadi> ©OtteS <2CilIen in Der gucbt unb 
SSennabnung $um #£rm ju erjteftcn; nacb 2inn>eifung ©Ot* 
teg ernftlicben 33efeblS, alten unD neucn ^ejlamentg/ unD tvo 
folcbe $inber 3ud)t/ au$ bcv^ftcber £iebe bei; <£lternunb (gcbul* 
meiflcrnf nacb ^6rtfilic5>er $jiicbt urn Die <£()« ©OtteS, unD 
ba$ gemeine &effe, an ber Qugenb $u befdrbern tnd <2Bercf 9c* 
ricbtet roivb, fo ttmb e$ aud) nicbt obne @egen bieiben. 3)ann 
Siebc/ gucbt unt) QSermabnung sum £)€rrn) iff jufammen eine 
Drci?facbc (gcbnur> n>elc&c nicbt ieicbt jcrretflct. fiat bet) (Eltern 
unt) @cf)ulmctflcrn tim aufricbttge Q)aterliebe ben Q3organg ju 
ben £inbernr fo i(t ju boffen, bag fotcb^^ roieber bet) ben ^inbern 
cine aufriebfige finblicbe iiebe gebdbren m6ge: $omt fotc&e £ie* 
be beo ben 5vinDern $um Q3orfcbein> fo iff 511 boffen, bag; tt>ann 
fofeber ©aame nicbt erfficft roirb, fonbern im ^BacbStbum blei* 
Ut, bag enblicb eine gefegnete £rnbte erfofgen rcerbe. ^iDill abtt 
bk Srct>f>ctt biefe £iebe ubcrroditigen, nnb mic tt>ilb $wt anfle* 
cftn unb en|unben> fo mug h>ie gemelbt, £iebe> S"cf)t unb Q3er* 
mabnung jum #£rrn jufammen geffocbten/ unb ju diuv tfetigen 
©eijjel ober SicbeS*9vutben gebraucbt tt)erben, fo ift $u boffen/ 
bag bieraug £tebc/ gurcbt unb ©eborfam entfteben nocrDe; aber 
alleS burcb Q5Qttt$ gndbigen ©eegen, «§ulffe unb Q5et)|lanb/ 
bann er mug barum crfucbt roerben/ bag er $um pfianfcen unb 
begieffen; @5ebet;eH geben tt>oUe* 

2ln ©OtteS ©nab; utib milben (geegen; 

3(1 alie^ ganfc unb gar gelegen: 

Unb obne feine »£>ulff unb ©unft/ 

3jt otter $?enfcben t()un umfonfl 

£)er ©eefen>$)?6rber fucbet aUtftit bk toabre aufricbtige £tebe 
|u bejlreiten mit feinev falfcben SMila, bev SOelt^iebe/ Die mit 
ibver £i#egierbe jum ©uten erflorben/ fo, ba$ fte aucb ben na< 
turlicben X!tcb^^Suncfen ber nacb bem gall nod) ubriggeblieben, 
fucbet au^uuSfeben; unb aucb fci;on ber; t)ic(en au^geldfcbet bat/ 
rooraug, unb rooburcb bann alles ungittHcbe 'SUefen folget/ ido^ 
burcb ber Sorn @Ottt$ f auf bm <£ag be^Sorn^gebduffet roor^ 
ben unb nod) ftirb; a(^ iu feben i(l an ber erften 2Be(t: trie 
aud) an ©obom unb @omorra> an 5Datban unb Slbiranv Kit 
aucb an ber 3erft6rung Serufalem/ unb anbern Orten mebr« 
SBa^ »or ^6«rcfe ber ginfcrnig fcfion t>otr (angen 3^iten augge* 

tt)ircfa 



THE SCHUL-OEDNUNG 63 

# )( *? X » 

wfrcfct toorDen, Da&on jeuget Die beiu'ge ©djrifft an Dfefen Or* 
ten: 3d) roill Der ffirfce nacb nur anfttyren, SK6m. i; t>. 18. bi$ 
$u gnDe. 3wn z *$it. *, »♦ 4. $. 6. 3uDd t>. 7* Unt) n>a^ &or 
Der^letc&cn S&ercfe $u unferen Sciten nocb td^fid> auggeubet 
toerDen, folcbetf lebret ung leiDer! Die tdglicbe (Srfabtung. 

<2£atm man eine$ <£briften @tanD unD ^PfJicbt, auf Die resbte 
^Baacjfci?ale leget, aucb in t>m ebefidjen ^flicbten, fo ftnDet ft$ 
Diefer SUtefcblag ricbtig, t)k Zitbt mu§ in alien £>tngen Den 2iu&> 
febfog geben, unD n?o Diefe mangelt, Da roirD aucb i>ief an Der 
Sucbt, an guter Oi'Dnung unD Q3ermabnung jum *&(£rrn, in 
Der $inDer$ucbt bet) (SItern unD ©cbulmeiftern ermanglen* €$ 
bat feine Dvi^ti^Feit in better @cbtifft> Dag Der $tann De$ 
2Beibe$ «£>aupt fep. (£$ i(l aber aucb DiefeS auf De$ SD?anne$ 
(geifenmoblm acbt ju nebmen/ roa$ Der 2Ipo|M ^aufuS Denen 
€bn(tltcben €bemdnnern roiflfenD madjt, roenn er fpricbt: i€or* 
"/ &. *• 3$ lafie eucb aber tt>iflcn/ lieben Q5ruDer, Dag ©>rfe 
jhte ift eineg jegu'eben SD?anne$ $aupt; Der $?ann aber 
ift M SOBeibeS £aupf. 9htn ijc gar tiicbt ju jweiffeln, roann 
Der 9)?ann mit £ebr unD £eben ©nfro feinem £auptfo(get, unD 
Da$ c&tib Dem S0?ann, DieiftnDer ibrenQrfcern unD ©cbufmei* 
(lern untertbdnig fofgen unDgeborfam ftnt> ; fo rm'rD Die aufricb* 
tige £iebe, Den 2htefd)lag am ©eroicbt Cbrifrli^cr ^fliefct refer)* 
licb Darlegen. UnD ateDann bat man Dennocb bep Diefem alien 
nicbts mebr getban, ate roa$ man $u tbun fcbufDig, unD Die@e* 
(igfeit (ft, unD bleibet Dennodj ein un&etDienteg ©naDengefcbencf. 
SeDocb roeil alle <£bvift(icbe ^flicbten (gtaffeto finD, toorauf au<$ 
n>ir, t>on (Staffel $u (Staffer, unfere Stftte unD (gcbritte fefcen 
muffen. ^Gollen roir Diefer ©naDe tbeilbafftig toerDen/ fobatunS 
Der £€9v0v ggfu* aucb DtgfaU^ i>erfd>iebene £ebre unD ®ar* 
nung binterlaffen. Ob nun roobif ein Sftenfcb Dem anDern ©Of* 
teg §>naDe abfagen fan, roeilen Der eine fo mobl ate Der anDerc 
obne ®Qttt$ ©naDe nicbt Ieben fan: @o fiinDet (i'cb Docb in Der 
£ebreCbrifti Diefer auSDrucflicbe UnterfcbeiD; jwifeben Dem tM* 
ricbten SD?ann, unD tb^ricbten 3"«9frauen; unD jroifc^en Dem 
flugen $?ann; unD fiugen 3""9f^uen; jroifeben Dem treuen 
unD untreuen ^necbt; (age jroifeben Diefen bei)Den, pnDet (1'cb 
ungleicbe Slrbeit, unD «ucb ungleicbe 55eIobnung Der ©naDe unD 
UngnaDe. ©0 iff e^ ;a Demnacb roeit befier, Dag man Iter) bier in 
Sett Der ©naDen aut Den ^eg begibt, auf roelcfrem <&£>tt feine 

C ; ©nab* 



64 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X so x • 

©nabe iwWffen tint) $ugefa$t/ ate frag man eg barauf anfom* 
wen faffe/ auf ©Otteg ©nabe $u funbigen/ tint) in t>er ©unbe 
$u befcarrett/ auf bag Die ©nabe bc|to mdcbtiger roerbe/ bejtefje 
9v6m. 6/ »• i* 2. 2f(l nun toie gemelbt eineg Cbn'ften (gtanb 
c(fo befcbaffen/ toie id& aud)befenne/ unb glaube, bag Cbntfug 
tft bag #aupt feiner©emeine/ unbalfo au$ emegjealtcbentDJan* 
tte6 «&aupt/foftobet fid) folcbeg jfa »on felbften/ bag eg beg$?an* 
nee fdnilbige $flicbt fetv bag cr bagjem'se/tvag il)n fein £aupt, 
•&^rr ; unb Stteifter felbften fcbvct/ er aud) Dag SOBeib folcbeg 
Icbre, tvcruber er jum «£>aupt ge|Met tfb unb fo bann bepbe 
CbrifHicbe. €beleute tbrer £inbev #et)l unb @eli$feit t>on #cr* 
$en fud)etv fo nwben fie auc& alle ©ebotte/ Die ibnen bev #£n: 
$tbkkt $u «&etfcen nebmen/ unb fie ibven 5?inbern einfcbdrffen, 
tiacfl ®OM$ 35efef)l fo ung fcbvifftlid) bintertaffen/ 1 05- SDtof. 

18/ ». 19. f $M 6/ 1). 6.7. % 78/ ». 1.2.3.4. £pl).6/ D.4- 

goloff. 3, t). 21. unb anbem Often meijv. 

<2Bag nun ber (£ltern ibre *))jlid>t ibrer £inber tw^en in fid) 
ftdlt: £ben bagjentge j^b aucbt>oneinem ©c^ufmetfler erfor* 
Uxtr beme folcfye Sugenb uberaeben unb amwtrauet ift. Unb ob 
man ftof)l fo t>xei alg jum #aupt gefleliet ivivb ubev folcbe 3u* 
genb/ fo if! aud) bigfalg Cfyviflug unfer #aupt/ nad) beffen £5e# 
feblmit unfeve #augba(t una, mit DevSugenb veaieren unb fubven 
foUen. #atnunbei'£(m'3SfugDa$umabl/alg ev$uungaufbiefe 
SSBelt gefommen/ ju fud)en unb fefig $u mad;en/ roag Mlobren 
tt>ar/ tk $inbev fo fonDetftc^ augftebe ju fief) geruffen, fie gefca* 
net unb aug £iebe geberget/- unb ibnen bag #immelveid) wbeif* 
fen: ate $u fefyen $?ai'C. ?/ 1>. $£♦ 37- @o fan eg ung nicbtroobl 
ablaujfen/ roann toiv ty'vaunifcb mit ibnen umgeben; ttieftobl pe 
muffen in ber gucbt unb Q5evmal)nung.jum «§^rrn erjosenttjer* 
ben. (Srn^dsen n?ir fernev mit (£vnff unb 5inbacbt, «>ie bev £m 
S€fug bajumabi feine Sunaev gcfebref/ it)e(^eg ung alien; bie 
ivir ung Cbn'flen nennen^ juv &bre fcbrifftlicbbintet'laffenmorben; 
alg im €t)angelio <S. SD?attb. 18 Cap: t)om iten big ^ t). fol* 
genber maffen ju lefen : 3" bevfelbi^en ©tunbe traten Die 3un# 
ger ju 3Sfw/ u "b fpvacben: 5S5ev ifl bocb bet gr6fiejle im §im# 
melreicfy? 3€fug rieff ein ^inb ju ft'cb/ unb flellete eg mitten un« 
ter fie/ unb fprad): ^arlicb/ id) fage eu^>: €g fet) bann/ bag 
ibr umfcbret/ unD rcerbet n>ic bie ^inDer/ fo merbet ibr nicbt in 
bag £imme(reicb fommen. ^23er f5c& nun felbft ermebnget/ roie 

big 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 65 



• X >i X • 

b\$ £inb/ ber ift ber grofieffe im £imme(retdj, Unb tvcr ctnfof* 
d>e£ $int> aufnimmt in meinem Sftamen, ber m'mmt mid) auf. 
QBer aberdrgert biefer geringffen einen/ t>fe an mid) glauben, bem 
n>dre beffeiv i>a$ tin €D?ui>(ftein an feinen £ate gebdnget rourbe/ 
unb erfduffet nmrbe im 5D?eer/ ba e$ am ticftflen ift. 2lu^ m 
gefubrren gotten be* «&<grra 3@u> fraben' n>ir aCe genug $u 
erlcvnen: .@o fern tuir tiooUen ins -gimmeireicf) fommen/ unb e* 
ttig gfutffeltg fe^rt/ burffen \w un£ nid)t einbilben bag biefeS 
ber 'SBeg barju fep/ tvann nw.bie $inber feinbfeiig anfebem obet 
ft>of>( gar barum fcbelren unb bejtraffem wann fie un$ in 2Bor* 
ten unb ©ebdrben nid)f ©re genua geben, nod) gomplimenten 
genua, macfeen Wtmen. 2lcb nein! big ijt ber 2[Beq ntdi>t sum 
•gimmefreicfe. 2Dann mx abev wn/olcber eigenen gbrfucbt urn* 
febven, nacb Cfjrijti £ebi> unb njerben fo niebrig rote t>te $inber; 
ba« befdrbertnidjt nut sum !Keicb ©OfceSr fonbern, e$ bringet 
auc&eine finblicbe ©cmcinfc&afft,- w(cbeS alCe^ mel mebr 9?u£en 
febaffen fan, ate alle H$ bocbbalren t>on fld) felbjb £>ann n>er 
ftd> bier felbft erb^bet/ benw'rb erniebriget roerben ; unb wx ftcf) 
felbft erniebriget/ ber roirb erboljec roerben. 

<£$ ftdren bieruber nod) febr t>iele ©genfefrafften anjufuftwtt'/ 

bie rbeite nu^u'eb unb befikberlid) tt)dren £iebe $u jjflankem no* 

burcb bie (£I)W ©OtteS wmebref, unb bag genuine SSefte be* 

ftrbert wrben fonte: 2(uc() todren fciefe bergfeidjen ©genfd&af* 

ten.bet)jufugen/ mefebe gerabe t>a$ ©egentbetl pflan^en/ baburd) 

bkt €bre @43fte$ oerminberf/ unb t>k wrborbene eigene (Sbre 

wrmebret ruirb/ sum @$aben unb 9?ad)tbeit t>e^ gemeinen 35e* 

ften: 3»cb will e$ aber megen biefem ^unc&en babet; benxnben/ 

unb anberen ju fernerer *prufung uberfaffen. 

Hun foigett n$cb ethefoe nu^itcbe Scbul^ilebmtcjett/ 

wcld)c nidyt mfr> fonbern t>em etm'gen <£><D3X uttfc 

fetttem XPort $u iZtyxen/ ttacb fcbultuger pfltcfct mtr f 

urtbmetner rtitt>ertr4utert ^ugertO/itt SLc\)V untile* 

bun$ $u bxin$m rotcb verpfltcbtet pttbe* 

Srjlli^ bienet $ur ^acftricbt/ bag in tvdbrenber $t\t icb ftier 

tm Sanbe @djul gebalten^ i^ j^inber Don i>erfcr)iebenen 9ie(igi* 

cn^ ^et?nung unb Uebung sur @c^ul befommen, fo/ ba$ icb fie 

nicbt in einerletf Sorm be^ ^atecbifmi unterriebfen Fonnen, aucr; 

ijl mir folcbe^ ni$t mit eingebunben tworben/ fonbern rnann (te 

im lefen/ fc^reiben unb bergfeicben @cbu(41ebungen tvobl be^ 

£ 4 rodbrt, 



66 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHEE DOCK 
® X 3* X • 

ttdfrrt/ fo ftflBen tk gftmuu £aug Die 5?inber ben <£ated)ifmuS 
felbtfen gefebrt; mir i|? aucbim ©efang/ faegen £ieber unb tyfai* 
men $u ftngen gret)beit gelajfen roorben: 2llfo t>abe id) fccwnaucl) 
£ieber unb ^falmen mit ibnen gefungen/ tvtikn fcon bct)ben rbei* 
fen, al$ nebmlid)/ son geiffreicften £iebern unb $falmen/ t>er £♦ 
©eift ber 3£ertfmeifrer. 

sfteben b.iefer ttebung 6abe ^earbettef/ urn eg babtn $u brin* 
gen/ bag ibnen ba^ neue ^(lament; mit Capttel fucjen unD 
auffd&fagen re$t befant roerben mo^e/ tveld)e$ audj ttobl bet) t'b* 
lien »on flatten gegancjen/ fa; bag rcann man jitr Seljre unb €r* 
ftabnung einen @prud> anfubren ttnli, |te Don fefbflen/ obne 2in* 
flwfuna $ewelbten ©prucr) auffcblagcn unb fefen* 

Site ibnen nun btefe %bu> erofinet/ fobabe getrac&tet Jte bftftitt 
$U brin&en/ ba$ fte bie$5lum(ein in biefem eblen ^3atat)ic^ Q5ar* 
ten •&, @$vtfft/ nidjt nut* roegen ibrer @dj6nbeit/ fonbern aud> 
ivegen tyres lieblidjen @5erud)$ reidjlicb fammlen molten/ roo$u 
id) ibnen; fo.&iel nad) meinem gertn^cn Q&rmogen bebufjflid) 
fetjnfdnnen/ Slnroeifunjj aegebetv fteicbe einen ©erud) be$£eben£ 
pro &ben in fict> baben/ roenn man jte fo gebraud?et/ n>ie j?e 
geoffenbabret ftnb/ nad) t'brer tfrafft unb SEBiircfung. ^ucb bin* 
gegen; njelcbe einen ©erud) beg <£obe$ $um %oDe/ in itd)baben> 
tag fte fcon bcpDen ^icjenfefcafften eine grfdntnig auS$. (E5d)rift 
fiaben; unb feben m6cbten. SDann gieiebrote Die %9abrb.eit i>a$ 
$eben in peb bat/ unb ein ©erucb be$ &ben$ sumSeben ill, rcann 
man ber ^BabiDeit fofget; alfo irn ©egentbeil, bat bte Sugen 
ten <£ob in ft'cb/ unb i(t ein ©erud) beS %obe£ jum c £obe, unD 
fubret $um <Sob wann man ber £ucjen fofejet: £)ann ber Sugner 
Q:bei(unb £obn i(t ber feurige^fubt/ wekbe^ t|r ber anbere^ob^ 
43ffenb. ii/ ». 8. 5Dic ^OBabvbeit abeiv roer ibr fofeet/ madjet 
t>tcrt>on fret?/ be|t'ef)e l)ieruber im €t>ancj. 30I). Cap. 8/ » : ji.3^ 

33*34. 3S* 

" ^Sie nun gemelbte ^ehfebajften einanber ^un?iber pnb/ fc/ 
tag bic eine ba^ £eben mit ltd)/ unb jum £eben fubret/ unb tk 
flnbere ben %ob in g'd) bat/ unb jum ^:obe fubret; alfo »erW(t 
e$ (tc^ aucb srotfc&en ber £iebe/ unb itym €i9enfcba(ften ; folcfce 
i(i gleicbfall^ ein ©erucb beg &ben$/ sum Seben/ «)er tljr folaet: 
Slber -Sag/ ^eib unb gcinbfcbafft/ baben einen Q3eru* t>e$ %o* 
t)es jum ^:obe in ftcb/ unb fubren jum ^obe unb Q}erberben roer 
ijnen folgets bann fie finb W QjeQentfeeil/ unb Der £iebe autviber. 

5l(fo 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 67 

W X 53 X « 

5l(fo if! e$ ctuc^ mit ©fouben unb Unglauben, fertrcr jft>ffd&en 
fBatmberjigfeit unb Unbarmbe'rfcigFeit, jmtfcf)cn @5erec&tigFeit 
unb Ungerecprigfeir, jfttfcben $eufd)beit unt) Unfeufc&b^ jwi* 
fcben £>cmutb unt) £ocbmufb» ©umma : Mt g6ftu'd)e ©gen* 
fcbafften babcn &a^ Seben in fid)/ unb fuf>ren auci> eincn @5erud) 
5um emtgen Seben mit (tcfj, tuer ficb burcb t'bre $rafft unt) 3£ur* 
cfung ttoill beavbetten unb regieren faffed &et Fommt baburd) jur 
SBiebergeburr, unb auS bem <£ob tn$ £eben. #ingegen ofttt un* 
gfatttdje 3Sefcn nebft beven ©genfcbaften ; gcben einen @5eruc& 
De$ <£obe$ bon j?c&, eincn t6btlicben ©erucb be$ S'obeS sum ^o? 
be unb QSerbammnif?, n>er ibnen bi$ in Den %ob fofger. 

9U$*tynerrhuti biefeS aucb'jum <$W evoflnet: <So fcaben fie 
(Spruce i>on biefer ober jencr ©genfcbafft, fo ; tvie eg an fit be* 
gefjret wb auffucben muffen: ®e(c^ev bann ben evflen (gprud) 
»on fotdjer ©genfdjafft bat/ fo an fte gefovbert roorben, ber trit 
fterauS unb ftrecfef bie «§anb aus, unb roic fte @prud?e son fol* 
xber gigenfiaft finberv fo tretcn fte eirteg nacb bem anbevn ber* 
t)Oi> unb (Men fi'cb in tint dtwU' tint$ binter $>a$ anbcre> bie 
$naben befonbevs, unb bie $?dgblein befonberS : 3)iefe$ conti* 
nuiret bis fte atte ©pruche fcaben. SIBbann iitjtt ber erfte feinett 
©prucfr: Sinbctftcb$aber,bag femanb in ber tfifyty iff, ber ben 
©prucb aucb bdtte/ bet gelefen ifr fo friff t$ auS ber fKcpbe utti) 
fucijet (tcb einen anbertv unb tntt aitbam ttieber $u unterft in 
bie 9vet)be. &iefe$ gefebiebetbarunv bag bie eblen $ontgbfamett 
alle befucbt tverben : $ud) ftnbet t$ fid) »on felbtfen, i>a$ jemefyr 
©prucbe son folcber ©genfebafft fo an fit begebvt tvovben t>or* 
fommen/ je mebr t>it ®abrbeit be^'enigen beutu'eber an %acj 
Fommf, fo, bag tin ©prudj ben anbevn nicl)r nur befejfiget/ fon* 
bem aud> erfldbvet unb auSlegct. ^Rad) gefebebenem (efen ber 
©pvuebe ,mxbtn etlicbe Sragen an fit gejMt, tvefebe biefelbe t>oh 
felbften erfldven ; bann iwrDcu fte tt?ieber auf gemelbte <Spruc6e 
guvuef geroiefen^ unb nocbma5(S wteber^ofet; i>a bann inSgemcitt 
terfebiebene 2lnmercfungen fcorfommen/ unb aug angefubrten 
©pvueben f for Dor Siugen (iegen/ tfteite jur £ebre; tfyite jum 
^:vo(! unb ©trircfung beS @laubenS/ tl^ett^ $ur &txaftt unt) 
SCBarnung^ 

gerner roann fte t^obf geubt im fwOen; fo (dgt man es juroef* 
(en bet) ibnen auf bie $robe fommen/ unb evinnett fte: S>ag t)a^ 
dufferfi$e©uc6enan fi'cb felbft nicbt wmtfiify fer?/ /eboc&fotten 

€ r fte 



68 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X 34 X • 

fle fbtcfyeg auty auf eine anbere ©efraff probieren/ fie folfen nun 
flanfc fttUe ft^en unb auf .tyre ©ebancfen Sltyfimg geben, unb at* 
feeitle ©ebancfen fttyren laffen; aber Den crften (Sprucfj t)ev ty* 
nen in$ ©emutfye fame/ ben (often (te auffutyen unt) lefem S5er> 
fciefer Uebung babeidj mid) offftnoftW fonberlicfj Mtvunbern muf* 
fen/ twVfkf) ©Oft/ au$ bem ?Q?unbe ber ttnmunbigen unb ©dug* 
tinge ein £ob jugeritytet bat/ urn t)m geinb unb ben Dvatygieri* 
gen $u tterfilgen. 

iftatybem eg nun ©OfteS ernftlityer Q5efefjl tft/ b$ man ben 
SffnDtttt&ie ©ebotfe/ bieerung geboffen/ aucb etnftydrffen/ unb 
iuefelben in bergutyt unb QSermatynung jum#Srm evjieljenfott, 
fo (tnben ft'ty in «£♦ (Styrift fo t)iel ftyone unb berrlitye geug* 
ruffe t)cn bem einigen ©Oft/ unb beffcn gfafu'tyen ©genftyafffen/ 
tt>ie ftc& ©Off burty feine Sillmatyf unb burty t)k (Stydpffung 
(Mer&ingegeoffenbafjref/ auty roieer alle £)inge burty ba^9S3ort 
fciner 5?rafft unb burty ben ©eijl feineS $?unbeS/ burty feine un* 
erfprftylicbe SJlfmatyt unb SBetebeit erfcfcajfen unb gemadjt bat. 
£>ie £. ©tyriftgibt ferner Seugnig, tvie burty be$ 'teufeteSfteib 
ber 4ob/ unb S*a$ ^eitd'tye unb emige Q&rberben in $>k SHMt 
f ommen/ unb n?te ba$ menftylitye ©efcfjlecDf/ burty bes (Satan* 
2ifl/ in ©unbe unb Ueberrretung gefalfen/ unb bag burty biefe 
Hebevtretung/ bte ©unbe in bie 2Belf fommen/ unb buvty t>tc 
i^unbe ber $;ob ; unb i(t alfo ber %ob ju alien SJttenftyen burty* 
Sebrungen/ bien>et£ (te alle gefunbiget batcen- 

£)ie fyeiltge ©tyriff unternwfef un$ fernetv t>$ ©Off naty 
feiner groffen Q$armf)er£igfeif/ bem gefatfenen menftylicben ©e* 
ftyletyt t>k SSerfyeiffung gerfyan/ $>a§ betf ^BetbeS^aamen ber 
©tylangen ben $opf jertrefen folle/ t)mit pe Weber au$ bem 
gluty unb QSerbammnif folfen erlofef voerbett/ burty tim erwge 
Srlofung. 3)on biefem alien finbet man in £. ©cbrift t>ie( 
fr6(llitye 3}erf)eiffungen/ fo$u ben sSdferngefcOetyen beftyrieben/ 
roeltye Don geit ju geit/ burty ^ofen unb t)k ^ropfyefen/ fbetl^ 
^urty giguren unb QSorbifber/ t^eil^ burty ©efi'tyfe unb ^Beif* 
fagung bejldffiget tvorben; n)Ct)oninr;ci(iger(Sc^riff alfen^efla* 
menf^fe^rttielegeugniflTe »orl?anben. gerner/ roie foltye QSer* 
fyeiffung t>urc5 ^f)ri|!um/ al^ ben t)er()eiffenen^Beibe^^aamen 
jur erfullten 3eif/ bur^ 2Burcfung be^ ^&. ©ei(!e^/ biefe^/ naty 
menftylityer ^Sernunfff unbegreifflitye g6ftlitye ©el)eimnig* < 2Bercf 
bet €v(6fungf burc& C^n'fli ©efcurf/ £e()r unb teben/ £eiben/ 

©ferben/ 



THE SCHUL-OEDNUNG 69 

• X if X • 

©ferbetv 2(uferflebung tint) «&immctfabvt ins SBercf gericbtef> 
unt> aollbracbt n>orben iff; »on biefem alien gibtuns biebeilige 
©cbrift neucn •fceftaments grunblicben Q>eticbt: 3lud) finbet ft$ 
barinnen auSfubrfidje 9?ad)ricbt/ note man folcber (Srlofung tbeil* 
baffig tverben fan. 2lud) n>te ein Cbnft (einen Q5eruf^ n>oju er 
bcruffen ifb burcb Uebung ber ©ottfeligfeit in ^l?viftft^en %u* 
genben/ i>on <®faffei ju ©tajfef; feme %ritte unb ©cbritfe fefcett 
mug/ jum tdglid^cn 2[Bad)$tbum unb gunebmen in Sef>r unbSe* 
ben/ nacb t)em (Sbenbilbe beffcn/ bet* t'bn gefdjaffen unb erfofet 
bat. 3d) (age: Q3on biefem alien/ lebvet unb unternxifet un$ bie 
£ebve Gibrifti unb feiner Sipoffel aitffubrficb im neuen ^eftoment. 
$?un folte Don jeglidjer Uebung inSbefonbere/ nacb obigem 3n* 
bait fcbriffrlid) aufgefefct toevben t true e$ bet) ber Qugenb $ur£ebt 
unb (Srmabmmg gebrducblid)/ ba$ fte ©prucbe t>on biefev ober 
jener £igenfcbafc/ twees an fte begebvt tvivb auffucbeti/ unb nacb* 
bem ein jeber feinen ©prucb gelefen/ rccrben aucb gragen an fte 
getban/ unb jebe grage rnirb mit einem ©prud) beantroortet/ ba 
bann em ©prucb ben anbern tbeils befeftiget/ tbeilS erf idret unb 
autflcget. ©age/ *>on folcbem alien fcbrifftlidjen SSertcfrt ju er* 
tbeilen/ tt>te e$ an micb begebret roorben/ folte eine groffe < 2Bcit? 
(duffigfeit in ftcb begreiffen * S&eilen aber bie £♦ ©cbrift alle* 
in fid) bat unb bdlt/ fo roirb e$ alba ju fudjcn unb aucb $u fjinbett 
fetrn,- unb ftjeilen in (£bvifto 3£fu alle ©cbdfce t>er <2Bei$beit 
unb bev <Sxf dntnif? aerborgen liegen/ rcoson unS bie $. ©d)rift 
geftijfen Q3ericbt gibt; fo wife icb micb/ unb anbere 9ftenfcben 
t)al)in $u fucben/ in ber «&oflfnung/ fo n>iv* »on gan|em#er&>nfu* 
(Sen/ baftvir aucb ftnben rcerben. Severn. 2?, t>. 13. Oftartb. 7* 
t). 7. S)te <2£elt fucbet ja mit £rnfl unb 33egierbe nacb €br 
unb @5uf/ nacb ©c(t>^ ©fiber/ £belgefteinen unb bergieicben 
©cbdf^en/ bie bet? ber 2Belt in groffen ^Burben unb <2Bertb ge* 
baltetrwerbetv ivelcbebocb sergdnglicb/unbgegen t>ic un^ergdng^ 
licbe ©cbd|e/ bk \m$ ©Oft in feinem 3£ort anerbietet/ gar 
nicbf jit Devgleicben fi'nb* ^2Bie nun ba$ fucben iff/ fo tvirb aucb 
baSfmben fet^n. ©ucbet man bk %Bdt in 2lugen*Suff/ glei* 
fcbeS €uft unb boffdrtigem &btn, man ftirb fte fo ftnben/ man 
ftirbaucb mitan ber^Belt^tbeil nebmen/ unt> enblidj aucb mit 
ber ^elt ^beil unb £obn ba»or pnben* ££er a ^ el . @J3 tt m $ 
S>a$ eroige itbtn fucbet/ unb Cbvifti guf (lapflfen getreulicb nacb^ 
folget/ ber ttirb aucl; finben unb nicbt aergeblicb fucben; fein fu* 

d)en 



70 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



® X 3* x # 
cf)entt>trt> ifym nfcbt un^efunDen/ audj>ntcl)t unbefofjnet bleiben. 
30^. 12, t>. z*. C. I4f fc- 3. c. 17/ »• *4- 

<hii ^ettidufTigf eit su t>ermeit>en bertc&fc mie fdjon gemelbt : 
Sag ic& tviefe nufclicbe unb erbaulid)e Uebungen unb Slnroeifung 
gur ©ottfeliqf eit nicbt umtfdnblid) befcfyreiben fan j 2>on@5lau* 
be/ £iebe/ *§offnung, ©ebult (gumma/ alle Uebungen ber %u* 
genb/ t>k in £. @d)rift jut ©otffeligfeit annjctfcn, roie folcbe 
tiu^ jur £ebre> $ur ©ttajfe, u. b. 9. f^tnterfaffett/ unb aufgejeid)* 
net fteben : ©age foldje/ n>ie (te son jebem inSbefonbere/ auf ge* 
jDiffe geft/ mit bev 3ugenb fcorgenommcn roevben fallen/ son alle 
t>em allbter augfufyrlidjen Q5ericl)t $u t^un/ folre julang fallen. 

3>ebodj/ twilen ber roafyre feligmacbenbe ©laube afle$ ergreif* 
fen mug/ roa$ $um Seben unb g6ttlid)en <2Banbel bienet/ unb ja 
rrid)t$ gulfigers bet) unb in 3£fu £&riffo ifo ate bev ©laube ber 
tmrd) ftebe rf)dtig fid) beroeifef, berrcabre ©laube an t>m .ggrrn 
3£fum, bem ifl »on bem £©rrn 3£fu felbjt ber @cl)ilb gege* 
ben/ bag er Gfyrifti SEDaffentrdger tjl/ nidjt nur bit 2Belt ju u* 
berwtnben/ alS ju feben 1 3ol>* 11 ». r . £. fonbern aucl) auSju* 
fdfcben alle feurige ^fetle be$ 586fen>id>ts, rote rcir lefen Bnnen 
<?pb. 6 f t>. i£. ^Bill bemnad) nur mtr unb anbern #\t 2luf* 
munterung unb (Starching be$ ©laubenfy albier ern>as twn ben 
©genfdjafften be$ ©laubenS bet)fugen/ fo wet icb i>or biefe 3eit/ 
mtf) bem <$Jaag metner gertngen ©aben/ burd) be$ «§£0v3v^ 
©nabe ju tbun t>ermag» 3)ann obne feine ©nabe unb @un|t/ 
iff unfer <£bun/ unb alleS umfonfh 2Beilen ici> biefeS bet) mtr 
fo bepnte/ fo finbe midj audjtterpfltcbter; biefes ein^fg unb at* 
iein sum ^reig <&£>ttt$ f unb jur €bre feineS ft'eifigen 9?amen^ 
auftufefcen. feann niemanb/ al^ bem lieben.^O^ baben rotr 
«g ju bancfen/ bag er un^ in btefer ftnjlern 9&elt/ bigger fetnbei* 
ligeS <2£ovt f ai$ tinZiftt auf bem Seudbfer f>at fleben lafifen>tt>ann 
nur unfere guffe auf ben 2Beg be^ grieben^ geridjtet (t'nb; fo 
fdnnenwir aucfe mit 5Dat)ib fagen : $f. 119/^ sof. ^OiOv 
t)ein 223ort iff rneine^ gujfe^ £eud)te/ unb cm £ic&t auf meinem 
SOege. 

©Ott abttr ber ein £id)t ijl/t'n roelc^em Feine ginflernig/ tvolle 
un^ fein Ziftt unb feine ^abrbeit fenben/ bag (te un^ (eiten unb 
fubren/ burc^ biefe^ pn(lere ^bfli unb ©d>arten,be$ ^obe^/ su 
feinem beiligen ^erg/ unb ju feiner S&obnung; t>ag roir au^ 
in SCaWjeit mit ®a»ib fagen f^nnen : W. s^ 3» Wnem ft*t 

feften 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 71 

• X 37 X • 

feljen n>ir bte £id)f. O! Dag n>ir mit @Haubeng*2lugen Die* 
fe$ SicF>t nicl)t nur befd^aueri/ fonDern aucb in fo(cj)em St'cbt roan* 
Deln, unD DaDurd) enDlicb alie 50?ad>t t>er ginfternig uberrcinDeti 
unD beftegen mdcbfen; rooju icb t>on ^erfcen tonmfcfye unt) bitten 
urn $ulffe unD QMaubcn$'$rajft au$ t>er #ob e r 2lmen* 

Sttttge jfcageit *w Rmbet/ n?oburd> it>nett bic 

^urcbt <S3Q>ttcs, fcurcb 2tiifftl?rtfttg wler vortrcflu* 
cfcer Qcfcrift Qpmcfce be^nt gcmacfct wrirfc. 

gr. i. 2Ba$i|I i>er@lau&e? 
21. (Sine geftifie gu&erftcbt Ded/ Da$ man boffef, unb ni$£ 
Stoeifctt an Dem> Da$ mannicbt jtcbef. &x. u f i. 
gr. 2. s&orau* fommt t>er ®faube? 
2J. (go fomt Dcv @5laube m$ Der ^reDigt; ba^ prebigen a* 
bet Durd; Da$ SBort ®Otu$. 9Wm. io, 16. 
gr. 3. 3um Qlnfang be$ ©laubettf w tommm, auf n>a$ »or eitim 

£ef>rmetfier ()atman su fet>en ? 
% 2luf 3£fum, Den 2infdnger unD QSollenDer be$ ©(aubenS. 
<£br. ia> *. 

§r. 4. %&a$ rourcfet t>er ©laube wann er recfttfcftaffen ijl? 
21. UnD tt>ififet/ Dag euer @5laube ; fo er recbtfcfcajfen ((1/ @5e# 
bult rourdet. 3ac. 1, 3. 

$r. 5. 3SB<tf muj? eitt §f)rifl in feinem ©laufien tmrreidjen? 
21. @o twnDet alien euren gleig Dvan; tinD reicbet Dar in m* 
tern ©lauben ^ugenD, unD in Der ^ugenD ^3efd?etDcni>eif/ unD 
in Der 35efd)eiDenI)eit SOjdffigFeit; unD in Der $?dj]$Feit ©eDult, 
unD in Der ©eDutt ©ottfetigfeit, unD in Der ©ottfetigfeit bvu* 
t>ev(tcf>e £tebe/ unD in Der bruDeriicben £iebe gemeine £iebe- z^et. 

i/ r. t. 7* 

gr. 6. 2Ber aber fotc^e^ nifyt tyat barjureicften? 
% S)er ift bd'nD/ unD tappet mit Der $anD/ unD tergiffet Die 
SXeinigung feiner twrigen ©unDen. z tytu if ?. 

gr. 7. .San man ntc^t aud) ofyne ©fauben ©0££ aefaffen? 
21. Obne ©lauben i^ unm5glicb &Ott ju gefalleh : 5>ann 
tver su ©43^ fommen n?iK; Der mug glauben, Dag er feiv 
unD Denen Die tf>n fucben, ein ^erae(ter fepn werDe. (£br. 1 i f 6* 
gr. 8. 2Bie Fojllicfe ijl e^bemnacft urn ben retyten ©lauben? 
21* 2Iuf Dag euer (^51aube recbtfebaffen unD Dtel fo(liid)cr er* 
funDen twrDe, Denn Da^ oergdngii^e Q)o(D; Dag DurcbS geueif 
bemdbret tvirD; «. i ^et. i/ 7. S^ 5» 



72 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X 33 )( ® 

Sr. 9. 5Ba$ wr trofitoingt c$ gtaubigen ©eelen, manti jic im ©latf 

benroanbeta? 
51* 2Bir, Die n>ir gfauben/ geben in Die SXube, :c. (Sbr. 4/ 3. 

gr. 10. 2Ba$ doc SBerftc&trung bringt el ben Unglaubigen? 
2(. ^SBeld^cn favour eraber, Dag fie ntc^t ju feiner Ovulje fom* 
men fo(fen ; Den Ungfaubigen ? UnD n>ir febcu/ Dag jte nicbt fya* 
ben f6nnen J>inein fommen/ urn DeS Unglaubeng tvillen* £br. 3f 

ig. I?. 

gr. n. 5Borju roerben glaubige @eelen bur(& ben ©lauben beroa&ret? 
51. gudv Die ibr au$ ©Otteg 9ttad)t Durcb Den ®lauben be* 
roabret roerDet $ur ©elfefeif, n>elcbe jubereitet ijr. Dag fte often* 
barfterbe ju Der (e^ten £tit. i *}3et. 1, 5. beftebe t>. 11. 
gr. ra. Surd) welc^e (Jigenfcbafft erlangt man bie it>af>re ©erecbtigfeit ? 
31. ©0 Du mit Deinem $?unDe befennejl 3<£fum, Dag er Der 
•&grr for unD glaubeft in Deinem £erfcen, Dag il>n ©Ol^ 
Don Den ^oDten aufemedet bat/ fo n>irjt Du felig. 2)ann fo 
man t>on #erfcen afaubefr fo nji'rD man gerecbtr unD fo man mit 
Dem 9)?unbe befennet/ fo roirD man fetig. SDann bk ©cbrift 
fpridjt: '•SBeran il)n cjfaubef/ n>irt> nicbt ju fcfjanDen. SK6m. 
10/ 9. 10. n» 
gr. ij. @o man burcb ben ©lau&en on e&riftum 3Sfnm, foldjer ©fc 
rccfefigfeit tfjeilbaftig roirb, one flebt el bann jroifc&en @D££ 
unb fola)en ©eelen? 
% sftun ttn'r Dann finD cjerecbt rooiDen Durd) Den @5(auben/ 
fo baben wit grtebe mit @43tt, Durd) unfern #(£rrn 3<£fttm 
CEbriftum. fK6m. f / 1. 

gr. 14. 3fl 3« bicfec ©ercdjt igfeit ju gelangen, bet; 6loffe 3ftunbs©te 
ben, oljne gruftte, ©eiil unb Seben genug? 
% @(eic5n>ie Der Hb obne @5eijt toDt ijlf a(fo aud) Der (3hu* 
be ofcne SBercfe ifl toDt. 3ac. 1, 2.6. 
gr. it. SEBorinnin betfebet bie JDaupt* ©umtna afler ©ebone, tint) roa* 

i|l il)re eigenfebafft? 
21. Sie $aupt* (gumma DeS ©ebotts iff: it'ebe t>on reinem 
$er£en, unD t>on gutem ©enjiffen/ unD &on ungefarbtem @(au* 
ben. 1 <£im. 1, r, 
gr. 16. gBann «^«r b«* ^«r^ nic^t rea)tfcf)affen/ fo ijl ber ©laubs ge* 
forbt: ^>at man in fok&em Bujlanbe au^ ^beil an fel^en 
SBerbeiflfungen? 
% ^u ttM'r(ttt>eDer 'Sfjetl nod) SlnfaU ^abett an Diefem^Bort; 
Dann Dein »&er| ifl nicbt rec&tfc&affen t>or @43^. H)arum tbue 
S3wfie fur Diefe Deine ^Sogl?eit; m\> bittt Q)Ott f ob Dir $>er$ebeu 

noerDen 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 73 

» X 39 X « 

rcerDen m6d)te bcr.^ucf DeineS«&er6en$.2(p6ft. ®efdj.8' ai * z *» 
gr. 17. Bic #. @cforifft gibe BeugniS/ Da§ ©imon Dec Bcmtem, t»o»on 

gcmelbt, aucf) glaubig roorben? 

, 21. *£)u gjaubefl, Dag ein einiger 05Ott if!: SDu tfjufl rooljl 

Daran; Die %eufel glaubens ciucfo/unD jittern. 3ac. 2, 19. feq. 

gr. 18. 2Bel<0cr ©latibe i|l gultig 001* ©Otf, in Gbrifio 3®f«? 

21. Slbrabam t)tt 05Ott geglaubt/ unD t$ ifi i(?m geredjnet 

jur ©erec&tigfeit. @af. 3/ £♦ 

gr. 19. !XSie foa man after fftun, roann man ne$ bet> ilcf> befinbet, bag 

man nod) in feinem »crloj)rnen ©unbenfianb gefangen liegct? 

% 2)ie S*it ift erfuliet, unD DaS Ovcic{> ®=0rte3 i\l berbep 

fommen : ^but 35uf[e, unb glaubet an Da$ ©xmgefium. 50?arc» 

i/ if. ?D?atrf>. $f 2.. c.4/ 17- 

gr. 20. SEBaS oerfunDiget Dann ba£ Soangelimn ben armen bufifertigm 

©unbern? 
21. 2Ufo f>ae ©O^ Die <2Belt getieber, Dog er fcinen dna> 
bowmen (E5obn gab, auf Dag dile> Die an ibn glauben, nicbt t>er* 
lobren tverben/ fonDern Das en>ige £eben baben. 3<>b- h * 6 . lieg 
aucf) £uc. iy gan£. 1 ^im- 1. if. £uc. 19/ 10, $?attb- 18/ «• 
$?atrb. ii, 28. 2?. 30. 

gr. 21. ginben fid) in £. 6cf)rifft no* mebr Bcugniffc ba|? &i< buffcrti* 
gen ©unber, bnrd) ben ©lauben an (Sbriihim S^fnti/ SBscge6ung 

ber ©tinben empfaben folten? 
21. 93on Diefem je.ugen allc spropbetcn, Dag Durcf> feinen 9?a« 
men alle. Die an ibn glauben, SSergebung ber ©unDen empfa* 
ben fallen* 2lpofl ©efeb- 10, 4? ♦ 

gr. 22. ©e&er biefe SBcrbciffiing aae roabre glanbige bu^ferttgc ©unbec 
an, ober ill nod) etn iinterfc&eib ? 
21. <£$ iff bk fein Untevfd>ei£> unter 3uDen unD ©rfcc&en : (£$ 
if! atter jumal cin .ggSKDJ/ reicb uber alfe, Die if>n anruffen. 
£)ann n>er Den *ftamen De$ «£>&KDv^ tt)ivD anruffen, foil felic* 
twrbett. d\om. 10, 12. 1$. 

gr. 2;. i?at bann &Ott feinen ©obn barum in bie 2Bdr gefanbt, un$ 
armen ©unbern ba^ gnabenreidje (£oangelium ju uerfunbigen? 
21. S)er ©ctft De^ #£rrn id ber> mir, Det^alben er wicf) ge<5- 
falbet l?at/ unD gefanDt ju t)erfunDigen Da^ (gcangelium Den Sr* 
men> $u feeilen t)k jerftoffene Jpitfytif ju pveDigen Den ©efange* 
nen, Dag fte tog fepn foQen/ unD Den SEMinDen Da^ ©eftc^f/ unD 
Den 3erfd)lagencn, Dag fie fret? unD leDig fei>n follen. UnD $u pre* 
Digcn Da^ angenel)me 3af)r De^ *£)€9vDv^ £uc, 4, 18. 1?. 
Sob. 3/ X7* 18. 1 306 4^ ?♦ GtoU 4/ 4- f * 

gr. 34. 



74 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

$ X 40 )( # 

gr. 24. fffieilen nun @0£t au£ Siebc t>or un$ arm* &mtM, feineS ei* 
ttigen ©obnetf nicbt wrfcbonet, fonbern ibn t>or un$ aOe ba^in gcgcben/ fo, 
ba$ aQe t)je an ibn glauben nicbt foffcn oei'fobren roerbcn, fonbern bal eroigc 
$?c&en baben : ©o fragt ficb$ fcrner^ roeilen aud) bet* roabre ©laube cine 
SBurcFung DeS£. ©eijtcS in an* fenn mug: SBorauf bann linfec ©laube 
an efori(tom3efumgcgrunl>et feon foil, toann n>ir ben £. (9eift jum2Berc& 
meifter baben unb bebaltcn rooaen? ob toir fticruor aud) in i>. ©cbrifft gc= 
toiffe Sftacbricbt unb Sttittocifung baben? obcr 06 eg bieran nicbtf gelegen 
feo, man glaube nacb feinem cigenen SBiilen/ (Butbuntfen unb 2Ba&n, 
toag, unb nm man rooae? 

21. 2Ber an mtc^ cjlauber, tvte Die ©c&rifft facjet, t>on Deffcrt 
Ceibe tvcrDen ©tritne M lebenbicjen SBaffer^ flieflen. 2)a$ fag* 
fe er aba* t)Oit tan @ei(t/ n>cfc^en empfatyen fo(ten> £>ie an ii>n 
Sfaubefen ; bann ber #. @5eijr roar nee!) nicfet ba; bann S£M 
tuar nod) nicbt fcerflarer. Sol), n, 38.3?* fa!)* flucfc 2$cM; 
t). 1 (?. bis zi. 

gc. as. acann man aber bet) ftcb beflnbet,ba(imart mebr auf bic flugen 
gabeln gefeben unb benen g«folget, aU ber £. ©cbriiTt; n?ot>urd) man fid) 
jelbll oerbinbert, ba|i ber £. @ei|l ben.ioabren lebenbigen ©(auben an^bri* 
jhim^fum nicbt bat rourcfen fimnen, tmb man i|t barum oon #er$en be* 

irubt, unb n>olt« gerne bejfelben n>ieber tbeilbafftig roerben/ Durcb toelcf) 
3fttttel fan un$ gebolffen toerbenr 

21. fitter, fo roirD eud) gecjeben, fucj>ef> fo roerbet ifjr finbett/ 
f fopfec an, fo n>irt> eud) aufgetfyan. 3)ann n)er ba bitttt, ber em* 
4>fdf>ct/ unb roer t>a fucbet ber finbet/ unb roer ba anflopfet, bein 
ttirb aufejerban. Wlattt). m 7- 8. 

§r. 26. #at bann ©Dtt folcben armen unb elenben $?enfcben auc&SBer* 
beiffung getban, bajj it |lcb rootle finben lajfen? 

% SBenbet cucfe ju mir/ fo nwber t^r felfg aller %Bdt €nbe, 
tann tc^ bin 050%%/ unb feiner me^t'. feqq. 3efaja 4f t n* 
aud) 3erem. 19, n-u. 1$. 

Sf. 27. aseilen getnelbte B<"9ni|fe t§ frdjftig bejeugen, ba$ ®Ott foU 
^)en bufjfertigen ■(Siinbern, bi? |lcb mit bitten unb fleben im 03laubcn jtt 
€?D« tfenoen, in feiuem WSovt Aborting 3"gefagt: ©0 fragt |ta)^nun/ 
roarum, Pber urn m$, fie am er(len ju bitten nptbig? 

21. Q?etbfrcjc bein 2tntlif3 Don meinen (Sunben/ unb tifge alle 
meine *307i(Tctf>at- ©c^ajfe in mir ($€)tt ein reined «§er^ unb 
gib mir einen neuen cjemiffen ©eifr. Q5ertt)irf mic^ nic&t »on t>ti* 
nem 2incjeftc^t/ unb nimm beinen fceidejen Q5eifl nic&t t>on mir. 
%r6fte mic^ n?ieber mit beiner «&u[jfe/ unb ber freubifl^ ©eijl 
tntWtt mic^. ^f. 5 1, 1 1. 12. 1 j. 14. , 

in. as. SJ3« n [on man anbatm ? 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 75 

• X 43 X '• 

% Sa fptae& 3€fu£ ju if>m; (bem <£euftf) l)ebe btc& ««(J 
Don muv ©atari/ Danti e$ fief)** cjefcOtieben; 3)u folt anbatett 
©Oft beinen *©(grrii/ unb t'bm alleirt bienen. SOtatt. 4/ io* 
§r. 39. 3n roelc&em 9Mnen fod man ben Jjinimlifcljen SBatet an6ta? 

% £Bal)v(ict)/ n>abr(ic(v id) fage euci): (go il)t ben QSater tt* 
tvas bitten tverDet in metnem Iftamen/ fo iw'tb *t$ eucb aebett* 
£3ist)et |?abt tyr nid)tg ^ebriten in meinem *ftamen. fBtttef/ fo 
tverbet tyt neljmetv bag eure gteube Dollfommen fet> 30&.16/ 
23. 24. 

5?. 30. &5ie foa itnfet ©e6dt fetrtet aefcfce&ert? 

31, S)atum fage id) eudj: 2tHe6, rca$ tl>u bittct in euretti ®e* 
bat/ gfaubet nur/ bag it)r$ empfafjen n>etbet/ fo noirbd eue& mx? 
Den. 3)}atc. ii/ 24. $at i f 3 bi$ 6. 

gr. j 1. 3S3ie foa unfcir ^5«5at ferner eingeric&tci fetiri/ tap ©it er&Srei 

nwben ? 

21* Sag if! t>ie gteubfgfeit &ie toiv fraben ju tfjm; i?ag/ fo toir 
ttm$ bittm nact) feinem <2BiHen/ fo b^ret er un& i Qofc. f / 14- 

gr. 3*. 3B«nn nun bet* ©eifi uMig, a5et? t»ie tftdflfte be$ ©lau&ertS ju 
fc&njatfj, n>er J&ilffr biefet ©cfrmac^cit <wf itn ©e&at? 

5(. £)et ©eiil btljftunfever @d)n>a#eit auf. S&enn wit 
foijfen nid)t roatf n>ir bdten fallen, tote ficfcS ^ebubtefr fonbetn be* 
®eift fclbft Mxtxkt \ir\$ aufs be(!e/.mit unaugfprecblicjjen feufa 
£en. £)et abet bie #et$en fotfeijet/ bet roetg/ ftas be$ @eii>£ 
©inn fei); 3>enn txwtxitt bie#ei%n/nac|?bem M ©=0^ 
gefattet. 9v6m. 8/ 2^ 27* 

gr. it. 3(1 bannocfc ©OtteS tfrafft in folcfien ©c&roac&en mddjtfg, ©ana 
fie if)tt <S<t)wac&l)eif mit bemut&igem unb jet fitit fc&tem $et flen, nac& bent 
SfftaaS i^rcd ©tauoenl/ ntit 6wen unb fle&en, latjen cot ©£)££ 
lunb werbm? 

2(. £)enn affo fpric&c bet t)obe unb et&dbene/ t>tx enrfglfcft 
toofjnet/ be$ ^Rame beilig iflt 5Der ief) in ^x «&6l)e unb im ^eU 
ligtbum tt)o»)ne/ unb bet) benen/ fo serfcljfagenes unb bemutt)tge5 
©ei(le^ (i'nb/ auf bag ic& etquicfe bett ©eifl ^tx QfitmutlMtmr 
tfnb t><\$ ^erij bet a^tfci)(a9enen, 3c& tbitt ntc^t imttietbat ba^ 
betn/ unb nicfrt etoiglict) jteen/ fonbem eg foil Don meinem 5(n^ 
9eft'd)t ein ©ei(l tvebetv unb i$ toiU 5it^rti macjjen: S^f- f7f 
if. 1^ 

$c. 34. €5 f|l attS alien angcfu&ttcrt Brtigniffen $. &$nftt Hat jn »cc- 
(tti)itif ba$ H an ®Dm$ ©citen, roegen ber SttenfcOen 95ctc()rung nia^t fc^s 
(et, ob fa)on unfa* ©laube fcfmmcb/ roann ec nut* rearer ©ejlalt oor ©Dit 
1(1/ fo fomt ©Oft iinftt-ee &$m<bbnt w ®teuUn$ m ^>ui|f. ^Dann ber 

35 ©IdU&t 



76 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



» )( 44 )( ® 

©lank ift cine SOBtoung Del fyiliatn ©eitfel in unl, roann air nur ten? 
fclben in unl raoum rourcfen (ajfen. <3o lange aber feet? unglaube in im$ 
Die D&er&anb 6ebdlt, fo roirtfet Der 66fe ©eitf Durd) Den Unglauben 2Ber* 
tfe Del unglaubenl, nebmlicb aUe Unreinigfeit, UnfeieDe, Unroa&rbeit, Uns 
serec&tigfeif, unb aael ungomic&e 3Cefen in Den sanDecn Del unglaubenl, 
tDobui'd) ©Duel 3orn nnD ®erid)t jut etraffe ubei* aael ungottlicbe 
2Befen fomtnt. c j\1 nun Die grag : Sffiann ®Qm$ <8<ricf)f, tibec eine 
<3mbt oDer £anD geDrduet mirD, unD no# fo tu'el (grfdnmul ubrig, Dap 
man erfennen fan, Dajiunfere ©unDe nnD Ungerecbtigfeif/Durcb DenUnglaue 
6en fold>c ©traffe Deuurfac&ef, nnD erfennet unD befemtet fein Unrest, un& 
tract)tet nacf) Siecbt unD @ered)tigfeif, folc&el roieDer Durcb bei'^ic&e 23u(je 
im C^lauben aufjuiicbtcn, wal Durd) Den Unglauben unD feine SBertfe ill 

SKnuiijletrcorDen; ©bnocb in ©jDftcS 28ort ©nabensSBerbeiffung 

oorbanben ? 

% ©ebet burc{) t>fe ©affen $u Serufalenv unb febauet unb 
etf(#e£/ unb fuc&ct auf il>vcr (gtrafien, ob tfor jemanb fmbet/ ber 
m1)t tbue/ unt) nacf> bem ©(auben fragc; fo nofd id) if)r sndbig 
fw» 3mm- 5/ 1. €$ecj). 18/22. zj. 

gr. ?$. ?H3ann aber Die 35efebrung nidjf folgct? 

5(. ©Oft if! cin rec&ter Dvicf)tcr, unb em ©Oft ber td^ 
lief) brduet, 903tU man fid) nid)t befebwvfo bat er fein ©d>n?ert)t 
geroe^et/ unb feinen SBogen gefpannet/ unb jielet; unb f>at ba* 
lauf gelest t6btiic6e ®efc^og, feine ^feile bat er lugevic&tet ju 
Mberben. % 7> 12. 13. 14. 

gr. 36. 5Beil el nad) Dem $a&, con $atur mit Dem SOfanfc&ett fo fcejlelt 

«ff, Dap cr gern »or nxife unD Hug roia gebalten roerDen: <Sr aber feine 

f&tifytit ojtterl in ©ingen fud)cr, Die Dor @D$£ nut fur SJjor&eit ge* 

Ijafoen werDen; fo ijl Die $rag: 2>urcb n>el<be €igenfc&afft man einm 2ln* 

fang in Der mfynnWufyiit nebmen fan? 

% £)ie gurcbt be^ £©XDtfft iff bet 2$ei$beit 5fnfang, bad 
iff mt feine ^(u^ljeit, tver bavnac& t&ut/ bed £ob bleibet en>tg* 
iicb* ^)3f. hi/ 10. 

gf. 37. 2Beil Die gufebt Del #(£rrn DecSBeilbeit Sinfang, fo ift tfja 
infonberbeit autf) febr nu^licb Dor Die 3w^ f »»«nn fie aa i&c SBornebmen 
in Dee §urct)t @0«el anfangen? 

2(. Se« «&gmn gurcbt iff 2lnfang sum lernen, t>k fSuc^fo* 
fen ^evac&ten ^Bei^beit unb 3ucbt @pr, (gat. 1/ 7- 
§e ,8- @o man mi(t unD oerjidnDig (e6en toia, roal mup manmeiDen? 

2i» (giebe, Die gurcbt bed ^gtrn/ to$ iff t)ic ^eidfjeit/ unt> 
miit>m t)&$ 556fe/ bad iff Q&rffanb, «giob 28/ 28* 

§r. 39. $an man aucb 9}acbnc&t ftnDen, roo Die n)ab« Seilbett i&te 
SBobnung unD ^erbet'ge nimmt ? 

3U S)ie 28eid^it fomt Mt in eine bodbafftiflc ©eele/ tint) 

tvofcnet 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 77 

• X 4r x m 

mf)Mt tiicT)t in etnem &ibt ben ©unbe mtttmttfM. Sann 
t>er beiltge ©etff/ fo recbt (efyret/fleucbt Die abcjottifd^en^ unbtvei* 
djec t>on ben rucfrfofert/ roelcfce cjeffrafit roerben mit ben @urtben> 
bte uber fte wrbdnset n>evben. 2)ann bt'e ^Bet'gfyett iff fo fromro, 
bag fie ben Safferer ntc&t ungeftvafft (dgt. £>enn @*Ott iff 3eu* 
#e uber aUe ©ebancfen, unb erfennet atfe «&ev£en gewig/ unb 
f)6ret alfe 2£orte. £>enn ber <2Beltfretg iff t>ol£ ©eijle^ beg 
*5O0v^/ unb ber t>fc Oiebe fennet, iff aHentyaiben. £>arunt 
fan ber nk\)t Derborgen bleiben* bet* ta Unrecftt rebet, unb t>a$ 
Died>t/ fo i\)t\ ffrafen foil/ tuirb fein nic&t fefjta S&eigf). ©, i; 

$r. 40. 5Bo mobnet fie bann ? 

2(. £>ie gurc&t beg £<£rrn iff ber 9H3eigJ)eit 2(nfart0, unb iff 
fm ^Set^engrunb allein bet) benen ©laubigen, unb roo^nef atteiti 
beo ben augerrodblten 9H3eibern, unb man (tnbef ffe allein bet) 
ben gerecf)fen unb glaubiaen. @iraci) i; i6* 

§r. 41. SOBeilcn ©Dttfeinm eobn in Dtcfe 2Belt gefanbf W, bal* roic 
burcO ibn le&cn foaen, it»elo>cr unS in £ef)t unb Men ein SSor&ilb gelaffcn, 
t>c$ n>tt* foaen nadjfolgen feinen 5i#apffen : ttKlc&er tins mic& Don (5D£S 
gemacbt i(l jut* 2$3ei$j)eit, jur ©erea)tigfeif/ $ur $eiligung itnb jttc &lb* 
fung. 6o fragt ftcfjl: 06 man benn and) nod) fernec noung W jufor* 
fc&en mta) S55ei$beif, unb auf pbilofopfofcfren bo&en ©cbulen flubieren foff # 
in &en 35itc6ecn Dec $I)ilofopt)en, unb Sefore Dec Stefcfoen, oie 
e$ in Dec SSBelt ge&rduci)lid) ? 

% @ef)er $u ; bag eud) niemanb beraube burd) bt'e spOifofo* 
pbta unb lofe Q&rfufyruna nad) ber $?enfcben*£ebre/ unb nacf> 
ber S&elt (gafcuncjen, unb nicbt nad) Cljrtffo, £>enn in tym 
woljnet bt'e sanfce gutte ber ©ottbett fetbljaffttg/ unb il>r fet>t> 
tjollfommen in ifeni/ reefer iff bag £aupt aller gurffentfyumer 
unb Obrtafeit. Cofoft. z, 8. % io. 

gc. 42. 2Borinnen foa man Dann fcetfdnbig jlnbieren nnb oef6lei6en? 

2(. $Du aber bfeibe in bem, bag bu gefevnet ^aff/ unb btr wr* 
trauet iff/ ffntemaf bu weiffeff/ Don tvem bu gelernet (jaff. Unb 
tr>etl bu »on 5ftrtb auf t>ie 5ei% (gc^rifft twiflTeff> fan bic& bt'e* 
felbiae unterroetfen sur ©eligfetf/ burcb ben (8(au(>en an €^nV 
ffo SSfu. SDenn atte ©efirifft Don ©Ott emgegeben, iff nu^ 
sur £el)re/ jur (gtraffe/ sut ^3efierun9; jur Sudjtigun^ in bet 
©erecfeti^feit; bag ein^enfcl) &£ttt$ fet) t)olIfommen/ ju afc 
(en ^uten ^SJercfen ^efc&icft. z ^tm. j/ 14. big 17* 
gr. 45. 2SeiUn «ns Die #. <Sa)ciffr ; wann man m folgef, juc ©eu'gfeit 

S) * untertveifet/ 



78 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

IX40(f 

uttteweifef, unbunfer ©fou6c <mf nic&ts anber£, «U affeto aufben einfgm 
©D££/ unb ben er gefanb't bat Shriftum 3U grunb?n, n>cl$c£ tier rec&te 
2Beg an5 *t>cm tob in$ £eben ju geben, aucb bie SBabrbeit unb \>a$ £ebeit 
iji; fo ijl mm tit grage: 06 man aucf) auf biefcm 2Bege, ber $iim £«bm 
fubret, Sreufc unb £rubfal m geroarten'bat? 

51. ©te fldrcf etctt t>ie <See(en ber 3uncjet> unb crmabneten 
fie, Dag f?e im ©(aubcn blieben/ unb bag n>ir buvcfe t>ieX ^trub* 
jaf mufien in ba^ Dveic^ ©OttcS gef>en- Sip. @5. 14/ 22, 

gr. 44- 2Ba$ fcbaffet benn Die £riibfal &or gfeuften, fo man bejtdnbig ge* 
bultig bi|j an$ (£nbe berbleibt? 

21. Unfere ^rubfai/ Die jeitlicfe unt) leicfet ift/ fc&affet cine e* 
fiM'cje unb uber aHe tnaffen nnc&tise Jpwlifyhiu un$/ t>ie n>ir 
tiid)t feben auft>d$ ficbtbare/ fonbevn auf bas tmftcbtbare. SDenn 
rca$ (ic&tbar iff/ ba$ iff jeitlicf); n>a$ aber unfw&tbar iff/ b«^ iff 
«n>i0. z Cor, 4, 17.18. 

gr. 4?. 28eil man ben 23eg 311m cmi^cn $?€6€» fofcfnnal finbet,ba|? mait 
buret) uiel greutj unb Xrubfal in$ fteicb ©OlteS eingcben mug: 60 roirb 
(8 loebl bofttf n&big fet;n, ttu (reben ®Ott tagltct) Urn ftraft be$ ©lau* 
ben$, unb urn ©etmlt imb Sroft aujufleben? 

% ©ebuft abet* iff euc& notb, auf bag ifer ben %Bittm <&Ot* 
#$ ttyjuunb t>k Stafreifiting e.mpfaijef. 2)enn nocf) uber tm 
fleine 9H5eifc fo rpivb fommen/ ber ba foramen folf/ unb md)t 
Derjiebeu. SDer gcwcfjte aber .roirb beg @Mauben$ feben : SOBet: 
abertwicben mirb/ an bem mirb meine (geefe.fein ©efatten fya* 
ben. 5Bir aber ft'nb nic&f *>on benen/ Die ba twicfjen unb tor* 
bamtw ruerben/ fonbevn son benen/ bie ba ejfauben/ unb Die 
(geefe erretten. ©n\ 10, 3^. big j?. 

gr. 46. ^at man aucb 9(nfe^iung auf biefem 3Beg 3it erwarten? 

2i. Unb roeif bu ©O^ lieb ixjarejl/ fo mufl^ fo fei;n, oftne 
2infed?tun ( G mufeft bu nic&t bleiben, auf bag bu beftabvet tvur^ 
be(t. ^tobia 12/ 13. 
gr. sz- .S)ann merben bie grommen bnr# Sre!i^ unb Srubfal beroabrt? 

21. SDenn g(eic& n>ie i>a$ @o(b buvc&g geueiv alfo n>crt>en t>ie f 
fo ©Ott gefaKen/ burets geuer ber ^rubfal betudbret. @ir 2/ 5. 

Si*. 48. ©febet cS mlf ben gbfijlen auf bem 5Beg 311m ttbm in folcbem 
Builanb/ ba(? ik bnrcb ba§ 5cuer ber icufifal mujfen bemdbrt unb geldutert 
iperben, fo bat jtcb ja ein efjrijl in biefer 2Beft nicbt^ anberS m oerfeben/ 
al^ ba^ erfti'sur 91nfecbtung febitfen inujl? 

2(. ?0?ein 5vint>/ milt bu ©43tte^ Siener few/ fo fc&icfe bic^ 
jur 2(nfecbtun#. (giracb 2/ 1. 

Sr. 49. 3Bie bat man tut) fewer in foMHn Sfnfetbfangcn 311 cerbaUen ? 

2i. 2}?eine (ieben £5mDW/ aftt*t e^ eitel gveube/ n>enn ifer tn 

mancjjerle^ 



THE SCHUL-OBDNUNG 79 

• X 47 X « 

ittattd>er(et> ^(nfcd&tutig fallet; wnb tviflfet/ bageucr©(aube/ fo ec 
te*tf*affen iff; @ebu(t timrcfet. 3ac. i, *♦ j. 
gr. r o. 5$irb folc^c Sni&fal unb Slnfecbtung ben (S&riffen nm befaiUea 
Don ©£W iugefdjitfr, ba|? fie aaein foOeu bettxibrt bleiben; obec baton fte 

aucfc noc& fonberlic&e SEBibcrfac&cr? urn be$ SttamenS C&rifli roiOen? 

2L ©ot*e$ babe i* $u eucj> gcvebt/ bag ifjr cud) ni*t divert, 
©iewerben cu* in ben $5ann d>un: €3 fommt aber t>te grit 
tag; twr eu* tfbttt> n>trt> meonen, er *ue <&Ott einen ©tenjl 
baran* Unb fo(*e$ roerben fie eu* barum tf)\\\\r bag fie toeber 
meinen QSater no* mi* erf enneri. 2(ber fclc&e^ !>abe i* ju 
eu* gerebt/ auf bag roann t)k geif fommen toirb, bag *r bavari 
^ebencfet/ pag i*$ eu* gefa^t ftabe* 3ob» is, 1 bis 4* 
Sr. ft. ©0 bor ic& rool)l, man tjat auf biefem fd>malert 2Beg be$ Seben* 
audj Seinbe w Dermutben? 

% $1* *&€nv h>ie finb meiner gctttbe fo ml, unb fe|en ficf> 
fo *>iel roiber mi*. QSiel fagen son meiner ©eele: ©ie &af fei* 
tie «&ulffe bei) ©0%% ©eta. feqq. $f> 3^ *♦ ** 

gr. $?. SBie foil fic^> abec ein (Sbrijt gegen feine leiblic&e geinbe wbak 

ten, unb was f>at ec in feinec (Sbritflic&en 9titterf4>afft biflfaHS 00c 
£)rbre t>on feinem #onig ? 

$♦ 3* aber fage eu*; £tebee cure geinbe, fegnet t>k eu* jfu* 
*en, *ut foofjl benen t>k eu* bafien/ bittet fur t>k f fo eu* be* 
UibiQtn unb wrfofgeru $Jar*. f > 44* 

§r s$. SSSetfen ein Cftrijt, feine leiblicfce geinbe burc5 bie Sie6e iiBcrmtit^ 

ben foa, fo fragt ftcb$, toa$ benn bie Sitbt t>or ©emebr frager, bent 
$einb 6c&aben ju tbun? 

5(. ©te £tebe i(t lan^mutb^ unb freunbh'*/ t)k Zkbt eiffett 
lii*f/ bie £iebe treibet ni*t mutbroitten/ fie blebet fiti) nitf)t f fit 
Oeliet {ity ni*t ungebdr b\Q, fie fu*et ni*t ba^ tint/ fie (dflfet fic(> 
tiicfet evbitfern/ fie tvacbtef nicfit na* ©cbabetv fiefreuetfi* ni*t 
n>ann^ unrecbt m^U $1 freuet fi* aber nuann^ re*f ju^ebet. 
©ie tJettrd^et al{e^/ fie gfaubet alle^/ fie boffet aKe^/ fie t>ui\>^t 
alle^- 1 €or» i$/4b!S7* 

§r. ^4. 55ie ijl eg bann befleOTum bie geifllicbe geinbe, n>a§ t)or !S5af? 

fen unb ®tmbv bcr ebrijlli(ben Siittcrfcbafft roerben ftieiii erforbert? 

2(. ©enn ob rotr wofjl imgleif* roanbeln, fo fivetfen rotr bo* 
ni*t fleif*(i*er 9Seife/ benn bie ^Baffen unferer IXitterf*ajfC 
finb ni*t fleif*li*, fonbern md*ti^fiir ©Oft/ su wrflorcn bit 
^3et)efiipn^en/ t^amit wit »erfi6ren i>k 5inf*(dge unb alie •£>$* 
%i f bk fi§ erbebet roiber i>&$ €rf dnenig ©Otte^/ unb nebmen 
gefangen aU ^ernunfft unter ben ©eborfam €btift\. 2, Covtnt* 
i°/3-4v*< S 3 S^ rr» 



80 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



* )( 48 X * • 

$r. ?*. 6inb bie SBajfen gemelbtcr £Mterfd>afft nic&f fleifc&Iict)/ unb 
toirb amt) nic&t fleifcblicb gefiritten: fo inuflen eg Scinbe fenn, bencn auf 
cine anbere SEBcifc SBiberRanb getban roerben mu&. SOSer finb nun 
allebiefe Seinbe? 

2(. gu(e|t/ meine £5tuberi feob (lavcf in bent #€rtn, unb in 
ber s)[>?ad&t feinet (gfarcfe. gtebet an ben «&arnifd) ©OtteS, 
bag i&r befle&en fonnef ge^en t)ie liftmen 2tofdu(fe DeS <£eufe[$. 
&enn rotr fyaben nicfjt mitgleifdj unbSSlut su fdmpfcn, fonbem 
mit gtnfen unb ©emaltigett/ nebmficfj, mit i>m «&(£rrcn bet 
SCGclt/ bie in bet ginftetnij? biefer 2S3e(t f>cnfd>civ mit ben bo* 
fen ©eijlern untet bem #immel. gpl). 6> 10. tx« xz* 
St. s 6. 6inb bag bie geinbe aae^bie man ubcrroinben mug? 

21. 3)ann alieS; roaS t>cn ©O $/£ gebofyten ijf, ubetfoinbet 
bie 2Beft/ unb unfer ©faube ift bet ©teg/ bet bie SBelt uber* 
number* bat i 3of). 5/ 4* 

gr. 57. 6inb nocb me&r Seinbt/ tselc&e wi&cr bie <3eele jlrciferi? 

•21. Sieben SSritbet/ id) ermine eudv ate bt'e gtemblingert 
unb pilgrim : €ntt)aftet euct) ton fleifdjlicfren fttften, wl<bt n>i* 
bet bie @eeie ftreiren. 1 tyit. z, it. unb fetnet: (go (affefnurt 
bie ©unDe nic&t fjerrfc&en in eutem jtetbficfjen Ztiter if)t ©er)ot* 
fam $u ieijten in i&ren £u(tert. ^6m. 6/ 10. 

g& 58. SBotinnen tmtj; man feine Sftacbt unb (Stdrcfc Derraebten gegen 
folate Seinbe ? 

% Sule&t, meine Prober J fetjb jlarct; in bem #&m, rnbin 
bet $tac&t fritter ©tdrcfe* €pf>* <v 10. 
§r. $9. sptt man and) 9}ac&riefjt, bap (I* tinflampf unb ©treit erfjoben? 

$. Unb e$ etbubficl) tin <&mit im£immei: $2ict)aef unb 
feine £nge( ff titten mit bem £)tad)ert/ unb bet ^>j:ac&e jltitt/unb 
feine ^ngel; unb jtegeten mfyt, auci) tuatb tr)te ©tatte ntc&t 
ntebt funben im £immef. Unb e$ mart) auSgerootffen bet grof* 
fe sbracbe; bie alte ©change, i>it to foeijfet bet ^teufel unb ©a* 
tana$ ; bet bie gan^e <2Beft »erfut)ret/ unb twb genjotff en auf 
tit (Erbetv unb feine (£nael tvutben auc& babtn geroorffetn 43ff. 

12/ 7. 8. ?. 

§r. 6a. 55$eil nun biefer 66fc Seinb, im ^immel ijl 6e(tti teen, unb <tu(5 
fidecmunben unb auSgetfoffen, aucb il>m feine ®tam im ^immel mebc et^ 
funben iji: SEBir abet fo tang roir auf erbenroobnen/ einen folcben geinb, 
unb ©eelen^^orbec w bejlreiten baben, unb einen foldjen ^ampff a\\$ 
eigenen ^rdfften ing 5Cercf m ricbten ifl mqtkm, w ung ®DZ£ nicbt 
mit ber gftatfct fcinec gottlicben ^rdfft unb ©tdtcfe ju ^ulffe fommt, unb 
Dec ftaccfe ^elO aup 2>a»tOS ©lamm, bet bem miefen feinen 3vaub nebmett 

fan/ 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 81 

& X 49 X • 

tan, unS nidjt in feint SStfcbitmung nimmf, fo roirb bfefec ^eint> tm$ ben 
2Beg jum #imntelreic6 futben ju eerfperren. ©ann mit unfa* sjRac&c 

iji.nic&ts getban, n>ic ftnb gar balb au^ eigenen tfrdfften nieDergtleaet? 

21. lint) nun fpric&t Dev •&&, Der Di* gefcbaffen I?at/ 3acob/ 
tint) bid) gemac&t (>at 3frael: giirc&te bid) nicOt/ t)enn id) ^abc 
bicb evldfet/ 1$ babe bic(j bct> beinem 9?amen geruffen, bu bifl 
mem. &enn fo bu t>urd>^ 3Bajfer $ef)e|t/ mill ic& bet) bir fepn/ 
bag bic& t>fe ©ftime m'c^t twfaujfen/ imb fo bu ins geuer ge* 
l)eft/ folt bu nicbt brehneh> unb t>te glamme foil $>ify ntc&t an* 
$unben» feq'q. 3ef. 43/ 1. a- *c. 

gc 6i. g|! biefe SBerbeifiung un$ 2lrmen jum 6cbn$, fo ftnb rait /ft 

recbt glutffelig in allent/ wail un$ nacb ©Ones 2Biaen oegegnen fan? 

21. ^BaS wollen wit benn tveiter fagen ? 3ft ©O^ fur 
un$ wet mag wiber un$ fetm? ^Belcber aucf) feineS eigenen 
@o^ne^ nidjt fcerfc&onet/fonbem tf>n fut unS alleba^in gegeben: 
2Bie folte et un$ mit ibm nic&t aHe$ fc&encfen ? 0\6m. 8/ 31.3a. 
unb fo fetnet fete $u €nbe. 

gr. 5*. 2Bobui'c& ba&en Die ©laubigcn biefen ^einb uBernnmben? 

51. Unb ft'e l)aben iljn uberwunben ; burd) be$ £amme$ $&iutr 
tmb burcf) bte 2Bort ify'rer Seugnig/ unb fyaben i\)v £eben nidjt 
geiiebet big m bm <£ob. Offenb. \z f n. 

%t. 6 ? . ssann man but'* ebt'itfi Sob unb 33lur, jur Ue&ernMnbumj 
fommen Ian, fo man fic& in roa&rem (Slauben an e^ciflum ubergi&t, fo bat 
man ja eine SQcftwng/ roorinnen man ficbcr ifi oor biefem geino 
unb ©eelen^orber? 

% 2)er Aflame be$ ■©grm ift ein t>efie* ©djfog/ bet ©erecfc 
tt fduffc t>aJ>irif unb wirb befdjirmef. @pr. @af. 18/ 10. 

gr. 64 SEBeilen aba* biefer geinb unb eeelen*9)?&rber, unfere erffeft 

©tern im tyatabiefi aua) in biefec SBetfung angefcoffen, mclcbi ec mil ®e* 

wait nicbt batte einncbmen tbrmm, bat fie «ber burcb Si|l unb 95ctrug bo* 

&in gebracbt, ba^ fie bicfc 58e|hmg con felbflcn u6erge6cn; fo if! Die grage: 

JD5 man auc& in biefec CBe(tung nocb Urfacfc bat, auf ber2Bacbt au fenn? 

21. ©eob nucbtern unb tva^et/ benn euer SGiberfac^et bet 
^eufef/ ge^et umber/ wie ein brullenber Hm f unb fuc^et/ wef* 
d)en et tJetfdjlinge, 5Dem n>ib^rf|cf>et i>efl im ©lauben/ unb mif* 
fet, bag eben biefelbigen Ztibm ubet eure ^rubet in ^x ^Belt 
ge&en. 1 ^ef. 5, 8. % 

§r. 6y. gjjie lang bat man notbig wacFet ju feon? 

% @o fet)b nun wader aaejeit, unb bdtet/ bag i()t wurbfg 
werben mo*gee; ju enffliefeen biefem alien/ i>te gefc&e&en foil; unb 
in ftfym m W Wenfc^en @of)n. Sue* *i/ 3^ 

» 4 gv.^ 



82 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



fjt\ 66. 2BaS bafiett folc&e 2Bdc&fec cor, ober jtrnt Selb ^ @efd!>ret) ? 

$1. SBBacbet/ ftebet im ©lauben/ fepb mdnnlirfv unD fci)i> 
parcf. Me eurc SDin^e taflnet in ber Siebe sefcfcebw. i Coring. 
16, 13. 14. „ 

§r. 67. sBfli bor Siebem) imiffta fit anMben, unb titfgen? 

51- @o jiel)et nun an ate Die 2iuSern)al)lten @K)tte$, «&efte 
gen unb ©eliebtcn, l)et^(ic&e^ Stbdrmeti/ greunbudjfeit/ 3)emuti)/ 
©anftmutb; ©ebuit ; unt) t>ertra^et einev Den anbenv unb feet* 
gebet cucF> untev einanbetv fo jemanb .^lage jat tviDec ben an* 
bern : @5(eict>n)ie (EljrifiuS eudE) aercjeben hat, alfo audj i(p. Ue* 
bet* alles aber jieftet on Die £icbe/ Die ba ijt Datf 33anb Der SSoH* 

Fommenbeit Setoff. 3/ IZ * x 3» 14.. «• f*f. bi§ 17. 

5r. 68. SBorinrten 6eflcl>ct ifore $rfeg$;9lu|hmg/ fcarmfco unD ©croebe 
ta$ jte tag(ic6 crqrciffcn, unb in Sereitfc&afft I)a&en mujfeit/ roami fa biefw 
eceUnsgeinb bejlieiien unb befagm rooflm? 

2i. d^teiffet ben #avnifd) ©OtteS, auf Dag tfor/ tvenn t>a$ 
bofe @funb(ein fbmmt SOBiberftanb tljun/ unb alleS n>ol)l au$* 
i-ic&ten; unb ba$ $e(b btfyaltm moget. (go fiefyet nun/ um^ut* 
ttt cure £enben mit bei* ^Gctbrbett/ unb angejo^en mit Detn 
$reb$ ber @5evecl)fiaieuy unt> an S5einen geftiefelt/ at$ ferttg $u 
treiben bag ^angeh'um beg griebenS, X>am\t tbr berett fetjb. Stor 
alien ^ingen abev ersretffet ben (Sdjilb beg@foub$n$, mit n>eU 
c&em tbr au$tofc!)en f6nnet/ alio feuri^e ^Pfeile beg 535dfta>td^tsf* 
Unb nebmet ben £e(m be$ «£et)u$, unb bat (gdjroerbt be$ @et* 
frtf, wlcl)eg ifl bag <2Bovt ©OtteS. Unb batet fiets in attem 
$ln(iegenr mit bittm unb fleben im ©eijf/ unb noacfeet ba&u, mit 
allem Slnbata/ unD glefcen fur atfe •Seid'aen, gpbef. 6, 
t>. 13* big is. 



a $ © e 



THE SCHUL-OKDNUNG 83 

fiitiw * gieMein. 

ot>er 

2f ufmiwtettmg bet &m&er, 

tfte!. 3$ weig em BlumUin fcubfcfc im& fan. 

{ft Ommt, litte tfittber, Fommt berbet), 
■dl nub let-net 3<£©U9E Femteit : 
^omrnt bocf) tmb fefyt, rote gut et* |ep f 
SSBie fromm unb treii; 
$ommt, tfyut if)n 5D?eijlcf nennett. 

2. D! fel)et feine ^i'eunbltc^fett# 
2>ie ftcf) ju eitcj) thut neigett/ 
SBie fierce!) er ftc^ anefbewt 
eucf) dffejeit/ 

§Biel gtttes au erjeigen. 

3. gc via eu$ fernen, flia imb fromitt 
fftact) ©Dtte^ mum kbm t 

@r ruffet: giebeS Emblem, romniJ 
tinb.roerbe fromm, 
%tf) win t>tr dlleS gebert. 

4. &)/ fommt bantt tfinber i ge&t bocfr (jer* 
3" 3Sfu fcfjdne ec&ttte 

£ort, lernt, unb fotgef feiner Seljr/ 

2)ie Eecttonen finb nitf)t fc^njeo 
<Da fefjt eutfj f)er, 
3luf feiner SEDei^eit 6tuf)le. 

5. Sfre gut i(l e$, rote fct>dn wnb fcitV 
S&ie Ueblid) anjufefyen: 

2Batm £inber recfjt geijorfam fenn, 

Unb gem (iaein; 

2ft 3£6U 6$nte gefjen. 

6. £a lernen fte, mit &tjt unb Sreufy 
SRec&t 6aten, lefen, ft'ngen. 
Unbfuc&en if>re %&m\$-<%t\t 

gn £eiligfeit, 

5)?it 3(£©tt f)imubrtngen, 

7. 01 folc&e tftnber I)abenS gufc 
^ie roerben eroig roo&nen, 

3m -OimmeU'eicbf mit frofyem $?utl): 

f&o 3<£6U© tout, 

&en fromtwn ^inbern (ofenen, 

£4 8, ®fc- 



} 



84 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



* X st X * 

8. @ie toerben tot, tit groffer greub, 
Sill Xag unl> ©tunben leben, 

5tcin Sbtfljl/ Urn gtirdjt, kin SramigFeifr 
Stein ©djmer$ Mb Seib; 
2BirD fie fca meljr umgeben. 

9. ©rum, (ii6en£inber le'rnef gertt, 
tint) liebet 3<£fum finblidj: 

2>ient iftm, ate eurem ©£)££ unb £€&9tSR> 

ltnD jliefjet fern; 

5Bon aflfem, roa$ nur funblidj. 

10. golgt nid)t ber bofen ^mt>er Stotf> 
£>er gauffer, unb ber (Spieler: 

JDfe wren 3®@ttSR nur uerfpotf/ 

Slidjt liebet ©£)££, 

55iic^t fenn mill 3£©U @djto. 

11. 50?ac^teu(5mit f 3gfu re^tbefanf A 
llnb fi$t w feinen ^uffen: 

Da gebet ibm bie recite £anbj 
Unb faat: £enlanb.' 
$1$, foffe micfj, 2)id) fiiffen. 

12. £anat tr>m ate Heine tfinbeileitfy 
5(n feinen £iebe$ Written, 

Unb fagt : & foUe gndbig \$Wr 
€uo) $inberlein; 
1Mb euer fid) erbarmen. 

1?. & foa euc^ feanen mit SBerftanb, 
5Da§ if>r ba$,Q5dfe fdjeuet, 
<£r foa eud) roerben recfjt befanbf/ 
Site ein £enlanb, 
<Der eud) »on ©iinb befrencr. 

14. 3a bittet tftn, er rootfe bodj, 
@ud) Sujt unb *kbt fdjencFen : 
<&ein liehet, fanffteS, fiijfel %otf)t 
Site Amber nod), 
Bu traqenmit^ebenifen. 

if. (£r foae euer junge* Jper§. 
^D?it feiner ^.iebe fatten, 
2)a$ e# jfets bencfe r>immefa)drtS, 
lint) alien ©d>er$, 
?Berad)t, urn feinet mitten. 

16. ©0, $inber, l>angt ibm fyer$li# ftty 
Sid)! ftangt i()m an \>k J^anbe. 
Unb fagt: £> 3<£©U! fti&re bann, 
giftjr un$, fortan, 



;/ f«l>r uns, bijj an$ ©tbe! 



1 

17* 5% 



THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 85 



• X n X • 

*7. gii^r \m$, mi bjefer 3Biiftene», 
£>e$ argen 2BeIt • ©etummels, 
3n$ 55<nter|anb, roo «n$ erfi*eu# 
£> 3g@U; treu ! 
2>ie £errli*feu; be* $immelfr 



eter^gieb. 



UTcl. tPer nur ben lieben (g<Dtt 14ft tittlttif. 

5)f$£! fommet Ijer, if>r a)?e!tf*en*#tober! 
<l 910 fommt; unb fcot t>ie 3*i*tigfeit j 
5Die 9*i*tigfeit, ber fiolQen ©unDer^ 
Unb ijre* EebenS gitelfeit. 
S)«nn afle$/ affe$, n>a* ibr feftf, 
£>a$ tragi Die Obfc^rifft: & verged! 

2. 3$ liege f)ier, im@terbe*$ette 
SSom ©imDen * ®tjft g<inf$ inftfcirf, 
d)?ein ©eijl men} feine Slufje *<$tatU f 
§)te mir t>ie Hebe $ani> geruft, 

9JB nur ben Cftamen ggfu @ f)rifo 
<Der au* im Sob mein £eben iff. 

3. SD?ein seitticf) Seben t|l oerfloflfenv 
Unbmeine £age finb oorbeo : 

£ie Fiir$e SMfabrt ifi bef*lofien, 
€$ iff an mir bie £obe$ *9teijft 
3)o* bin t* frob, £<£3t9i 3£@U GOriji, 
SDaf? bu au* mtt am 9ten&en biff. 

4. 3* f)ab bur* ®Otttf rei*e ©nabe, 
2)er SSelt f*on langji, gut 3ta*t gefagt; 
Mb auf bem f*malen 3(£fu$ $fabe ; 
SRa* roafjrer ©eelen SRuj) getra*t. 
S)o* f)ab i* nidjt getijan, »a$ tau0f/ 
Unb oiel w roenig (Srnfl gebrau*t. 

5. 31* ©D££! bur* betne Siebe$*#anbe/ 
9}?a* bu mi* je$o no* bereit : 

<Dajj i*/ an meinem le^tert Grube, 
3n beinem Jpepl getrojl abf*eib. 
S>eirt SHSitt fet) mir in €roigfeir, 
€iu Centrum t>er 3ufriebenf)eit. 

6. j^iermit roitt i* nun 2(bf*eib neljmMf 
58on benen/ bie mi* bier gefennf, 

58or erfl son benen, bie fi* gramen. 
3n iftrem cirmen (5orgen>(3tanb, 
Sur*'t @£>tr, unb bdtet Sag unb 3*a*fr 
2n tijn Demand nun gufe Sfiac^t. 

7Sut 



86 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

• X f4 X • 

% (But $<L$t t i!jr ftetcfcett biefer grben, 
3)ic if>r Den SKei$tbum nennt em ©liicfy 
°$c& aunfcbte memal* retc^ ju tserben, 
<£g wabrt bodj nur ein SiugenblicF, 
llnb ebriftu* ruft: em fearle* 2Be&.' 
SSebentft* bocb, 6UI: ic&, 3um &bieu. 

S. @ut Sfat&t* bu aitbe @d)aar Dec 3ugeiit?# 
2>u unbefebrte J&eiben^ucfa 
<Dte bu nidjtf roetfit t>on €br, imb tiiqm\>, 
Unb nur bem ®atan bringeft griie&k 
golg ©£>tte$ ernflem 2Bort nnb Statfo 
©onfl fmbtf bu emtg feine ©nab. 

9. ©ut £Rad)t Hjr SBcIt gefmnten £erisefy 
SDie ibr <wf <£rben $reube fudjt ; 
3n^urft»eili £ad)en, epielen, ©cfjerfsen: 
iinb eurem ©£>££ nidjt bringet gruc&e. 
3f$, t^ut boo) @eeten, tbut Doc^ 33uf I 
©onjl fa&it ior in bie ginflermifi. 

io. @ut $adjt r eudj mit einanber <ttfett< 
S)u falfcfjc, bofe, arge 2Belt ; 
$)<«} euer Zhnn mir nic^t gefaOTcit, 
$at end) metn 5BanbeI ftorgejleilt: 
SEBdr folcfje* nt&t burcf) ©Ottc« $tt<rtv 
©cfjon e&'r oef^e^tt/ tbdr* Jtty ju (pat 




TRANSLATION OF 

THE SCHUL-ORDNUNG 



A 

Simple and Thoroughly Prepared 

School-Management 



Clearly setting forth not only in what manner chil- 
dren may best be taught in the branches usually 
given at school, but also how they may 
be well instructed in the knowl- 
edge of godliness. 



Prepared out of love for mankind by the skilful schoolmaster 
of many years experience, 



Christopher Dock 



And through the efforts of several friends of the 
common good authorized to be printed. 



German town: 

Printed by, and to be had of, Christopher Saur, 1 770 



PUBLISHER'S PREFACE 

Beloved Reader: 

It is, beyond dispute, one of the first duties of 
parents and rulers to rear and rule their children 
and subjects in the fear of God. This, above all else, 
requires our greatest diligence and care in a two- 
fold, yea, threefold manner: 

First, we shall look upon them as precious gifts 
which God has entrusted to us, not only that we 
should pla}^ with them and have in them our temporal 
delights, but that we are under obligation to exert 
every effort to bring them up in the nurture and 
admonition of the Lord. (Ephes. vi, 4.) Knowing 
that we shall be called to account for all that is given 
us, for unto Avhomsoever much is given, whatever it 
may be, of him shall much be required. (Luke xii, 
48.) A pious teacher writes that parents may earn 
heaven or hell by their children, just as they bring 
them up. 

Second, in addition to this, therefore, is required 
not only a formal admonition ; "Not so, my children, 
do not such evil things, ' ' as did the old priest Eli in 
I Saml. ii, 23, etc., nor with constant nagging or 
beating whereby children are incensed to anger, but 
rather an earnest admonition to the Lord, with 
sound punishment if these admonitions are not suf- 
ficient to suppress evil, and a good, steadfast life in 
godliness ; for bad examples ruin more than all good 
precepts combined can build up. Children keep a 

91 



92 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

sharp eye on those who are set over them, be they 
parents or teachers. 

Third, in order not to offend one of these little 
ones, a thing which is fraught with such severe pun- 
ishment (Matth. xviii, 6, 10), we require untiring 
prayer for ourselves and for the gifts entrusted to 
us, that God may add His blessing that they may be 
brought up to His glory. Even if we were to apply 
all diligence in planting good seed in our youth by 
good teaching, and water it by careful training, yet 
God must give it strength, or it will not flourish. 
For we cannot give our children other hearts, but 
God can. Therefore, we should earnestly continue to 
pray day and night and beseech Him for their sakes ; 
and when parents and teachers once make this their 
main object and greatest care, to bring up their chil- 
dren and those entrusted to them to the honor of God 
and to do with them as the Lord has already admon- 
ished the children of Israel in the Old Covenant (5th 
book of Moses vi, 6, 7), "And these words, which I 
command thee this day, shall be in thine heart : And 
thou shalt teach them diligently unto thy children, 
and shalt talk of them when thou sittest in thine 
house, and when thou walkest by the way, and when 
thou liest down, and when thou risest up. " Then in 
a few years we should see quite a different worid. 
And although it does not lie in the power of parents 
to give their children new hearts, their efforts would 
still not be in vain, but God would add His blessing 
to their diligence, and if with all their diligence and 
those wholesome admonitions some should fail, they 
have still saved their own souls. 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 93 

Ordinary life is similar to a household, the usual 
thing therein, be it orderly or disorderly, cleaves to 
the children throughout their lives, so that Solomon 
may well say in 22 Cap. v. 6, "Train up a child in the 
way he should go, and when he is old he will not 
depart from it. ' ' Can we not similarly plant early a 
fear of God; when at every opportunity vice is 
made hateful and virtue and love of God desirable 1 
Therefore parents should be especially careful of 
the company into which they send their children, 
and especially what teachers they choose for them ; 
for what they see and hear of these impresses itself 
deeply upon their tender spirits. 

This my beloved father saw clearly, and already 
almost twenty years ago he felt a desire to meet our 
wants, as far as possible, in this respect, and as he 
knew of a man whose whole desire was to seek the 
children's best advantage in body and soul, to teach 
godliness as well as the ordinary branches, and in 
accordance with the advice of the Apostle Paul (Tit. 
ii, 7), always showed himself a good example, and 
was also blessed with a natural gift, he was desirous 
of obtaining a written statement of his school man- 
agement that he might print and publish it, that 
other teachers who are anxious to instruct their 
children well and are not so richly gifted might find 
something in it to improve themselves. And for 
others, who care not whether the children learn any- 
thing or not, so long as they receive their pay, it 
should serve as a means of shaming them, when they 
see that parents too know how a well-planned school 
should be kept, and finally it is to teach the parents 



94 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

themselves Avhat to do with children whom they 
earnestly wish to teach something good, for many 
parents in this country are obliged to teach their 
children themselves, (and others should do so rather 
than send them to teachers whose lives are stained 
with vice). These and other considerations have 
induced my beloved father to write to one of his 
good friends, as may be seen from the following 
letter. 

Thus our good friend Dock was willing to write 
such a work, but when it was completed, he could 
not make up his mind to have it printed, because of 
a certain modesty, fearing that it would be looked 
upon as a monument to himself and thus be taken 
amiss. For this reason he was unwilling for it to 
be published during his lifetime, and it therefore lay 
nineteen years, until a few friends of the common 
good begged him persistently to have it published. 
Finally he yielded, and in the year just passed it was 
given me to publish. After reading it, and finding 
much pleasure therein, I consented to print it, but 
before I could attend to the work, the MS. was 
mislaid that I knew not how to find it again, and I 
feared that it had been sold as plain paper, so that I 
advertised in the newspaper for its return and 
offered a reward to the finder. When it still re- 
mained undiscovered, some people cherished evil 
thoughts, charging me with willfully putting it out 
of the way on account of some possible distasteful 
features in it. This I was forced to bear for some 
time, and had nothing to justify me but my good 
conscience. However, the author was not unhappy 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 95 

over the delay, and sent me a letter begging me not 
to worry over the loss of the MS., that it had never 
been his intention to have it published during his 
lifetime, and so he was quite well satisfied that it 
was lost. But when, as it seemed, I had borne my 
disgrace long enough, the MS. was finally found, in 
a spot where my men and I had repeatedly looked 
for it searchingly without noticing it, after having 
been lost for more than a year. So I have been 
unwilling to make any further delay, and here I 
give it to you, dear reader, as the honest, benevolent 
author wrote it, for the good of all who may read 
and profit by it. I hope no harm has been done by 
its having lain so long, for perhaps those who would 
have read it then would have laid it by and forgotten 
it by this time, and in our day it is as important as 
then, or more so. For experience teaches, that as 
the end of time draws nigh, so carelessness toward 
the good increases, and mankind is in godly things 
so careless and so indifferent to profitable instruc- 
tion as was scarcely the case in the time of Noe, of 
which it is said : ' ' They heeded it not. ' ' And we see 
that almost everywhere children are far more care- 
fully instructed in the equality of the world and 
useless things than in useful duties that stimulate to 
godliness. 

That this little work may serve the purpose for 
which it was first written and compiled by the 
author, and having been delayed so long may be 
received with the greater attention, is the sincere 
wish of your faithful friend who has at heart the 
welfare of all men. Christopher Saur. 

Germantovvn, March 27, 1770. 



96 THE WOEKS OF CHEISTOPHER DOCK 

OCCASION FOR WRITING 
THIS LITTLE BOOK 

Feiend Dielman Kolb : 

The thought has frequently occurred to me, gone 
and returned, that you should (if you have the time 
in the future) some time write down for me the art 
and method employed in keeping school by our 
friend Dock. How he receives the children into 
school. How he manages various children in differ- 
ent ways. How he treats them kindly and lovingly 
that they both fear and love him. That they love 
one another. Also of their letter-writing. How 
he trains them to maintain silence. How he uses 
shame as an incentive to teach diligence. Also how 
he draws childlike pictures for them to practice. In 
fine, I should like to have you describe it to me 
briefly or at length, in such a manner that if he 
should depart this life we could give a just descrip- 
tion of him, partly for the glory of God and partly 
for the instruction of other schoolmasters and of 
their successors, how it is possible to educate the 
youth. This I think would be well worth printing, 
during his life-time if he be willing, or afterward. 
At least I should like to send it to Germany if he 
should be unwilling to see it printed during his life. 
I consider it important, for it is desirable to know 
how to instruct children in letters and religion. 
While you could not use your pen I have gladly 
excused you, but now you have no such excuse as 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 97 

you had when you were ill. I have mentioned only 
a few points that chanced to occur to me. You can 
enlarge upon it, and I think there is nothing in his 
conduct toward children and adults but is worthy 
of consideration. I send my heartiest regards to 
you and your wife and remain indebted to you in 
love and service. 

Christopher Sattr. 

Geemantown, Aug. 3, 1750. 



AUTHOR'S PREFACE 

Sollford, Aug. 8, 1750. 

Salutem, Esteemed Friend : 

With present writing will say that I was to-day, 
for a definite purpose, called upon to visit Friend 
Dielman Kolb, who told me that he is in receipt of a 
letter from Friend Christopher Saur, in which he 
inquires, in general, as to my school management, 
concerning which he would like to know, not only 
the art and method by which I receive the children, 
but also how I keep order among them. Then 
Friend Dielman explained to me thus: He would 
like to undertake such a labor of love for his Friend 
Saur, but as he is not thoroughly acquainted with 
my methods he is, therefore, not able to comply with 
Friend Saur's request in a satisfactory manner. 
Therefore he has begged me to take the burden upon 
my shoulders and make a report, to gratify Saur's 
wishes. This I am not able to refuse altogether on 
account of my love for Friend Saur and Friend 
Dielman, but I find many difficulties in a matter of 
this kind which I should like, first of all, to explain. 

As regards reporting upon the questions that 
Friend Saur has put to Friend Dielman and the 
latter to me, I could easily answer them, seeing that 
my daily dealings with youth are known to me better 
than to another. But the difficulty is this : that it 
would appear as though I were trying to build up 
for myself a reputation, testimonial or unsavory 

. 99 

LOFC. 



100 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

monument, which, if it were indeed true, would de- 
serve before God and all pious, Christian people, not 
honor, but rather ridicule and shame, and could not 
conduce to my soul's welfare and salvation. It 
would only be food for self-love. But may the Lord 
keep this far from me, for many pious hearts have 
been attacked by this robber and have lost what they 
had attained in the grace of God. For example, take 
even wise Solomon himself, who had not his equal in 
wisdom, riches, honor and glory, all of which and 
more he obtained from the Lord by prayer. In time 
he had through divine grace risen so high in knowl- 
edge, wisdom and understanding, that none was his 
equal; he flourished like a tree by the rivers of 
water. Of his wisdom and what he accomplished 
by it we may read at length in the first book of 
Kings, third to tenth chapters. Yet, after Solomon 
allowed self-love to conquer him, this beautiful tree 
still stood in honor and glory, but self-love had bred 
so many nests of caterpillars that many of Solo- 
mon's first fruits were withered, which displeased 
God, as may be read in I Kings xi. 

In my dealings with youth, this is of all my 
duties the heaviest burden upon my heart, and it 
outweighs everything else, call it what you may, 
namely this: How I may rule and conduct my 
household that I may some day receive a gracious 
testimonial from the great Shepherd of the sheep, 
who entrusted the young lambs to me through 
twenty-six years. They were really entrusted to me 
thirty-six years, by an occupation that no one knows 
better than I. But in this country I neglected that 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 101 

profession for ten years, for which I often felt the 
smiting hand of God, which before then had served 
me well. May the Lord graciously overlook my 
neglect of the youth during that time. 

Further regarding the work asked of me, I 
stand here as in a deep valley, with a high mountain 
range before me, and I would much rather end my 
few remaining days down here in the valley, in the 
simplicity of life, God being willing, than climb the 
mountain. I hope my friend will be able to under- 
stand me. But as my friend's interest in this matter 
is the glory of God, and the good education of youth, 
I can and will not refuse to add what is in my feeble 
power. Especially as I shall soon, though only God 
knows when, leave this mortal habitation. O, it 
should be the supreme desire of every one to pro- 
mote the glory of God and the common good, for this 
can make us happy here and in eternity. Holy 
Script tells us in so many places to do this. For the 
sake of brevity I shall quote only St. Peter's words 
(I Peter iv, 10, 11), "As every man hath received 
the gift even so minister the same one to another, as 
good stewards of the manifold grace of God. If any 
man speak let him speak as the oracles of God; if 
any man minister, let him do it as of the ability 
which God giveth; that God in all things may be 
glorified through Jesus Christ; to whom be praise 
and dominion for ever and ever. Amen. ' ' 

Beloved friend, this admonition of the Apostle 
binds me for the glory of God to serve my neighbor 
with the gift that God has given me, as I wish to be 
considered a faithful steward before God, this being 



102 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

as aforesaid the aim toward which I strive, and to 
obtain which is dearer to me than all that is visible. 
As I know that I can do nothing of my own strength 
without God's help and the strength of His Holy 
Spirit, and that my best work is incomplete, I give 
my school management to my friend on this condi- 
tion: should he find anything therein that would 
serve for the glory of God or the assistance of 
others, let him put it where it belongs, and render 
unto God what is God's. (Psalm cxv, 1.) Also, if 
my friend during my life-time can give to me or my 
pupils any useful directions (that will add to the 
glory of God) I am willing and duty-bound to accept 
the same with love. 

Now to arrive at the request of Friend Dielman, 
I could begin at once, but as Friend Christopher 
Saur asked of Dielman a report of everything, in- 
cluding the correspondence of the pupils with one 
another, I must give Friend Saur an explanation 
of this latter, so that when we come to it, he may 
be enlightened. 

After I had, as stated above, given up the school 
at Skippack which I had taught for ten years, and 
lived ten years in the country, doing farming ac- 
cording to my limited ability, various opportunities 
for teaching presented themselves, until finally I 
began teaching again, in the two townships of Skip- 
pack and Sollf ord, three days weekly in each school. 
But I was already acquainted with keeping school 
in this county, and knew that it is very different 
from methods in Germany, where the schools stand 
upon such pillars as the common man cannot well 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 103 

overthrow. Then when I considered the duties of 
the profession, and firmly determined to carry out 
all these duties, I also saw the degenerate condi- 
tion of youth, and the many wrongs of this world 
by which adults spoil and distress youth. And I 
saw not only my own unworthiness, but also the 
unequal ability of parents in the training of 
their children, for while some seek the salva- 
tion of their children in precept and example, 
and do all in their power to promote the glory 
of God and the good of their children, others 
are quite the opposite. They teach their chil- 
dren evil by their own example, and thus the 
teacher must counteract this influence and be stern 
toward such unruly pupils. This readily gives a 
teacher the reputation of being partial. It is said 
that he is more severe with one child than with 
another. This indeed he must be, for the children's 
sake, that good children may not be ruined by bad 
ones. Otherwise it is of course a teacher's duty to 
be impartial. The poor beggar child, scurfy, ragged 
and lousy, if otherwise it have a good disposition 
and willingness to learn, should be as dear to him 
though he never receive a penny for it in this world, 
as the child of wealth from whom he expects good 
remuneration. The rich reward for the poor child 
will come in the next world. In fact, it would take 
too long to enumerate all the duties of a schoolmas- 
ter. But it would take still longer to enumerate his 
troubles. Considering all this, I early discovered 
that if I wished to accomplish good among children 
I must daily with David, lift up my eyes to the 



104 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

mountains for help (Psalm cxxi) if I wished to do 
good work in the world as it exists, and so I re- 
entered this work and have thus far remained in it. 
I often wish I could have accomplished more, but I 
thank God for helping me to do as much as I did. 

Concerning Friend Saur's first question, how I 
receive the children at school, I proceed as follows : 
the child is first given a welcome by the other chil- 
dren, who extend their hands to him. Then I ask him 
if he will be diligent and obedient. If he promises 
this, he is told how to behave ; and when he can say 
his ABC's and point out each letter with his index 
finger, he is put into the Ab. When he reaches this 
class his father owes him a penny, and his mother 
must fry him two eggs for his diligence, and the 
same reward is due him with each advance; for 
instance, when he enters the word class. But when 
he enters the reading class, I owe him a present, if 
he reaches the class in the required time and has been 
diligent, and the first day this child comes to school 
he receives a note stating : "Diligent. One pence." 
This means that he has been admitted to the school ; 
but it is also explained to him that if he is lazy or 
disobedient his note is taken from him. Continued 
disinclination to learn and stubbornness causes the 
pupil to be proclaimed lazy and inefficient before the 
whole class, and he is told that he belongs in a school 
for incorrigibles. Then I ask the child again if he 
will be diligent and obedient. Answering yes, he is 
shown his place. If it is a boy, I ask the other boys, 
if a girl, I ask the girls, who among them will take 
care of this new child and teach it. According to 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 105 

the extent to which the child is known, or its pleas- 
ant or unpleasant appearance, more or less children 
express their willingness. If none apply, I ask who 
will teach this child for a certain time for a bird or a 
writing-copy. Then it is seldom difficult to get a re- 
sponse. This is a description of my way of receiving 
the child into school. 

Further report concerning the assembling of the 
children at school: 

The children arrive as they do because some have 
a great distance to school, others a short distance, so 
that the children cannot assemble as punctually as 
they can in a city. Therefore, when a few children 
are present, those who can read their Testament sit 
together on one bench ; but the boys and girls occupy 
separate benches. They are given a chapter which 
they read at sight consecutively. Meanwhile I write 
copies for them. Those who have read their passage 
of Scripture without error take their places at the 
table and write. Those who fail have to sit at the 
end of the bench, and each new arrival the same ; as 
each one is thus released in order he takes up his 
slate. This process continues until they have all 
assembled. The last one left on the bench is a "lazy 
pupil." 

When all are together, and examined, whether 
they are washed and combed, they sing a psalm or 
a morning hymn, and I sing and pray with them. 
As much as they can understand of the Lord's 
Prayer and the ten commandments (according to 
the gift God has given them), I exhort and admon- 
ish them accordingly. This much concerning the 



106 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

assembling of pupils. But regarding prayer I will 
add this additional explanation. Children say the 
prayers taught them at home half articulately, and 
too fast, especially the "Our Father" which the 
Lord Himself taught His disciples and which con- 
tains all that we need. I therefore make a practice 
of saying it for them kneeling, and they kneeling 
repeat it after me. After these devotional exer- 
cises those who can write resume their work. Those 
who cannot read the Testament have had time 
during the assemblage to study their lesson. These 
are heard recite immediately after prayer. Those 
who know their lesson receive an O on the hand, 
traced with crayon. This is a mark of excellence. 
Those who fail more than three times are sent back 
to study their lesson again. When all the little ones 
have recited, these are asked again, and any one 
having failed in more than three trials a second 
time, is called "Lazy" by the entire class and his 
name is written down. Whether such a child fear 
the rod or not, I know from experience that this 
denunciation of the children hurts more than if I 
were constantly to wield and flourish the rod. If 
then such a child has friends in school who are able 
to instruct him and desire to do so, he will visit more 
frequently than before. For this reason: if the 
pupil's name has not been erased before dismissal 
the pupils are at liberty to write down the names of 
those who have been lazy, and take them along home. 
But if the child learns his lesson well in the future, 
his name is again presented to the other pupils, and 
they are told that he knew his lesson well and failed 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 107 

in no respect. Then all the pupils call " Diligent" 
to him. When this has taken place his name is 
erased from the slate of lazy pupils, and the former 
transgression is forgiven. 

The children who are in- the spelling class are 
daily examined in pronunciation. In spelling, when 
a word has more than one syllable, they must repeat 
the whole word, but some, while they can say the 
letters, cannot pronounce the word, and so cannot 
be put to reading. For improvement a child must 
repeat the lesson, and in this way : The child gives 
me the book, I spell the word and he pronounces it. 
If he is slow, another pupil pronounces it for him, 
and in this way he hears how it should be done, and 
knows that he must follow the letters and not his 
own fancy. 

Concerning ABC pupils, it would be best, hav- 
ing but one child, to let it learn one row of letters at 
a time, to say forward and backward. But with 
many, I let them learn the alphabet first, and then 
ask a child to point out a letter that I name. If a 
child is backward or ignorant, I ask another, or the 
whole class, and the first one that points to the 
right letter, I grasp his finger and hold it until I 
have put a mark opposite his name. I then ask for 
another letter, &c. Whichever child has during the 
day received the greatest number of marks, has 
pointed out the greatest number of letters. To him 
I owe something — a flower drawn on paper or a bird. 
But if several have the same number, we draw lots ; 
this causes less annoyance. In this way not only are 
the very timid cured of their shyness (which is a 



108 THE WOBKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

great hindrance in learning), but a fondness for 
school is increased. Thus much in answer to his 
question, how I take the children into school, how 
school proceeds before and after prayers, and how 
the inattentive and careless are made attentive and 
careful, and how the timid are assisted. 

Further I will state that when the little ones 
have recited for the first time, I give the Testament 
pupils a verse to learn. Those reading newspapers 
and letters sit separately, and those doing sums sit 
separately. But when I find that the little ones are 
good enough at their reading to be fit to read the 
Testament, I offer them to good Testament readers 
for instruction. The willing teacher takes the pupil 
by the hand and leads him to his seat. I give them 
two verses to try upon. But if I find that another 
exercise is necessary after this (such as finding a 
passage in Scripture, or learning a passage, in which 
case each reads a verse), I give only one verse, which 
is not too hard for those trying to read in the Testa- 
ment. If pupils are diligent and able, they are given 
a week's trial, in which time they must learn their 
lesson in the speller with the small pupils and also 
their lesson with the Testament pupil. If they stand 
the test they are advanced the next week from the 
spelling to the Testament class, and they are also 
allowed to write. But those who fail in the Testa- 
ment remain a stated time in the ABC class before 
they are tested again. After the Testament pupils 
have recited, the little ones are taken again. This 
done they are reminded of the chapter read them, 
and asked to consider the teaching therein. As it is 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 109 

the case that this thought is also expressed in other 
passages of Holy Writ, these are found and read, 
and then a hymn is given containing the same teach- 
ing. If time remains, all are given a short passage 
of Scripture to learn. This done, they must show 
their writing exercises. These are examined and 
numbered, and then the first in turn is given a hard 
word to spell. If he fails the next must spell it and 
so on. The one to spell correctly receives his exer- 
cise. Then the first is given another hard word, and 
so each receives his exercise by spelling a word 
correctly. 

As the children carry their dinner, an hour's 
liberty is given them after dinner. But as they are 
usually inclined to misapply their time if one is not 
constantly with them, one or two of them must read 
a story of the Old Testament (either from Moses 
and the Prophets, or from Solomon's or Sirach's 
Proverbs), while I write copies for them. This 
exercise continues during the noon hour. 

It is also to be noted that children find it neces- 
sary to ask to leave the room, and one must permit 
them to do this, not wishing the uncleanness and 
odor in the school. But the clamor to go out would 
continue all day, and sometimes without need, so 
that occasionally two or three are out at the same 
time, playing. To prevent this I have driven a nail 
in the door-post, on which hangs a wooden tag. Any 
one needing to leave the room looks for the tag. If 
it is on the nail, this is his permit to go out without 
asking. He takes the tag out with him. If another 
wishes to leave, he does not ask either, but stands by 



110 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

the door until the first returns, from whom he takes 
the tag and goes. If the tag is out too long, the one 
wishing to go inquires who was out last, and from 
him it can be ascertained to whom he gave the tag, 
so that none can remain out too long. 

To teach the uninitiated numbers and figures, I 
write on the blackboard (which hangs where all can 
see) these figures 

1234567890 
far apart, that other figures can be put before and 
behind them. Then I put an before the 1 and 
explain that this does not increase the number. 
Then I erase the and put it after the 1, so that it 
makes 10. If two ciphers follow it makes 100, if 
three follow, 1000, &c. This I show them through 
all the digits. This done I affix to the 1 another 1, 
making 11. But if an is put between it makes 101, 
but if it be placed after, it makes 110. In a similar 
manner I go through all the digits. When this is 
done I give them something to find in the Testament 
or hymnal. Those who are quickest have something 
to claim for their diligence, from me or at home. 

As it is desirable for intelligent reading to take 
note of commas, but as the inexperienced find this 
difficult, I have this rule : If one of the Testament 
pupils does not read on, but stops before he reaches 
a comma or period, this counts one-fourth failure. 
Similarly if one reads over a comma, it is one-fourth 
failure. Repeating a word counts one-half. Then 
all failures are noted, and especially where each one 
has failed. When all have read, all those who have 
failed must step forward and according to the num- 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 111 

ber of errors stand in a row. Those who have not 
failed move up, and the others take the lowest 
positions. 

Regarding the correspondence, I may say that 
for twelve years I kept two schools, as already said, 
and for four summers (during the three months that 
1 had free owing to the harvest) I taught school at 
Germantown. Then the pupils in Skippack, when 
I went to Sollford, gave me letters, and when I re- 
turned, the Sollford pupils did likewise. It was so 
arranged that pupils of equal ability corresponded. 
When one became his correspondent's superior, he 
wrote to another whose equal he tried to be. 

The superscription was only this : My friendly 
greeting to N. N. The- contents of the letter con- 
sisted of a short rhyme, or a passage from Scripture, 
and they told something of their school exercises 
(their motto for the week and where it is described, 
&c). Sometimes one would give the other a ques- 
tion to be answered by a passage of Scripture. I 
doubt not, if two schoolmasters (dwelling in one 
place or not) loving one another and desiring their 
pupils to love one another, were to do this in the love 
of Glod, it would bear fruit. 

This is a piecemeal description of how children 
are taught letters, and how their steps are led from 
one degree to the next, before they can be brought 
to the aim that we have in view to the glory of God 
and for their own salvation, and which will be last 
discussed. 

Now regarding his second question : How differ- 
ent children need different treatment, and how ac- 



112 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

cording to the greatness of the offense punishment 
must be increased or lessened. 

I should gladly tell my friend all of this truly, 
but as the subject is such a broad one, I really do 
not know where to begin or end. This is because the 
wickedness of youth exhibits itself in so many ways, 
and the offenses which are taught them by those 
older than themselves are so various, and as God 
Himself declares : (I Moses viii, 21) "For the imag- 
ination of man's heart is evil from his youth," so 
that from this impure spring (unless by constant 
effort the bad is suppressed and rooted out) there is 
little hope of improvement. Corruption is so great, 
and increases daily in so many ways, that I am con- 
vinced that it is impossible to do anything of one's 
own power. Where the Lord does not help build, all 
that build work in vain. The slap of the hand, hazel 
branch and birch rod are means of preventing 
wicked outburst, but they cannot change the stub- 
born heart, which holds us all in such sway since the 
fall, that we are all inclined more to the bad than 
to the good, so long as the heart is unchanged and 
not renewed by the spirit of God. But while the 
seed of wickedness is present, it could not grow if 
we were convinced of its presence, and strove ear- 
nestly to remove it, not only from ourselves, but 
from our fellow man and from our youth. As this 
old evil and serpent's sting is the same in all, we all 
are enabled to seek earnestly the same surgeon and 
apply the means of recovery which He prescribes 
for such evil, to ourselves and our youth. For with- 
out recovery we cannot reach peace, for the worm 



TEANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 113 

that forever gnaws our conscience through the ser- 
pent's sting leads to eternal damnation. May Grocl 
mercifully assist us all, that we may not neglect the 
promise to enter into His rest, and none of us re- 
main behind. Amen. 

Because, as has been said, it would take too long 
to enumerate all cases, I shall give my friend only a 
few, together with the means that I have sought to 
apply. But these means cannot cure the damage. 
The Lord of Lords, who holds all in His hand, and 
for whose help we need much to pray in such cases, 
deserves all the praise if we see improvement. 

First, among many children swearing or curs- 
ing is so common, expressing itself variously in so 
many wicked words. If this evil is not warded off, 
such sour "leaven leavens the whole lump," there- 
fore such children are carefully examined, whether 
they understand what they are saying. As it is fre- 
quently very evident that they do not, they are asked 
whether they have thought of the words themselves 
or have heard them; they usually reply that they 
heard them from So and So. If asked why they 
say it also, the answer is usually again, because So 
and So said it. Thus often ignorance is shown. 
They do not know why they are saying it. To such 
it must be explained that they must guard against 
such words; that they are against God's will and 
command. If they hear So and So use them, they 
shall tell that person that he or she is doubly sinning, 
for they got into trouble in school by repeating the 
words. If such children then promise not to use 
the words again, they go free the first time. But if 



114 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

after being warned they persist in the bad habit, 
after being certain that the accusation is true, they 
are put upon the punishment seat, with the yoke on 
their neck, as a sign of punishment. On promising 
to be good in the future they escape with a few slaps. 
If they again offend, the punishment is increased, 
and they must furnish surety. The oftener the 
offense, the more bondsmen. These bondsmen's 
business is to warn and remind the offender and 
prevent repetition. This is the rein and the bit to 
be put into their mouths for such offense, but the 
change of heart must come from a higher hand, and 
must be sought with diligent prayer. The import 
of God's word must also be explained to the offender 
and the other pupils. What great weight is in all 
this (if one persist and is found guilty to the end) 
and that man must render an account of himself, on 
the judgment day, of every idle word spoken. Such 
passages they must look up and read, and for their 
further instruction they are given a song or a psalm 
to learn. 

Perhaps Pennsylvania was not infected by this 
contagious and wicked plague as early as some other 
countries that are long harassed with bloody war, 
where rough and unmannered soldiers have neither 
propriety nor decency, but do all sorts of wicked 
things in word and deed, without fear of God or 
man. The poor innocent children are hereby in- 
fected, and cursing and swearing become so common 
that many do not consider it a sin, even by adults. 
Children repeat such things, they are we know born 
mto the world without the power of speech, so that 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 115 

we cannot blame them for bringing the use of such 
wicked words with them. O, no! the words they 
hear they learn to speak, they do not understand 
them, and do not know whether the word is good or 
evil. And as this country has been divinely pro- 
tected from war thus far, and many of the first set- 
tlers were people who walked in the presence of 
God, little of this was heard among us. But a 
greater number of people coming to this country 
bring a greater quantity of this ware with them, and 
while it is not recognized as merchant's ware, it is 
still distributed and more generally used, to the 
great disadvantage of youth. 

Secondly, the deep-seated wickedness of youth is 
exhibited in this way. When they have done a 
wrong, and are questioned regarding it, they usually 
try to cover it by a lie. Which, if it is not seriously 
punished and earnest effort made to eradicate such 
snake poison, leads to their destruction in time and 
eternity. Therefore parents and schoolmasters, in 
so far as they seek to promote the welfare and salva- 
tion of the poor children, must act betimes to pre- 
vent lying. To be sure, this wicked habit is very 
old. It exhibited itself directly after the fall, in 
Adam's first-born son, Cain, when he was asked to 
account for his great sin against Abel, his pious 
brother. Glod asked him, " Where is thy brother, 
Abel % ' ' and he answered contrary to his knowledge 
and conscience: "I know not, am I my brother's 
keeper V (I Moses iv, 9.) From this we see that this 
snake poison was manifest soon after the fall, and 
still bears fruit of death and destruction, which will 



116 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

be hard for parents and schoolmasters to account 
for if they do not seriously endeavor to keep their 
children from it. How near this is to my heart, none 
knows better than I. An accompanying song for 
pupils will reveal it in part. The Lord Jesus Him- 
self testifies that the devil is the father of lies. 
(John viii, 44.) At His time the Scribes and Phari- 
sees, while having the external appearance of piety, 
did things not for the glory of G-od, but for their 
own glory, and colored their cause with lies against 
truth, for which Christ said to them, as the verse 
tells us: "Ye are of your father the devil and the 
lusts of your father ye will do ; he was a murderer 
from the beginning, and abode not in the truth be- 
cause there is no truth in him. When he speaketh 
a lie, he speaketh of his own, for he is a liar, and the 
father of it." Such are Lord Jesus' own words. 
John the Baptist calls them for the same reason a 
generation of vipers, as may be seen in Matthew iii, 
7. Read also and consider earnestly the twenty- 
third chapter of Matthew, and you shall find what 
woes follow lying and selfish actions. The last ex- 
pression of the woes is described in the thirty-third 
verse: "Ye serpents, ye generation of vipers, how 
can ye escape the damnation of hell?" 

As I have said, by weeding out such bad twigs 
and plants from our children, and planting good 
things in their stead, then earnestly exhorting God 
to add growth to their watering, there is hope of 
doing some good. For the children themselves are 
always most to be pardoned, for they are as wax 
that can be pressed into any shape. But if such evil 



TEANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 117 

root is permitted to branch and grow, similar fruits 
will appear on the grown tree, I mean the grown 
man, that belong to woe and hell fire. For the kind 
of fruit is in the root, and the tree that does not 
bring forth good fruit is hewn down and cast into 
the fire. Now a lie is one of the fruits that belong 
in the fire. It is also the hiding place in which other 
sins conceal themselves. That a deceiver may con- 
tinue his deceit and yet appear an honest man, he 
adorns his cause with lies. That a harlot may keep 
the name of being a virgin, she employs lies. A thief, 
murderer or adulterer does likewise, and if there is 
not sufficient clear evidence his crime is so covered 
by lies that he may still remain honest in the sight 
of the world. But if, while there is time for grace, 
such sins are not admitted, such hiding place can 
hide nothing, the end will have to bear the burden. 
For who denies his sins will not succeed, but he who 
admits and discontinues them, will obtain mercy. 
(Solomon ii, 13 ; I John i, 8, 9.) 

Regarding the means of preventing these out- 
breaks, I see that it is beyond human power to exter- 
minate the root. Grod alone through the power of 
His Holy Spirit must do this. Still it is the duty of 
preachers, directors, parents and schoolmasters to 
work diligently on themselves, their fellow man and 
children, to hate this sullied coat of the flesh, and to 
remove it, as much as by the grace of Grod is in their 
power. And it is my opinion that the first and most 
important means is to pray for God's help. As 
children are ignorant and foolish and do not under- 
stand the enormity of it, we need to remind them 



118 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

earnestly and lovingly: what qualities lead us to 
God, and which lead us away; which have within 
them the odor of life unto life and which that of 
death unto death. How good qualities come from 
the good and eventually return to it, how similarly 
evil comes of evil and leads back to it, and that good 
is rewarded with good and evil with evil. That God 
is the highest good and the source of all good. But 
Satan is the source of all evil, and as God is a God 
of truth, so Satan is the father of lies. For this 
reason we must love truth, and work truth in words 
and deeds, if we would go to heaven and be forever 
happy, for the reward of liars is hell and the fiery 
pit. Having taught such things we are also bound 
to make them acquainted with the passages in Holy 
Writ that testify to this. Further we must warn 
them if they wish to be happy they must avoid this 
wrong, for if they carelessly or perhaps intention- 
ally disobey this command they will be punished 
for the good of their souls. If after this the pupil is 
found to trespass, and denies his guilt, the punish- 
ment is divided into two parts, and the lie is first 
and hardest punished, also for a lie no bondsman is 
accepted. For the original offense, according to its 
nature, the punishment is lessened by surety, or 
without bondsman may even be deferred on promise 
of reform. Also after punishment, the punishments 
threatened by Holy "Writ are reiterated. 

Stealing is also exhibited early in some children, 
and when caught in the act they usually try to lie ; 
telling that one or the other gave it to them, or that 
they found it. And often the evidence becomes so 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 119 

confused that one has work enough to straighten it 
out. I have this rule for its prevention : No pupils 
are allowed to give away or exchange anything with- 
out the previous knowledge of myself or their 
parents, be it at school, at home or on the road ; and 
if they find anything they should give it to me, for 
it is not theirs if an owner can be found. If no one 
claims it for a certain time after being found, it 
belongs to the finder. In this manner I have suc- 
ceeded, thank God, in reducing punishments for this 
offense to a minimum. 

Greed for honor is exhibited among children, 
though not to such extent as among adults, in whom 
it has often led, for the sake of a title or an honor, 
to great war and bloodshed, not only among those in 
high places, but among people of low degree. Much 
quarrel arises from it; indeed the little word 
"thou" * often creates quarrel and even riot; but 
among children the evil is much more easily gov- 
erned. If a child persists in occupying a seat higher 
than the one he has deserved through merit in read- 
ing, writing, &c, and tries to crowd out the rightful 
occupant, he is placed at the tail of the class, as a 
warning to the other pupils, and must stay there 
until he has worked his way up. When the children 
realize this, the evil is easily remedied. But who 
will humiliate adults, if they will not humble them- 
selves, as Christ teaches? (Matth. xx, 26, 27; Chap, 
xxiii, 12; Luke xiv, 11; Chap, xviii, 14.) 

In the matter of quarrels, children are also much 



* A German resents " Du," the familiar form of address, from a 
stranger, especially one of lower rank. 



120 THE WOEKS OF CHEISTOPHER DOCK 

more easily appeased than adults. When children 
become angered at school or on the way there, and it 
is shown that both combatants are wrong, each one's 
fault is pointed out and the punishment for each 
defined, and also meted out if they are unwilling to 
make peace. Thereupon they are placed together 
on the punishment seat, apart from the other chil- 
dren until they are willing to make up; if not, 
deserved punishment will follow. But it rarely 
happens that they are put on the punishment seat. 
They prefer shaking hands, and then the case is 
adjusted. If this were the case among adults, and 
if they were as willing to forgive and forget, 

By lawsuits no purses depleted would be, 
And lawyers would never wax rich on their fee. 
Gnawing conscience would come to rest, 
"With love and peace life would be blest ; 
Much less of ache and dole 
For heart and soul. 

I am further asked how I teach the children to 
refrain from talking, and train them to silence. To 
this I reply, that it is the hardest lesson for children 
to learn, and they would hardly do it of their own 
free will. It takes them long to learn to speak, and 
having learned they are loath to give up the privi- 
lege. But nothing more edifying can be taught chil- 
dren than that there is a time to speak and a time to 
keep silent, and none more difficult to instil. Indeed, 
it would seem that we grown ones have not learned 
this lesson too well ourselves, for we should often be 
more careful when to speak and when to keep 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 121 



silence. And the little organ, the tongue, is not 
easily tamed, nor can one punish it with the rod, as 
other organs. And the mischief done by words is 
done through the tongue, according to the constitu- 
tion of the heart (Matth. xii, 25). Although often 
the talking done among children is not due to evil 
intention, nothing can be accomplished unless talk- 
ing and silence each have their time. I have devised 
several means, all of which worked for a time, but 
not permanently, so that something new had to be 
tried. My method is as follows : 

First, when the lesson is assigned, they learn it, 
after the custom of this country and England, by 
repeating aloud. To keep them all at work I move 
among them until I think they have had time enough 
to learn the lesson. Then I rap with the rod on the 
blackboard and there is silence. I now ask the first 
to recite; meanwhile a monitor, who has been de- 
tailed to this duty, stands on a bench or other high 
place where he can see all and reports the Christian 
and surname of each one who talks, studies aloud or 
does anything else that is forbidden. He also writes 
the name down. As some use partiality in this 
work, those who have been proven to be untruthful 
are discharged from the work unless they apply, 
and promise to be honest. Also those who have been 
on the punishment seat for lying are not allowed to 
be monitors, unless they prove truthful through a 
period of time. Thus provided with a monitor, one 
can hear the lesson or go on with something else 
that is instructive, without interruption. When 
the work is over this may be forgotten. But if it is 



122 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

noticed that the talkers take advantage of being 
forgotten, those noted by the monitor must come 
forward and sit on the punishment bench, one by 
one. They are given their choice between wearing 
the yoke or a rap on the hand. Most of them extend 
their hand for the rod. 

This is the information asked for regarding the 
way I keep the children quiet, but it is by no means 
my intention to force this method upon any one else. 
Each must arrange his affairs in the best way that 
he can. But if my management written here by re- 
quest and not from choice, should be in any way 
objected to, because it differs from that of Germany 
and other places, I will say in defense, that condi- 
tions here are different. Among the free inhab- 
itants of Pennsylvania schools are differently con- 
stituted from those in Germany. For a schoolmaster 
there is definitely installed by the government, and 
the common man cannot readily remove him, hence 
he is in no great danger if he is too hard with chil- 
dren. Although I freely confess, even if I were thus 
installed by high authorities, I should still feel that 
the power to be hard with children was given me 
for their good. ISTow experience teaches that a timid 
child is harmed rather than benefited by harsh words 
or much application of the rod, and to improve it, 
other means must be employed. Likewise a stupid 
child is only harmed. A child that is treated to too 
much flogging at home is not benefited by it at 
school, but it is made still worse. If such children 
are to be helped, it must happen through other 
means. 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 123 

A stubborn child that does not fear to do wrong 
needs to be sharply punished with the rod, and also 
earnestly reminded of Grod's word, in the hope of 
reaching the heart. But the timid and stupid must 
be reached by other means that make them more free 
in spirit and more desirous to learn. When the chil- 
dren are brought thus far it is no longer difficult for 
teacher or pupil, and my colleagues will agree with 
me that the souls put in our keeping are very 
precious. We will be called to account for them by 
our God, and though we have the power to punish 
they would, I think, agree with me in saying that it 
is preferable to bring the children to do things from 
a love of doing than to force them by the rod. The 
words "Thou shalt and must" and the words "I 
obey gladly" are very different in sound. For the 
latter the master needs no rod, and it sounds sweeter 
and is easier to account for. In Psalm ex, 3, it is 
written : l ' Thy people shall be willing in the day of 
thy power, in the beauties of holiness. ' ' Now what 
is done willingly in body or soul is not in need of a 
rod. Again in Psalm xxxii, 8, 9, we read: "I will 
instruct thee and teach thee in the way which thou 
shalt go : I will guide thee with mine eye. Be ye not 
as the horse or as the mule, which have no under- 
standing ; whose mouth must be held in with bit and 
bridle, lest they come near unto thee." Here again 
we see that they who allow themselves to be taught 
and led with the eye have no need of a bit and a 
bridle. We can see this difference in senseless ani- 
mals. One driver does not employ half the shout- 
ing, spurring and whipping with his horses as an- 



124 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

other, and yet takes as heavy, yea heavier burden, 
over hill and dale. And when the work is done, the 
willing horses and also the teamster have had the 
easier time of it. 

Regarding my friend's question, how I treat the 
children with love that they both love and fear me, 
I will say that in this respect I cannot take the least 
credit upon myself, if I am at all successful with 
children, either in teaching or in performing re- 
ligious duties. First I owe God particular thanks, 
because besides calling me to this profession He 
has given me an extreme love of children. For if it 
were not for love it would be an unbearable burden 
to live among children. But love bears and never 
tires. If a natural mother did not love her children 
all the little incidents in the education of a child 
would be unbearably wearisome, but her love makes 
this burden light. When St. Paul explains his love 
to the congregation at Thessalonia he expresses it in 
the words of I Thes. ii, 1, 13. In verses 7 and 8, he 
compares his love to a mother's love when he says: 
"But we were gentle among you, even as a nurse 
cherisheth her children ; so being affectionately de- 
sirous of you, we were willing to have imparted unto 
you, not the gospel of God only, but also our own 
souls, because ye were dear unto us. ' ' My esteemed 
friend, these words of the Apostle express such love 
in that he was willing not only to impart the gospel, 
but his very life. But have all clergymen in this 
so-called Christendom from the time of the Apostles 
down, remained in this spirit? All have had a 
splendid example in the words of the Apostle just 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-OKDNUNG 125 



cited. Yea, lie calls to all of us and says : "Breth- 
ren, be followers together of me, and mark them 
which walk so as ye have us for an example" (Phil, 
iii, 17). But as it was at the time of the Apostles 
and how it is in our so-called Christendom those can 
see best whose spiritual eyes are opened, I will leave 
the question open, and comply with my friend's 
request, feeling certain that he means well for the 
children 's good. But suppose a mother felt like per- 
petuating her loving methods toward her children, 
and committed the same to a book, that after her 
death they might be continued, but the children 
should then receive another mother. She would be 
very likely to say to the children, your former 
mother raised you according to her ideas, I will 
follow mine. Then it would be of little use to the 
children that their mother wrote in pure love. Yet 
the mother did her part, even as St. Paul when he 
wrote : "Brethren, be followers together of me, and 
mark them which walk so as ye have us for an exam- 
ple." Now those who do not desire to do as told in 
the seventeenth verse, but prefer the opposite, as the 
Apostle, weeping, wrote in the eighteenth and nine- 
teenth verses, such follow their own ideas. Yet the 
Apostle had done his duty and had saved his soul. 

I have told the friend in answer to his question 
regarding my treatment of the children with love, 
that I can take no credit for it. Love is a gift of 
God. According as one desires it, it is given and 
according as one guards and uses it, so it can be 
increased or diminished. But perhaps it can be 
stated by what qualities one can help or hinder love, 



126 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

profit or lose by it. The divine footprints that we 
follow in seeking righteous love show us that it is 
universal and extends to all creatures. "He letteth 
his sun shine on the wicked and the good, and send- 
eth rain to the just and the unjust. ' ' To partake of 
the love of Grod man must follow these footprints. 
They will guide him in love, from one love to an- 
other by a consideration of creatures and protecting 
them. 

The great work of the redemption of the human 
race was also universal, and if we had accepted it 
universally, believed, and followed in love the foot- 
steps of Christ we would be firmly grounded in it. 
We would understand with the Saints the length 
and breadth, the depth and height of such endless 
love, and would know and realize that the love of 
Christ is better than all knowledge. All Christians 
are called upon to follow in Christ's footsteps, and 
to do this in love He has left us an example. (I 
Peter ii, 21; John xiii, 13-17, and other places.) 

But as we accept all this, yet follow the foot- 
prints of the world in lust of the eye and the flesh 
and vain life, we may hope for little growth in the 
love of God, be it whoever it may, no matter what 
his titles, and if he have the most Christian title in 
the world. "For whoever loveth the world loveth 
not the Father." (I John ii, 15.) The love of this 
world is not undefiled. Nor does it lead to a love of 
humanity. It leads only to what is mine or thine. 
So long as mine and thine are secure, the love of this 
world remains ; but should self-love and glory suffer, 
war and turmoil begin at once. 



TEANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 127 

The natural spark of love which God did not 
quench entirely after the fall, but exhibits in 
rational and irrational creatures according to their 
capacity, is in many ways weakened and suppressed 
by love of the world. I will only mention the nat- 
ural love among natural people. It leads to their 
union in marriage, and so long as the natural spark 
of life is maintained, such love is not lessened, but 
increased, so that they are more closely bound to- 
gether, produce children and support them together. 
For this is implanted in them in this natural love, 
even among heathens and such nations. For other- 
wise the human race could not multiply in an 
orderly manner. Irrational creatures are also im- 
bued with a natural love to feed their offspring. 
Christians have not only the natural spark to bring 
up their children, but also to bring them up in fear 
of God, according to commandments in the Old and 
the New Testament. And where such education is 
carried on in sincere love by parents and teachers, it 
will not be without blessing. For love, breeding and 
admonition to the Lord, form a three-fold cord that 
does not easily break. If parents and teachers have 
sincere parental love for children, it may be ex- 
pected that this will in turn produce a sincere filial 
love. When this love appears in the child, unless it 
is choked it may be expected to mature good fruit. 
But if liberty attempt to overpower this love and 
ignite it with wildfire, love, breeding and admonition 
to the Lord, as stated, must be used as a three-cord 
whip, then there is hope that love, fear and obedi- 
ence will result. But all through God's gracious 



128 THE "WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

blessing, help and assistance, for He must be begged 
to add growth to planting and watering. 

In God's grace and tender blessing 

All is safe and of much avail ; 
But without His help and succor 

The efforts of all men must fail. 

The murderer of souls seeks constantly to combat 
true love with his false Delilah, world-love, that in 
its lust is dead to the good, so that it seeks to extin- 
guish the natural spark of love left after the fall, 
and has succeeded in many eases. Then follows all 
ungodly conduct, piling up the wrath of God upon 
the day of wrath. It may be seen in the first world, 
and also in Sodom and Gomorrah, in Dathan and 
Abiram, as also in the destruction of Jerusalem and 
other places. What works of darkness have been 
done in times gone by ! Holy Writ tells us in many 
places. For brevity I shall mention only : Romans 
i, 18 to end; II Peter ii, 4-6; Jude 7. And what 
works of this kind are done in our own time, experi- 
ence tells us. 

When we weigh a Christian's duty, his matri- 
monial duties as well, we find that love must always 
be the standard, and where it is wanting there will 
be much wanting in order, in education and admoni- 
tion in the Lord, in the management of children, in 
parents and teachers. It is a true passage in Scrip- 
ture that man is woman's head. But on the part of 
man it is well to consider what St. Paul tells to 
Christian husbands: (I Cor. xi, 3) "But I would 
have you know that the head of every man is Christ, 



TEANSLATION: SCHUL-OKDNUNG 129 

and the head of the woman is the man. ' ' Now it is 
beyond donbt true that if in his life and teachings 
the man follows Christ, and the woman the man, the 
children will follow their parents and teachers and 
obey them. So that sincere love fully specifies the 
weight of Christian duty. And yet in all this we 
have done no more than our duty, and blessedness 
still remains only a gracious gift. But all Christian 
duties are steps that we must place our feet upon, 
step by step. If we seek salvation our Lord Jesus 
has given us directions. While no man can deny 
another God's mercy, because without it we cannot 
live, there exists this difference between wise men 
and virgins and foolish men and virgins; between 
faithful and faithless servants: there is a differ- 
ence of work, and unequal reward of grace or dis- 
grace. So it is much better that we begin here in 
time of grace to walk the road that Grod has prom- 
ised than to take the risk of sinning and remaining 
in sin, letting grace be so much mightier. (See 
Romans, vi, 1, 2.) Now if the Christian's place is 
thus fixed, that Christ is the head of the church, 
and therefore of each man, it is a foregone con- 
clusion that it is each man's duty to teach what his 
master has taught him unto his wife also, whose 
head he is. And both parents, seeking the salvation 
of their children, will obey all the Lord's command- 
ments, and teach them to their children, as has been 
commanded us. (I Moses xviii, 19 ; V Moses vi, 6, 7 ; 
Psalm lxxviii, 1-4 ; Ephes. vi, 4 ; Coloss. iii, 21, and 
other places.) . 

Now all the duties of parents to their children 



130 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

are also the duties of the teacher to whom the chil- 
dren are entrusted. And as he is in this sense head 
of these children, so Christ is his head, according to 
whose command we must act. When Christ came to 
this world to seek and to save, he called the children 
to him in especial love, caressed and blessed them 
and promised them the kingdom of heaven. (Mark 
ix, 36, 37. ) For this reason we will not be blessed if 
we are tyrannical with them, however much they must 
be raised in- discipline and in the fear of the Lord. 
Further, let us consider how the Lord Jesus taught 
his disciples, a record of which is kept for us in St. 
Matth. xviii, 1-6 : " At the same time came the disci- 
ples unto Jesus, saying, Who is the greatest in the 
kingdom of heaven ? And Jesus called a little child 
unto him and set him in the midst of them, and said, 
Verily I say unto you, except ye be converted, and 
become as little children, ye shall not enter into the 
kingdom of heaven. Whosoever therefore shall 
humble himself as this little child, the same is great- 
est in the kingdom of heaven. And whoso shall 
receive one such little child in My name receiveth 
Me. But whoso shall offend one of these little ones 
which believe in Me, it were better for him that a 
millstone were hanged about his neck, and that he 
were drowned in the depth of the sea." From the 
quoted words of the Lord Jesus we all have enough 
to learn. If we would enter heaven and be happy 
forever we need not imagine that the way is to glare 
at these children or even scold and punish them if 
they do not show us enough honor or pay us enough 
compliments. Ah, no, this is not the way to the 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 131 

kingdom of heaven. But if we turn from such 
selfish pride to Christ's teachings, and humble our- 
selves to the level of children, it not only leads us to 
the kingdom of God, but gives us a community with 
the children that is much more useful than all this 
keeping aloof. For who exalts himself here will be 
humbled, and who humbles himself will be exalted. 

There might be much more said here of qualities 
that are partly useful in implanting love by which 
the honor of God is enhanced and the common good 
increased. And many qualities might be enumer- 
ated that do the opposite, by which the honor of God 
is decreased and the common good injured. But I 
shall leave this matter to the judgment of others. 

NOW FOLLOW A FEW USEFUL SCHOOL EXERCISES WHICH 
I FEEL COMPELLED TO MENTION, NOT FOR MY GLORY, 
BUT FOR THAT OF ALMIGHTY GOD, AND WHICH I GTVE 
THE YOUTH ENTRUSTED TO ME. 

I may say that in my experience in this country 
I have had, at my school, children of various relig- 
ious denominations, so that I could not teach them 
the same catechism. Nor have I such a catechism 
included, but when the children have learned to 
read well, the parents at home have to teach them 
the catechism themselves. In the teaching of hymns 
I have been given liberty. So I sang hymns and 
psalms with them, for the author of both religious 
songs and psalms is the Holy Ghost. 

Besides this, it has been my aim to make them 
familiar with the New Testament from the exer- 



132 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

cises of finding chapters. This has been quite 
successful, so that when a passage was men- 
tioned, they turned to it and read it without being 
prompted. 

When this door is opened, I have aimed that they 
should cull the flowers in this Garden of Eden, — 
Holy Writ, — not only for their beauty, but also for 
their fragrance, by pointing out to them, to the 
best of my feeble power, which have a fragrance of 
life unto life when put to the use that is revealed in 
them. Also which have an odor of death unto death, 
that they might have knowledge from both sides of 
Holy Writ and might be able to see. Then just as 
truth has the odor of life unto life and when we 
follow it leads to life, thus lies have the odor of death 
unto death in them and lead to death if we follow 
them. For the reward of liars is the fiery pit, which 
is the other death. (Revel, xxi, 8.) Truth, however, 
frees him who follows it. (John viii, 31-35.) 

Now as opposite qualities have opposite effects, 
some leading to life and others to death, so it is with 
love. Love has the odor of life, but hate, envy and 
enmity have the odor of death and lead to death, for 
they are the opposite of love. 

Thus it is also with faith and faithlessness, char- 
ity and lack of charity, justice and injustice, chas- 
tity and unchasteness, humility and vanity. In fine, 
all Godlike qualities have life in them and lead to 
life; whoever trusts in their efficacy is born again 
from death into life. All Godless things and their 
qualities are of death, and lead to damnation, if one 
persists in them until death. 



TRANSLATION : SCHUL-ORDNUNG 133 

When this was explained to them in part, they 
had to look up passages referring to the various 
qualities. Whoever finds a passage, steps forward, 
the next follows, and so they form a row, boys and 
girls separately, as each finds some passage of Scrip- 
ture until they are all in a row. Then the first reads 
his passage. But if another one should have the 
same passage, he steps out and looks for another, 
and then joins the ranks again at the foot of the 
class. This is done in order to have them find all 
the rare Bible gems which express these qualities. 
It also becomes evident that the more passages are 
found dealing with a certain quality, the more 
clearly does the truth of the same appear. In this 
way one passage of Scripture serves not only to 
fix another one in memory, but also to elucidate 
and explain it. After the references have all been 
read, the children are asked several questions, 
which are easily answered from such references. 
The references are then repeated. This gener- 
ally gives rise to different points which are brought 
to light by the passages made use of, in part for 
instruction, partly for comfort and strengthening 
of faith, partly for warning and chastisement. 
Besides, when the pupils have had much prac- 
tice in finding references, they are at times put 
to the test and reminded that outward seeking is 
not in itself undesirable, but that it should be tried 
in another form. I let them sit very still, pay atten- 
tion, and think no idle thoughts, but the first passage 
that enters their minds, they shall stand and read. 
In this exercise I have often marvelled how Grod 



134 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

"has perfected praise out of the mouths of babes 
and sucklings" to destroy the revengeful foe. 

As it is God's stern command that we should 
teach the children the commandments He has given 
us, and shall bring them up in the fear and ad- 
monition of the Lord, there are in the Scriptures 
many beautiful witnesses to the one God and His 
divine qualities; how He reveals Himself by His 
works, and how He created all things by the power 
of His word; the breath of His mouth, and His 
impenetrable omnipotence and omniscience ; Script- 
ure further testifies how through the devil's envy 
death, temporal and eternal destruction, came into 
the world, and how the human race by Satan's cun- 
ning fell into sin and disobedience, and that through 
this disobedience sin came into the world, and 
through sin, death, and thus death penetrated to all 
men, because they all sinned. 

Holy Writ teaches us also, that God in His great 
mercy promised fallen mankind that the seed of the 
woman should bruise the serpent's head, that they 
may be again redeemed from the curse through an 
eternal redemption. Of all this we find in Scripture 
many comforting promises given to the fathers 
from time to time through Moses and the Prophets, 
partly by signs and partly by visions and prophe- 
cies. Of these there are many in the Old Testament. 
Again, how such promise was fulfilled through 
Christ, the promised offspring of woman, by the 
Holy Ghost, God's mysterious plan of redemption 
— incomprehensible to man. Of His birth, ministry, 
life, suffering, death, resurrection and ascension, of 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-OBDNUNG 135 

all these the Scriptures tell explicitly. Also we find 
here how we can obtain this salvation. Also how a 
Christian shall do his dnty through practicing piety 
in Christian virtue and rise step by step to become 
more like Him who created and redeemed him. I 
say in all these things we are instructed by the 
teachings of Christ and His Apostles, in the New 
Testament. 

Now I should tell of each exercise in detail, how 
it is customary with children to have them read a 
passage relative to one or another quality, then to 
ask questions and have them answered by another 
quotation, so that one impresses the other, explains 
and amplifies it. But to explain all this would be 
very tedious. But as Holy Script contains every- 
thing, that is the place to seek and to find it. And 
because in Christ Jesus all treasures of knowledge 
and wisdom are hidden, I refer myself and all others 
to Scripture where such can be found. ( Jerem. xxix, 
13 ; Matth. vii, 7.) Does not the world seek diligently 
for honor and property, for gold, silver and pre- 
cious stones? These and other treasures are held 
in righ esteem by the world, yet they are perishable, 
and not to be compared to the immortal treasures 
God offers us in His word. As we seek, so shall we 
find. If we seek the world in the delights of the eye 
and of the flesh and in vain living, we shall find it 
so, and finally also find the world's share and wages. 
But whosoever seeks God and everlasting life and 
follows Christ's footprints faithfully, he will also 
find and not seek in vain. His search will not be 
left unrewarded. (John xii, 26 ; Chap, xiv, 3 ; Chap, 
xvii, 24.) 



136 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

To avoid tedium, I repeat I cannot describe 
many exercises that are conducive to blessedness of 
faith, love, hope, patience; in fine, all exercises of 
virtue that in Holy Script lead to blessedness, as 
they are written, useful for instruction, punishment, 
&g. As each should be taken up at a particular time 
with children, to tell of all this in detail would take 
too long. 

But the true redeeming faith must embrace all 
that is useful in life and in the path of righteousness, 
and nothing is more acceptable to Jesus Christ than 
exhibiting one's faith in acts of love. To such the 
Lord Jesus Himself has given the shield that He 
shall be His armor bearer, empowered not only to 
win in this world (I John v, 5, 6), but also to quench 
all fiery darts of the Evil One (Eph. vi, 16). I 
shall only for my own and others' encouragement, 
and the strengthening of their faith, add a few 
things concerning the properties of faith so far as 
I am now, with my feeble strength and by the grace 
of God, able to do this. For without His grace and 
favor our actions and everything are in vain. Be- 
cause I find this to be the case with myself, I feel 
called upon to write this down, simply and solely 
for the glory of God, and in honor of His holy name. 
For we may thank none but the dear God, that He 
has thus far in this dark world let His holy word 
stand like a light in a candle-stick. So long as our 
feet are turned in the path of peace, we can say with 
David (Psalm cxix, 105), "Lord, Thy word is a 
lamp unto my feet, and a light unto my path." 

But may God, who is a light, and in whom there 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 137 

is no darkness, send us light and truth, that they 
may lead and guide us through this dark valley of 
the shadow of death to His holy mountain and to 
His abode ; that we may also in truth say with David 
(Psalm xxxvi), "In Thy light we see light. " O, 
that we may with the eyes of faith not only see this 
light, but also walk in it, and by it at last conquer all 
the powers of darkness, for which I wish and pray 
from my heart for help and power of faith from on 
high. Amen. 

Some Questions foe Childeen 

Whereby the fear of God will be taught them 
through many excellent Scripture passages. 

Q.I.— What is faith? 

A. — The substance of things hoped for, the evidence of 
things not seen. Hebrews xi, 1. 

q. 2. — Whence cometh faith? 

A. — So then faith cometh by hearing, and hearing by the 
word of God. Komans x, 17. 

Q. 3. — To reach the beginning of faith, what teacher shall 
we choose? 

A. — Looking unto Jesus, the author and finisher of our 
faith. Hebrews xii, 2. 

q m 4. — What does faith do when it is righteous ? 

J..— Knowing this, that the trying of your faith worketh 
patience. James i, 3. 

q. 5. — What must a Christian give in his faith ? 

A— And besides this, giving all diligence, add to your faith 
virtue; and to virtue, knowledge; and to knowledge, temper- 
ance ; and to temperance, patience ; and to patience, godliness ; 
and to godliness, brotherly kindness ; and to brotherly kindness, 
charity. II Peter i, 5, 6, 7. 



138 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

Q. 6. — But who has not this to give ? 

A. — He is blind, and cannot see afar off, and hath forgotten 
that he was purged from his old sins. II Peter i, 9. 

Q. 7. — Can one not please God without faith? 

A. — "Without faith it is impossible to please Him, for he 
that eometh to God must believe that He is, and that He is a 
rewarder of them that diligently seek him. Hebrews ii, 6. 

Q. 8. — How precious then, is true faith? 

A. — That the trial of your faith, being much more precious 
than of gold that perisheth, though it be tried with fire, might 
be found unto praise and honor and glory at the appearing of 
Jesus Christ. I Peter i, 7. 

Q. 9. — "What comfort is it to believing souls to abide in 
faith? 

A. — For we which have believed to enter into his rest, &c. 
Hebrews iv, 3. 

Q. 10. — What is threatened the unbelieving? 

A. — And to whom sware He that they should not enter into 
His rest, but to them that believed not. So we see that they 
could not enter in because of unbelief. Hebrews iii, 18, 19. 

Q. 11.— To what shall faithful souls be kept? 

A. — Who are kept by the power of God through faith unto 
salvation ready to be revealed in the last time. I Peter i, 5. 
See v, 41. 

Q. 12. — By what quality do we reach true justice? 

A. — If thou shalt confess with thy mouth the Lord Jesus, 
and shalt believe in thine heart that God hath raised Him from 
the dead, thou shalt be saved. For with the heart man believeth 
unto righteousness and with the mouth confession is made unto 
salvation. For the Scripture saith, Whosoever believeth on 
Him shall not be ashamed. Eomans x, 9, 10, 11. 

Q. 13.— When we through faith in Christ Jesus partake of 
such justice, what is the relation of God to such souls ? 

A. — Therefore being justified by faith, we have peace with 
God through our Lord Jesus Christ. Romans v, 1. 

Q. 14. — Is mere faith of mouth sufficient, without fruits, 
spirit and life? 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 139 

A. — For as the body without the spirit is dead, so faith 
without works is dead also. James ii, 26. 

Q. 15. — What is the end of all commandments and what is 
its character ? 

A. — Now the end of a commandment is charity out of a 
pure heart, and of a good conscience, and of faith unfeigned. 
I Tim. i, 5. 

Q. 16. — But if the heart is not righteous, faith is feigned ; 
in such condition do we partake of such promises ? 

A. — Thou has neither part nor lot in this matter, for thy 
heart is not right in the sight of God. Repent therefore of this 
thy wickedness, and pray God, if perhaps the thought of thine 
heart be forgiven thee. Acts viii, 21, 22. 

Q. 17. — Holy Script bears witness that Simon, the sorcerer, 
also was converted? 

A. — Thou believest that there is one God ; thou doest well ; 
the devils also believe, and tremble. James ii, 19 and fol. 

Q. 18. — Which faith abides before God in Christ ? 
A. — Even as Abraham believed God and it was reckoned 
to him for righteousness. Romans iv, 9. 

Q. 19. — But what shall one do when he finds that he is still 
a sinner? 

A. — The time is fulfilled, and the kingdom of God is at 
hand ; repent ye and believe the Gospel. St. Mark i, 15 ; Matth. 
iii, 2 ; Chap, iv, 17. 

Q. 20. — What is promised to poor repentant sinners ? 

A. — For God so loved the world, that He gave His only 
begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in Him should not 
perish, but have everlasting life. St. John iii, 16. Read also 
St. Luke xv; I Tim. i, 15; Luke xix, 10; Matth. xviii, 11; 
Matth. xi, 28, 29, 30. 

Q. 21. — Are there in Holy Script other passages testifying 
that repentant sinners shall receive forgiveness of sins by 
believing in Christ Jesus? 

A. — To Him give all the prophets witness, that through 
His name whosoever believeth in Him shall receive remission of 
sins. Acts x, 43. 



140 THE WOKKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



Q. 22. — Does this promise refer to all repentant sinners, 
or is there a distinction? 

A. — For there is no difference between the Jew and the 
Greek ; for the same Lord over all is rich unto all that call upon 
Him. For whosoever shall call upon the name of the Lord shall 
be saved. Romans x, 12, 13. 

Q. 23. — Did God send His Son into the world to proclaim 
to us sinners the redeeming Gospel? 

A. — The Spirit of the Lord is upon me, because He hath 
anointed me to preach the Gospel to the poor; He hath sent 
me to heal the brokenhearted, to preach deliverance to the 
captives, and recovery of sight to the blind, to set at liberty 
them that are bruised, to preach the acceptable year of the 
Lord. St. Luke xviii, 19 ; John iii, 17, 18 ; I John iv, 9 ; Gal. 
iv, 4, 5. 

Q. 24. — Now as God, for love of us poor sinners did not 
spare His own Son, but sacrificed Him for us all, so that all 
believing in Him should not perish, but have eternal life; the 
next question is, seeing that true faith is the action of the Holy 
Ghost upon us, whereupon shalt this faith in Jesus Christ be 
founded, if we would have the Holy Ghost as our leader, and 
keep it? Have we certain information regarding this also in 
Holy Script, or may we in this regard believe according to our 
own will, judgment and liking whatever we wish? 

A. — He that believeth on Me as the Scripture hath said, 
out of his belly shall flow rivers of living water. (But this 
spake He of the Spirit, which they that believed on Him should 
receive, for the Holy Ghost was not yet given, because Jesus 
was not yet glorified.) John vii, 38, 39. See also II Peter i, 
16 and 21. 

Q. 25. — But if we find that we have given more attention 
to wise tales than to Holy Writ, thereby preventing the Holy 
Ghost from implanting the true faith in Jesus Christ; and we 
are then sorry from our heart and would like to become pos- 
sessed of it again, how can we be helped? 

A. — Ask, and it shall be given you ; seek, and ye shall find ; 
knock, and it shall be opened unto you: For every one that 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 141 

asketh receiveth ; and he that seeketh findeth ; and to him that 
knocketh it shall be opened. Matth. vii, 7, 8. 

Q. 26. — Hath God also promised such poor and wretched 
ones that he could be found ? 

A. — Look upon Me, and be ye saved, all the ends of the 
earth; for I am God, and there is none else. Isaiah xlv, 22. 
Also Jerem. xxix, 11, 12, 13. 

Q. 27. — Because the references given emphatically testify 
that God has promised a hearing to those repentant sinners 
who turn to Him with prayers, the question arises, what is the 
first thing they should ask for ? 

A. — Hide Thy face from my sins and blot out all mine 
iniquities. Create in me a clean heart, God; and renew a 
right spirit within me. Cast me not away from Thy presence ; 
and take not Thy Holy Spirit from me. Restore unto me the 
joy of Thy salvation; and uphold me with Thy free Spirit. 
Psalm li, 9-12. 

Q. 28. — To whom shall we pray? 

A. — Then saith Jesus unto him, get thee hence, Satan; for 
it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and Him 
only shalt thou serve. Matth. iv, 10. 

Q. 29. — In whose name shall we pray to the heavenly 
Father? 

A. — Verily, verily, I say unto you, whatsoever ye shall 
ask the Father in My name, He will give it to you. Hitherto 
have ye asked nothing in My name. Ask and ye shall receive, 
that your joy be fulfilled. John xvi, 23, 24. 

Q. 30. — How shall our prayer proceed ? 

A. — Therefore, I say unto you, what things soever you 
desire, when ye pray, believe that ye receive them, and yet shall 
have them. Mark xi, 24; James i, 3, 6. 

Q. 31. — How shall our prayer be shaped further, that we 
may be heard? 

A. — This is the confidence we have in Him, that, if we ask 
anything according to His will, He heareth us. I John v, 14. 

Q. 32. — Now if the spirit be willing, but the power to 
believe too weak, who helps to strengthen this power in prayer ? 



142 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

A. — The Spirit helpeth our infirmities; for we know not 
what we should pray for as we ought; but the Spirit itself 
maketh intercession for us with groanings which cannot be 
uttered. And he that searcheth the hearts knoweth what is 
the mind of the Spirit, because He maketh intercession for the 
saints according to the will of God. Eomans viii, 26 and 27. 

Q. 33. — Does God's power still reign in such feeble ones 
when they reveal before God their weakness with humble and 
contrite heart ? 

A. — For thus saith the high and lofty One that inhabiteth 
eternity, whose name is Holy: I dwell in the high and holy 
place, with him also that is of a contrite and humble spirit, to 
revive the spirit of the humble, and to revive the heart of the 
contrite ones. For I will not contend forever, neither will I 
be always wroth: for the spirit shall fail before me, and the 
souls which I have made. Isaiah lvii, 15, 16. 

Q. 34. — All witnesses cited from Holy Script clearly show 
that God's help is not lacking, however weak faith may be, if 
it be only of the right appearance before God, God will come 
to the aid of our weakness. For faith is an action of the Holy 
Ghost in us, if we will only allow it to act. So long, however, 
as unbelief has the upper hand within us, the evil spirit will 
through unbelief work acts of unbelief, namely, all unclean- 
ness, dissension, untruth, injustice and all ungodly things in 
the children of unbelief, whereby God's wrath and punishment 
will come upon all ungodly conduct. Now the question is: If 
God's judgment is threatened over a city or country, and there 
is still enough faith left to admit that our punishment was 
caused by unbelief and sin, and we repent of wrong, and try to 
do right and justice, and raise once more in the heart by faith 
what unbelief has destroyed, will God be merciful still ? 

A. — Run ye to and fro through the streets of Jerusalem, 
and see now, and know, and seek in the broad places thereof, 
if ye can find a man, if there be any that executeth judgment, 
that seeketh the truth; and I will pardon it. Jerem. v, i; 
Ezek. xviii, 22, 23. 

Q. 35. — But if no conversion follow? 



TEANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 143 

A. — God judgeth the righteous and is angry with the 
wicked every day. If he turn not, he will whet his sword; he 
hath bent his bow, and made it ready. He hath also prepared 
for him the instruments of death; he ordaineth his arrows 
against the persecutors. Psalm vii, 11, 13. 

Q. 36. — As since the fall, man likes to pose as knowing and 
wise, but often seeks wisdom in matters that God counts fool- 
ishness, the question is : By what quality can we make a begin- 
ning in true wisdom ? 

A. — The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom. A 
good understanding have all they that do His commandments ; 
His praise endureth forever. Psalm cxi, 10. 

Q. 37. — Because the fear of the Lord is the beginning of 
wisdom, is it desirable for the young to begin all their under- 
takings in the fear of God ? 

A. — The fear of the Lord is the beginning of knowledge, 
but fools despise wisdom and instruction. Proverbs i, 7. 

Q. 38. — To live wisely what must we avoid ? 

A. — Behold, the fear of the Lord, that is wisdom, and to 
depart from evil is understanding. Job xxviii, 28. 

Q. 39. — Can we find information where true knowledge 
resides ? 

A. — Wisdom enters not the portals of a wicked soul, nor 
dwells in a body under the bondage of sin. For the Holy 
Ghost which teaches aright avoids the idolatrous and departs 
from the profligate who will be punished for his sins. Wisdom 
is so exalted that she will not permit the scoffer to go unpun- 
ished. For God is a witness of every thought. He knows the 
innermost recesses of every heart. He hears every word. The 
orb of the world is filled with the Spirit of the Lord. He who 
fathomest speech is everywhere. Therefore, he who speaks 
falsely will not escape; and the right by which he is to be 
judged will not fail him. Wisdom of Solomon i, 4-8. 

Q. 40.— Where then doth it dwell? 

A. — The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom, and 
is alone the heart's foundation of all believers. It dwells 
with the elect of womankind and is to be found only with the 
righteous and believing ones. Sirach i, 16. 



144 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

Q. 41. — Because God has sent His Son into this world that 
through Him we shall live, who has left us an example in 
teachings and life, that we shall follow His footprints. Who 
also is made by God for wisdom, justice, healing and redemp- 
tion. The question is : Do we need further to seek after knowl- 
edge, and study at high schools of philosophy, the books of 
philosophers and teachings of men, as it is customary in the 
world ? 

A. — Beware lest any man spoil you, through philosophy 
and vain deceit, after the tradition of men, after the rudiments 
of the world and not after Christ. For in Him dwelleth all 
the fulness of the Godhead bodily. And ye are complete in 
Him which is the head of all principality and power. Coloss. 
ii, 8, 10. 

Q. 42. — Wherein then shall we continually study and 
remain ? 

A. — But continue thou in the things which thou hast 
learned, and hast been assured of, knowing of whom thou hast 
learned them. And that from a child thou hast known the 
Holy Scriptures, which are able to make thee wise, unto salva- 
tion through faith which is in Christ Jesus. All Scripture is 
given by inspiration of God, and is profitable for doctrine, for 
reproof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness. That 
the man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished unto all 
good works. II Timothy iii, 14, 17. 

Q. 43. — Because Holy Script, if we follow it, teaches us 
salvation, and to found our faith on nothing but the one God 
and Christ whom He sent, which is the right way from death 
into life, and is also truth and life, the question now is: 
Whether on this road that leads to life we may expect crosses 
and troubles ? 

A. — Confirming the souls of the disciples and exhorting 
them to continue in the faith, and that we must through much 
tribulation enter into the kingdom of God. Acts xiv, 22. 

Q. 44. — What is the benefit of trouble, if we are patient 
unto the end? 

A. — For our light afflictions, which is but for a moment, 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 145 

worketh for us a far more exceeding and eternal weight of 
glory; while we look not at the things which are seen, but at 
the things which are not seen: for the things which are seen 
are temporal; but the things which are not seen are eternal. 
II Corinth, iv, 17, 18. 

Q. 45. — As the road to eternal life is so narrow and one 
must enter through trial and tribulation into the kingdom of 
God, is it necessary daily to pray God for strength and 
patience ? 

A. — For ye have need of patience, that, after ye have done 
the will of God, ye might receive the promise. For yet a little 
while, and He that shall come will come, and will not tarry. 
Now the just shall live by faith, but if any man draw back, 
my soul shall have no pleasure in him. But we are not of 
them who draw back into perdition, but of them that believe 
in the saving of the soul. Hebrews x, 36-39. 

Q. 46. — Have we also to expect persecution ? 

A. — Because God hath loved you, it had to be thus. "With- 
out temptation thou canst not be, in order that thou mayest be 
established in the faith. Tobia xii, 13. 

Q. 47. — Then the pious will be saved by crosses and tribu- 
lations ? 

A. — Just as gold is purified by fire, those who please God 
are approved through the fire of tribulation. Sirah ii, 5. 

Q. 48. — If it is the fate of a Christian on his road to life 
to be tried and purified by the fire of trouble, is it a Christian 's 
sole mission to prepare to suffer persecution? 

A. — My child, if thou desirest to be God's servant, prepare 
thyself for tribulations. Sirah ii, 1. 

Q. 49. — How must we behave in such persecution ? 

A. — My brethren, count it all joy when you fall into divers 
temptations; knowing this, that the trying of your faith 
worketh patience. James i, 2, 3. 

Q. 50. — Is such trouble and persecution sent a Christian by 
God solely to preserve him, or has he other enemies for Jesus' 
sake? 

A. — These things have I spoken unto you that ye should 
10 



146 THE WORKS OF CHEISTOPHEE DOCK 

not be offended. They shall pnt you out of the synagogue; 
yea the time eometh that whosoever killeth you will think that 
he doeth God service. And these things will they do unto you 
because they have not known the Father, nor Me. But these 
things have I told you that when the time shall come, ye may 
remember that I told you of them. And these things I said 
not unto you at the beginning because I was with you. John 
xvi, 1-4. 

Q. 51. — Then if I understand aright, on this narrow way 
we may expect enemies? 

A. — Lord, how are they increased that trouble me ! Many 
are they that rise up against me. Many there be which say 
of my soul, There is no help for him in God. Psalm iii, 1, 2. 

Q. 52. — How shall a Christian act toward his bodily foes, 
and what orders has he in his Christian knighthood from his 
King? 

A. — But I say unto you, love your enemies, bless them that 
curse you, do good to them that hate you, and pray for them 
which despitefully use you, and persecute you. Matth. v, 44. 

Q. 53. — If a Christian is to conquer his enemies by love, 
what arms does love carry that can injure enemies? 

A. — Charity suffereth long and is kind; charity envieth 
not; charity vaunteth not itself, is not puffed up. Doth not 
behave itself unseemly, seeketh not her own, is not easily pro- 
voked, thinketh not evil ; rejoiceth not in iniquity, but rejoiceth 
in the truth ; beareth all things, believeth all things, hopeth all 
things, endureth all things. I Cor. xiii, 4-7. 

Q. 54. — How is it with spiritual enemies ; what weapons of 
Christian knighthood are used against them? 

A. — For though we walk in the flesh we do not war after 
the flesh. (For the weapons of our warfare are not carnal, 
but mighty through God to the pulling down of strongholds;) 
Casting down imaginations, and every high thing that exalteth 
itself against the knowledge of God, and bringing into captivity 
every thought to the obedience of Christ. II Corinth, xi, 3, 4, 5. 

Q. 55. — If the weapons and the fighting are not carnal, the 
enemies must be such as can be resisted in another way. Who 
are all these enemies? 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 147 

A. — Finally, my brethren, be strong in the Lord, and in 
the power of His might. Put on the whole armor of God, that 
ye may be able to stand up against the wiles of the devil. For 
we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against the rulers 
of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in 
high places. Ephes. vi, 10, 11, 12. 

Q. 56. — Are these all the foes we must conquer ? 

A. — For whatsoever is born of God overcometh the world ; 
and this is the victory that overcometh the world, even our 
faith. I John v, 4. 

Q. 57. — Are there other foes that fight against the soul? 

A. — Dearly beloved, I beseech you as strangers and pil- 
grims, abstain from fleshly lusts, which war against the soul. 
I Peter ii, 11. And also : Let not sin therefore reign in your 
mortal body, that ye should obey it in the lusts thereof. Ro- 
mans vi, 12. 

Q. 58. — How shall we strengthen our power against such 
enemies ? 

A. — Finally, my brethren, be strong in the Lord, and in the 
power of His might. Ephes. vi, 10. 

Q. 59. — Have we also news that a war has arisen? 

A. — And there was war in heaven. Michael and his angels 
fought against the dragon; and the dragon fought and his 
angels; and prevailed not; neither was their place found any 
more in heaven. And the great dragon was cast out, that old 
serpent called the Devil, and Satan, which deceiveth the whole 
world : he was cast out into the earth, and his angels were cast 
out with him. Eevel. xii, 7, 8, 9. 

Q. 60. — Now because this enemy was conquered in heaven, 
overcome and cast out, we while we live on earth must fight 
him here, and are unable to wage such war alone and without 
the help of God's divine power. Unless the strong hero of 
David's race, who can take his booty from the giant, come and 
help us, this enemy will seek to bar our way to heaven. For 
with our power nothing can be done, and our own strength is 
easily vanquished? 

A. — But now thus saith the Lord that created thee, O 



148 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

Jacob, and He that formed thee, Israel, Fear not : for I have 
redeemed thee, I have called thee by thy name ; thou art Mine. 
When thou passest through the waters, I will be with thee; 
and through the rivers, they shall not overflow thee ; when thou 
walkest through the fire, thou shalt not be burned; neither 
shall the flame kindle upon thee, and fol. Isaiah xliii, 1, 2, &c. 

Q. 61. — If this is promised us poor ones for our protection, 
then we may be very happy in everything that may befall us 
in God's will. 

A. — What shall we then say to these things? If God be 
for us, who can be against us? He that spared not His own 
Son, but delivered him up for us all, how shall he not with 
him also freely give us all things ? Romans viii, 31, 32, to the 
end. 

Q. 62. — How have the faithful vanquished the enemy? 

A. — And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and 
by the word of their testimony ; and they loved not their lives 
unto death. Revel, xii, 11. 

Q. 63. — If we can conquer by the death and blood of Christ, 
if we relinquish ourselves to absolute faith, have we a fortress 
in which we are safe from the foe and soul-murderer? 

A. — The name of the Lord is a strong tower : the righteous 
runneth into it and are safe. Prov. xviii, 10. 

Q. 64. — But this enemy and soul-murderer found our first 
parents in paradise in this tower, which he could not take by 
force, but caused it to surrender by deceit and cunning. The 
question is: Is it necessary to be watchful even within this 
fortress ? 

A. — Be sober, be vigilant, because your adversary, the devil, 
as a roaring lion, walketh about, seeking whom he may devour ; 
whom resist steadfast in the faith, knowing that the same afflic- 
tions are accomplished in your brethren that are in the world. 
I Peter v, 8, 9. 

Q. 65. — How long is it necessary to be watchful? 

A. — Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may be 
accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to 
pass, and to stand before the Son of man. Luke xxi, 36. 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-OKDNUNG 149 

Q. 66. — What is the war cry of these watchers? 

A. — Watch ye, stand fast in the faith, quit ye like men, 
be strong. Let all your things be done with charity. I Corinth, 
xvi, 13, 14. 

Q. 67.— What clothes shall they wear? 

A. — Put on therefore, as the elect of God, holy and beloved, 
bowels of mercies, kindness, humbleness of mind, meekness, 
long suffering, forbearing one another, forgiving one another, 
if any man have a quarrel against any, even as Christ for- 
gave you, so also do ye. And above all these things put on 
charity which is the bond of perfection. Coloss. iii, 12, 13, 14, 
to 17. 

Q. 68. — Wherein consists their implements of war, armor 
and weapons, that they daily seize, and have in readiness if 
they wish to fight and conquer this soul-enemy? 

A. — Wherefore take unto you the whole armor of God, 
that ye may be able to withstand in the evil day, and having 
done all, to stand. Stand therefore having your loins girt about 
with truth, and having on the breastplate of righteousness; 
and your feet shod with the preparation of the gospel of peace ; 
above all, taking the shield of faith, wherewith ye shall be able 
to quench all the fiery darts of wickedness. And take the 
helmet of salvation, and the sword of the Spirit, which is the 
word of God. Praying always with all prayer and supplication 
in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance 
and supplication for all Saints. Ephes. vi, 13-18. 



END. 



150 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



CHILDREN'S SONGS 

OR ENCOURAGEMENT FOR THE CHILDREN 
Tune: I Know a Floweret Beautiful and Fair. 

1. 

Come, dear children, come hither, 
And learn to know Jesus. 
Do come and see how good He is, 
How innocent and faithful. 
Come ! call Him master. 

2. 

see His kindliness 
That bends toward you, 
How heartily he offers himself 
To you at all times 
To show much good. 



He wants to teach you, quietly and piously 
To live after God's will. 
He calls, dear child, come 
And become pious. 
He will give thee all. 



0, then come, children, do go on 

Into Jesus 's school. 

Hear, learn and follow His teaching, 

The lessons are not hard. 

Sit down here 

On the chairs of His wisdom. 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 151 



5. 

How good it is, how fine and beautiful, 

How lovely to behold, 

"When children are right obedient 

And gladly alone 

Go to Jesus 's school. 

6. 

There they learn with eagerness and joy 

Rightly to pray, read, sing, 

And seek their lifetime, 

In holiness, 

With Jesus to spend. 

7. 
such children are well off. 
They will forever dwell 
In heaven with joyful spirit, 
Where Jesus does 
Reward pious children. 

8. 

They will there in great joy 

Dwell every day and hour. 

No fear, no wrong, no sadness, 

No pain and sorrow 

Will surround them there any more. 

9. 

Therefore, dear children, learn gladly 

And love Jesus filially. 

Serve Him, as your God and Lord, 

And fly far 

From all that is sinful. 

10. 
Do not follow the group of bad children, 
The loafer and the gambler, 



152 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

Who only mock your Jesus, 
Who do not love God and 
Will not be Jesus 's pupil. 

11. 

Become well acquainted with Jesus 

And sit at His feet. 

Give Him your right hand 

And say : Savior ! 

0, let me kiss thee. 

12. 
Hang like little children 
About His loving arms, 
And say, He shall be merciful 
To you children 
And have pity on you. 

13. 

He shall bless you with understanding, 

That you avoid the bad. 

He shall become well acquainted with you 

As a Savior 

Who frees you from sin. 

14. 

Yes, beg Him to 
Give you pleasure and love. 
His dear, gentle, sweet yoke 
Still learn as children 
To wear thoughtfully. 

15. 

He shall your youthful hearts 

Fill with His love, 

That it think ever heavenward, 

And all jesting 

Ignore for His sake. 



TEANSLATION: SCHUL-OKDNUNG 153 



16. 
Thus, children, cling to Him heartily. 
Ah ! hang on His hands 
And say : Jesus, lead, then 
Lead us henceforth. 
lead us to the end. 

17. 

Lead us out of this wilderness 

Of the wicked turmoil of the world, 

Into the Fatherland, where we may be pleased, 

Jesus true, 

With the glory of heaven. 



154 THE WOEKS OF CHKISTOPHER DOCK 

DYING SONG 

Tune: Who Letteth Only God Command. 

1. 

O, come here, ye children of men ! 

come and see the nothingness, 
The vanity of proud sinners 
And their life's emptiness. 
For all, all that ye see 

Bears the inscription : it perisheth ! 

2. 

1 lie here on my death bed, 
Quite infected by the poison of sin. 
My spirit knows no resting place 
That the dear Hand has given me 
Save only the name Jesus Christ, 
Who also in death is my life ! 

3. 

My earthly life is over 

And my days are passed. 

The short pilgrimage is ended ; 

It is my time to die. 

But I am glad, Lord Jesus Christ, 

That Thou art with me. 

4. 
I have by God's rich grace 
Long ago said Good-night to the world, 
And on the narrow path of Jesus 
Sought true peace of spirit. 
But I have not done what was useful, 
And used far too little seriousness. 



TRANSLATION: SCHUL-ORDNUNG 155 

5. 

God, through Thy loving hands 
Prepare me now still, 

That I at my final end 
Depart comforted in Thy salvation. 
Thy will be to me in eternity 
A centre of contentment. 

6. 
Herewith will I now take leave 
From those who knew me here ; 
First from those who grieve, 
In their poor condition of sorrow, 
Fear God, and pray day and night ; 
Trust in Him ; now good-night. 

7. 
Good-night, ye rich of this earth, 
Who call riches happiness. 

1 never wished to grow rich. 
It only lasts a moment at best, 
And Christ calls : a hard pain ! 
Think of it, I pray you as a parting. 

8. 
Good-night, you wild swarm of youth, 
Ye unconverted brood of heathens, 
That know nothing of honor and virtue, 
And bear fruit only for Satan. 
Follow God's earnest word and advice, 
Or you will never find grace. 

9. 
Good-night, ye worldly hearts, 
That seek pleasure on earth 
In pastime, laughter, play, jesting, 
And bear no fruit to your God. 



156 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

O, do ye souls, do penance, 

O, ye souls, do penance, 

Else you will descend into darkness. 

10. 
Good-night, all of you, 
Thou false, bad, wicked world; 
That your doings do not please me 
My life has shown you. 
If it had not, by God's grace, 
Happened earlier, it would be too late now. 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN 

PART I. Nos. 33, 40, 41 
AND PART II. No. 15 






terftliW Wlwtim. 9Jum. 33. 

Copi4 tint? @d)rifft welcfre bet @d>u!meiffct: 

C^rtfJop^ 2>o cf, an fcinc nocb lebenOe ©cfcmler 
3ur Jtetjr two tferrotf^mwg aue iltebe gcfcbriebett £4$, 



i(en S)ienern unD 2(efo>ften, «&aufr3Mfem unb 9ttuftern, 
" ncbfl ibren flinDern unD 2(ngeb6r$en, nmnfcbe tc|> $ur l)e% 
Hc&cn fSegruffuncj/ Dag Da ®Ott De* grieDentf, unfere £er£en 
unD @innen regieren roofle $u einem ©Oft n?ol)f i gefdUigcn £eben 
unD 2£anDe(, *u tftun n?aS t>or i&m flefdHig iff, Durd; 3£fum 
Cljnff, n>eld)em fep ©te, t»on <£n>igfeit 511 gtvigfeit 2lmen. 

(Efeliebte in bem &£rm? 

21$ Die Urfacjj DiefeS fbun, tmb &a^ @cf)tifre$t fit 

@*reiben$ anbefangt, Cbrifli ©cbuie $u (ernen, unD 

fo gefcfciefjet fofcfjes aud fid) jubereiten tmD juberciten taf* 

emer DringenDen 2kbi jur 2(uf* fen woflen, (Sbrifti 3od> auf ji$ 

munterung, aucf> tine fjerfcltdje ju neljmen, unD ate ©cWffeut 

JiebeS farming, au$ freuer ifjrem<Seefen$irtenin£ebrunb 

2iebeH3fW>t an alle meinege* &ben $u fofgen, |?cj) tt>illig in 

tDcfcne @c&u(er, fo noc& t>orge* ©eljorfam «rgeben, unb fernec 

gentvdrfige geit titf Seben flnb, ergebenn)oaen;fo(cfjentt>irDauc{> 

t)ann tc& nicbt tvtfien fan, m wwn fie bis an$ €nDe getreu 




balD icb metne ffevblid>e #utfe 
ablegen nwDe, acb! Hebe ^m# 
ber ! roann id) jurucf Dencf e, n?a£ 
t)er #£rr &or ©naDen>@aben 
in eud) gcfeget, Da tbr nod) in 
eurer finDhcben @nfa(t roaret, 
tmD tw'e erfreulid) e$ mir tfl, mn 
tcb an Den ertvacbfenen ^d;u(em 
fefyen unD fpubten fan, Dag Die 
gurcbt @5=Otte$inibren «§er£en 



tjerbfeiben su^beilnwDen, roa$ 
Der ^gvrS^Mfofcben&ev&eif* 
fen, 3of)- 10, a 7. z 8. 

S&eifen aberDiefe2(n$al){fefj& 
gering/ unD fid) wof)l iinc Qx6f> 
fere 2(nja^f jwDen modtfen, Die 
mit &ema$ Die 2Btit (t'eb ge* 
rcennen, Dem gfeifcl) ©eborfant 
ju letflen in feinen Ziifttn, mi$)t$ 
Docb, tDofern e$ nid)tt)urcbber^ 



taum unD ^31a| bef ommen Ijat, Itc&e 55u(fe in einem beffern(gmti 
t>en b6fen £uf!en unD Q3e$erDen unD £eben^^erdnDei:iing noc& 
M SleifW 2SiDev(lanD/ ju Dwfleit Dem ©rab f omf, fo t^ue 



159 



160 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

3 64 Cfyx. &$&&f tince Qcfralmetf&rs/ 

©Otf e$ 2Bort in £eif. ©cbrifft ben re*f en $£ef nfiocf €f>ritfutfi 

ten Slu^fprucb folder @c(Ta(t u* 3Sfum in ber£(icber £tfbe&3to 

I>er fola>/ unD iff unt) Wetbt ubcr ctmgun^ tiac& femeni @kbot un& 

€iffe unbu gfcrfigC/ flfctfcf>tld&^efin* bcfd>f/ in freproiflrgem @kljor* 

re Sftenfcben Oct 2lu$fprucb alfp, fam einaerleiben $u (qffen/ $u ei* 

rote follies. an mkn Otten in nem ftucbtbaren SXeVen/ tw 

$riltge* ©cbrifff fan nacbgefe* grudge tragtium eroigen&ben, 

j)ennxrDen,ate0idm.8/6.7.8. $©?r 3€fu Dti bift ja unfer 

aud) 2K6m. £, 20. 21. @5aL r , 35rdutigatfl/ Du batfja DtefeSin 

i9.zo.©aU,7.8.?. <£pbef.5r fceinem fwugm'acbenDen. S&ort 

3. 4. f • 6. (Eefof.sr f . £ 7. 8. unb wrbeifFen, unb im$ fo freunD(ic& 

an Dielen anDern £>xtm mebf. einge(abenunbgefprocben:Bie* 

$lu^ angcfubvten Seu^nuffen £e icfc> ^e vor fcer Vcjwt 

4)til ©cbnfft fan gefefren n?er* imb £Iopf;e <tn, fo jemanfc 

t>eti/ ma^ Die #ebe biefer SXGelf/ meute Btt'mme fy$vtn wivb f 

in 2lugenlufr, gfetfcbeSluft tint) iwfc trie €£ur aufcfyun, 311 

foo jfdrt igem $eben »or tin ^Betn* fcem wcrbc tcb cmge^cn ««0 

(WMfottuiSer fcorgrucbtbrm* txts 2lberti>mrtJ>i rofc i^m 

#f; « brin^etfeinc grudrt $um ^alteit, unfc cr mt't rou\ 
eroigen &ben, t)ann ifer ^Bem %ld) Dag folclje £iebe$/$eref# 

jtotf i(l betf "SDeinfrocfS juQso* nigung aud? bet; tm^ gefebeben 

fcom, nni> Don bem2Jcfer $u ©0* mdc&te/ flopfebann Itebjler3(5> 

raorra> ibrc %rauben ftnb ©alfe/ fu bet> ung alien an ; an ber ^bii* 

unb baben bitfere %$mtn f ifc re unferS #eri|en$. 2(cb m6cb* 

2Bein ift §)racben<©ifft, unb ten boebbie/enige, Die Die SISefe 

tuutiger Ottern Q5alfe, f Q5uc& in 2lugen(uft, gfeifd;e$(u|l tin& 

93?ofe 3 */ 3 *. fjoffdrttgem £cben fteb geroonen/ 

UnD ob *$ gfeicb febon nod? 6eine@fime l>6ren/ aufrca<ben/ 

nicbt fo roeit $um QSerfal! f om* t>om ©unDen-^ager auffteben/ 

men/ bag man folcbe grobe ( 2Ber* unb bir i^rc •Ser^n&SMrauf* 

^e be^ gfetfebe^ »oHbra$t/ wo* fbun/ ber 93Seltabfagen, unD Dir 

von in angefu^rten geugnujfen nacfyfofyen in Mr unD £cbcn^ 

*9et(. ©cbrifft trielDung gefebe* bterju mode ber gnabenveiefce 

f>eri/ fo tfi bod) Die Sett hn man ©Ott'Den ©egen geben. 
nac^fcme^SlcifcM^uftcnsu^ ^03ann roir befractfen, Die 

ben angemenbet, ntcbt 5" femer bolbfeelige unD gnabenretcije/ ja 

©eelm *£>et>t unb ©eeligf eit an* (iebreicbe ^inlaDung De$ ^Srm 

ScmenDet njorben, unD n?drc /a 3Sfu an ade $?enfcben, nx'Id)c 

^6cb|1 ni5tl)ig »om (Sunben* er in fetnem ^cflam^ntlicbeti 

©cpiaf attfiulfcjen/ koO (1^ in 2CiiIen fopirtffiltid fcinterlaffen/ 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 33 161 

-&rtt|Etfct)e 1£xm4fynun$ m feint Scbftfer *c. z€$ 

i<J ivifl Der fiir^e nachitur ef u'ebe unD rrucf nefe fie mtf ibrem «§aar, 

anfu^ren : er|Hicb> aftariflj. "/ unD f u (fete feme gujfe/ unbfaf* 

zg. 29. 30, rufft er mir unD aU befc lie mit @alocn. %lm Ik* 

kn £0?enfcf)en $u, unD fpridtf: ben $inDer/ Die tfjr $u ewent 

jkommt fcer 31* mir <*Ue, &ie Q)er#anD unD Sabren f ommeti/ 

t^r mu^fehg unb bdaben beDencfet Dfefetf bet> «u$ felbfo 

feytv id? will eweb crqfetcFejt/ (T^riftus rujfer atte mubfel$e 

ne^met m*f ett&roein 3>cb unD belaDene$u (Icl> unD roirftnD 

unO lerttet t>on mix, t><mn \a alle muf>felia, unD mit (Sim* 

t'cfc bin fbttfftmfittyik/ unb Den belaDen, 2>attti vcex t>a 

von ^ergen t>emutpig, jo weifj CEtottf 311 tl>wn, imfc 

werfcet t'^r &ttfcc fuftm vox tfyute nicht/ tern i#s Qito* 

ewre ^eeleit; twifmein 3$cb t>e. fjac. 4/ 1 7. 

iff fhnfftf nnb mew SLa$ $$x\$u$XiWtyt un$ fofreb* 

ifl leicbt. reicl)/ aber er n>tll uni nidjt win* 

3fjr Jtcbett .StfnDer! n>tr roer* gen ; c$ erforDertju Diefemfom* 

ten ja bier &on unferm @eelen* men etoen "frenroiliigen ©ebor* 

&rauticjam fo liebreid) gemkfji* fam/ Dtetoeilen aber in f etnem an* 

get $u f ommer> unD er n>ill un$ Dern «&e»f, unD i(l aucb fein an* 

er<mic£en/ unD wann n>tr fein Derer ^ftame unfer Dem *§immef 

3>ocb auf unS neijmen/ unD #er* Den $?enfd)en gegeben/ Darin n?ic 

fcenS 2)emuf& unD ©anfffmutft fallen felia tverDen/ aftf atleiti 

»on ibm kxmn, fo roerDen n>ir Durcb (j&rifhm?/ er ift Da$ lirt^ 

Diube finDen oor unfere <E>ee(e, fcbulDige 2am, twfcf;e$ Der gan* 

unD folcbe @eefen*3iube ttirDe* \m 2&(f @unDe getragen, (gc 

tvicjiugemefenfeijn; nun^in* tfl Die Q3etfcff>nung fur unfere 

Der! n)a^i(tDocbfu(fera(^^u^ unD Der gan^en iQdt @unDc 

unD ©emutb ift Der ®eg Da* tvorDen/ er ifi unfer ©ee(en? 

jU/ unD wa$ ift fcbmer^ltcber iSrautigam/ Der DaS i)er(obrne 

at^ ^etn/ unD «5ocl;mutb (lur^et menfcb(icbe@efcl)(ecbt mieDer au« 

Da binein. De^ ©afan^ 50?acbt erlofete/ unD 

^ie erquicflicb ttjar e$ Der rotll jtcb mit feinem erliifeten 

grofien @unDerrn r »on roefeber ?0?enfcbiicben ©cfcblecbt »er(o^ 

!t>irlefen?uca7. al$ibrDer«£>err ben in €n)igfeif/ fo folte \a auf 

3<gfu^ Die febmere ©iinDenla^ unferer <&titc Da(? 93er(oben an 

abgenommen/ unD ibre ©ee(e (£bri(Ium unfern ^eelen^rdu* 

rube cjefunDeiv jur b^licben tigam/ roie n?tr in £iebe mit ibm 

^)ancffagungfa^te(teficbsuDe^ *>er(obt unD tereinigt roerDen 

^rrn 3£jii gufen nieDcr, unD m6cbfen/ unfer #aupttt?erc£ unD 

n«|tc feme gufie mit Q:brdnen innigfte^ Q}er[angen fei;n ; w& 

& f a flA(b 

11 



162 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



2,66 &)** %>*&$, time ecbwlmriper*, 

tiacb tt>tt am erftcn tracbfen fol* foljmOpfer »or mem tint) t>*t 
ten, ja e$ folte un$ mebr Daran ganfcen 2£elt @unDe nwDen/ 
gelegw fenn, ate an allem tt?a$ Den baft Du un$ au$ £tebc gegc* 
ftcbtbar ift, er aUein ift un$t>on ben, ad; gib micb ifjm auburn 
<S<2>ttgem<$cbt, 3»r X£>et$* {gigentljum uber, Dag id) Durc& 
tyit f $ux<8exe<bti$Uit f $wc fein bitrer SepDen unD ©terbea 
^etligung twb 3ur igrlo* t>on meinen @unDcn gereinigt 
fUng, i Corinth i, 30, (ESift roerDe, t)cr fan mid) Durd) fettt 
anDerg fein €0?ittler jroifcben ^lutreinigen, unD icb mill mid) 
Q)Ott unD Den $ttenfcben, al$ aucbfortbinDiefem<Seelen*2lvfct 
nur aUein Der eingebobrne ©ofyn ganfcubergeben in gen)illigen@e* 
@otteg,<£r)riftug Sgfu^i^im. fjorfam, unD Die ©ebore unD S5e* 
2, 4. 5 . 6. 3)urd> ibn babm n>ir fef)(e, Dieer mir, meine arme unD 
einen gugang jum SSarer, £pb. wrtvunDete ©eele $u Ijetjlen, Mr* 
2,17.18. UnD mann n>ir mit fcbrcibf, gurmiHig annebmen; 
fcem Derlof)rnen ©ofrn recbt in foramen n>ir fo mit Dem »er* 
un$ fcbfagen, unD unfern gu* (obrne @obn in roabrem @5(au* 
ftanD roegen unferer begangenen ben, berljlidjer Q$uffe, mir emem 
^unDen recbt ju ^erfcen fafien, Demutbigen unD jerfcblageneti 
unD in recbtcr#erfcen6 53ufle Den £erfcen unD ©emurbe 511m Q3a* 
C$orfa& faffen, mir Dem wlor> ter, unD Dem (^obn, fofolgec 
wn ©obn Sum Q}arcr $u geben, J>icrauf Die jmente ©ntabung De$ 
unD ju ibm fagen : Vatcv idy #©rn 3©u, unD Die ift fo 
Jtobe tjcfutiDtget in bem freunDlid) unD gnaDenreicb al$ 
^immeluubvorfctr, icbbm Die ©fte, fie ift befcbrieben \m 
mcbt wertb 0<rf$ tcfo bettt ©)angelio3or)anneg6,37.unD 
(5obn betffa macfce tmcb lauret mfe folgt : 2t(!es wa$ 
ttttr ale emeu bemcr C<tg* mtr metrt Pater gtbt, t>4£ 
Joiner, icbergebe micb nun auf$ fcomt^u mtr, imb tver 31* 
neueunterDeinen@5eborfamfUnD imrfcomt, ben wert>e tcb 
fage nun Dem^aran, DerS&elc rocbt bt'n<w$ floflen. 
unD meinem fleiKblicNeftnten @o fomme Dann roer <&m\t 
©gennjilien ab, Die micb bisber Dcrfyeifit, unD men fein @un* 
&on Dir unD De?ner©naDebaben Den*©reul betruber, $u Dem, 
abgeroenDet, acb GOft fet> mir Der feinen eon (i'cb mei§t, Derpcb 
©unDer gndDig, unD gib mir gebeugt^uibmbegiebef,u)ien)i(C 
Den littler jmifeben Dir unD Den Du Dtr tm £id)tt (teljn, unD Durc& 
^enfeben, DaS ift tm [it* Did) fefbff m\of)nn ger)n, Mt 
ber@obn, an Dem Du S&obfgc* Du Der^unDe (anger Dienen, Da 
fallen baft/ Der ift ia Dag Q}er* bity ^ retten/ er erfebienen, O 



nem! 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 33 163 

*ErnfJ licbe igmta^nnng Art fh'rte ©cfctfler :c. 367. 

Aeio iMlag Dk ©unDen^aJjn, 5D?at(6dt 3/ Die famen aucfr ja 
twin £eptanD nimtDie ©unDer 3^banne^ 'Sauffe, tvte aberSo* 
on. banned t5ic (SigenmilligeS tint) 

2Ba$ finD nun b(e •©inber* bocbmutfyigeg £eben anfa^e/ fo 
nufien, bic un$ fcerbinDern, Dag nannteer (te Ot£erge$ud)te/ unD 
»irnic^tiu®>n(?ounfcrm@ee* frracb$uil)nen: Set?et3«tirtb 
len*Q>rdutigam fommen? t^tttrecbt|cb4ffette^firilcb l te 

3)er (Satan fleUec unS t>.a3 berBuflfe. 3lberfiet(jatenm<$t 
Sveicb Diefer ( 2Gett unD tbre£err* SBuffe/fie &erad)teten aucb ©Ote 
Kc&feit »or, tn 2iugen(ufi, Stei* te$ Svatf) roiDev fid? felbjfr unD 
fd)e$lutf> unb&offdrtigem&ben/ licfen fid; nicfrt tauffen, af$ ju 
unD roann t»ir Dafi unferm fleifcb* feben Suca 7- S)«t «g)(£rr 3& 
Itc&gcftnfcn (£igenroilfen, Der fuSgabibnenauc&benDtatftjvaS 
nacb Dem 8aH wn $?atur jum fie tbun folten Dag fie DaSetvige 
Q56fen geneigt itf; Die-^errfcbajTc Jeben- fiinDen mdcbten/ Die S&or* 
uberlaffeti/ fo tvirb Dag Smitten te finD befcbrieben 3o&anne$ 5. 
$u Cbrifio roenig gortgang ge* unD lauten n>ie foigt: Quebec 
winner man fomtroobiforoeuv tn t>er Bcfrrifft ^<w* ty* 
Dag man befennef/ Dag(£bnfiu$ mewet t^r ^4bt b4$ ewt&e 
wratfe getforben, n?eld>e$ aud) ilebcn brinnen, twb fitift* 
eine lautere unD tbeure ^Oabr* l>te von nriraeugec, twbtbr 
fjeit i\t f aber tvarum (EbrifiuS wolt ntcfrt 3wmtr fcommen, 
furallegefiovben, unDnueunfere b4jl t>r b46 Jleben tyabm 
3)fud;t bargegen it\$ 93Jerct* ge* mocbtet. §)er ftoebmutbige 
webtet werben folle, fofd;etf roirD €igenn>ille bielte. fie Don Cftrifio 
fogfeicb nut bepgefuget/ unD lau* unD Dem eroigen ttbtn ab. 
eet rote foigt, 2 Coring, o 1 f . 3d) befenne »cn £erfcen mit 
Uttberttfb4rumfu>|ie4k Dem 2ipo|W ^3autt, i^motft* 
Ie geporben, auf ba$ btejo 1, if. 2>4p es je geimffttdb 
&4 tebett, ^mfore ritefct iV W4^r fey, twfc cm t^euir 
nen fclbffc lebett, fonbern wcrtbesXPort/^p^ftia 
t>em, ber fwr (te geporben (C^rt/iue fcommeit iff in bit 
twb 4ufcrf?4rtbett ift. SDiefe XOeit/ bte ©uttber (eltg 3» 
£ebengreguln finD Dem fleifcblicb* nt4cben; unter welcben tcb 
geftnten gtgenmtKen jumtDer^ ber furne^mfJe bin. fybtt 
unDfo(angDer0eifc()(i^gefinie Weil Cbttfiu^ fommen tfi Die 
^igenmitte DieOber^anD bebrift/ ©unDer felig $u macben,fo mug 
roirD Dag fommen $u Cftrifio Der ©unDer aucb su €5rifio 
DerbinDert. ®re ^Pbanfaer unD fommen; ttann er felig tverDen 
©aDucaer/ tvoaon n>tr lefen n>ill. fommen n?ir@tinDer$u 

^ f a Cbrifio, 



164 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



16% 



C&r. jDocFs; time ©cbttimeip<w 



©ri (to, t>cr f omen ift t)ie @utt* 
l>er feCi^ ju macben, fo fomt 
DaS ^erfoferne (gcftaaf jufeinem 
£irten, Der t>er£obrne ©rofeben 
i|t n>ieber gefunt>en/ Der itfrfobr* 
ne (gobn fomt roieDerju feinem 
QJater, rooruber ftd> Die gncjef 
tm #immef erfreuen, unD je mebr 
tt>tr Den33orfa(5ne(jmenun$mit 
©jrijlo m frepnjifft^em ©eljor* 
fam $u ijereinigcn/ je mefcrnw* 
t>en ttwr auct> beftnDcn, Dag un£ 
Die.3)fna,e Die nn^ nacfr unferm 
fleifcfrlicHefinftn ®gentt»t*aen ei* 
m Su|f roaren/ roerDen un$ nun 
a'ne fd>n>cre £afl fenn, n>oru>er 
tvir un$ <3eti(5t6^t'fittt>en roerDen 
in farmer ^uffemiteinemDe* 
mutf)tcjen gugfall ju Dec @na* 
Den^5ut $u roenDen, bit Da$ 
wrrounDete ®en>i|Ten gefceifef, 
imD foir 3?ul)e pnDen t>or unferc 
(Seelen, unD fofcfre @eefen<2Ru* 
fee fcerDen iDir bei) Cfcrijio fln* 
Den/ nxmn n>fr su tftm fommen. 
©ofte mfr nunDiefe Stage ju 
^beit werDeti/ meifen tc& sjom 
ftommen $u (Eljriftofcbreibe/ ob 
n>ir Dann au$eignen$rdfften$u 
Cfjrijto fommen fdnnen, iihanu 
rootu mit 9^ein# nMrfonneneS 
nicfjt au$ eigenen jftdfffen, aber 
Darin unD Darmit (tnt> n>ir nicbt 
entfc&ulDtgef, e$ fomt faerinnen 
auf unfev Gotten oDer nicfet 
TOolIen an/ Dev #(£rr 3<£fu$ 
iegteinSeuflnugfcintf <2Bii(eng 
ab/ uber Serufalem, Die ^Oor* 
te ftnD befefrrieben £uca$ 23/ 37. 
Wi« oflrb tyxbt ufe bum 



Kwfcer vttfamlett wtUtn, 
vote ewe -foenm vtx\cm\tt 
tbre 'Aucbkin untcr i^rc 
$lu$d, unbifyv tyabt m'ebt 
gewolt. 

^BoKen n>ir un$ Durcfr Die 
fcenlfame @5naDe ©Otte^ nicbt 
$ud)tigen laff^ri/ DaS ung 6ttfid)e. 
^Befen unD Die n>eu1iej;e£u|te$u 
fcerfeugnen, fa (tnD n>tr ;a fefbff 
fd>u(D Dran/ Dag un$ Der £&tt 
3£fu$ nicfet unter feine ® naDen* 
Slugel neljmen fan, roie gerner 
auc& rooffe. §)ie naturfrcb g> 
bofjrnen^inDTeinfo'ffen au$ eig* 
nen ^rdfften nicfrtf t^un $u ibrer 
fefbfl Dieinigung/ nocjj |td> fefbj? 
befieiDen, fpeifen unD crancfen/ 
nod) (tcb felbft »or alien rot'Der* 
ttwirfigen gnfdUcn ju beroabren/ 
$u Diefem aHen baben (te au^et* 
Qmm ^rdfffen fein^}erm6gen, 
n>a^ i^nen mangeuv Dag jeigm 
fie mit %81'mm an f Diefe^^ei^ 
nen rubrt Der gutter ^er^/ jte 
reinigte^/ flereicbtil>mDie£5rii' 
fie, unD ijl Der gutter ifrregreu* 
De, n>ann Da^ ^inD Diefelbe ju fei* 
ner ^eib^^unD £eben&$?abrun£ 
anne^men n>ill/ will aber Dad 
5?inD Diefelbe nicjf anne^men/ fo 
n>irD Die gutter btttubt, Dann 
fie metg Dag DaDurcj) Dem $inD 
feine Seibe^^unD ^ebeng*^rdjfte 
abnebmen, nun founr>crm6genD 
a!5 Die nafur(id;e gebo&rne^inD* 
(ein ai^ et^nen ^rafff en ftnD, fo 
uncermigenD (i'nD mir aucf) au^ 
ti$mm ^rdfften un^ feibfr ju rei^ 
nigen/ wann n>ir aba unfere 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 33 165 

{grtt|Eli$e fgxmatymng <m faint ©filler it* z6$ 

9lid)tt$ tit erfemten tote efenDig (SftiaDen^efcOenc? Don ®Ott 

t$ mit m$ befttk ijl, unD jmD untf aefcbencfet/ unD Durcb un* 

fcesieria nadj Der wmunfftigen fern #grrn 3£fum <£bnftum 

lantern €0?iXd^ bcr @nat)en/ rme ertvorben, etf toerDen aucb roe* 

tie ;e$t flebi$rne ^wDiein.nacfj nig %a$e unD ©tun&en t>orbe$ 

i&wr^tfer.$Wc&/fojfUaDie* geben/ Dagwirimleibli^enunl) 

fe Iwlfame (BnaDt SOttetf alien geiftlicf>en 2(n(iegen ntcl>t nfofeig 

gtafc&en erfcienen ; ftnD rotr baben auf Der'-SBacbt $u fle&erv 

nun dm #er£en toiUig un£ Dure!) fonDern nrir roerDen afle geit Ur* 

Diefe#e»>(fame@naDe$cbti3en facbe f>abcti «n6 mit ^ac^ert 

|uta(fen&a^un^tfIief;eSS3efen unt) ^Sdten #x Der ©naDetW 

wnD Die mltlid)* 2u(len $u t>er* <$bur ju wenDen/ unD urn @et* 

ieugnen/ unD rcfolten aerne $ucb* fleS * unt) ©faubeng * $raffte 

iifl/ gereebt unD ©ottfelig leben an$u()alten, mil jtcb ed^(id[^ 

inDiefer^elt/wirbefinDenunS fttinbt ftnbm? t>#e n>fDer unfe* 

aberauSeigenen^rafffenbierju vc ©ee(e jfreto/ gecjen mU 

tok Die" jejt jjebobrne tffa&feit?/ cbe n>ir auS ciaenen jftrdfiften 

flan^frafttfogn*un»crm6gcn&; ntc&t^ t)erm<teen/ aber Durcb 

foift fofbUtemguftonD feinbef* ©Otfea #ulff unt) .Q3e»flan& 

fer.Otfittct, a(6 roir taffen unfer &erm6$en tvtr alleg. 

Slnliegen mit ^Betneri/. gSitten 3)er £@;rr n>etfe ung erfdfen 

unt) gfeben t)or <550tt Funb tver* fcon affem Uebef/ tint au$Wf* 

ten/ er fan Den $?uben 5Crafft, fen jufeinemfttmmlifcJenfKei*/ 

tmD tm Unt>erm6genben @rar* roelcbem fen (£bre »on (Sttjigfett 

cfe geben/ imb wr foicbe bat /a $u ^migfejt/ 2fmen. 

fcer £€rr 3£fu$ 3 ©cjWffel 3br lieben $inDer ; Die tbr gtt 

DerOMeiffunaeninfetnem'Se* eurem QSerjIanD unD %af)xm 

ffament(ic6en 3Bi(Icn bfnterlaf* fommen fe»D/ Die £iebe $u eureni 

(en/ Der eeflc, btttet, foxvirb (geelen #e»l unD ©effoWf, 

tndy gcgebcit/ ft*cbet/ fo |jat micb geDrungen eucb noift 

wcrDct it)r fiiibtn, Uopffet Dor meinem SibfcJieD au^ ikh 

art, (0 voivb eud)aufsetfy<m. ju erma^nen; unterfucftet eucfr 

UnDma^mtrDannaufunfer^it* felbfo ob i'6r im ©(auben ju 

ten/ @u*en unD 2inF(op(fen C^iflo fommen/ oDer nod> ju 

^mpfangen, Dag if? fauter ©na* fommeniDiCig fei>D/ pnDet iht 

te urn ©naDe/ unD fcfc&c^ f<to* bet? eucf)/ Da§ i^r mit Dem uu 

mn mt aitc?> unfern eigenen fobrnen ©o^n t)om QSater ge# 

'^rdfften nfc&t iufcftreiben, fon* .gangen/ fo faflfet Den QSorfafc 

tarn Der ©naDe ©Otteg/ unt) mit Dem aerfobrnen @cbn rwe* 

He. ibt alfo We ©rtfefrif ^m ^r^umSJat^m^n, faflfet 

ttt* 



166 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

270 <ffcr;1>date,e{rtcd6cbolme*fh£rmftfcrt.art peine @<$6Ier. 

cucl> Me f&tlt mit ibm Sfuaen* faffen, er feetflfet untf ia fo fie& 

lufb SMclwHufi/ unD Oojfdrti* reicf) fommeiv ttne i&r au$ fet* 

gem &ben nicbtfanaer betl)6ren, nem 2Botf aernommen, (gold) 

mad)tf eure $erfcen fofi t>on fofe $ommen brtna.et un$ 2id)f, feer* 

<frer fallen £iebe, unt> bexiiebtt geflfet t>od) Da$ £ommea niche 
»n& wrfobet eucb mit 3<2fu un* ©w m #*te fcfrulDiger 

ferm ©eefen*25ra r utigam, Der C£rifiop|> 2>*<f . 

aitf £teb« fein £eben fur tin* ge< 

NB. ©a 3)rucfer f>af e$ bet> btefem <gtu& nfr&ig eraefcfer 
ties 2lutf)or$ 9fctmen bet> $ufe£en> erflliclv roeit e$ befonDerS/ 
e&er sum QSorauS an feine ©cbiiler gericbter iff, ( ob e$ tvobt 
«Ule Sttenfcfeen obne 2lu$nai>m anaefjet,) fo iff etf bilfi$, i>ag |te 
nnflfen n>er mic ifjnen reDet; fo f)ataud> jum 2lnt>ern £>er liebe 2lu* 
tfjor einen fofeben gufen <2BanDef gefubrt, unD tfyut tt no*, m 
feinem bofyen Wttx f Dag e$ ntc|>t unerbauficlv un&ibm nic&tna** 
tfreilicj feptt wirD, Da§ man feinen ^amen roiffe. ©Oft aebe, 
bag atfe Dit e$ (efetv ft* etnen ttmrcflic&eti Sftufcen Darau£fd)5pf* 
ftn mo#en* 



& & @ & ® 

^ft *&$* i^ft i^^ 

# ^S & 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 40 



167 





ieiftltcW Ifagajieit. gffum. 



40. 

tyuribezt ti$tt)ige &ittm*l^e$tln fife 2tfnbet» 

I. ^cgeltt, wie fid) tin Ikinb in &em $><tufc fewer i£U 
tern 511 peefcalten bat. 

t. 2>e$ JTJorgeits bey uttb n<td> fcem Zufftttyn. 

fcferodfted mtt Deinen <$efd>tt>i* 
ftem oDer anDew, fuefce aucfy ben 
Dem 2ln$teben gute ©eDantf en ju 
t>aben. (Srinnere i)icb an Dad 
^letD Der $ereci)figfett 3(?fu, 
roelcfced Mr in 3£fu crroor* 
ben morDen, unD faffe Den 
2)orfa(3/ c^ an Diefem ^age 
Durcb lnutfyroilltge @5fint>en ntcbt 
5u beflecfen. 

7. ^enn t>u Dad @fc(id>ftmi> 
Die ^>anDc roafcfrejl/ fo fprn^e 
Dad ^Gaffer mcfrtin Der ©tube 
fcerum. 

8* 3>en $?unb afle $?orgen 
mit ^BaflTer au^ufpulm unDDie 
gafaw mtt fcem ginger abreiben/ 
Dt$i»t $ur (£rl)a(tung Derfelben. 

?. &ennDut>ie#aar*r\mr* 
mejb fo ttitt ntcf?t mitten in Die 
©tube/ fonDem bepfeit in eine 

Crfe. 

10. S)ad $?orgen*@5ebdt 
tterricbte nidjt au$ laltftnmger 
©ettobnbetf/ fonDem au$ beefy 
lidjer £>antfbarfeitgegen ©ott, 
Der Dicb in Deri)origen9&tcf)rbe< 
biitit bttf unfc mf ifrn Dcmutfyia. 
Ov r an, 



5^3ebed £inb fo baH> Du 
? SO? org end gctoccfet 
roirji/ fo tfefje auf, ja 
genjoljne Did; ofyne rcecfen 511 
reciter 3cit auf$uroacl)en, unD 
obne SauDern ton Deinem £ager 
aufeujteben. 

*. ^ann tin Dad 85tffet>er* 
fajfen baft/ fo Decfe Daffelbe fein 
crDentlici) tvieDcr gu. 

3. £a§ Deine erjte (55cDancfen 
$u ©ott gerid)tetfej>n/ nac|) Dem 
(Sfemptl £)at>iDd/ tveldS>er ^f. 
13?* 18. fpricbtr mannicb erroa* 
djebintcb nocj) bet) Dir, unD b ]3f. 
63,7. roann id) envacfre, fo reDe 
k\) ton Dir. 

4. <Q$tete Denen t)k Dir juerft 
begegnen, unD Dcincn glternunD 
©efebtoitfern einen guten $?or* 
gen r Docl) nicfyt aud bloffer @5e* 
n>cbnf>eit/ fonDem and roafyrer 
£iebe. 

5. ®eroof)nc Did) Deine RkU 
Der fein burtig, aber Docl) aucb 
orD6ntUc$ anjukgen. 

6. Sinjlatt Dee unmi£en ®e* 



168 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



320 fynnben nHtyQt &mn*T&t$tlrt fnv Kinder. 

an, Dag er an&iefem3;age bcine S&obffbafen, bitte iljn urn Die 

QSerritbtungen fegnen rooKe, m> ^Oer^ebuucj Detncr ©unDen, unD 

gig amj> ntcbf Da3 ©ingen unD empfeljle Did) feiner gndDigen 

&fen in Der 35icbef. S25cfcbtrmung. 

u. SDein SOJorgen Q5roD ig 19. <2Benn Du in Der 9?ad)t 

nfd>t auf Der ©affe, oSer in Der aufroacben foltefi, fo geDencfean 

©dbule, fonDern bitfe t?cine (21* @50ft unb feine SlHgcgenroarf, 

fern, Dag fie Dir folcf)e$ $u #aufe unD bdnge eiteln ©eDancf en nicfet 

Qtbm. nacb. 

12. ©ucbebaraufDeine$8u* 3- 2$ C V *> cr WMfatit. 
cber jufammen, unD fomm ju 20. 9U3atin Du, gunial ben 
recbtetgeit in Die ©cbule. fremDcn &uten ju ^ifc&e gebefi, 
2. 2>ee 2lbenft& bey fcero fo famine unD roafcbe Dicb Dormer 

@<fclafen*gefcen. fein reinficb- 

13. $?acb Dem 2l6enD*<£fien 21. Unfer Dem^dfen lag bk 
fgge Dic& nicbt in einen^Bincfel, .gdnDe nicf>t jur £rDen bdngen, 
Dafelbfi 511 fcblafen, fonDern m* fabre aucb fonft nicbt Damit ber* 
ficbte em Deine 2lbenD>2lnDad)f/ urn, fonDern lag fie jugleicb mit 
nut ©ingen, Q3dten unD £cfen, Den 2(ugen ju ©Off empor ge* 
ebe Du 019411 $>ette begiebejl ricbtet fenn. 

14. Ste^e Did; an etoem be* 22. &bne Did) unfer Dem @e* 
fonDern Orfe ai\6, oDer reo eg ja bk nicbt an, unD gaffe nicbt mit 
ftt (&egemtfart anDrer £eufe ge* Den 2lugcn berum, fonDern fen 
jcbeben mug, fo fen baben befebet* anDdcbtig unD ei)rerbietig »or Der 
Den unD febamfyafticj. beiligen $?ajefidt @5otteS. 

if. ^eftebe$im>ei(enbieau&' 23. sftacbDem ©ebdtroarte 

gesogenen&leiDer, ob etn?a^Da* hit anbere, Die proffer finD ibren 

ran jerriffen fen, Damit e$ ben *pla$ eingenommen bflben, a(6 

3eiten auSosebeffcrttverDen Hm. Dann fefce Dicb aucb fein fiili unD 

16. 2BitfDeine$(eiDernid)l fittfaro$u <£ifcbe. 

in Der ©tube berum, fonDern le> 24. Ueber <£ifcbe fifce fein ge* 

e fi?$ufammen an etnen geroif* raDe unD (rid, rcacfle nicbt mit 



en Ort, Damit Du fie $?orcjen3 Dem ©fubl, unD lege Die 2lrme 

frub gleieb roieDer finDen f 6nneft nicbt auf Den ^ifeb. $?efier unD 

1 7. Sege Dicb fein $ud)ttg unD ©abel lege jur recbf en, Da$ Q5roD 
geraDe in$ Q3ette/ unD DecfeDict) abes jur lincfen ©eife. 
nooblju. 2f. gfteiDe alle^, m$ Den 

18. €be tut einfabfdfej?, fo ©cbein eineg beifien unD unban* 
prufe Dicb/ toie Du Dea <iag ju> Digen »&unger^ bat, Dabtn geb«3* 
gcbrac&t/ Dancf e QJott fur feine ret/ tvenn man Die ©peifen fo be* 

gierig 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 40 



169 



&imfeert ttJt^tge SftttiMRegeltt fftr 2tfnfrer. 321 

QktiQ mfkhttr roenn man Der er* dje Fein ©erdufcbe Durcb @cbar* 



fte in Der (gcbuffcl iff, twnn man 
Da$ 33roD auf einmal in (auter 
%$ifitn jfrfcbnetDet, tt»enn man 
0cfd?tt)inD unD gieria, ifiet, roenn 
man fcbon ein anDer (gtucf 
?Srot) forDert, Da man nocb ntc&e 



ren auf Dem teller. 

32, ^ecfe Den feller tveDer 
mit Dem ginger nocb mit Dcr 
Suncje ah/ fabre aucb ntcf>t mit 
t>er Sunge auffer Dem gftunbe 
berum. @tu^e Den (Sienbogen 



binunter gegeffen, roenn man $u nicbt auf Den $$$/ trow Du Den 

flrofie 3$if[en fcbneiDet, roenn £6ffel $um 3)?unDe brmgefl. 
man Den £6ffe( jti ttolf nimmf, 33. SDa* <3alfc nimm nidjC 

roenn man Den $?unD ju toll mit Den gincjern, fonDern rm't Der 

ftopfet, k. $?efierfpifee au$ Dem ©alfcgaf . 

26. Q5Ieibe r>or Deinem Orfe 34* 3)ie $nod)tn oDer roa$ 
tn Der (ScbufiH, unD fep »er* fonftubria^leibef, tt>irf nicbt un* 
cjnugt mit Dem'/ roa$ Dir gegeben rer Den <£*($/ ftojfe (it aucb nicfjt 
tvtrD, unD begebre nicbt »on at auf Datf^tfcrV&icb, fon&etn lag 
(em ju baben. fte auf Dem SKanDe De$ tellers 

27. (giebe nicbt auf eined an* (iecjen. 

Dern^efler, oberetroamebralS 3$. £)«$ Slfoc&em in Den 

Du befommen babe, fonDern a> gdbnen mit Dem $?ejfer ober 

nieffe Da$ Deine mit SQancffa* ©abeltfebt nicbt fein, unD tjl Dem 



Sung. 

28. 30 nicbt mebr g(eifd) 
*inD gutter, a($Q$roD, beigaber 
Da$ ^roD nicbt mitt)tn Sabnen 
ab, fonDern febneioe mit Dem 
$?effer orDentlicbe SSiffen/fcbnei* 
De fie abet nicbt i)or Dem 9)?un* 
De ab. 

29. gaffe WHffet unD £6ffef 
fein orDentlicb, unD bute bio), 
Dagtw DaS^feiD oDer^ifcbtucb 
nicbt befJecfefi. 

30. 3)ie fetfe ginger fetfe 
ntcbt ab, fonDern roifebe (ie on 
eto ^ucb, braucbe abcr fo rnel 
m6glicb ill, Die ©abelanftatt Der 
ginger. 

31* $aue Die (gpeifen mit 
WSCfc&foffenen dipped/ unD ma* 



gabnfleifeb fdjaDud). 

36. @o t>tcl m6gu'cb iff, fo 
entbalfe Dicb Die^afe uber^ifeb 
$u febneufcen, erforDert eg abet 
Die Sftotb, fo roenDe DaS $nge* 
ftcbt ctroag torn $,if#e binmeg, 
oDer ftafte Die £>anD oDer bit 
@enwtte &or j DeSgieicbenaucfj 
roann Du ^iefejl oDer «5u|reft» 

37. ©eroo'bne Dicb Durcbau^ 
nicjt Delicat unDecfelid)t wffyn, 
oDer Dir einjubiJDen, Dag Du Did 
unD itm$ nicbt effen f6nncfl. 
£0?ancbe muffen in Der gremDe 
ejfen (ernen, tt>a^ fie ^u «&aufe 
nicbt f onten. 

38. SMe auf Dem Reflet (ja* 
benDe (&ptiiw ju genau befeben 
oDer gar beriecben/ ftebet nic^t 
9v r 2 tvobL 



170 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



322 -fcimfcert iwt^tgc &tien£kt$cln fur &m&er. 
roobf. <E>o(te)tDu in Der <Spei* Dcrc berum geben - fafftf. 3) 



fe ein«©aaroDcr fonfl ertvaS fin* 
Den, fo tbue c$ fiill unD unwr* 
mercft bei> (SeitC/ Damit anDere 
ntcjtjum (Scfel beroocjcn roerDen. 

3?. ©0 oftDu etiva^ auf Den 
heifer befomfl, fo beDantfe Dicb 
mit ^fteiauna. £>ee £aupts. 

40. 3)ie Jtnocben nage nicbt 
mit Den gcibnen ab, macbc aucb 
nicbt etn ®eto7e/ Da$ $?artf be** 
aug $u f lopfen. 



££enn man Dm Sinfancj tm 
^rincfenuber^ifcbemadKt, ebe 
bit 2ieltern oDer Q)orne()mem 
getruncfen. 4) "^Bcnn man 
jugleicb mil einem ^ornebmen 
ba^ ©(ag an Den $?unD fefcet. 
f) 'S&enn man trintfet rtwm 
anDere nocb mit una reDen. 6) 
£Benn man Da$ ©lag etlidx 
mal binrer einanDer anfeljet. 
4^ 2>or unD nacb Dcm c $:rm* 



41. <£$fcbicftftcb mcbt, *>a& tfen pfiegtmanDen9)?unD abju* 
jcnige n>a$ Du einmat auf Dem roifcben Docb nicbt mit Der#antV 



teller gebabf, wicDcr in Die 
@d)u(fcl au legen. 

4^. ^Genn Du ubcr^ifeb et< 
n>a$ b^fangejt, fo bufebicb Dag 
Du Den (£rmet nicbt in bk ©cbuf* 
fef banflen (afifeft, oDer em ©lag 
umrocrffejl 

43. Ueber $ifcb reDe nicbt 
eber bit Du gefragt mir jl, baft Du 
aba in Der ^ircbe oDer (gkbufe 
etroas guteSgemercfet, oDer fdllt 
tit tin feiner ©prucb em, Der 
frbjum^ifcursfebieft, foDarftf 
Du fofeben roobl fcorbringen, re* 
Den aber anDere m$ guteg, fo 
i)6n aufmercffam $u. 

44. ®enn Du trfntfen roilf?, 
fo mufl Dufeine@peifemebr im 
SOjunDe baben, unD Dicb »orber 
b6m'cb neigen. 



fonDern mit einem ^ucb oDer 
©erw'etfe. 

47. ©ep uber %ifcb Dientf* 
ferticj/ tvenn erroaS in Die ©tube 
i)imin ju boblen, oDer fonjt $u 
tbun iff DaS Du fcerricbten fanjl. 

48. QCennDufattbifc foftc* 
be obne ^oltern auf, nimm Den 
©tubf mit, rounfebe cinegefeg* 
nefe SO?ab(&eit, unD trtrt be»> 
(Seitju marten \va$ Dir befob* 
kn roirD. SDocl; bat man ficb 
bierinn nacb Dem roatf getuobnlid) 
ift, $u ricbten. 

4?. 3)a$ ubrige 23roD jlecfe 
nicbt in Die ^afebe, fonbern lag 
e6 auf Dem %ifcbe (iegen.. 

fo. Sbc Du nacb ^ifebe et* 
tva^anDer^ »erricbte|l, foDancft 
»or Deinem ©cbopfer Der Did) 



45. <& ftebet febr ubek 1) gefpeifet unD gefattiget bat. 

frftarcfeguge tbut, Dag man Sinb in t>er 6*uU rerMtcii 
©cbnaufen ofcer ttef 2itbem bofe^ foil, 
len mug. 2) ^CBenn man unter 5 1. $kM 5?inD mnn Du in 
Dem ^rincfen DieSlugen aufan^ t>k ©cbule fomft/ fo neige Dicb 

ebrerbieti^/ 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 40 171 

3>ttttbert rtct^i^e ©itten^etjelrt filr 2\w£>er. 3*3 

tf)Uibkt\Qr unD fe£e Did) fltCI an 5?. ©ielje mebr auf Did) fefbft 

Deinen Ort/ unb geDencfe an Die a(S auf anDere, n>o Du mc&t sum 

©egenrcart ©Ottel 2luffeber fiber fte befMet bifh 

52. SSSann gebatcf roirD, fo 60. 3Benn Du md)t gefraget 

beDencfe Dag Du mit ©Otr re> wirft/fofeoflifl^unD^ilfanDern 

Deft, unD rcenn @otre$ ^33ort nicbtein/ rcenn fte tl>re Section fa< 

gebanDelt tiotrD/ fo beDencfe/ Dag gen fallen/ fonDern lag jte fur ftcjj 

©ottmit Dit reDe/ fet) ai|o De* reDen unDantrcorten. 

mfitbtg unD anDacbrtg. 61. ©egen Deine $?itfcbufer 

73. 2£enn Du faur bdten beroeife Did) (iebreich unD frieD* 

muft/ fo reDe langfam unD be* feiti9,$antfenicbtmitibnen,ftof* 

Ddcbtu'cb; unD tvenn gefungen fefienrcbt, be|uD(enid)tmitDei* 

n)irD/ fo fuc&e nid)tDie anDern ju nen ©cbuben oDer mit Der 'bin* 

fiberfcbretjenoDerDaSerlteSlBort te ibre jileiDer, gib ibnen feme 

5U fyabcn. Q5ei)namen, unD wtfyalu Dicbm 

54; ©epDeinem £ebrmeifler a&n ^tucfa:alfogegenfte,mie 

attejeit geborfdtt?/ unD lag Dicb Du moUetf, Dag fte jtcb gegenDicj) 

nicbt fiber etner @acbe etlicbe pcrbalten jbflen> 

mat t>on tfjm erinncw. £2* £>fite Did) t?or aUm un* 

55- ^GirjtDu urn Deiner Un* anftdnDigen groben <&ittm unD 

arten n>tUen gejfraft/ fo beroeife ^5ebdrDen in Der ©c&ufe. £)a* 

Did) rccDer mir £Gorten nod) mit bin geboret, 1 ) 9IBenn man |tc& 

©ebdrDen ungeDulDig unD mi* mit t>tn fianbm oDer ganfcen 

Derfpenftig/ fonDern nimm e$ su Seibe t>or gaulbeit au&recFet. 2) 

Deiner 35efferung art. ^enn man in Der ©djufe Obfl 

5^ #ufe Dicb in Der ©djule oDer anDere ©acben iffet. 3) 

tor Dem fcbdnDlicben plauDern/ ^Bmn man Die#anDoDer2Jrm 

DaDurcb Du Dem (gcbulmeifter auf De$ $?acbbarg 2kbfef legefr 

feine %xkit fcbrcerer macbft/ Dei* oDer unter Den $opf fltytt, oDer 

ne 9#itfcbfi(er drgerfr, unD Did; fid) mit Dem^opfe i>ortt>drt£auf 

unD anDere an Der Siufmercffam* Den %ifcb leget. 4) ^Gennman 

frit binDerjt. Diegu|FeaufDicQ$ancf fe$et,oDer 

57. ®ib acbt auf alleS m$ DamitfcbarretoDerbaumehvoDer 

gereDet roirD, fi&e fein geraDe, unD Die %$tint fiber einanDer fcbldgt, 

fiebe Deinen Sebrer an. unD turn |tcb jlrecfet, oDer fit int 

r8. ©ollt Du Deine Section @ifcenoDer@reljen$un>eftDort 

auffagen/ fo fcbfage Da^^ucb einanDer fperrt. OSSBennman 

obne ©erdufcb auf/ (ieg fein (aut/ am 5?opf frafcef. 6) ^mn 

Deutficb unD langfam^ Dag man man mit Den Singern fpieiet oDer 

alle ^orte unD &\)\bm mfit* Daran f (aubet* 7) S&ennmatt 

ben t mm. dl r 3 Den 



172 THE WOKKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



324 %>mbtn nHtyiQc &mn&t$tln fur jkutder* 



t>en $opf bolbtjorjtcb/ balbfyin* 
rer ficb/ balb auft)ie@ettc tven* 
bet unb brefret. 8) ZBmn man 
ftfct unb fcbfaft. 9) 235enn man 
unter bem %ifcb ober £5ancf ijer* 
lim friecbet. 10) $Benn man 
bem preceptor Den SXucfen $u 
febret, n) <2Benn man Die 
5tleiber in Der<3d)u(e anberS an* 
tbue. 12) < 2Bennmanjtd)un* 
fldtrg in ber (25d?u(e bejeuget. 

63. £afte t>ctne Q5ucber in* 
twnbig unb au6r»eni>icj fein rein 
un$) fanber/ fdf>retb unb maf>le 
nicbt aKer(er) fyntin, jerreiffe fie 
nid)t unb &er(iebre fclned ba»on. 

64. 'SGennbufdjreibeil/fobe* 
fuMe Did) nic^t an «&dnben unb 
©eftcbt mit ber SDtnfcri/ befpru* 
l|e ami nicbt bamit ben 3£ifd) unb 
Die Q3dnc£ e/ ober beine unb m* 
Derer tftre $(eiber. 

65. ^ann Die @d)u(e au$ 
i(l; fo ttiac&e fein aepolter, fprin* 
ge nid>t n>ann Du eine %reppe 
berunter gefyen mufl; uber * ober 
3 @tuffen bin, $>amit Du niefct 
(gdjaben mjjmeO; unbgeljefitt* 
(am nac& £aufe. 

til. XOie ftcfr em :&ttit> 
fiuf ber (gaffe t>er&aU*rt foil. 

66. £iebe$ ftinb/ obbuajeid) 
nad) ber ©cbuleauffer ber^luf* 
ficbt t)tw$ £e()Mi,ei(ter$ bill/ fo 
ifl bocb ©oft an alien Ortencje* 
genrcdrfia/ bafarbu Urfad) fcafl 
aud[> auf ber @afle bid) t>or ibm 
unb feinen fceilicjen gncjeln su 
fc(>dmen. 

67. Ovenne alfo nic&t n>i(b auf 



ber ©affe Ijerum/ ftbrepe aud) 
nicftf/ fonbem gef)e frill unb cl)r* 
bar. 

68. Q$emeife bid) fcrjamljaf* 
ticj, unb fbuc nicjjt 6ffenf licr) i>or 
anbem &uten baSjenige/ n>a$ 
man an einem abejefonberten Or* 
te $u wrricbten pflecjef. 

69. 2iuf ber ©traff? $u effen 
ijl unanjldnbig. 

70. ©affe nid)t mit \>tn 2lu* 
gen in ber #6(je Ijerum/ faufe ben 
£euten ntcbt entgecjen; unb trttt 
nicftt mutbroiUia, in ben £otb/ n>o 
er am Dicfften i(l/ ober in eine 
$fufce. 

71. 2Bann bupeljefl $ferbe 
ober einen QBaytn fommen/ fo 
trttt auf t>k &titt, unb but* 
bier)/ ba$ bu nicr)t(gcbabennej)* 
mefl/ bdnge bid) niemaltf ijinteri 
an einen <2Bagen an. 

72. 3m 2Gintcr gelje nic&t 
auftf &$, roirf anbere nicbt mk 
@cbnee*Q5allen/ unb faljre ni^t 
mit lieberlicjen Q3uben auf t>m 
©cblitten. 

73. 3m ©ommer babe bic& 
nicbt im ^Baffer unb gelje nic&t 
ju nabt an baffelbe- «&abe aucft 
feinen ©efallen am ?Q?ut&roiflen 
unb frecben @pie(e«. 

74. ^51eib nicbt auf bem^Be* 
ge fleben/ n>o (id) £eute jancfen 
ober fcblagen ober anbere ^o§* 
fceifen treiben *, gefelle bicft nicbt 
$u b6fenQ5uben/ tk bicb»erfuj< 
ren ; (auf aud) nicbt auf t>m 
Safyrmdrcftenberum; jlebe nicbt 

beo ^n $}arcftfc()WM ffi<7 

unb 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 40 



173 



fyvmbcYt notice Sittett^Xecjeltt far Winter. 325 

tint) ftebe Den leidjtfertigen ^dn* rdufd; unD mefog QMdtfern nacfv 



£en nicfet jii/ Dann Du lernejr Da 
nfcbts ate Q56fe$. 

7*. gaffe Did) nic^t auf Der 
©affe mit anDern 5?inDern ju« 
fammcn/ Dag Du Die ©traljeein* 
ne!>mefr/ lege auc& nid)t Deinen 
2irm auf anDerer tbre^cbultern. 

76. 'SBann Dir jtmani) be* 
f antes oDer ttornebmeS begegnet, 
fo nwefoe ibm au£, unD bucfe 
Dicb bty!id?j roarfe aber nid)t fo 
lancje bt^ er fd)Dn neben Dir, oDer 



unD jeicbne ibnmiteincmljinein* 
gelegten fcbmalen (ancjen papier* 
cben, Deven Du immer etlicbe in 
Deiner %$kbt\ (icgen baben mu(!. 

80. QMauDere nicbt in Der 
5ttvcfeC/ unD njennanDere mit Dtr 
plauDern tvoUen/ fo gib ibnen f er* 
ne ?lntn?ort, tt>irft Du unfer Der 
spreDigt »om ©cblaf ancjefod)* 
tw, fo ftebe ein twnig auf> unb 
fucbc Did) DefTclben ju ertrebren. 

81. <20ann Der Aflame 3tfu$ 



garfcboneoruberifofonDernbe* genennetoDer Qtbattt roirD, fo 

wife tbm fofcbe <£brerbietigfeif, ^ntblofie oDer neige Dein -gaupt, 

roenn Du nocb ein paar ©cbritte unD bejeige Did) ebrerbietig. 

Don ibm bifl %t. ©affenid)t in Derftircfce 

IV. Kegeitt tote ftcb em {j crum m $ an t, crn £ C ufen unD 

*mfc in bcr perMlwn^ ober ^ e ^ctne 2lugen in guter gucbt 

%ir<be perbalten foil. D /v^u,™ 

77^ebe6^nD,beDencfdnDer % m ^„^ m <gfc 

<3erfamfungoDertebeanDte fen 4 h U nocb & 62 in Der 

Wge@eg^art®ot^,unD ScJu ie JU wrmeiDen Jaft; Me 

DagDuna* Dem^ortc, Dag ^unocbftielme&rmDer^ 

Dub6reftan,enem^ageger!cl). ^ JU mm M m . 

ttt werDenfoHeft „.. 84 . <2Benn Du mit anDern 

78. »rinael)eine55!<belunl> paa r»ifeinDie^rcbeunDau^ 

©efangbud) mit, unD ftnge j, e r ^trcbe gefubretn>ir(l,fofo(t 



unD bate fein anDdcbttg mit. 
&mn au$ Dem 9)?unDe Der/un* 
gen $inDer will fid) ©Ott tin 
Job $ubereifen. 

79. Unfer t)er $rebigt gib 
auf alleS acbt, mercfe roa$ auS 
Dem ^ert »orgeftellet, unD roie 
fcers^ortrag eingetbeilet ttirD; 
tuelcbcS Du aucb in Deine®ct>reib* 
^afelauffcbreibenfanfi <gd)la* 
ge ein unD anDern fcb6ne* @prud) 
H] Demer QMebel, Docb obne Q5e* 



Du niemanD auS ^ttutbroillen 
flofien, Deriren oDer befprt^en, 
fonDern ebrbaru.fliUe fortgeben. 

V. &egelttf wte peb etrt 
%irit> fonjT in fetnem 0am$en 
Umgan^c ?u rerbalren bat. 

8f. £iebe$ £inD, lebe mit je* 
DermannfrieDlicb unD etnig; unD 
lag Deine ganrje ^)6fiicbfeit au$ 
S)emutb unD waiter £iebe Dei 
^acbflen flieffen. 

8^. @en>of)ne Wcl) in alien 
Deinen 



174 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



•fctmbert n$tty$t &ttctt*ReQcln fiir At'trter. 

(ccje roenn Du etroag gefragef ivirf?; (af 



Oemen <S*acI)cn orDenrticJ), 
Seine ^256cber unDanDerg anfet 
nen getvifjfen Ort, unD (a§ e$ 
ttfcb't unoiDenfltcl) unD jcrffreuet 
Jjerum ficgen. 

87. 2&«nn bid) Ueine 0tern 
mischief en n>olren/ fi> merrieDte 
(gacfre n>oW/ Die Du au6rid>tcn 
follft, fcdmit Du fie nicfet urirec&t 
bejMeff. 2Benn Du Dein <55e* 
fcftdftau^erid)fctf)af?' fo fomm 
<jfeid) roicDer nad) >§aufe unD 
bringe 2lntivort. 

88. <Efl) niemalS muffin fonbern 
$ebe entroeber Deinen &tevn w 
.ftanb, obcr it>ieDerbo!ebeine8ectio» 
nef/UnD Jerue DaS/enigeaugtpenDio, 
ipaS for anfgeqe ben rcorDen. J^utc 
Did) aber, D<?§ Mi nicbt in gaifligen 
cber eiteln ^ikbern lefefi, ober Die 
3eit ; Dafur Mi &ott;Red)enfrbaff ae* 
Den mu|T,mitGbaiteri oDer SEBurfeln 
oerberbeff. 

89. 3Benn Mi ©elD befommft, fo 
flib el jemanb aufjubeben, DamitDu 
ei nicbt betlicbrctf ober oernafebetf. 
©ib oon Mm beiniqen qern Qlflmofen. 

90. -2£enn Dir f?manD etniag 
fcbentfft, fo nintm eg mit berieebteu 
£anD iin r un& bebancfe Did) boflid). 

91. tfommtf Du ju jemanD, Der 
©elD fluf bem Xifcf>e, Qt>er fontf et# 
n>a§ lieqen twt, fo qebe nicbt fonabe 
hinju, unb bleibe nicbt aflein in Mr 
©tube. 

92. 33eborcbe niemanb an Dec 
tbtirSnrrtcbz!, z<5. laufaud) nicbt 
ofeid) binein, fonbern flopfe be* 
fcbeiDentlid) m roartc barauf big 
titan tod) binein rufet, unD bticfe Did), 
ipann Du bineirt cjetreten, febmeif? 
aucb D* tbur nicbt fobart $u. 

v9J. sBerftefle Dein (fteftcbt nicbt 
fan Den geuten Durd) 9tuu$e(rt ober 
6auet- feben : ©eo nic^t flpefifeb/ 



aber Dietfeuteerfl augteDen/ unt>fai* 
k ibnen nicbt ing 53?ort; antroorte 
nid)t mittfopfnutfeu oDer ©c&uttcln, 
fonDern mit Deutlic&en unD befebet 1 
Denen 3Borten. 

94. ©einen jReperenfc maaV alls 
leit etroag tief unD lanajam, mit er» 
babenem ©eftcbt. 6cbarre nicbt mit 
Den giifien iti rpeit binten binaug. 
tfebre Den Peuren nicbt Den SRittfen/ 
fonDem bag Olnqcf d)t 311. 

9?. tfommt ein fremDer oDer cju» 
ter jreunDinS Spam, fobejeuueDicr) 
boflicb aecjen ibn, beifc ibn mtQforn* 
men, biete imn einen 6tubl unD war* 
te ibm nuf. 

9^. 3m Sftiefen, SReinigung Der 
Slafe, 3iu8fpeuen unD ©abnen be* 
fififfiqe Did) afler moglicben roobfan* 
jlanDiqfeit. ?!BenDe Dein 9lnqefid)t 
nlfDemi etrcaj! auf Die 6eife, bait 
Die ^>atiD por, faffe DieUufaubetfeit 
Der 3lafe inS <5d)Hupftud) r unD be* 
fiebe eg nicbt lanqe, !a^Den6>)eid)el 
(jeraDc berunter aufDie^rDe faQen, 
unD tritt mit Dem Suffe Druber :c. 
pemoline Did) nicbt an Mi bejlanbt- 
ce ^teufpern, crubeln in Der SRife/ 
beffine? 6*naufen, unD anDer ecfel* 
baftis unD unanRanDiqeg 5Sefen. 
f 97. (Sebe niema'l unflatia unD 
fauil'd) einber. 6cbneibe Die sftriflel 
ju recbter ?eit ab, unD bait tfleiDer, 
(gcbiib unb ©tnimpfe rein U. fauber. 

98. 3tn gacben fei) mdfjla unD be^ 
fcbciDen. Ufa nicbt ubet aUf§, am 
aOermeniqflen aber u&er anDerer £eu» 
te CBo§heit oDer Unqiiicf. 

99. Jfjail Du etroag oerfprocben, fo 
fucbe egaud)3ubaltcn, unD bufeDi0 
por aQen piiaen unD Unroabrbeiten. 

j 00. 2Bag Du $utei unD n>oblam> 
HdnDiqeS an anbern (Sbriillicben geu» 
ten flebed, Dag lag Dinum&orbilDe 
Dienen. 3ff etipa eine JugcnD, i|i 
etroa ein fob/ DemD«Kfe nacb.^feil. 
4/ 8. 





GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 41 175 

leiftltd)e$ If agajtcn. fRvaxu 41* 

^uitbcrt cbt:tj?ltd>c SUberts^egete/ fife &w&er. 

L Kcgclit? ?Ort fcem *?er£>4ltert gecjett <0<Dt^ 

1. ©cfraam tmD Dfaue t>or beinem 

(gDencf C/ Dag jrotfdjen Mr (gcbopjfer; nxnbe Dtc& mit ei* 

nn'D Dem Dretjeinigen nem jerfcblagenen #et6en ju 

3£fu €f>rifto Deinem einigen 
©nabensStuW/ fud>e in feinem 
QMut Durcb Den ©(auben Die 
QSeraebung. Deiner ©unDen, 
unD faffc ernen neuen 93orfa|; 
ntcbr meb* Der ©unDe, fonDerrr 
S^umi €brtftunuuDienen,unD 
Die}} Durcb fcinen ®eifl veajerto 




@Ottem5BunDaufa> 
ric&f€t fep/ in roefrbemer £>erfi>ro* 
cben (jatbicb jufieben unbjufeg* 
nen; Du aber binroieDerum »er* 
pfticbfef/ ibn ju ikbm unD tfrni 
finDu'cb ju aeborcben. 

2. ^imm Dir^inmalcjnuaja* 
me geir ba^u, in Der ©fide Mr 



Dem 2tnaejtcbfe <55oftcs5 Did) $u $u (ajfen. 

priifeii/ obDu M$J«r DaS ailed 5. ?3Btr(l Du 1 aber in Deinem 



treuficb unD betfanDig beobacbtet, 
wag Dein <Sauf*$5unD t)on Dir 
erforDert? Ob Du ©off finDHcl) 
geliebef, gefurcjjttf unD ibm S> 
Jjordjet. 



©ercijfen uberfubref/ Dag Du 
jroar Deinen $auf*S5unt) nod) 
nid)t ftifTentlicb unD fcorfe^lkj) 
ubertreten, aba Docb m Den 
^Pfficbten Der @ocffel$Fett$utwi* 



3. SOGtrft Du in folcber ^ru* len fracje unD nad)(dJFicjcjewefcn/ 

fung in Deinem ©eroifjen uber* unDbieunD Damartnigfa(tigg> 

jeuaef/ Dag Du Did) »on (&Ott feftlet, fo fucbe gleiebfate mitreu* 

Durcb n>iffenf(icbe ©finDen n>ie* enDem unD gfaubigem #er|en 

Derlo^aenffen/ unD^ro^gaut* Did? in Dem Salute 3£fu iuu>a* 

tyit, Ungeborfam, £ugen/ Sred)* feben unD Did) binfort vim grof 



beit UnD anDere Dergleitben Un 
arten bet) Dir $ur £errfcbafff fom* 
men iaffen ; fo faume Dicb nicbt 
town ^.aufcOSunD §u erneuern. 
4. (Srfenne Deinc funDlidje 
Unarten unD Dein angebobrneS 
tiefeg 2}erDefbert/-mit Oev|tid;er 



fern £rnfte$ in feiner 9M;fo(ge 
$u befleiffigen. 

6. 0D?et>ne aber ja nicbf/ bag 
Du foldbed mit eigenen ^vtafften 
au^ffcf>fen nwDefb fonDern bit* 
it ©Ofttaglicf) urn fetnen gufen 
©et'jl, Dag Derfelbe fceinen cjuten 



© $ 



SSorfafc 



176 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



328 3>tMf>ert cbrfffttcfce iLebetts^ecjeltt fur &tnt>er. 



SSorfafc ftdrcfen tint) bicb un 
flrdfflicb betvabren rooKe. 

7. $&bft folcbem tdgftdjen 
©ebattoadbe befldnDicj uberbicb 
felbjr. <£raue beinem #erfcen 
nS'ebt ju Dtef/ Denn e$ iff (ebr be* 
trttglicb; babe acbt/ mobinDetne 
©ebancfen unb QSegterben ficl) 
neigen ; unbbafte Slugen/Obren 
unb $unge in guter Orbnung. 

8. $ftimmbicbinfonberbeitin 
acbt/ t)agt>uDont)er©tin&e/l)a* 
$u tm am metffen gctK^t bi{fr 
nicbt uben>ortbei(et iwrbefr. 
gltebe afle ©elegenbeiten su ber*- 
ielben> unt) fucbe fte burcb ben cr* 
bdfenen £5epffanb ©OtteS im* 
mermeftr $u entfrdfifen, 

9. &ge bicb fetnen ?ibenD $11 
£5etfe/ b$ tm bein©eroiffenge* 
prufet/ unt) roegen ber begange* 
nen Sefeftritte/ t>urcb gtdubige 
<£rgretffling be^ Q&rbicnffeS 
3€fu (Sbriffibicb m\t®otta\\$* 
gef6buet. 

io. 2kfleiffige WcJ, ©Oft 
aufrtcbtig ju furcbtcn nicbt auS 
f necbtifcber Surcbt t>or ber ©tra* 
fe, fonbern au$ finblicber £iebe/ 
t)te ficb fcbeuet ctrt»a^ ju tbun ; 
ba$ bemgeltebfen migfalle f onte. 

11. SLBifff bu aber &m t>on 
*£>cr^n furebten unb (ieben, fo 
muff bu if)n recbtfennen (ewen; 
ba^ti bit bte £. ©cbrijft t)ie be* 
fie 2lnroeifung gibf. 

12. £a§ f einen 'Sagijingeben, 
ba bu nicbt etroag au$ Dem < 2Borc 
®om$ (efeff unt) bctracbteff, 
gleicb nw bu feinen ^agjobne 



(Effen unb ^rincfen fcoruber ge* 
btn laffefr. 

13. £ie$ aber ©otfeS SGort 
niemalS anbe'rtf, ate mit ttefffer 
©jwbtctigfeit, roet( barinn bte 
bocbffe ^ajeffdt mit bit, einem 
fo armen ©unber rebec. 

14. £>ein reblicber Srcecf bet? 
beinem £Mbel*£efen mug btefcr 
fet;iv ba$ bu alleS einfaltig glau* 
benftolfeff, n>a$ fie (ebrct, alieS 
tbun, n?a$ (te gebietet, alleS t>of* 
fen 7 roa$ (te tterbeifiet. 

if. ftomnuu Der ©cbrtfft, 
ate einer, bet nocb ganfc unrcif* 
fenb iff in gottlicben SDingen; 
fo njtrft bu am meiffen barauS 
(ernen. &mn Dcnen Unmunbi* 
gen rot'K e$ ber QSater im £im* 
me( offenbabren. 

16. Gertie infonberbeit 3& 
fum (£bnffum, beinen (ieben 
•Sepfanb/ au$ ber •&. ©cbrifft 
beffer erfennen, bamtt bu an ibn 
glaubeff, unb in fein s 23ilb wt* 
fldret njerbefr. 

17. sprdge btr au^ ber $. 
©6ri(ft bte gdttlicben €igen^ 
febafften tiefin betn -§er^. 

18. 2BeH©Otr<in©dfti(l/ 
fo btene ibm im@etflunb in ber 
31'Gabvbeit/ unb fucbe btcb mit 
ibm burcb ©(auben unb £iebeju 
einem ©ettfe ju »erbtnben. 

1?. SOBeil ©Ott enjig unb 
un^erdnberd'eb iff/ fo bange ibm 
aucb mtfunfcerdnberdcber^reue 
at\ f unb uerleugne gern urn fet* 
net tvillen t>k geitliebe unb wx* 
gdnglicbe .^)inge, 

20. 9Be« 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 41 177 

ftunbett d)viftlid)e JLcbene^egclfi fiffr T&inbtr. 329 

20. S&eil et f>et£ic) ijt, fo mufl ©Otc aucfc gem in Deinem «&er* 
Du Dicb aucb »or Der Reflect ung £en roobnen mill/ fo lag t$ Durcb 
Der ©unDe beroabren/ wenn Du Oeiticn ©lauben reimgen unD 
mtC t^m n>if|l Q5emetnfcbajft (ja* Durcf) feinen @ei|t beberrfeben; 
ben. fo roirD er (tcb Dir mit gtoffcr 

21. ^eilerbarmberfcigunD greunDlicbfeit unD £iebe offen* 
9U" tig ifr fo fafie $u ibm in allcr bafjren. 

Detner *ttotb etn guteS 93ertrau> 29. "SBanDfe ft ef$ in Der bef* 

en ; unD fa; aucb gutig unD barm* ligen Slllgegenroarr ©OtteS wit 

^cr^is gegen Die (ElenDen. cinem ftctcn 2lnDencf en feiner Sie* 

22* *3©etf er gerecbt i(l unb be. ©0 offt |icb betne ©eDan* 

ba§ ®ute belobnef/ fo befleiffige cfen unDSSegierDenDon i&m ob* 

Did) aud) Deflfen roaS redjr iff. febren/fo(encfe(ien>ieDerjuil)m/ 

9£>eil er aber aucbDaS Q36febe* folfe e$ aucb faufenDmafrl in fa 

Oraffef/ fo biite Did) »or Der nem ^age gefd)eben. 
<gunDe> roelcbe Die ©trafe naa) 30. Soen beiugen Sftamen 

ft* jiebef. ®€>m unD 3€fu fubre me* 

23. $8eil er roabrbafffig i\l f maty* obne (Sbrerbietigfett in 
fo glaube feinen S&rbeiflfungen Dcinem $2unbe/ unD (a§ ailed 
unD furebfe Dicb t>or feinen &rob* leicbf ferrtge Sfacben unD@d;tt)6* 
ungen. ren feme »on Dir fei;m 

24. ^eilerallmdcbtig ift,fo 31. Unrerftebe Dicb nfemaltf, 
tvage e$ getroft auf feinen SBen* ©prucbe Der beiligen ©cbriffc 
ffanD/ er roirD Dir aUe <25cbtt>ie* auf eine eifle unD fdeberftepe 
rigfeifen uberroinDen belffen. ^BBeife ju migbraucben unD ju 

2f . <2£eil er allein roeifc itf, wrfebren ; ®Ott roirD Diefen 

fo fucbe bci> ibm allein Die roab* 8kwC nicbt ungerocben laffen- 
re ^Oeigbeif, unD uberlag Didj 3*. #alfe ©Oft nicbt nur in 

ganfc feiner Dfrgierung. Deinem »£er£en recbt bocb; roegen 

26. <2Beil er aflwtjfenDrfc fo feiner unenDlicben $}acbt> ©ute 
untertfebe Dicb nicbt Durcb £eu* unD ^Btiffycit, fonDern fucbe 
cbelen ibn ju betrugen/ unD bufe aucfc folcbe #ocbacbtung Durcb 
Dicb aucb »or beimlicben (gun* SCttunD unD ^bcitanDen^agiu 
Den. (egen. 

27. 3Beif er an alien Orten 33. QSraucbe Deinen SDfunD 
gegenrodrtig itf, fo roiffe/ Dag Du ibn urn feine «&ulfe tn alien 9W* 
aucb ^ Der ©nfamfeit nicbt al* tben anjuruffen/ feine Zkbt $u 
(ein feoejl, fonDern Dag Dein f un(f* rubtnen, unD i&m fur alle erjei> 
tiger Dftcbfer alleS febe unD b6re ; te ^oWf&aten Demutbigft su 
roa^ Du reDeft unD fcornebmefl Dancfen. 

28* S)a Der allgegemvdrfig* @ d 2 34. 9{ic&fe 

12 



178 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

34. 3ftc!)fe aber aud> in Der ren Q3efe!j( t>oUbringe(t/ ibren 

<Xbac Dew ^ununD^aflTcn alfo Suc^ttqun^en t)tcf? untermcrffefi/ 

riii/ Da§ @K3tt DaDurd) »er&err* tyre ©cbmacfebeiten mtt ©eDulD 

lid)et tverDe. tragefr unD jte mentals fcorfefc* 

3f. ^etlige Den %ag M lid? be(et'Digefi. £>a$ alies bill 

fi&nttiitalltt @orgfau> brim Du aud) Drinen ©rognmD ©ttef* 

ge ifen nicjjt mtt @ptekn unD ©tern, SSormunDern unD an* 

^uflftggang, fonDern mit belli* Dern Q)orgefe£ten fcl)u(Dtg. 
am 93errid)tungen ju. 4** 3>tnen ©c&ulmeiftem 

36* @el>egerne in Die @cbufe fanjt Du Die $?uf)e unD fym, 

unD gum ©ottedDtenp/ DamitDu Die (te an Dir berciefen, nimmer* 

(erncfl/ nxtf $11 Deinem grieDea mef>r amtgfam t>erge(ten. £iebe 

Wenet> unD berceife Did) |M,auf* unD ©re fie Daljcr, n>ie Deinen 

mevdfam unD efererbieticj gcgen teiblicben 93ater, unD jucfee ifc 

Die tyiiiQt ©egenmart <&Om. nen tyre faure $?u&e Durd) @5e* 

H. 5le«elrt von tern Vers borfam,8{ei§unD2iufniertffam* 

baittn getfen ben tftfcfcffen. fett $U fcerfuffen. 

37. £iebe$ 5?it»D/ im Umgan* 42. groifefcen Dir unD Deinen 
ae mit Deinem ^dii)\\m, er fct) ©efcbmijternlagniemalS 3'einD* 
§reunD. cDcr SemD> babe feDer* fc&afft unD Santf auflommen. 
$eit Die (Ermatvnung ^auli tor. 43- @egenDeme$?it*©c&u* 
Slitgen: ©cpD niemanD nicfrtS (er fuefce Dtdf) freunDftd) unD 
fd>u(Dig, Denn baft tyr euc() unter* Dienflfertig $11 betwifen. grtvdl)* 
einanfcer Hebet. SXom. 13,8. k aber nur Dtejenige $u Deinen 

38. 2Ule$, n>a$ Du n>i(fr, Da(r gmtnDen, Die @=Ott furcj)fen 
Dir Dte£eute r^un foKen, Da$ tf>ue unD anDern mit gufen ^vempeln 
iljnenaucf). UnD n>a$ Du rciijt, twgeljen. 

fcaj? Dir Die £eute nic&t tbun fo(* 44. Side b6fe ©efeUfc&afft 

Jen DaS tftue tljnen aitej) nic^f. fn'efte unD meiDe, ate ein red)t 

Sue. 6, 3 1. gefdf>r{id)er ©tritf DeS (gatanS 

39. 9W|r ©Oft bijt Du unD bitte (&Ott tdgfid) Dag er 
ntemanDen meljr £iebe unD (gf)r* Deine ©eefe fur 2lergerni(fen be* 
erbiettgfeif fcfcufoig afo Deinen roafjr.e. 

€itern; »on n>e(d)en Du Da$ £e< 45. @>egen affe unD ttornejj* 

ton empfangen baft me £eufe be^euge Did) ©rerbtetig 

40. S)eine £tebc unD €&rer* unD t)6flitf), unD fud)e fdgltcS 
bictigfeit aber geaen Die (Slfern A mefto a(le grobe unD unanjtdn* 
fanfl Du Durcr; nifytt beffer an. Dige <&itim abjulegen. 

Den ^aajegen/ ate Durd) etnen 46. fiiitt Didj^ Dag Du Dtcb 

wilfigen ©eborfam/ b$ Du ifc* nkfct an gremDen, 2trm<in unD 

©ebrec&fic&en 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 41 179 

@ebrcd)ficl?cn aerfunbiatf?/ ibrer ju befrraffen. Q?etfrajfee$aber 

fpottetf/ ober fte fonft frdntfeft; auS &ebe/ nut groflet Q5efc&ei* 

jbnbern erroeife Dtcb gegen fie mn> D^nbeit unt) QJorfic&tigF eit, 
(etbtd unb bienjrfertia, n- @W mc&t traurig tuft 

47. ©egen betne greunbeunb i>erDrie§ltd) bei> Den Zmttty fom 
9BoWff)d(er lag bei? aUer @efy* t>ern freunbltcb unbfflunter ; unb 
sennit erti bancfbareS #er0lt* flwar au$ etrrec mnerlfe&en (£m* 
tf en. pjinDuofl: ber greuflDft&ftfc unt> 

48. beinen $einben/bie bid) Seutfeligfeit @)Otre& 
au$tad;en ober fonfi beletbiaen/ 54. *&aft bu iemant) befetbi* 
nergift nicbt §8*N mit Q56fem/ get/ fo fcfedme Dic& ntc&f/ e$ be* 
t»$-@cf)elt*SCortmit @cW* mutl)iajubefennenuni> abatibif* 
S&ort; fonbern bttte ©Ott, ten. 

Da§ er ibnen i&re ©unDe t>erge* s f . ®ib niemanb ^crgermg 

be ; unb fte befebre/ unirtaj? feme buret) bofe •Sanbliw^ Wjjifcije. 

@?e(egenbeif/ t^nen ©uretf $u ©ebdrbenunDunfeuf5>egarftige: 

t^un/ au^ ben «§dnbetL dltbm. @aa^ fbfrbe ntemduS* 

49. 5(cbte e$ fur etne unt>er* nacl?/ wenn bu fte »dn anbertr 
irtente £bu, tvenn bu umbetner gebdret baft/ unb fdjdme bic& 
(Stifle unb ©ofteSfurcbt rmtten folcben UnfTat be$ Rafting rote* 
Don anbern »erad>tet unb gefcaf* Der m beinen $)?unb $u .neljmen* 
fet tt>irfl. &rne bie (gcbumcf) 16. (get) jufrieben <mit beiti/ 
(Sferifti t>on ^ugenb auf boc6 roatf bir <&Ott burd) Deinc .^r* 
fcfcd&en. tein $u nxnbet/ unbajtoneeinetrc 

5b. <2Bt{l ein sorniger urib jeben oftne ^eibiinb; ^n&unft 

racbajer iger @ebanct*e in bir auf? ba$ <&timQt. 
Oeigen/ fobdmpfeibnburc&baS 57. £a§ bklj ntcbt getufieti 

Slnbencfen ber£iebe unb ©anfft* aud) nur DaSgeringfte beinen (£k 

mutfi 3@u <£bnfti. tern unb g0?ir*(g>t&ufern ober an* 

51. Sag Dtcb nicbt- ben gorn bern £euren &u entroenben; ober, 
uberroinben/ jemanb ber bir et* »on bem @5e(be/ bafur&u et^aS 1 
rcaS juroiDer actban bat/ ju bolen folft, ju t>eruntreuen/ e^su 
(gefceto/ i^n Q56fe^ juroun*. bebaften ober jtitternafcben.; ber* 
fd>en/ ibn su fcblagen/ ober auf 9leic6enf(etner2lnfana5atman^ 
anbre SBeife bicft an ijm ju rd* 9)en ben 2[Geg $um ©algen g^ 
cben. ^enn^OttJatgefagt: ba(jnef. 
Sie«9tacJei(l.m'eirt/i'^tt)iflM* 58. »5a(t bu bid); Derfu^rea 
gelten. 3t6fn. ia, 1% (a(fen/ anbern etwag ju entmen* 

52. SagfticbmcbfcDurcfrSOttn* ben/ Objl unb anbere ©acben- 
fetemg^ebf abbaltenba^ ^3ofejurauben it. iohhtmtbtinm 

©«3 Se&ie*. 



180 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



332 fyunbevt cbrtfflicbe &ebett0*XegeIit p5r X\ttt&er* 

III. Kegeln von fcem IPer^ 
balten ernes Binges gegert 



gc^fcr mit tvafyrer IKeue/ fudje 
e$ roieDer $u erfefcen ODer urn ©> 
foffung ju bitten/ unD bute Did) 
Detn £ebctag fur fold;em fcbdnDli* 
cjjem Staffer. 

59. QSeflcifige Did) Dermal 
ren Slufricbtigreit/ geroityne Dic& 



ft* felbfl. 

65. £iebe$ 5tinD/ (erne Did) 
fefbff rec|)t erfennen. 

66. » ©ute, Da$ Du an 
Dir pnOeR/ iff ®Om ; atles 



nicbt an Da$ fcf)dnDlid)e Sugen; Q$6fe abet/ DaS DuinDirftnDeft 



Deffen QSater Der %euffel iff, 
fonDern wDe Die ^33abrf>ett eon 
^er^cn/ n?enn Du aud) gfeid) 
©cfcaDen unD Q3erDru6 Dat>on 
^ab^n fofteff. 
60. <2Benn Du etroaS nrieDer 



iff Dein eigen. 

67. <26enn Du Dicf) obne (Si* 
genliebe unD (&I)mercbefei) recbt 
betracbteff/ fo roirff Du geroaljr 
h?erDen/ Dap Dein £etfc toon$?a* 
rur em SlbgrunD DeS SoAfen feiv 



erjebfeff/ Da$ Du »on anDern ge* unD Dag t>er ©aame atter Saffer 
j>6ret/ fo fefce nic&ts Da$u> ba* in Dir wrborgen liege; roelc&er 



mit Du Dem Sugen*®efff nic&tm 
Die ©tricfe failed 

61. IKtc&te unD taDle nie* 
manD, offenbare nicbt DeineS 
SreunDeS -SeimlicOfeiten/fep fetn 
SerldumDer, ©cbmeicbler unD 
O^venbldfer, fonDern reDe roobl 
i>on Deinem sftdcbffen, unD ent* 
fdjulDige feine ©ebrecben. 

62. 2Denn anDre ibrer @cbul* 
unD anDrer ©unDen fid) rufj* 
men/ oDer uber $>arrengpofFen 
iafytn, fo bute Dicb/ Dag DuDicb 
nicbt Dure!) OTtmacbcn i^rer 
©unDen tbeilbafffig macbeff. 

63. <Sie&effbuef»a$356fe$ 
an anDern/ fo feuf|eDaruber/ er* 
tnnere Dicb Dabet) Deiner eigenen 
Sebfer, unD bitfe ©Oft/ Dag er 
Dicb t)or folcben Q&rfunDigungen 
berodljren tooHe. 

64. ©ib jeDerman n>a$ ibttt 
gebubref/ unD lag Dicb Durcb Die 
beilfame ©naDe ©OtfeS judjti* 
gen/ gered;t $u le-ben- 



nur auf ©elegenfyeit roartet, ber* 
»or $u brecben. 

68. gliebe a(fo aKe ©efegen* 
beiten sum £36fen, ftie Den ^eu* 
fel felbff. &mn t$ (inD lautec 
^upplerinnen/ Die Did) in feme 
©ercalt uberliefern. 

69. 3)eine unfferb(ic6e@eele 
iff Da^ eDelffe ^Ijeil DeineS 36e* 
fen$, Daljer muff Du aud) mebt 
Dafur forgen/ a(S fur Den fferb* 
licben £eib. 

70. S)er SiDei Deiner ©eefe 
beffebet in Der ^Sereinigung mit 
<&QtU Daber Du nacb Derfelben 
aud alien 5?rdfften ffreben muff. 

71. £Btlff Duabermit^ott 
DereinigetnjerDenunD bkikn f fo 
muff DuDie@unDc ernff M) f)af* 
fen ; unD Die funDlicben 9?eigun* 
gen Deiner «^er^en^ in tdg(icj)er 
Dveu unD ^5u(fe Ddmpfen/ Denn 
Die bcrrfcbenDc ©unDe fcbeiDet 
Dicft unD &Qtt von einanDer. 

7*. 2B<H 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 41 



181 



fyimbat <bvifili<he itebens^egeirt fttr r&mfcer. 333 



72. <20e!l aber @otf/ Derein 
wrsebrenb geuer iff, feine ©e* 
meinfcljafft mit einetn @unDer 
foaben fan/ obne Den s>3?itt(er: 
fo muft Du biefen im tvabren 
©laubenanefjmen/ unburn Dein 
#er£aur , 20oljnuna, einrdumen. 

73. 2Bo aber Der S^ittfer^ 
3€fu$ £biiftu$ tvobner, Da 
rooljnet aucfr fern @eift/ Der Die 
(geefe immermebr $um SSifDe 
@=Ofte$ erneuerr. 

74. S>iefen(>eiliaen©effMa§ 
In Deiwm «&erfcen fre» unD un* 
gebinDerr tvurtfen, fo tw'rD er Det* 
nen QSerflanD erleucbten, Detnen 
^illen ju <&Ott (encfen, unD 
Dein ©ermffen mif gwbe unD 
SreuDe erfullen. 

7f. 3«bieferOrDnun(jmu|t 
Du auc5 fclbjt Die 5?rdfffe DeineS 
©emutbS tmmermebr ju wrbef* 
fern fudben* 

76. Q5rauc5e Demen L 33er* 
(lanD unD Dein ©eDdc&tnig, et* 
tva$ nflftficfc* mit Demfelben $u 
faflfen unD $u beljalten. 

77. 3ut)orDer|lfamm(eDirei* 
nen ©djafc Der grfenntm'g au$ 
DemS&orfe @?Of te^,i>a^ Dir Den 
2Beg jur 23ereimauncj mif ©oft 
setsct; ndc&ft Dem aber bemuse 
Did) aucl) anDere nufcu'c&e ^Bif* 
fenfcbafften ju (ernen. 

78. ®ew61jneDeinen933inen, 
aOejeit ba$ roaljrfiafTtia @ufe$u 
ermdljlen, unD bat 256fe $uwr* 
tterffen. 

79. ©rtnge Deine ©nbilbungS* 
Srafft in gute DtDnung. SBilDe Dir 
fcie£u(i Der 28eu nicbt lieblic&er/ unb 



DaS wabre gbriflentbum nutt fcbive* 
rer ein, alS ftct> £>et)Dc8 in Der £b<rt 
beftnDet. 

80. Seme Get) 3eifen Deine 2Iffec* 
ten unD ©emutb&Sfteigungen $d> 
men, Damit fie Dicb riifyt jum ©elaoerc 
macben. 

81. S&runrubiae &*' n ©emiitfo 
nicbf, roebee Duicb Da$ aSerfangen 
nad) ir tDifcben £)ingen, nod) Durcb ei» 
tele $offnung, nocb Durcb unnufce 
Surcbt, roeDer Durcb roettttcbe £rau» 
rigfeit, nocb Durcb uppige greuDe. 

8z. 3orn,sfteiDunD$J?ujguntfftnD 
ixncfcr Der@eelen, bute Dicb bag Du 
nicbt unter ibre ©eroalt gerarbeft. 

8;. Sa6 feine aeile unD unflatige 
$uffe in Deluem $er$en auffieigen, 
Denn fie Derroitflen 2etb unD @eele. 

84. 3lu*berDerberbfen<5igenli«» 
be entfleben Dren £aupt«8 after; Qrbr* 
get^/ ©elDgeift unD SBoOnfL $rufe 
Dicb roobl ju roefebem Du am meiften 
geneigt feneft, unD fucbe fokbe tJiei# 
gung ben 3eiten ju unterDrucfen. 

8f. ge mebr Du Deiner n<ifrirli« 
cben ■gieiflung fcbmeicbelft, ibr tbreit 
SEBiOeii laffejli unD fte t>ersarteifl/ De» 
(lo toraniftbermirD fie Dicb beberfebe. 

86. ©eine @eele fan nirgenDS 
SRube finDen algin (&Dtr. Sendber 
Du Dicb Durcb ©laubenunD?iebemit 
ibm oereinigejl; Deflo rubiger teicD 
fie netted. 

87. ©Ott W Dir a6er nebfl Der 
@ee!e aucb Detnen Seib anoertrauet; 
unD ibn mit (Sinnen unD ©lieDern 
rueijHicb gejieret; Daber bifl Du oer» 
bunDen; aucb DenfelfiengefunD 3uer» 
balten, unD unbeflerf t ju benabren. 

88. ©eo alfo Borflcbtig, unD gib 
Dicb nicbt in gefdbrlicbe UmjidnDe, 
in nelcben Seib unD ©efunDbeit 
6cbaDen (e^Den fdtiic. 

89. ®en?6bneDicb nicbt nodiifiigr 
unD wrjartle Detnen Seib nicbt ju 
febr/ fonft ©trft Du Dein ftbenlang 

tin 



182 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



334 $>unbcvt cbrtfflicfre &tUn6s&t$cln fin 2tfitoer, 



«in elenfar uhd frdntflit&er SOJenfcb 
aerben. 

90. ©cfidme Diet) memafy mi(5 
fcer gertngikn Slrbeif/ fonbern tbue 
fie geM/ unb fljebe all Me ^JJefl, Den 
tragen 3ttiffFtggang> 

91. £ange Dem ©cftfaf nicfot 311 
febt n&itii Damit bu nicbf in gaul* 
beit qerarbeft. 

91. Ueberfufle beinen geib ni(bt 
mit dDitt oielem ^ffett ifflD Siincf en, 
JDenn S9?djfigfeif erftflt ©efunbbeit. 

9j. gltebe tnfonbeibeit Die mebf 
al8 t>iebif<fce Sruntfeti&eit/ unb lag 
bid) ttiemdlg bereben, ntebr m tun* 
(fen all bit bienlicb ifl 

94. ©ebejikbtigutibftbrtmbafftig 
mit beinem faibe urn, unb bebe(fe/ 
roaS Die Siafflf tuia bebetft baben, 
tt>etl fcetne ©lie'ber ebritfi ©fieber 
fiub/ unbroeil Dettr geib ein Sempel 
DeS £. ©eifleg fenn foff. 

9f. @(bitft Dir ©OK an beinem 



Ui% efwat in, fo trage be ine ©((mm r» 
#en nut ©ebult/ unb glaube, ba§ er 
bi(b lieb babe, roeif er bicb aw&tiget 

96. 2Bifl©Dttba§bu inber 2Bdt 
arm, f rantf unb »e,racbtet fenn fofl|T, 
fo gebencfe : (£r i ji bee ^grr ; er tbue 
rcaS ibm toobl gefdflt. 

97. ^ebenrfe Da§ bu nirf)t tmmec 
in biefer 2Belt leben n>erbe|1/ unb 
ftbitfe bi(b bet) Beit w beinem 2lb» 
febiebe. 

98. ©telle bir jeben Sag al§ ben 
legten »or, fo roirb bein letter Sag 
Dia) nicbt unoermutbet uberfaflen. 

99. &itte ©0tt, ba|? er tjir einc 
Iebenbige Ueberjeugung oonber ©e* 
roi&beit ber 2lnfer|lefiung beg fiinff* 
tigen ©ericbtSunb bed eroigen gebeng 
geben woOe. 

100. giircbte & ^ ,,j$t t>or bent 
$obe,benn baflbu^bri|tlt(b qelebet, 
fo ©irft on micb felig unb freubig 
flerben fdunen. 



ibae $Mbene % 23 C ernes fromttten Xxiufces. 
£in 3«n0cr imfc 3un0eriri bes =£$£rrn 3£fo foil feyn, 



1. *A tffmertffdm auf ba8 2Bort 
"<lbrifH,3lp.@ef(&.i6,i4. 

2. "Drfintftg im ©eiff, &dm. 12, 
*J 11. 

3. f bripo gang ergeben, Jit. 

v^ 4/ i 4 , 

4. 'TVmijtbja qegen ©Ott un\) 
■ L/ ?0?fnf(befi/1!)?att.if/i9. 

y T?rbar tn ©ebfirben, 91dm. 



Erbar in 
it, »7. 
$. I?rucbtbac i 
r 3ob.«;. 
7. I^lrtubig an ten £(5rrn <%<£* 

VX fum, $lp.©ef(b. itf/if 
S. TJimmlifcb geflnnet/ *J)bil. J/ 



ingutenSBertfen, 



20. 



9. Tmmer frdli(b im ^®9tTO/ 

J. $Wt.4,4. 
10. T7" euftb unb reineS #ef$en$/ 

*>U»attb.5f8. 
»i, T auter unb unanftoffig. 



12. VT itleibig gegen bie (glen* 
•L" 1 beti/ i$etr. ?/8. 

-L^> i^Jetr.4;8. 
14. f^rbentlicb in alien Singen, 

^^ i€or.i4/4°. 
if. prd<btigimbet(igen@(bmu(f/ 

* €fai ^i| 10. 
16. /^v uit unb fog oon bem bdfen 

vx ©ett)ij[eti/ Jp)ebr. io, 2z. 
17. 1} ei(b<in$irtbenbeg J^eiligen 

*-v ©eijlegi igor. i/4. s. 
i8. Canfftmiitbig; €»b.4/32. 

19. TTrea t>em Jp)Srren3Sfu bii 

* inbenSoDe,Offe»b.i/io. 
10. T Tntertbdnig untei* einanber f 

^ €pbef.f/if. 

21, vyacfet allejeit, Sue. 21, 3*. 

22. '7 r ii(btig unb febambafftifl. 
-^ Sit. 2, 11. 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 15 



183 




H^igptWR^ 



©dftlidxS SKagajten. 3?um. 15- 

divey erbauh'd)e Utefcep f voeld)c bet (Bottfelige (EfytU 
ftopf? £)otf, [@<{)u(meifter an t>cr @ci>ipbacf>] fetnenuebeii 
Scfyulcim, unt> alien anDern CuVfte lefen , 3ur23etrad?ttmcj 
fcmterlaffm ^>at. 



!» 



SIM. SfGcr nur ten lieben <80tt laifc tvaltetr. 



:=3^ 



: y— ^F ir^ 



i 



£>i>er auf frlgen&e ^Xtoterr. 
ein Jebeng'faben (auft 311 Sube, 9D?ein tytfgerfabrt i|l balD 



=^$ 



fc§: 



getban; 9la) ©Off, mir ein ©eleittfmann fenbe! £)er mid) erbalt" 



auf renter 33abn, JDer bet) mir an bem SRnber {leb SSBa'nn in) Den 



fc=S£ 



=dl 



lefcten @mrm aitffleb. 

-2. 

£armit mein ©a)ifflein bura) bie 

mum 

$>er Sobefcangfl gerab ju geb; 
Bum ?BaterlanD unb meine 6eele, 
SMieit auf iforen £eit$|lern feb, 
Sluf meinen ^enlanb^umGbrifl, 
S)er and) im £ob mein 2e6en ifi. 
3. 
3la) £©* mein ©Oft! Mjj mein 
^egebren f 
©iefrt nid)t auf mein ©ered) tin feit; 
3<^ &off Dti roirjt e$ mir gewabren, 
SluS ©ttabe unb SBarmberjigfeit : 
<Denn unfer eigen gt:6mmigfeit, 
3jl tw bir ein befletfteS £leib. 
4- 
©fottfi , fleb unb £i>ffnung ju oer* 
mebren., 
.ftommf nicbtau^ eignen $raften forf, 
3a) f>off auf €bnftora meinen £@r* 

re it/ 
Unb auf fein unbetrugfia) 28ort, 
2>a§ i(l in meiner Ie^ten <Kei§, 
1D?ein ?e ben&tranf unb@eelen-fpeif , 
(Btiftl. XVlawiisn II Cbet'I. * 



5. 
€r tft ba§ £amm, t>a$ &ie£attf 

(grben , 
£)ie ©nnb bet* 2Belt aetragert Ut t 
2Bei'$ l)enli^ glanbt, roirb feelig 

roerben , 
ttnb 6eo ©Oft firtton grieb u. ©nab: 
■bruin la§ ict) meinen 3(£fumma)ti 
3Cenn mir ber XobbaSJrjerje&ric&k 
6. 
fftun roiQ id) in ber Sie&e faffett , 
2H'iiber, ©c&wejlern, mit 2Beib.un& 

$inb, 
9lfftie6c gramb/ aucb bie mia) baffen, 
lint) mjr nicbt roobl gemogen ftnb; 
3a) but eucf) afi"e urn ©ebuft, 
SSerseibet mir, erlafjt bie ©c&utb. 

7- 
2Bo eua) mein SBanbel, £f)un 
1111b ?<eben, 
3" etroa^ je fcetnibet baf/ 
9a) toiO cna) aRen gern t>erge5etr , 
Itnb bitte ©Oft \sa$ er in ©nab 
Un$ anfeb nnb gendbig feij, 
UnS aBen unfrc @?inb eerjenb. 



184 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



l?4 



<£eijfttctye fLitVtt. 



8. 



$oa) ettt $ing fan i$ nia)t &er> 
t)eelen ; 
S35a5 mir nodj an t>etn £erjen liegt/ 
g$ ftnb bie jarten jungen ©eelen,, 
©er'r fan fa) fo oergefien nid)t • 
5S5eU ©atan i&n'n auf biefev 3Belt 
SBtel Eftefc unb gaaftricf l>at gejMt. 

9- 

Urn ibre ©eeleo 311 beflncFen/ 

Unb fiibren fie gebunben fort, 
£)en breiten 2Beg / burdj feine Sucfe / 
©erabe nacfr Der JDoaempfort/ 
3u flfen fie in (Sroigfeit/ 
2fo Samtnei/Quaalunb grofletf Seib. 
10. 
Sr ffeOt i&n'n »or bie SuflberStu* 
aen, 
€r jleHt i&n'n »orbie$e&ber2&eJf/ 
SDie Sleiff&efclujl barauSiufaugen; 
Sura) <SGre/ SBouuft ©utf> uhd 

©elt>; 
SHira) £offartb,.©ei!j/ ^efrugeren ; 
2)utc6 §alf4){)eit, Sugcn, $eua)eleo. 
11. 
2>ura) ^reffen , ©aufen > Sanjen , 
©Drinaen , 
§foa)en unb ©a)n)6ren oftne S(5en ,• 
£eia)tfertig ©djerjreb/ gotten ftngeit/ 
3a qjflatuenfort bie Jjtarereo; 
©0 fommt au$ biefem bennoa) fort/ 
^)<t§ / SReib unb £embfa)afo Jfrreg 
unb$)l0tb. 
12. 
51$ bitte eua)/ tbr liebeit $inber, 
Old) ta) ermafw unb bitte eua) » 
$o!gt nia)t bew SEBege folder ©iht» 

ber, 
©r#brt eua) abw>n©£)tte$9teia), 
gura)t@Dtt/ untJbittibnfru&unb 

fpatf) , 
2>a§ er eua) fufjr ben rea)ten $fab. 

©Dtt pat ja feinen ©ofm gegeben/ 
2)er finflern 3Belt $u einem $ia)t/ 
Bum SBBeg; jnr SBafjrheit unb jrtm 

geben / 
2Ber ibm naa)fofgt/ ber irret nia)t; 



€r if* 00m SBater ausgefanbt/ 
3u fiil)ren unl ins SSaterlanb. 
14. 
©Dtt Ijat nia)t 2ufl anbemSBees 
berben , 
<De$ ©unbers Sob gefdltifmtnidjt/ 
& fiat nia)t Sufi an unferm ©ter* 

beft, 
Sftod) baj? mir fallen in$ @eria)t, 
Siur Unglaub unb be$ gleifa)e$ $a5ia> 
2>ie bringen unS sum bojien 3iel. 
15. 
SGBie ic& au$ ©Dtte* 20ort aer* 
nommen/ 
Unb nnfcr Jp>e9lanb felber fpcte^t^ 
S)ag ba^ Sia)t in bie SSelf fep f om* 

men/ 
Unb benen if* e^ gum ©eridjt 
grftbienen, bie im-^inflemuf / 
SBerbleiben ol)ne ©laub unb 35uf. 
16. 
©arum i(l noc5 ben 2ttenfa)en* 
^linbern 
Sap ^oangeliumbereit/ 
5©er nla)t glaubf , roirb fla) felbfl 

oerninbern, 
3tn feinem J^eol unb (SeeUafelt; 
2Ber argeg tout/ berj)a§tbagSid)t, 
Unb oabur$ faat er mi Oeriajt. 

3Bec fia) noa) i)ier in 3eit ber ©na» 
ben» 
Sn feinem bdfen ©unben*@tanb t 
Dura) ©0tte^ 3Bortunb©et|l[agt 

rati)cn , 
Surd) roaore ^)u^ bie <5unb erf ant t 
UnJ) glaubt an gbriftumunoerriicft/ 
Unbfolgtibm nan), ber n>irb erouicft. 
i'8. 
(§Ott roia ihm fcwedmfewr* 
jetben 
Cfirtjia^ burch fein ©erec^tigfett/ 
2Sirb ibn burd) feinen ©eiderneiien 
Unb skbsn an Hi £od»eifrfIeib: 
^ann gehet an,ber fengef greub; 
Senn fi'a) ein ©eel aui'^nfoereif, 
10. 
35ebenft eimltf^t ll&mStmm 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 15 



185 



^jp^epfy 1 






<BeiftUd)t fciefcer. 



iff 



Unb iib( eucf) in ©ottfeflgfeif ; 
taU ai§ bie 2Bett ntcf)t fenn ein 

ftinber 
Sin eurem^enl nnb ©efigfeif , 
®o roerb't tor bort in (Sroigfeit, 
Suc^ freuen o&ne Duaa! unb £eib. 

20. 
35ebenft e$ micfj iftr SDJcnft^en* 

finber; 
2>je u)r nod) Ubt in (gitelfeit, 
S3ebenft e$ roof)!, ti>r freemen 61m* 

ber, 
Unb Fa§t eucf) ratben in ber Beit; 
(£1) ©£)tt fetti Sintlig Don euc^ roenbf, 
Unb fein gered>ter 3orn anbrennt. 



21. 



Slim gutc Sftac&tbulie&e^ngenbi 
(&Dtt fegne unD bebiite eucf) ; 
gr Siereeitcf) mitSudjtunblugenb, 
Unb fringe euc^ $u feinem 3teia). 
©ut 2ftad)t eucb alien intfgemem/ 
3ungen unb Sllten, ®rog nnb tflwn. 
22. 

S)i$8ieMein fdjenf iduumStbfc&eibe 
<Der lieben^ngenbafljugfeief); 
Unb bitte eucf) rooflt end) baeiten 
3ur e»igengreubtnt30tte$3tei(&: 
£a|ii £amp unb (55cfd^ nid)t leer feint/ 
§tifli ©Iflubenfcol mit Xugcnb brew. 
2 gjetri i/ 5 bi^ 16. 



m 



*£in ember cjetfrficl? fUtt> von fclbi^cm 2Cutfcor. 

$kel. 31>r ©un&er fommt gegairgeu. 

m 



^— ^—^ 



-^Xcr3S::±- 



ct) JCinDer roollr ibr lieben/ 
SBoflt ihr ia greube 11 ~ -n # 



:~i5r 



£i i^» ;-, ^ 



5E? 



y — fr; 



60 liebt roaS ftebens roertb/ 
<5o liebt »<i$ jceiiDe mertb ; 



:$==: 



3E 



Siebt ©Ott , ba$ hocbfle ©ut , $J?it ©eifi , £erj , <5eel imb tDBitft , 



©0 roirb end) fo!ct>e Jiebe Srquicfeit £erj unb"3)?urt>. 



2. 

Siebf ibrbie Gjitelfeiten, 
$iebt ibr be$ gleifc&e&Iuff, 

@o faugt if)i* furje greuben ; 

3lu$ falfc&er £iebe* ©rujt, 
SBorauf in d-roigf eit, 
$ofgf 3 aran| er, DuanfunbSeib, 

■2Bo nicbt in 3eit t>er ©naben, 

S)ie ©eel burd) 35u§ befrent. 
3- 
•H>ir finben flar gefebrieben 
©on einetn reidjen 3Q?aim , 

jDer tbat fold) Ctebe uben, 

SBie ?uea^3eigetan/ 
£ebt er bie furse 3eit f 
3n ^leifcbe&lutf unb gveub, 

Unb lief} fein £er$e ir-ei)ben 

3n iauter ©telfeit. 



J^^JJ^-^JnJit 



4- 

6r hnt in biefem Seben 
93?it ^Jurpur fic^gefteibt, 

S)ocb er muS 3ibfc()ieb g^ben ; 

©ein greiio rpabit ftfi'jj 3eit 
©0 balb nacb feirtem tobt> 
©efaub er |lc5 in Silofh; 

9liemanb mit inn erretten 

Slu^fol^rlJeiniinb l?ei&. 

5- 
2)rnuf rief er mn (Jrbarmen, 
Slc^^ater3tbt'al)am! 

^omm boa) unb foilf mir3Irmen 

2lus Diefec groffen Slamm; 
^cb bitte bic^ brtruni/ 
Step fenbe Sawrum, 

SO?it eiucm Sropjkin SBaffei* 

3u fu^Ien meine 3ung. 
a 6. ^eirt 






186 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



If6 



<5tiftlid}e Jitefcer. 



6. 



5?ein £ro|l aarD ibm gegeben, 

2li£Der:@'eDenfe<5obn! 
£)a§D.u in Deinem£eben, 
£)ein @ut$ eradblt sum So&n; 

£)rum liebe&'inDerlein, 

U§t$ m§ dn SBarnung fenn, 
$>erla§t Da$ eitle £eben, 
S)ajj tyr entgebt Der <pein. 

7- 
Sfcun tfinDer Die ^arabel 
©i6t gfcifhi* felbjl j«r Se&r, 
SDrum baltetf nic&t uor gaM, 
$ocb oor em neue CDfa&r; 
€:$ roirD alfo ergeb'n , 
SHSanri Da$ ®ericf)t gefa)eb'n, 
.©er erne airD ftcf) freuen, 
2)er anDre traurig jle(w. 

©ie Wort fpridjt ebriffitf Uavlifi, 
3H aeit, Der SSSeg ift breit, 
SQBorauf fo oiel gefdbrli# 
SHSanDeln in Diefer 3eit, 
Sftacb Der §3arDammni§ $u, 
3n -Quaal, $ein unD Unruft, 
2Bot*m jTe fid) felbjl tborlid) 
©tiirjen Durcfr gleifc&eS greuD. 
9. 
SOtan lieffet mit grjiaun.cn 
5in anDern Drten mebr / 
©ajj €britfu$ mit $ofaunett# 
Stfit feinem <£ngel$ Jbeer, 
3Birt> fommeft sum ©eridjt, 
2Sie ®Dttt$ 3Bort au*fpri$f f 
2>a atfe$ airD tiergeben 
€D?it $rad)en, aa$ man fieljt 

IO. 

Ill^Dann mufien erfdjetnen 

g$or feinem 9Ingeftd)t, 
9JH S9?enfd)en gro§ unD Heinen , 
UnD fommen oor ®erid)t, 

UnD boVn Die Qteawung an, 

SBaS jeDer bat getban 
3n feinem ganjenSefon, 
Sid) ^inDer Denf t Daran ! 
ii. 

S>ie Stfufjer ber ©eaifien 

SBerDcn Dort aufgetfyan , 



SEBovauf man bier 6eftifTetr f 

3BirD e^ Dort jeigenan, 
2)a$ 33ud) DeS SebenS Dann, 
2$irDaud)Da aufgetban, 
2Ber Darin airD gefunDen, 
2)er ijt redjt gliicflid) Dran. 

12. 

3>a$ Sootf i|I Dem gefaffen 

3u€brifft red)ter£anD, 
$Xit anDern grommett alien, 
2BirD er a\$ ©xbaaf erfannt; 

33e» ibm aebt an Die §reuD 

^naffer gaigfeit: 
$ein 3ung fan Da au6fpretf)en t 
2>ie greuD unD £errua)feic. 

13. 

Sldj Da n>irb Cieblid) flingen, 

2)er^ngel 9ttiifiC*<S&or, 
50?it 3auijen unD mir @ingen f 
SSBirD ^tbm Durcb Die Zt)ot, 

3n3iortf ^taDt binein , 

3&a$ §brt!lt ^cbaffein fenn , 
3Bo eroig $mfo unD 5Bonne 
5luf ibrem J^aupt roirD fenn. 
14- 

£<Srr3£fu! treuer J^irte, 

3db! un^ju Deiner £erD, 
$1$ mil unfre 25egierDe 
©ir nacf)/ Don Diefer (SrD, 

S)er ©atan unD Die255elt, 

^>abeh iftr $ti% eeflefft, 
tln^ ooh DU' abjufubren f 
2)ura) SBoauil, Sbr unD (Sciu. 
is. 

(So fang roir bier nod) (eben 

0o ffno air in ©efahf, 
2icb £(Srr Du aolfi un^ gebett 
3u Jpiilf Der Sngei ©(baar* 

Sid) fenDun^Deinen^eiR! 

T)a§ er un§ 33e»fla'nD leill, 
Bamit air Dir rec&t folgen, 
S55a^ un^ Dein Sport anmei^f. 

SBann unfer $m aiff aanfert 
SSom fcbmalen Eeben^pfaD, 

@o gib un^ in ©eDanfert, 

2)a^ fo(ct>e CO?i(fetbat 

ttn^ 



GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN NO. 15 



187 



4fl{)* 



(Btiftlidjc &iebev. 



*T7 



SBorbemem 9tid)ter<|)ubr, 
£oren>ig ftfitfe jlurjen, 
SU'um bait «n« auf bem $f«b. 
17. 

SBann «n5 bie Sffielt mit $rangen, 

€D?rt Jpjoffart, glcjfc&efcfaji, 
5« itjve S|e% n>jfl fangen, 
©0 brucf in imfre 35rufi# 

5H?aOortin€n>igfdt, 

£86k jammer/ Ouaal tmb Seib, 
Sluffoldjefut'jegreuben, 
SGBirb eroig fena bereit. 
18. 

^Jftonj bu in unfre -Oerjen 

2)ie roabrelDemurbein/ 
3uno an fcie ©(aubenS tejw 
£a(j aller falfcfoe ©c&ein 

&e» un$ weite oermeib; 

tint) ber 2J5elt $?ufl nnb §reub ; 
COJit 2>emuil) ubernuinben, 
©we!) ©lauben* ©iegim'Srreif. 
19. 

@ib&(i§ un&beine Siebe 

jD ©eelen*93raufigam! 
21(f) SiebeS Urfprung gfebe, 
2)a§ beine £iebe3 glamm 

2)a$ £erj in uitf enf mm, 

2Bobur$ ntff arie@unb, 
3a atfetf molten oafen, 
S&aSmrfjtmitbiroerbinb. 
20. 

Std) SBater all bie £ugenb ! 

£>ie bir gefdttig ftnb / 
©ib un$ unb and) ber 3ugenb ; 
!Die nocf) -unnwnbig jtnb, 

^amitaabte (inf <£rb 

£>ein iReia) |tet$ ©erb bermeftrr, 



itnb bafe na$ betncm SButm 
£)em gtam ge&eiligt n>erb» 
21. 
Unb roeil auf biefer <£rbett 
£)er fcfjmale £tmmel$ 3Se§ 
SBott Sriibfal tmb 35efcf)0)erbeuj 
Sin £reu$ unb &iben$ ©te<j J 
6o gib £<E9^ ©ebult, 
Unb fdjen? un$ beine «OnIb 7 
(£rld§ tm$ Don bem &d§eit/ 
SOergib un$ nnfre ©c&ulb, 
22. 
5Bo mir auf biefem 2Bege 
Slttf ©eir getrerefl fenn ; 
Unb bura) be$ 5 l eif#eg 2Bege 
@etinfligtmbie©unb/ 
SH5te noil* muflfen geffefon, 
2>a§ e$ gar oft gefc&'efW/ 
SBoburo) rcir bid) betrubeff 
Unb beine ©traf oerbient. 
23. 
5tc& ©Dtt unb SQatetr fdjone ! 
SBergibbieSOWferbat, 
Burd) gforifium beineffl <&cfytit r 
Unb gib un$bie@enab, 
2)a(? tin* fein £reu$ unb $lotf), 
^a mar eg aucb ber£ob, 
Son beiner Sicbe fc&eibc 
.5(uf biefem SeibenS $fab. 
24. 
Sdnettf £ob ; ^rcn}, bort oben, 
©en ©£>££ tin bdd&ften £&ron, 
Sen foflen roir adJoben, 
Unb €nri|lo feinem ©oftn, 
©amrnt bem ^etligcn 0ei[i/ 
Serunfer Sidjleroeift/ 
S)er bring un« aC jufammcit, 
€r fen affein geprei§r. 

ben fidy nicfyt a1xe$uf<i)lufjen. 

&Uibet nimmer o^ne 2oJm: 
2Ber i!e in ber that beft^et f 
3ft fd)ou feia> unb Una unb fa^o'n/ 
Obne fie fein ©urn toa$ nu^et, 
8We$ mup au Qrunbe gebn. 
vi 5 2. 2Bei* 



5We!. 2IUe gKenf«^en rauffen ffcrfietr. 
JRromm fenn ijlein ©a)a<j ber3w ? 
O genb, 

3re 3ier unb befte #ron ; 
^eiUgfeit unb tpa()re£ugenb, 



188 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



I?8 



(Beiftlifye Jlte&er, 



2. 



2Ber oerlangt auf biefer (£rben 
6d)dn unb reic& unb flug 3« fenn, 
*H5er anc^ einjl wtQTfelig rocrDen , 
5D?u§ oor affen £>ingen, fein 
Sftacft bertoabrengrommfeitlaufen/ 
Unb ba$ fdfflid) ^erlen 3?eid> 
©id) 3um gigembum etfaufen/ 
©o toirb ii)m fein 5Htelt*finb gleidj. 
3- 

@;rmuf feinen ©Drt erfennen, 
Unb oor ti)m in (Sbrfurdjt (let)n / 
©egen ibm-in ?iebe brennen, 
Uttb auf.fetnen SBegen gebn; 
©u{e6 tbun unb bdfeS baflfen, 
01$ beo.anbren unb aHein / 
Sko bent S&dten ftnben lafj'en 
£)(me #4lfd) unt> £eua)el-.fd)ein. 

£r mu§ fid) in ©DtfeS SBiffen 
6rt)irFen mit ©elatfefi^eif / 
Unb nad) 5D?dgtic5fett erfiiflen, 
255a^ @Ott oon ©ebttlt gebeut/ 
CaureS mu# er toiflig tragen, 
€r mug fenn getrof* im Seib , 
Unb bann aua> bet) guten £ageh 
&eben nit^t Die gitelfeir. 

®p mu§ alle Sftenfc&en ebren, 
Grr mug bienen jeberman ; 
€r mu(j feinen &dd)flen lebren 
Unb ertauen roie er fan ; 
Ueber tonfe fid) erbarmen, 
fyebem belfen mtf Dei* Sloth; • 
Unb aucj) roiUigltd) ben airmen 
Xbeilen mit oon feinem 33rob. 
6. 

£r mu§aud) feintfinbbetruben, 
Km nid)t nur bie guten greunb, 
Conbern aud) bie geinbe liebert, 
£>d ik'tf fc&on nic5t wiirbig fenn. 



tf)utman nicfrt nad) feinem 5Biaen, 
05 muj? er nia)t neibifdE) fenrt; 
(Sonbern feinen Unmutb jliffen/ 
Unb fein ®rou"en laflfen ein.> 

7 
€r mu§ ffdj oerbunben acbren 
9D?aa§ *u batten in bem Stubtn; 
^r mujj bet) ber 9lrbeit trad)ten 
Sttoan nidjt $uoiel m tbun ; 
<£r mu§ feinem &ib Da$ ©terben 
Wt oerpraffen nid)t ju jiebn , 
Sftod) mit 20oau(l ftd) oerberben; 
©onbern folc^e 25inge fiiebn. 

8. 

€r mu§ bie 2tffecren jtoingen, 

3orn, $Betru&nij?,3lngfiunbgreu&, 

5D?u§ er in bie <5d)ranfen brin* 

gen, 
$J?i§gunft, Q3itterfeif unb Sleib, 
3)?u§ er immer oon ftd) treiben , 
$D?urbn)ifl/ 6pielen r 2Rarrentbet;/ 
$?u(j er lafien oon fid) blei&en/ 
*Denn e$ i(l fein €br babei). 

9- 

2ll$benn toerben bie ©ebarten 

©nug poirt unb bdffi^ fetjn/ 
?D?an rairb auc^ oerforget merbett 
?D?it ber Sftotbburft in^gemein, 
5H5ei§beit roirb and) nid)tgebre$en, 
<&Dtt toirb felbflen macfren f lug , 
IJnb man njirb fo fdnnen fpreijen/ 
3Ber <50tt \)at, bat am gnug. 
io. 
£ore benn bu toertbe 3"9enb ! 
S)enfe biefen ©ingen na(&; 
golge t>oc5 unb trad)t nac^ lugenty 
SSBdble ^reub fur Ungemad): 
©djau bie game 25elt oergebet/ 
Unb aU ibre £ufl unb $reub; 
2lber toer fromra i|J beftebtfv 
^mmer unb in Stotflfeit. 



5&eun& 



GKEISTUCHES MAGAZIEN NO. 15 189 



greunt) <J&ttffop& <5mtr, 

/valte mir m gut baf? icfe freumutfeis mit bir rebe. %tcfebe* 
<r me id) fcfeon fcerfcfeiebcne 3a^rc l)er betnc Seining Mm? 
men unb aucf> fcfeon ctlid&e mat fcfeonecHeiftm^lliefcetinunb 
mit bem fcTtagastenbeftmmen, abfonbcrttcfe lefctMtroicfeeneS 
nei^jaf;r6(Hefcl;enF, fur roefcfeeS tcfe mid) fcfeufbte bepnbe 
tneinen StanE baffir abjuftattcn : £Da mir nun biefer pterin be* 
finblicfee fc&5nc ZiftyCBtfans ju Jjpcmben fommen unb barum 
mir bie gre&feeit genommen bir foldjes $u fdjicfen mit greunb 
tS&it**** tyht, feoffenbe bu roerbejt felbigcS roenn ©cfegen* 
fecit unb Olaum in einem tTtacja3fen£5[at mocfete fepn, folcftcs 
mit einruclen; roctd;eg feojfe Don melen ^enfefeen tvurbe &anrV 
barticfeft ansenommen roerben/alSein fcj>6neS Stutf einestfla* 
tja3iett*23late. 

JDiefe^ 



»on t>einem greimb unb fSDofelmunfc^er 




*£in 



190 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



1 60 <£ei|Hid?e Htefcet\ 

(£m fty$!t Ziftb<(5efan$ nad> tern >£ffat, 

gftel ®0£X fob citi ©cbtitt jur €n>igfeit. 



CWbermat un$ beine ©lite 
<l atuf ganj rounDerbare 2Beij?/ 
Unfre $flid)t fufort ju ©emutbe 
SDur# Den <5egen in Der 6peifo 
£>ie bu uns bap uorgejlrecfet, 
lint) Damit in on* ermecFet 
Gitten hunger $&v tiafy Dir. 

S$ie groji tjIDeint^reunDlidjfeif/ 
SBie bert'lid) Defoe ©lite; 
£>ie Da oerforgt m jeDerjeit 
S)en £eib unD Das ©enwtbtf. 
2)u 2ebeR$greuuDu.$?enf(&eu£ufo 
&u ball tins alien SJtatb gemu^t; 
UnD un$ fefjr t»obl gelabet. 

S>e$ 6tmmel$ Sfenfler offnejl Du 
UnD fc^enfft uitS milDen SHegen ; 
S>u (fl)lie^t Die <£rDen mif unD w, 
UnD giebjl unS Deinen (Segen : 
3)ie ^ojl if* Da auf Dein @ebei§r 
SS5en folte-Das ju Deinem jpreiji/ 
D$>ater f nta)t beroeg* n ! 



©em IBtebe gibfltm gutter fatt, 
itttD fpeifetf auq> Die Oiaben, 
2Bann fie nodj blo|j, Jung, jcfrroacfr 

unD matt/ 
UnD feine Sfta&rung tjaben ; 



£<grr,Du tbu|t auf bit mifDe £auD 
UnD fattiaeft to& ganse ttono 
$Mt groffem BoblgefaHen. 

5- 

$ur fold)e ©uttbat motten air/ 
5Bir liebe $inber mujfen 
S&on ganjer ©eeten Dan fen Dir / 
UnD unfer $?abljeit fdjlieffen 
$ftit einem ©anf unD gob*geDic&f / 
£> treuer ®£>ttl Derf4>md(> e^ mc6f/ 
£a|j e$ Dir wo^tgefaaen. 

$ergie6 mtf unfre 5D?i|Fetbaf , 
UnD gib mas roic begebren; 
.©cbaff wis, &dtei* ! femern SKafb, 
<Da# mic un$ ebrli<t> ndftuen. 
SSedenbe fiinftig gute 3eif / 
&lkf, giabrung , grieD unD <£inig* 

feit, 
©efunDijeit/ £e»l unD 6egen. 

7. 

£a£ enDttdj 6e» DeSgammeStifd), 
5n Deinem SJteicb uns efien , 
355o taufenD ®aabm milD unD fr ifa) , 
!£u feibjl un$ wil-fl $ume(fen: 
©a mirD man fdjmecfen $reuD unD 

(Sbt, 
UnD roiiv £(£rr r rootfenmmttiermebr 
>Ju pteijfen Di$ auftjwm 



& X & & 
X 3flf >:< 

ft 



TRANSLATION OF THE 

GEISTLICHES MAGAZIEN 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE 

Number 33 

Copy of a letter lovingly dedicated by the school- 
master, Christopher Dock, to those of his pupils 
who are still living, for their teaching and 
admonition. 

To all servants and elders, fathers and mothers, 
as well as their children and relatives, I wish in 
greeting that the God of Peace may rule our hearts 
and minds and lead us to Grod-f earing lives, to do as 
he bids through Jesus Christ, to whom be honor 
from everlasting to everlasting. Amen. 
Beloved in the Lord : 

Regarding the cause of my writing this, I do it 
from urgent love of cheering and lovingly warning 
all those of my pupils who may be still living, as I 
cannot know how soon I shall put off this earthly 
tabernacle. O, dear children, how I rejoice when I 
think what blessings the Lord laid within you when 
you were simple-minded babes, and what joy it is to 
me to see in my grown pupils that the fear of G-od 
has found lodgment within you to grow, to withstand 
the evil lusts and desires of the flesh, and to accept 
gladly the right to become pupils in Christ's school, 
to prepare and be prepared, to take up Christ's 
cross and as lambs to follow the Shepherd of your 
souls in precept and example, to render yourselves 
obedient and continue to do so! To such will be 

13 193 



194 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



given, if they remain true to the end, what the Lord 
Jesus has promised them. (John x, 27, 28.) 

But as the number of these is very small, and 
there are probably a great many who with Demas 
have learned to love the world, obedient to the flesh 
in its desires ; for these, unless they do not repent 
this side of the grave, God's word in Holy Scripture 
may be found in many places referring to the non- 
repentant, and it remains forever for all such carnal 
ones as it is written in Romans viii, 6, 7, 8 ; Romans 
vi, 20, 21 ; Gal. v, 19, 20 ; Gal. vi, 7, 8, 9 ; Ephes. v, 3, 
4, 5, 6 ; Colos. iii, 5, 6, 7, 8, and in many other places. 
From these references it may be seen what sort of 
vine is this love of the world, with the lusts of the 
eye, the lust of the flesh, and an arrogant life. It 
bears no fruit of eternal life, for it is the vine of 
Sodom and of the fields of Gomorrah. Their grapes 
are grapes of gall, their clusters are bitter, their 
wine is the poison of dragons, and the cruel venom 
of asps. Deut. xxxii, 32. 

And although it has not gone so far as Holy 
Writ describes, yet the time spent in pursuit of 
worldly desires is not spent for the good of our 
souls, and it is high time to awake from sinful slum- 
ber, and be entered into the vine of Christ Jesus in 
sincere love, according to his command; to become 
a fruitful vine that bears the fruit of eternal life. 
For thou, Lord Jesus, art our bridegroom and hast 
promised this in Thy redeeming word and so kindly 
invited us and said : 

O that such union in love might come to us. 
Then knock at the door of all of our hearts, dearest 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 33 195 

Jesus. O that those who have learned to love the 
world through the lust of the eye, the lust of the 
flesh, and arrogance of heart, might hear Thy voice, 
awake, arise from sin, and open the door of their 
heart, abandon the world and follow Thee in precept 
and in example. May the gracious God add his 
blessing unto this. 

When we look upon the kind, gracious and lov- 
ing invitation of the Lord Jesus to all men which 
He leaves so manifold in His will and testament, 
thus in Matth. xi, 28, 29, 30, He calls to me and to all 
mankind : ' ' Come unto Me all ye that labor and are 
heavy laden, and I will give you rest. Take My 
yoke upon you, and learn of Me, for I am meek and 
lowly in heart, and ye shall find rest unto your souls. 
For My yoke is easy and My burden is light." 

Ye dear children ! we are here so lovingly invited 
to come by the Bridegroom of our soul, and He is 
willing to refresh us, and if we take up His yoke 
and learn humility and gentleness of heart from 
Him we shall find rest in our soul, which rest may 
be enjoyed forever. Now, children, what is sweeter 
than rest? And humility is the road toward it. 
And what is more painful than sorrow 1 And vanity 
plunges us into it. 

How refreshing it was to the great sinner of 
whom we read in Luke vii, when the Lord Jesus 
took from her the great weight of sin, and her soul 
found rest. Truly grateful, she sat down at Jesus 's 
feet and moistened His feet with tears and dried 
them with her hair, and kissed His feet and anointed 
them with ointment. Now, dear children, that you 



196 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



have reached the years of maturity, consider this 
yourselves. Christ calls all the weary and heavy 
laden to Himself, and we are all weary and laden 
with sin ; therefore "to him that knoweth to do good, 
and doeth it not, to him it is sin." (James iv, 17.) 
Christ invites us so lovingly, but he will not force 
us ; we need for this coming a free obedience. For 
in no one else is salvation, and no other name under 
heaven is given us in which to seek salvation, than 
that of Christ. He is the innocent lamb that bore 
the sins of the whole world. He is the propitiation 
for our sins and those of the whole world. He is the 
bridegroom of our souls who redeemed the lost 
human race from the power of Satan, and will be- 
troth Himself in all eternity with His redeemed 
human race. Therefore our betrothal to Christ, our 
soul's bridegroom, is the great work and desire of 
our life, the chief thing for us to aim at. Yea, we 
should desire it more than all that is visible, for He 
alone of God is made unto us, wisdom, and right- 
eousness, and sanctification, and redemption. (I 
Corinth, i, 30.) There is no other mediator between 
God and man, than the own Son of God, Christ 
Jesus. (I Tim. ii, 4, 5, 6.) Through Him we have 
access to the Father. (Ephes. ii, 17, 18.) And if we, 
with the prodigal son, look into ourselves and 
rightly rue our condition from past sins, and in true 
repentance resolve, with the prodigal son, to return 
to the Father and say: "Father, I have sinned 
against heaven, and in Thy sight, and am not 
worthy to be called Thy son ; take me as one of Thy 
hired servants. I submit anew to Thee, and break 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 33 197 

with Satan, the world and my flesh-loving selfish- 
ness, that until now have turned me from Thee and 
Thy grace. O God, be merciful to me, a sinner, and 
give me the mediator between Thee and men, that 
is Thy dear Son, in whom Thou art well pleased. 
For He is the peace-offering for my sins and those 
of the whole world. Him hast Thou given us in love, 
commit me to His care as His own, that I may be 
cleansed of my sins through His bitter sufferings 
and death. His blood can wash me of my sins, and 
I shall henceforth willingly and obediently submit 
to this soul's physician, and accept willingly all 
commands and orders that He gives me to heal my 
poor wounded soul. " If we come thus like the prod- 
igal son before the Father, humble and crushed, and 
to the Son, then will follow the second invitation of 
the Lord Jesus, and it is as lovely and gracious as 
the first. It is described in St. John vi, 37, and reads 
as follows: "All that the Father givest Me shall 
come to Me, and him that cometh to Me I will in no 
wise cast out." 

Come, then, sinners, and those who sorrow on 
account of their sins, to Him who turns no one away 
who comes in the humility of heart. Why wilt thou 
stand in thine own light, and thus be lost? Wilt 
thou longer serve sin, when He appeared to save 
thee ? Oh, no. Leave the path of sin. My Saviour 
loveth sinful men. 

Now what hindrances prevent our coming to 
Christ, our soul's bridegroom? 

Satan places before us the kingdom of this world, 
pleasures of the eye, of the flesh and vain life, and 



198 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

if we abandon ourselves to our flesh-loving selfish- 
ness that since the fall is inclined toward the bad, 
the coming to Christ will advance but slowly. We 
probably reach the point of realizing that Christ 
died for all, which is a pure and precious truth, but 
why Christ died for all, and what our conduct should 
be, is also added. (II Corinth, v, 15.) And that 
He died for all, that they which live should not 
henceforth live unto themselves, but unto Him 
which died for them, and rose again. These rules 
of conduct are contrary to flesh-loving selfishness, 
and so long as this is in control, the coming to Christ 
is prevented. The Pharisees and Sadducees of 
whom we read in Matth. iii, came also to John the 
Baptist, but when he saw their selfish and vain lives 
he called them a generation of vipers and said unto 
them: " Bring forth fruits meet for repentance." 
But they did not repent, they despised also Glod's 
advice and were not baptised, as may be seen in 
Luke vii. The Lord Jesus also advised them what 
to do to find eternal life; the words are given in 
John v, and read as follows: " Search the Script- 
ures, for in them ye think ye have eternal life ; and 
they are they which testify of me. And ye will not 
come to me, that ye might have life." Yain selfish- 
ness kept them from Christ and eternal life. 

I confess from all my heart, with the Apostle 
Paul, (I Tim. i, 15) : "This is a faithful saying, and 
worthy of all acceptation, that Christ Jesus came 
into the world to save sinners ; of whom I am chief." 
But because Christ came to bless sinners, the sinner 
must also come to Christ if he would be saved. Just 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 33 199 



as we sinners go to Christ who came to redeem sin- 
ners, so the lost sheep comes to its shepherd, the lost 
coin is found, the prodigal son returns to his father, 
at which the angels in heaven rejoice, and the more 
we determine to unite ourselves with Christ by will- 
ing obedience, the more we shall find that those things 
which pleased our fleshly selfishness become now a 
heavy burden, which causes us to turn toward the 
door of repentance with suppliant kneeling until the 
wounded conscience is healed and we find rest for 
our souls, which rest we shall find with Christ if we 
go to Him. 

As I am writing of coming to Christ, if the ques- 
tion should be asked me, whether we can do this of 
our own strength, I answer, No. We cannot do it 
of our own strength, but this does not excuse us, for 
it depends upon our willingness. The Lord Jesus 
expresses his willingness for Jerusalem; the words 
are given in Matth. xxiii, 37: "How often would I 
have gathered thy children together, even as a hen 
gathereth her chickens under her wings, and ye 
would not!" 

If we will not be chastised by the healing grace 
of God, turning from ungodly conduct and worldly 
desires, it is our own fault that the Lord Jesus can- 
not take us under His wings of grace, however 
gladly He would do it. Natural born little ones can 
do nothing for their own cleansing, nor clothe them- 
selves, nor eat and drink, nor protect themselves 
from harm. For all this they have no power within 
themselves. What they require they indicate by 
crying. This crying touches the mother's heart, she 



200 THE WOEKS OF CHEISTOPHER DOCK 

cleanses it, offers it her breast, and it is the mother's 
joy when the child accepts it for its body's and life's 
nourishment. But if the child does not accept it the 
mother is sad, for she knows that then the body's 
and life's strength of the child will diminish. Now 
as helpless as new born babes are we to cleanse our- 
selves, but if we recognize our worthlessness and 
how wretched we are and are eager for the same 
pure milk of grace, as the new born child for its 
mother's milk, this healing grace of God is available 
for every man. If we are willing to be chastised by 
the wholesome grace of God, to leave our ungodly 
conduct and worldly desires, and would fain live 
piously, righteously and godf earingly in this world, 
we are of our own strength as unable to do this as 
the new born child. But in this condition there is 
no better means than to express our need with cry- 
ing, begging and pleading before God. He can give 
to the weary strength, and to the weak power. For 
such the Lord Jesus has left in His Testament three 
keys. The first, ask and it shall be given unto you ; 
seek and ye shall find ; knock and it shall be opened 
unto you. And what we receive for our asking, 
seeking and knocking, that is pure grace upon grace, 
and this we cannot ascribe to our own strength, but 
to the grace of God; and so blessedness remains a 
gift of grace from God, attained through our Lord 
Jesus Christ. Few days and hours pass that we 
have not need to be watchful in bodily or spiritual 
needs. We need at all times to turn with watching 
and praying to the door of grace and beg for 
strength of spirit and of faith. For daily we find 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 33 201 

enemies that war against our soul, against whom of 
our own strength we can do nothing, but by God's 
help we can do everything. 

May the Lord deliver us from all evil, and help 
us to His heavenly kingdom, to whom be glory from 
everlasting to everlasting. Amen. 

Dear children, who have come to the years of 
understanding. Love for your souls and for your 
souls' salvation has led me to admonish you before 
my departure. Examine yourselves, if you have 
come in faith to Christ or are still willing to come. 
If you discover that, with the prodigal son, you have 
gone from the Father, determine, with the prodigal 
son, to come to him again. Let the world no longer 
deceive you with pleasures of the eye and of the flesh 
and vain living. Free your hearts from such false 
love, and love and betroth yourselves with Jesus, our 
soul's Bridegroom, who for love gave His life. He 
calls to us lovingly to come, as ye have read in his 
words. Such coming brings us light. Do not forget 
to come. 

Yours in love, 

Christopher Dock. 



N.B. — The publisher has considered it desirable to affix the author's 
name of this contribution: first, because it is chiefly addressed to his 
pupils ( although it concerns all men without exception ) . So it is meet 
that they know Avho speaks to them. Secondly, the dear author has led 
such a good life, and does yet in his great age, that it is not unprofitable 
nor detrimental to him that his name be known. God grant that all 
who read the letter may put it to real use. 



202 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE 

Number 40 



A Hundred Necessary Rules of Conduct for Children 

I. Rules for the Conduct of a Child in the 
House of its Parents 

a. In the morning, during and after rising 

1. — Dear child, as soon as you are called in the 
morning, arise; indeed, accustom yourself to 
"awaken" at the proper time without being called, 
and to rise without loitering. 

2. — When you have left your bed, turn back the 
covers. 

3. — Let your first thoughts be turned toward 
God, after the example of David, who (Psalm 
cxxxix, 18) saith: "When I awake, I am still with 
Thee," and (Psalm lxiii, 6) "I remember Thee upon 
my bed and meditate on Thee in the night watches." 

4. — Bid a good morning to those whom you meet 
first and to your parents, sisters and brothers ; not 
from mere habit, but do it out of true love. 

5. — Accustom yourself to dress quickly, but at 
the same time neatly. 

6. — Instead of idle talk with your sisters and 
brothers, seek while dressing to have good thoughts. 
Remember the garb of righteousness in Jesus that 
has come to you through Jesus, and resolve this day 

not to sully it by deliberate sinning. 

202 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 40 203 

7. — When you wash your face and hands, do not 
splash water about the room. 

8. — Rinsing the mouth with water each morning 
and rubbing the teeth with the fingers serves to pre- 
serve the teeth. 

9. — In combing your hair do not stand in the 
middle of the room, but in a corner. 

10. — Your morning prayer should be said, not 
as a matter of an indifferent habit, but in fervent 
gratitude to God, who has guarded you during the 
night; pray him humbly to bless your actions this 
day ; neither forget to sing, and to read the Bible. 

11. — Do not eat your breakfast on the street or 
in school ; but ask your parents to give it to you at 
home. 

12. — Then gather up your books and come to 
school in proper time. 

b. In the evening, on retiring 

13. — After supper do not sit down in a corner to 
sleep, but attend to your evening devotions — song, 
prayer and reading, before retiring. 

14. — Undress in a private place ; or if it must be 
done in the presence of others, be modest and re- 
tiring. 

15. — Examine occasionally the clothing you take 
off, for possible rents, that they may be mended 
betimes. 

16. — Do not scatter your clothes about the room, 
but lay them together in a definite place, that you 
may readily find them in the morning. 



204 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

17. — Lie down decently and straight, and cover 
yourself up well. 

18. — Before you go to sleep, consider how you 
have spent the day; thank God for His blessings; 
pray for the forgiveness of your sins and commend 
yourself to His gracious care. 

19. — If you should wake during the night, think 
of God and His omnipresence, and cherish not evil 
thoughts. 

c. At meals 

20. — When you go to the table, especially among 
strangers, first wash, and comb your hair. 

21. — During grace, do not let your hands dangle, 
or move them otherwise, but let them, with your 
eyes, be raised to God. 

22. — Do not lean during grace, and do not let 
your eyes roam about, but be attentive and reverent 
before the holy majesty of God. 

23. — After grace wait until others older than 
yourself sit down, then be seated quietly and mod- 
estly. 

24. — During the meal, sit straight and still, do 
not wiggle your chair, and do not put your arms on 
the table. Place your knife and fork at the right 
side, bread at the left of your plate. 

25. — Avoid everything that indicates excessive 
hunger, such as looking greedily at food ; being the 
first one in the dish; cutting one's bread all into 
pieces at once ; eating fast and greedily ; asking for 
another piece of bread before the first is eaten ; cut- 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 40 205 

ting too large pieces; taking one's spoon too full; 
filling the mouth too full ; &c. 

26. — Keep to your side of the dish, and be satis- 
fied with that which is given you ; do not want some 
of everything. 

27. — Do not look at some other person's plate, to 
see if he has more than you, but enjoy your own 
with gratitude. 

28. — Do not eat more meat and butter than 
bread. Do not bite the bread with your teeth, but 
cut proper mouthf uls with your knife ; do not, how- 
ever, cut them in front of your mouth. 

29. — Take proper hold of your knife and spoon, 
and be careful not to soil your clothes or the table- 
cloth. 

30. — Do not lick your greasy fingers, but wipe 
them on a cloth. Use your fork instead of your 
fingers whenever possible. 

31. — Chew your food with closed lips, and do not 
make a noise by scraping your plate. 

32. — Do not lick your plate with your tongue or 
finger, nor lick the outside of your mouth. Do not 
rest your elbow on the table when you carry your 
spoon to your mouth. 

33. — Take the salt from the salt cellar, not with 
your fingers, but with the tip of your knife. 

34. — Do not throw bones or other remains under 
the table, nor push them on the tablecloth ; but leave 
them on the edge of your plate. 

35. — Picking your teeth with a knife or fork is 
illbred, and injurious to the gums. 

36. — Avoid if possible blowing your nose at the 



206 THE WOEKS OF CHEISTOPHER DOCK 

table. If it is necessary turn your face from the 
table or bold your hand or napkin before it. The 
same when you sneeze or cough. 

37. — Do not form the habit of being dainty or 
choice, or of imagining you cannot eat this or that. 
Many are forced to eat abroad what they could not 
eat at home. 

38. — It is bad form to look too carefully at the 
food put upon your plate, or worse yet, to smell it. 
If you should find a hair or anything else in your 
food, put it away quietly that others may not be 
disgusted. 

39. — As often as something is put upon your 
plate, acknowledge it by a nod of the head. 

40. — Do not gnaw bones with your teeth, neither 
make a noise trying to knock the marrow out of 
them. 

41. — It is not proper to replace in the dish what 
is already on your plate. 

42. — When you reach across the table for some- 
thing, be careful not to dip your sleeve in the dishes 
or upset a glass. 

43. — At the table do not speak until you are 
asked, but if you have learned something desirable 
at church or school, or if you think of a passage of 
Scripture relevant to the subject, you may tell it; 
but if others discuss something good, listen atten- 
tively. 

44. — When you drink, you must have no food in 
your mouth, and must incline your head politely 
before you drink. 

45. — It is very bad form: (1) To drink such 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 40 207 

large draughts that one must snort or take a deep 
breath. (2) To look from one person to another 
while drinking. (3) To begin drinking before one's 
parents or distinguished persons have drunk. (4) To 
drink simultaneously with a distinguished person. 
(5) To drink while some one is addressing you. (6) 
To put the glass to the lips several times in succes- 
sion. 

46. — Before and after drinking it is customary 
to wipe the mouth, not with the hand, but with a 
napkin or cloth. 

47. — At the table be willing to fetch things into 
the room or do other services that you can. 

48. — When you are satisfied, rise without clatter, 
pick up your chair, wish a "blessed repast" and 
step aside to wait for commands. But in this matter 
we must be guided by custom. 

49. — The bread that is left over, do not put into 
your pocket. Let it lie on the table. 

50. — Before proceeding to anything else, after 
eating, give thanks to your Creator who has fed and 
satisfied you. 

II. Rules of Conduct for a Child at School 

51. — Dear child, when you enter the school, bow 
respectfully and taking your place quietly, think of 
the presence of God. 

52. — During prayers, and at the mention of 
God's word, remember that God speaks with you, 
and be reverent and attentive. 

53. — If you are called upon to pray aloud, speak 



208 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

slowly and thoughtfully, and in singing do not try 
to outscream the others or have the first word. 

54. — Always be obedient to your teacher and do 
not cause him to remind you of the same thing 
many times. 

55. — If you are punished for your naughtiness 
do not express impatience in words or manner, but 
accept your punishment for your improvement. 

56. — At school avoid this scandalous talking, by 
which you make your teacher's work more difficult, 
annoy other pupils and disturb the attention of 
yourself and others. 

57. — Attend to all that is told, sit up straight 
and look at your teacher. 

58. — If you are to recite your lesson, open your 
book without noise, read loudly, slowly and dis- 
tinctly, that every word and syllable may be under- 
stood. 

59. — Attend more to yourself than to others un- 
less you are appointed monitor. 

60. — If you are not asked, keep quiet and do not 
prompt others. Let them speak and answer for 
themselves. 

61. — Toward your fellows act lovingly and 
peacefully ; do not quarrel with them, hit them, dirty 
their clothes with your shoes or ink nor give them 
nick-names. Act toward them always as you would 
have them act toward you. 

62. — Avoid all improper, vulgar habits or actions 
at school. Such as, (1) Stretching with laziness the 
hands or the whole body. (2) Eating fruit or 
other things in school. (3) Leaning one's hand or 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 40 209 

arm on a neighbor's shoulder, leaning the head on 
the hand or laying it on the desk. (4) Putting one's 
feet on the bench or letting them dangle or scrape, 
crossing the legs or spreading them too far apart in 
sitting or standing. (5) Scratching the head. (6) 
Playing with the fingers or chewing them. (7) 
Turning the head in all directions. (8) Sitting and 
sleeping. (9) Crawling under benches or desks. 
(10) Turning the back upon the teacher. (11) 
Changing one's clothes in school. (12) Acting inde- 
cently in school. 

63. — Keep your books clean inside and out; do 
not scribble or draw in them; do not lose or tear 
them. 

64. — In writing do not soil your hands and face 
with ink, and do not spatter the ink on the desk or 
on your or other children's clothes. 

65. — When school is out do not make a clatter. 
In going down stairs do not jump two or three steps 
at a time, lest you hurt yourself. Gro quietly home. 

III. Conduct of a Child on the Street 

66. — Dear child, although when out of school you 
are beyond the observation of your teacher, remem- 
ber that God is everywhere, and that you must even 
on the street fear Him and His holy angels. 

67. — Therefore do not run about wildly on the 
street and shout, but walk quietly and demurely. 

68. — Act modestly, and do not do before other 
people what it is customary to do privately. 

69. — It is improper to eat on the street. 

14 



210 THE WOEKS OF CHKISTOPHER DOCK 

70. — Do not walk along looking at the sky, do 
not run against people, do not tread where the mud 
is thickest or in puddles. 

71. — When you see a wagon coming, step aside 
and avoid danger. Never hang on the back of a 
wagon. 

72. — In the winter do not go upon the ice, do not 
snow-ball others, and do not go sledding with dis- 
orderly boys. 

73. — In summer do not bathe in the water or go 
too near it. Do not take pleasure in pranks or inde- 
cent games. 

74. — Do not stop where people are quarreling or 
fighting or doing other wicked things. Do not asso- 
ciate with bad boys who will lead you astray. Do 
not run about at fairs, nor stand before mounte- 
banks, nor watch lewd dancing, for you can learn 
only wickedness. 

75. — Do not join hands with other children on 
the street and block the way. Neither put your arm 
on another's shoulder. 

76. — When you meet some one you know, step 
aside and bow politely, but do not wait until he is 
beside you or past you. Show your respect while a 
few steps in front of him. 

IV. Conduct in Meeting or Church 

77. — Dear child, in meeting or church think of 
the sacred presence of God, and remember that you 
shall be judged according to the word you have 
heard that day. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 40 211 

78. — Bring your Bible and hymn book with you 
and pray and sing attentively, for from the mouths 
of young children God will perfect praise. 

79. — Listen carefully to the sermon. Note the 
text and the divisions. These you may also write on 
your slate. Open your Bible quietly to the refer- 
ences given and mark the place with a narrow strip 
of paper, of which you should always have several 
in your Bible. 

80. — Do not talk during the sermon, and if others 
talk to you, do not answer. If you are sleepy, stand 
up a little while and try to keep it off. 

81. — When the name of Jesus is mentioned un- 
cover or incline your head and show yourself 
reverent. 

82. — Do not gaze about you at church, but keep 
your eyes under good discipline and control. 

83. — All improper habits that you must avoid 
at school, as given in No. 62, you must avoid still 
more diligently at church. 

84. — If you enter or leave church in couples you 
must not purposely elbow, push, or stare at others, 
but walk out quietly and modestly. 

V. General rules of Conduct 

85. — Dear child, live in peace and unity with 
every one, and let all your politeness emanate from 
pure love of your neighbor. 

86. — Practice order in all things ; lay your books 
and other belongings in their proper places and do 
not let them lie carelessly about. 



212 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

87. — When you are sent on errands by your 
parents, pay attention, that you may discharge your 
errand properly. When you have done your errand, 
come straight home and report the answer. 

88. — Be never idle, and either help your parents 
or study your lessons. But beware of reading in 
indecent or idle books, or wasting the time, for which 
you are accountable to God, with cards or dice. 

89. — When you are given money, hand it to some 
one to save for you, that you may not lose or squan- 
der it. Cheerfully give alms with your money. 

90. — When you are given anything, take it with 
your right hand, and thank the giver politely. 

91. — When you happen to go where some one has 
left money or other things lying on the table, do not 
go too close and do not remain alone in the room. 

92. — Do not listen at the door (Sirach xxi, 26). 
Do not run in quickly, but knock modestly, and wait 
until you are asked in, then bow as you enter, and do 
not slam the door. 

93. — Do not distort your face before people with 
frowning or sour looks. Do not be sulky when you 
are asked a question, but let others finish talking 
and do not interrupt them. Do not answer by shak- 
ing or nodding your head, but with distinct, modest 
words. 

94. — Make your bow somewhat slowly and deep, 
with uplifted face. Do not thrust your feet too far 
behind. Turn your face toward people, not your 
back. 

95. — When a stranger or friend comes to the 
house, be polite, offer him a chair, bid him welcome, 
and wait upon him. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 40 213 

96. — In sneezing, blowing your nose, spitting 
and yawning, exercise all possible decency. Turn 
your face aside, hold your hand before it, take the 
discharge from the nose into a handkerchief and do 
not look at it long ; spit straight down, and put your 
foot on it, &c. Do not form a habit of constantly 
clearing the throat, digging the nose, violent pant- 
ing, and other disgusting and indecent ways. 

97. — Never appear among people looking inde- 
cent or dirty. Cut your nails at the proper time, 
and keep your clothes, shoes, and stockings neat and 
clean. 

98. — In laughing be moderate and civil. Do not 
laugh at everything, but especially not at the wick- 
edness or misfortune of others. 

99. — When you have made a promise, try to keep 
it, and beware of all lying and untruth. 

100. — Whatever you see in other Christian peo- 
ple that is good and proper, let it serve you as a 
model. If there be any virtue and if there be any 
praise, think on these things. (Phil, iv, 8.) 



214 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE 

Number 41 
A Hundred Christian Rules for Children 



SECOND PART 



I. Rules Concerning Conduct Toward God 

1, — Consider that between thee and the triune 
God there is a covenant established in which he hath 
promised to love and bless thee, but that thou also 
art bound to love and obey Him implicitly. 

2. — Take time to consider alone and in the pres- 
ence of God whether thou hast faithfully and con- 
stantly observed what thy baptismal covenant re- 
quires of thee : whether thou hast loved God simply, 
feared and obeyed Him. 

3. — If such meditation convinces thee that thou 
hast torn thyself from God through conscious sin, 
that stubbornness, laziness, disobedience, lying, im- 
pudence and other such misdemeanors have been 
allowed to rule thee, do not neglect renewing thy 
covenant. 

4. Admit thy sinful acts and inborn deep- 
seated corruption most heartily before thy Creator ; 
turn with a contrite heart to Jesus Christ thine 
only mercy seat, seek through faith forgiveness of 
sin in his blood, and make a new resolve to sin no 
more, but to serve Jesus Christ and be ruled by His 
spirit. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 41 215 

5. — But being convinced that thou hast not 
broken thy covenant consciously and intentionally, 
yet that thou hast occasionally been slow and care- 
less in thy Christian duties, and hast frequently 
failed here and there, then seek also with repentant 
and believing heart to wash in the blood of Jesus 
and henceforth to be more earnest in following him. 

6. — But do not consider that thou canst do all 
this of thine own power. Pray God daily to 
strengthen thy good intent and to preserve thee 
sinless. 

7. — Beside such daily prayers, watch constantly 
over thyself. Do not trust thy heart too much, for 
it is very deceiving. Be careful which way thy 
thoughts and desires tend, and keep eyes, ears and 
tongue in good control. 

8. — Take particular care that the sin to which 
thou art most prone shall not conquer thee. Flee 
every opportunity of committing it, and seek by the 
help of God to weaken it constantly. 

9. — Never lie down at night before thou hast 
examined thy conscience and reconciled thyself with 
God for thy errors, through Jesus Christ. 

10. — Be diligent to fear God uprightly ; not from 
slavish fear of future punishment, but from filial 
love that avoids doing anything to displease the 
beloved. 

11. — But to love God aright, thou must know 
Him, and for this Holy Script is thy guide. 

12. — Let not a day pass without reading and 
considering some part of Scripture, as thou wouldst 
not go a day without food or drink. 



216 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

13. — But never read God's word excepting with 
great reverence, for in it the highest majesty speak- 
eth to thee, a poor sinner. 

14. — Thine honest purpose in reading the Bible 
must be to believe implicitly all that it tells, to do all 
that it commands, and to hope all that it promises. 

15. — Approach Scripture as one wholly ignorant 
of spiritual things, and thou wilt learn most, for to 
the untutored the Father in Heaven will reveal 
Himself. 

16. — Learn especially through Scripture to know 
Jesus Christ, thy dear Savior, that thou mayest be- 
lieve in Him and understand Him. 

17. — Impress deeply upon thy heart the divine 
qualities taught in the Scriptures. 

18. — As God is a spirit, serve Him in spirit and 
in truth, and seek to unify His spirit and thine 
through faith and love. 

19. — Because God is eternal and immutable, 
cleave to Him with unchanging faith, and gladly 
give up for Him temporal and perishable things. 

20. — Because He is holy, thou must guard thyself 
from taint if thou wouldst have communion with 
Him. 

21. — Because He is merciful and good, trust Him 
in all thy trouble, and be thou also good and merciful 
to the wretched. 

22. — Because He is just, and rewards righteous- 
ness, pursue thou righteousness. But because He 
also punishes sin, avoid sin, which merits punish- 
ment. 

23. — Because He is truthful, believe His prom- 
ises and fear His warnings. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 41 217 

24. — Because He is omnipotent, trust His help, 
for He will help thee to overcome difficulty. 

25. — Because He alone is wise, depend on Him 
alone for pure wisdom, and abandon thyself wholly 
to His guidance. 

26. — Because He is omniscient, do not dare to 
deceive Him by simulation, and beware of secret 
sin. 

27. — Because He is omnipresent, know that in 
solitude thou art not alone; that the future Judge 
seeth and heareth all that thou thinkest and doest. 

28. — As the omnipresent God loveth to dwell in 
thy heart, let it be cleansed by thy faith and ruled by 
His Spirit. Then will He reveal Himself to thee. 

29. — Walk ever in the sacred presence of God, 
constantly remembering his^ love. Whenever thy 
thoughts and desires turn from Him, turn them 
back to Him, even if it is a thousand times in one 
day. 

30. — Never speak the sacred name of God or 
Jesus except with reverence, and let all careless 
swearing and cursing be far from thy thoughts. 

31. — Never dare to turn passages of Holy Script 
to idle or laughable use. God will not leave this 
sacrilege unpunished. 

32. — Not only esteem God highly in thy heart for 
His infinite power, goodness and wisdom, but seek 
also to express thy esteem in words and deeds. 

33. — Employ thy mouth to call for His help in 
trouble, to praise His love, and to thank Him for all 
His benefits. 

34. — But so shape thy deeds also, that God may 
be glorified in them. 



218 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHEE DOCK 

35. — Sanctify the Lord's day with great care, 
and do not spend it in games and idling, but in 
sacred exercises. 

36. — Love to go to school and church, that thou 
mayest learn what is good for thy peace, and show 
thyself quiet, attentive and respectful in the sacred 
presence of God. 

II. Rules of Conduct Toward 
One's Neighbor 

37. — Dear child, in thy intercourse with thy 
neighbor, be he friend or foe, keep ever the teach- 
ings before thee of St. Paul : Owe no man anything, 
but to love one another. (Rom. xiii, 8.) 

38. — All that thou wouldst have others do to 
thee, do also to them. And what thou wouldst not 
have others do to thee, do not to them. (Luke vi, 31.) 

39. — Next to Grod thou art owing none more love 
and honor than thy parents, from whom thou hast 
obtained life. 

40. — But thy love for thy parents cannot be bet- 
ter expressed than by a willing obedience, doing 
their bidding, accepting their punishments, bearing 
their weaknesses with patience, and never intention- 
ally offending them. All this thou also owest to thy 
grandparents, step-parents, guardians and other 
superiors. 

41. — Thy teachers' trouble and faithfulness thou 
canst never fully repay. Love and honor them 
therefore, as thy own father, and seek to lighten 
their heavy burden by obedience, diligence and 
attention. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 41 219 

42. — Between thee and thy sisters and brothers 
never allow quarrel and enmity to arise. 

43. — Seek to be pleasant and helpful to thy 
fellow pupils. But seek as thy friends only those 
that fear God and set others a good example. 

44. — Avoid all bad company, as a very dangerous 
wile of Satan, and pray God daily to preserve thy 
soul from evil. 

45. — Toward the aged and distinguished persons 
be respectful and polite, and seek daily to put aside 
all coarse and improper conduct. 

46. — Guard against offending strangers, the poor 
and the helpless, and do not mock them, but treat 
them with sympathy and helpfulness. 

47. — At every opportunity exhibit toward thy 
friends and benefactors a grateful heart. 

48. — To your enemies who laugh at thee or other- 
wise offend thee, do not return evil for evil, nor 
insult for insult, but pray God rather to forgive 
their sin and to convert them, and miss no oppor- 
tunity of doing them good. 

49. — Consider it an undeserved honor to be de- 
spised and hated for thy quiet and God-fearing way. 
Learn from thy youth to esteem the disgrace of 
Christ. 

50. — If an angry or revengeful thought tries to 
arise in thee, subdue it by the thought of the love 
and gentleness of Jesus Christ. 

51. — Do not let wrath induce thee to rebuke any 
one who has done thee wrong, to wish him ill, to 
strike him or in any other way to avenge thyself. 
For God hath said : Vengeance is mine ; I will repay. 
(Romans xii, 19.) 



220 THE WOBKS OF CHRISTOPHEE DOCK 

52. — Let not the fear of man prevent thee from 
punishing evil. But punish it out of love, with great 
care and modesty. 

53. — Be not sad and morose among strangers, but 
friendly and cheerful, and that from an inward 
sense of the friendliness and grace of God. 

54. — If thou hast offended some one, be not 
ashamed humbly to admit it and to apologize. 

55. — Offend no one by wrong actions, ugly man- 
ners or unchaste, nasty speeches. Never repeat such 
things when thou hast heard them from others, and 
be ashamed to take such filth of Satan into thy 
mouth. 

56. — Be satisfied with that which God gives thee 
through thy parents, and begrudge no one his own. 

57. — Yield to no temptation to take the last thing 
from thy parents or fellow pupils, or to appropriate 
money given thee to do an errand for thy own use. 
Such beginnings have shown many the way to the 
gallows. 

58. — If thou hast been tempted to take from 
others fruit or other things, admit thy fault in true 
penitence, seek to replace it, and guard thyself all 
thy life against this abominable vice. 

59. — Practice true uprightness, do not learn to 
lie, for the Devil is the father of lies. Speak the 
truth from thy heart, even if it bring thee loss and 
annoyance. 

60. — In repeating what others have told thee, add 
nothing, lest thou enter the net of the spirit of lies. 

61. — Judge and censure no one. Do not reveal 
thy friend's secrets. Be no slanderer, flatterer or 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 41 221 

tell-tale ; speak well of thy neighbor and excuse his 
weaknesses. 

62. — When others boast of their sins at school 
and elsewhere, and laugh at foolish pranks, beware 
of participating in their sin and compromising thy- 
self. 

63. — Seeing something wicked in others, sigh 
over it, think meanwhile of thine own faults, and 
pray God to deliver thee from such sins. 

64. — Give every one his due and let the whole- 
some grace of God chasten thee to live justly. 

III. Rules of Conduct of a Child 
Toward Himself 

65. — Dear child, learn to know thyself aright. 

66. — All the good thou findest in thyself is of 
God ; but all the wicked is thy own. 

67. — If thou observe thyself without self-love or 
flattery thou shalt find that thy heart is by nature 
an abyss of sin, and that the seed of all vice lies 
hidden within thee only awaiting the chance of 
breaking loose. 

68. — Therefore flee all opportunities of wrong as 
the Devil himself, for they are all go-betweens that 
deliver thee into his power. 

69. — Thy immortal soul is the noblest part of thy 
being, therefore thou must take more care of it than 
of thy mortal body. 

70. — The nobility of thy soul consists in its union 
with God, for which thou must strive with all thy 
strength. 



222 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

71. — But to be and remain united with God thou 
must earnestly hate sin, and dampen the sinful in- 
clinations of thy heart with daily penitence, for pre- 
vailing sin separates thee from God. 

72. — But as God, who is a consuming fire, can 
have nothing in common with a sinner, thou must 
turn to the Mediator in full faith and take Him into 
thy heart. 

73. — Where the Mediator, Jesus Christ, dwelleth, 
there is also His Spirit, that is ever renewing the 
soul into an image of God. 

74. — Let this Holy Ghost work in thy spirit, and 
it will ever enlighten thy understanding, turn thy 
will to God, and fill thy conscience with peace and 
joy. 

75. — In this order must thou seek ever to renew 
the strength of thy spirit. 

76. — Employ thy understanding and memory to 
grasp and retain something useful. 

77. — First of all gather a treasure of learning 
from the word of God, that shows thee the way to 
reconciliation with God. Besides this, endeavor to 
learn other useful knowledge. 

78. — Accustom thy will ever to choose what is 
good, and to discard what is evil. 

79. — Accustom thy imagination to proper form. 
Do not imagine the joys of the world lovelier and 
true Christianity more difficult than they really are. 

80. — Learn betimes to curb thy affections and 
emotions that they do not enslave thee. 

81. — Do not disturb thine emotions by a desire 
for earthly things, vain hopes, unprofitable fear, 
neither by worldly sorrow nor excessive joy. 



SPIBITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 41 223 

82. — Anger, envy and jealousy are tormentors of 
the soul. Beware of their power. 

83. — Let no rank or improper lusts arise in thy 
heart, for they destroy body and soul. 

84. — From wicked self-love arise three chief 
vices, ambition, avarice and lust. Discover to which 
of these thou art most inclined, and seek to suppress 
such tendency betimes. 

85. — The more thou dost flatter thy natural in- 
clination, give it its own free will, and pamper it, the 
more tyrannical will it become. 

86. — Thy soul can find rest nowhere except in 
God. The closer thou dost approach Him in faith 
and love, the more peaceful it will become. 

87. — But God has given thee beside a soul, also a 
body, and has wisely endowed it with members and 
senses. Therefore thou art bound to keep it sound 
and untainted. 

88. — Be therefore careful, and do not expose thy- 
self to dangers that menace body and health. 

89. — Do not accustom thyself to luxury and do 
not pamper thy body, or thou shalt be a wretched 
and sickly being all thy life. 

90. — Never be ashamed even of the lowliest work, 
and flee idleness as thou wouldst flee from the 
plague. 

91. — Do not love sleep too much, lest thou become 
lazy. 

92. — Do not fill thyself with too much food and 
drink, for moderation preserves health. 

93. — Avoid especially drunkenness, which is 
more than beastly, and never allow thyself to be led 
to drink more than is needed. 



224 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

94. — Carry thy body decently and' modestly, and 
cover what nature meant to be covered, for thy 
members are Christ's members, and thy body is a 
temple of the Holy Ghost. 

95. — If God sends a visitation to thy body, bear 
thy pains with patience, and believe that God loveth 
thee because he chasteneth. 

96. — If God wills that thou shalt be poor, sick 
and despised in the world, think, "He is the Lord, 
may He do as it pleaseth Him." 

97. — Remember thou shalt not always live in this 
world, and prepare betimes for thy departure. 

98. — Look upon each day as thy last, then the last 
day will not find thee unprepared. 

99. — Pray God to give thee a definite conviction 
of the certainty of resurrection, judgment and eter- 
nal life. 

100. — Fear not death, for if thou hast lived a 
Christian life, thou canst die blessed and happy. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 41 225 

THE GOLDEN A. B. C. OF A 
PIOUS CHILD 

A disciple of the Lord Jesus shall be : 

1. — Attentive to the word of Christ. Acts xvi, 14. 

2. — Fervent in spirit. Romans xii, 11. 

3. — Submissive to Christ. Titus ii, 14. 

4. — Humble toward God and man. Matth. xi, 29. 

5. — Honest in demeanor. Romans xii, 17. 

6. — Fruitful in good deeds. John xi, 5. 

7. — Believing in the Lord Jesus. Acts xvi, 15. 

8. — Heavenly in spirit. Philip iii, 20. 

9. — Ever rejoicing in the Lord. Philip iv, 4. 
10. — Chaste and pure in heart. Matth. v, 8. 
11. — Sincere and without offence. Philip i, 10. 
12. — Compassionate to the unfortunate. I Peter iii, 8. 
13. — Sober for prayer. I Peter iv, 8. 
14. — Proper in all things. I Cor. xiv, 40. 
15. — Resplendent in sacred ornaments. Isaiah lxi, 10. 
16. — Sprinkled from an evil conscience. Hebr. x, 22. 
17. — Rich in gifts of the Holy Spirit. I Cor. i, 4, 5. 
18. — Tender-hearted. Ephes. iv, 32. 
19. — Faithful to Jesus unto death. Rev. ii, 10. 
20. — Submitting one to another. Ephes. v, 21. 
21. — Valiant at all times. Luke xxi, 36. 
22. — Sober and modest. Titus ii, 12. 



15 



226 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE 

Part II, Number 15 

Two Edifying Hymns, which the Godfearing Chris- 
topher Dock (schoolmaster on the Skippack) 
has left to his pupils and all others that read 
them, for contemplation. 

Tune : Who Only Letteth God Command; or to the follow- 
ing notes : 

(Meter and Rhyme like "Dying Song.") 

1. 

The thread of my life runs to an end, 

My pilgrimage is soon over ; 

Lord, send me an angel 

To guide me to the heavenly Canaan. 

Who stands beside me at the rudder 

When I ride through the final storm ? 

2. 

That my little boat may pass 

Straight through the waves of death 's anguish, 

To Canaan, and my soul may look 

Intent upon her guiding star, 

Upon my Savior, Jesus Christ, who 

In death still my life shall be. 

3. 

Lord, my God, this is my prayer, 
Look not upon my righteousness. 

1 hope that Thou wilt keep me 
By Thy grace and mercy. 
For our own righteousness is 
Before Thee as a filthy rag. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 15 227 

4. 
To increase faith, love, hope, 
Does not lie within the power of man. 
I trust in Christ my Lord 
And in His unfailing Word. 
This, upon my last journey, shall be 
The draught of life, the food of soul. 

5. 
He is the lamb, that here on earth 
Hath borne the sin of the world ; 
He that heartily believes shall be saved, 
And find with God peace and grace. 
Thus, I will cling to Jesus when death 
Shall rend my heart asunder. 

6. 
Now will I say in love, brothers and sisters, 
Wife and child, every friend that 's dear, 
Also those that we do hate, 
Or are turned against me ; 
Pray you all, forbear, 
Forgive and spare the debt. 

7. 
Where you my manner, act and life, 
In something have offended, 
I will gladly forgive all of you 
And pray God that He, in mercy, 
Will look upon us and be gracious, 
And forgive us all our sin. 

8. 
Yet one thing more I can 't conceal, 
It still weighs upon my heart ; 
It is the tender souls of youth, 
These I must in memory cherish. 
Because Satan in this world hath laid for them 
Many nets, stumbling blocks and snares. 



228 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

9. 
These entangle their souls 
And lead them forth in chains 
Along the broad path through his treachery, 
Direct to the gate of Hell, 
To steep them throughout Eternity 
In anguish, pain and great torment. 

10. 
He exalts for them the lusts of the eye, 
The love of the world, through which 
They may feed the lusts of the flesh, 
Through fame, sensuality, success and wealth, 
Through vanity, avarice, deceit ; 
Through guile, lying, and hypocrisy ; 

11. 
By eating, drinking, dancing, carousing, 
Swearing and cursing without restraint ; 
By singing frivolous, vulgar, wicked songs, 
By spreading sensuality. 
Then from these proceed hatred, 
Jealously, envy, enmity, war and murder. 

12. 
I pray you, dear children, 
0, I admonish and beg you, 
Go not in the way of sinful men, 
It leads you away from God's kingdom ; 
Fear God and beseech Him early and late 
To lead you along the right path. 

13. 
Hath not God given His Son, 
As a light for this dark world; 
As the way of truth and life ? 
Whoever follows His footsteps will not err. 
He alone is the right pathway 
That leadeth to the heavenly Canaan. 



SPIBITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 15 229 



14. 
God taketh no pleasure in destruction, 
The sinner's death doth not please Him. 
He hath no joy in our death 
Nor our falling into judgment. 
Unbelief and the lusts of the flesh 
Alone bring us to a bitter end. 

15. 
As I have learned from God's word, 
And as our Savior Himself says ; 
That light has come into the world 
And appeared as a condemnation 
To those who in darkness 
Walk without faith and penitence. 

16. 
Therefore for the children of men 
The Gospel is still prepared ; 
Who believeth not, will be guilty 
Of neglecting his own salvation. 
He that doeth evil hateth the light, 
And thereby he falls into judgment. 

17. 
Who here in time of grace, 
In his awful state of sin, 
Through God's word and spirit takes 
In true repentance, admits his sin, 
And believes in Christ unerringly 
And follows Him, will be comforted. 

18. 
God is willing to forgive his sin. 
Christ, through His righteousness, 
Will renew him through His spirit, 
And clothe him with the wedding garment. 
Then begins the rejoicing of the angels, 
When one soul is willing to repent. 



230 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

19. 
Consider well, dear children, 
And practice godliness ; 
Let not the world be a hindrance to you 
In your salvation and blessedness. 
Then you will yonder in eternity, 
Rejoice without pain or sorrow. 

20. 
Consider it also, ye children of men 
Who still live in vanity ; 
Consider it well, ye fearless sinners, 
And take counsel in time, 
Before God turns His face away from you, 
And His righteous wrath is kindled. 

21. 
Now, good-night, ye dear youth, 
God bless and keep you. 
May He adorn you with modesty and virtue, 
And lead you to His kingdom. 
Good-night, to all of you together, 
Young and old, large and small. 

22. 
This little hymn I give in parting 
To all my dear pupils, 
And beg you to prepare 
For eternal joy in God's kingdom. 
Let lamp and vessel not be empty, 
Pour the oil of faith into them with virtue. 

II Peter i, 5 to 16. 

Yerse 8 on Manuscript omitted: 

Mark well, I mean to say 

That my prayer is to Jesus only. 

What concerns Jew, Turk and Gentile, 

These I never have offended. 

I wish for them a view that's clear, 

To see the Light of Life in God's Word. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 15 231 

ANOTHER SPIRITUAL SONG 

by the same Author 1 
Tune: Ye Sinners Come. 

1. 

0, children, would you cherish 

A worthy lasting love ? 
The good that does not perish 

Is only found above. 
Seek God, the highest goal, 
With spirit and with soul, 

Then you will find a rapture 
The heart cannot control. 

2. 

Is indolence a pleasure? 

Does worldliness allure ? 
Then know that short the measure, 

For life is never sure, 
And through eternity, 
The soul will ever be, 

The time for pardon wasted, 
In woful misery. 

3. 

Saint Luke has plainly written 

About a man of pride — 
With riches was he smitten, 

And worldliness beside — 



1 In Governor Pennypacker'a " Historical and Biographical Sketches," 
p. 148 ff, the following translation is given. In the translation the 
Governor says : " The effort has been made to preserve the thought, 
versification, metre and rhyme — a somewhat difficult task." The task 
has been so artfully performed that it seemed best to give it in this 
interesting form. 



232 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



He lived a little while, 
Luxurious in style, 

And fixed his heart on pleasures 
That only do beguile. 

4. 
In purple was he clothed, 

The whiles he lived on earth, 
Soon vanities were loathed 

And pride of little worth. 
Death put an end to gain — 
He found himself in pain — 

And from the direst sorrow 
He ne'er was free again. 

5. 
Then piteous was his wailing 

To Father Abraham ; 
' ' come and help me failing 

In this tormenting flame — 
If I could only sip — 
If Lazarus would drip 

A little drop of water 
Upon my parching lip. 

6. 
No hope to him was given, 

No answer from the Lord 
To say that he was living 

Choose good for his reward. 
And so, beloved child, 
Take this for warning mild, 

Abandon idle living, 
To good be reconciled. 

7. 
It is a truthful story 

As Christ Himself does teach, 
Not simply allegory, 

Or other idle speech, 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 15 233 

And also can we say 
That on the judgment day 
The one will be rejoicing, 
The other mourning stay. 

8. 
Christ tells us very plainly 

The gate is open wide 
And many enter vainly 

In worldliness and pride ; 
The way is very broad, 
It is an easy road, 

Which leadeth to destruction 
And sorrow's dread abode. 

9. 
We read with greatest wonder 

In many places more, 
That Christ with trumpet's thunder, 

While angels round Him soar, 
Will come upon that day, 
The Holy Scriptures say, 

When everything material 
Will crash and pass away. 

10. 
And then must all assemble 

To meet His searching glance, 
Both strong and weak will tremble 

To see that countenance, 
The reckoning to hear, 
What each in his career 

Has done of good or evil — 
Oh, children, think and fear. 

11. 

Our secret inclinations 

Will then be open thrown, 
Our strongest aspirations 

Will in the light be shown, 



234 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

And. he who then with heed, 
The Book of Life can read, 

And find his name there written, 
Is fortunate indeed. 

12. 
He who is so appointed 

Aside at Christ's right hand, 
Along with the anointed, 

Among the sheep will stand, 
To him great joy will be 
For all eternity, 

No tongue can give description 
Of his felicity. 

13. 
While bells are softly ringing, 

The angel music choir 
With chanting and with singing, 

Will enter through the door 
To Zion 's golden town, 
On mortals looking down, 

And every lamb of Jesus 
Shall then receive his crown. 

14. 

Oh, truest shepherd Jesus ! 

Count us among Thine own, 
Come quickly and release us, 

Amid enticements thrown, 
For here does Satan old 
His wicked nets unfold 

And ever seek to win us 
With honors and with gold. 

15. 
As long as we are living 

Is danger ever here, 
Unless assistance giving 

Thy helping hand be near. 



SPIRITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 15 235 

Thy Holy Spirit send, 
That He support may lend, 
So that we faithful follow 
Thy word unto the end. 

16. 
Whene 'er our hearts are sinking 

Within the narrow way, 
Assist us then in thinking 

That any wish to stray 
May, from Thy judgment stool 
Into the fiery pool, 

Us hurl below forever, 
Where waters never cool. 

17. 
Whenever earthly rapture, 

Or arrogance or lust, 
Shall with allurements capture, 

Oh ! help us to distrust — 
Enable us to see 
What endless misery 

For transitory pleasures 
Will ever ready be. 

18. 
Oh, let us be o'erflowing 

With true humility ; 
The lamp of faith be glowing 

That all of us may see 
False glimmerings to shun : 
The world be overdone ; 

The victory o 'er fleshly things 
By lowliness be won. 

19. 
Oh ! send us from above, 

Thou Bridegroom of the soul ! 
Thou source of purest love ! 

A living burning coal 



236 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

To kindle in the heart 
The fear of Satan's art 

That all things may be hateful 
Which would from Thee us part. 

20. 
The virtuous, oh Father ! 

Acceptable to Thee, 
And all the children gather 

"Who still unready be 
That, spread on every side, 
Thy kingdom may be wide, 

And that Thy will be followed, 
Thy name be glorified. 

21. 

And since the way to Jordan, 
The long and narrow road, 

Is full of toil and burden, 
The Cross a weary load, 

Oh, give us patience, Lord, 

Thy precious help afford, 
Withhold not from our failings 

Thy sweet forgiving word. 

22. 
If we the way pursuing 

Should ever turn aside 
Unto our own undoing, 

Induced by worldly pride, 
As oft indeed has been, 
And for the grievous sin 

Might punishment severest 
Deservedly begin. 

23. 
Oh, God, and glorious Father, 

Our failures do not heed, 
But for Thy Son's sake rather 

Be merciful indeed, 



SPIEITUAL MAGAZINE NO. 15 237 

So that when sorrows toss 
No earthly trial or loss, 

Not even death, itself, can 
Divide us from the cross. 

24. 
Then praise to God above 

Upon the highest throne, 
To Him we offer love, 

To Christ His blessed Son, 
And to the Holy Ghost, 
In whom we place our trust, 

They bring at last together 
The pious and the just. 



SCHRIFTEN 

WITH TRANSLATION 




•■ 



■ 1 

i if >• 















"6.1 





«5i. *.•**■ r-s' 






i *y '^ 











mm 



'WS 



. -■•** , . 




tar 43 






TRANSLATION OF THE 

SCHRIFTEN 



A. 

Upon God's grace and tender blessing 
Everything is wholly and entirely dependent ; 
And without Heaven 's help and favor 
All the efforts of men are in vain. 
Therefore, continue in the fear of the Lord 
And cling to it throughout thy life, 
Because it brings understanding and wisdom ; 
Also cause all things to prosper well. 

B. 

Consider well in all things 

Which thou hast to do in this world ; 

That God who hears and sees everything 

Also sees what is done by thee. 

And that thou must of thy deeds and life 

Kender an account on the judgment day. 

Therefore strive by day and by night 

To keep, indeed, thy conscience well. 

C. 

Cross, discomfort, distress and trouble 
Are well known to the pious on earth ; 
Therefore, be comforted and undaunted 
If, at times, thou too art troubled. 
God sends thee the pang of the cross 
After the manner of the fathers, and for thy good, 
That the world may displease thee 
And may not keep thee out of Heaven. 
16 241 



242 THE WOEKS OF CHEISTOPHER DOCK 

D. 

Humility is a lofty virtue 

The charm of old age and the adornment of youth, 

It leads mankind heavenward. 

Therefore remain ever devoted to it. 

Why should man, the little worm, be proud 

Who has received his possessions from God, 

Whom every disease promptly disfigures 

And whom death strikes to earth ? 

E. 

Honor every man according to his rank, 

If thou wouldst turn love and praise upon thyself ; 

Especially, fear and love at all times 

Teachers and those in authority. 

Gray hairs with equal measure 

Let honor be given by thee. 

Who does not strive to do this, 

Is himself not worthy of honor. 

F. 

Idling is a wicked life 
To which no man should submit himself. 
Sloth weakens mind and spirit, 
On the contrary, work is very good. 
One must consider St. Paul 's words, 
That who would not work should not eat ; 
Therefore, let each one follow the calling 
For which God the Lord created him. 

G. 

Avarice is the root of all evil ; 
Let it by no means oppress thee, 
Because it leads the soul from God, 
And leads many into destruction. 



TRANSLATION OF THE SCHBIFTEN 243 

What the hand of the Highest has given thee 
Use that aright and be content. 
Be pious and adhere to honesty, 
Then great joy is prepared for thee. 

H. 

Whole-souledness in right things 

Causes them ultimately to succeed. 

Perseverance in the right track 

Is indeed becoming to good Christians. 

We shall fear God and not inquire 

What weak man may say ; 

But he who has God for a friend 

Is a man whom no one injures. 



The more thy enemies envy thee 
The more shalt thou avoid the bad, 
The more thou art despised and hated, 
The more be armed with understanding. 
A pious man will remain upright, 
No matter what hate and envy do to him ; 
He who stands well with his Creator 
Is a man who never sinks. 



K. 

Skill and understanding are precious gifts. 

Thou, too, shalt strive to gain them, 

Especially in the time of youth, 

When everything is easily learned. 

If God has given thee a pound, 

Then shall it not be hid by thee. 

Use it to the glory of God, 

That thy neighbor may have use of thee. 



244 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

L. 

Let love possess thy heart, 

Let love ever enkindle thee : 

Not love that burns in lewdness 

And runs after base lust. 

The love of God shall impel thee 

That thou mayst avoid evil, 

That thou lovest thy neighbor as thyself 

And bearest thy cross patiently. 

M. 
With moderation it is easy to thrive. 
Poverty causes her no fear, 
Because she does away with extravagance, 
And keeps everything only according to need. 
Health stands at her side, 
Let her prepare also thy table, 
And share with her thy food and drink. 
Then thou wilt grow old and rarely ill. 

N. 
Envy is a poison and rust of souls 
That alone enjoys to torture itself. 
Therefore look to it with all diligence, 
Bar for it the door of thy heart. 
Let God's distribution satisfy thee; 
He does not give all to every one, 
He does not give all in one place, 
He gives one thing here, another there. 

But godliness with contentment is great gain. I Tim. vi, 6. 

O. 

To live in a house without order 
Will never make a rich man, 
Therefore take care of thy servants. 
See what each does and follows, 



TRANSLATION OF THE SCHRIFTEN 245 

Let them not exercise play and impertinence, 
Let them stay at home at night, 
Let there be heard God's word and prayer. 
"What will follow ? Blessing will come. 

Ye fathers, provoke not your children to wrath: but bring 
them up in the nurture and admonition of the Lord. Ephes. 
vi, 4. 

Make yourselves purses that do not grow old. A treasure 
that never diminishes in Heaven, where no thief breaks through 
and no moth corrupts. 



False display in gestures, actions, words, 

Surely are injurious everywhere ; 

Likewise defiance and insolence 

Have deprived many a man of his possessions. 

Therefore be in all things modest. 

Dress according to thy rank, 

Estimate not too high nor too low, 

The middle road is just right. 

God resisteth the proud, but giveth grace unto the humble. 
James iv, 6. 

Q. 

Torment follows a life of lust; 

Who then would strive for such ? 

After a joy that is short and slight 

Follows long misery and bitter pain. 

how much better to avoid in the first place 

Than afterward to suffer such great agony ! 

God let me stand by virtue, 

And avoid base lust. 

Set your affections on things above, not on things on the 
earth. Coloss. iii, 2. 

(Short Summary of the 150th Psalm.) 



246 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

And the world passeth away, and the lust thereof: but he 
that doeth the will of God abideth forever. I John ii, 17. 

R. 

Revenge is a thing that God will take ; 

Therefore thou shalt leave it to Him. 

If they do thee wrong and take advantage of thee, 

Commend it to God, but in such form 

That thou immediately layest hate away 

And leavest gentleness in thy heart. 

Forgive, for God forgives thee also 

And charges thee to do the same. 

Dearly beloved, avenge not yourselves. Romans xii, 19. 

S. 
Provide, but provide in such a way 
That thou canst leave it to God. 
Exercise everywhere industry and good sense, 
Place the outcome in God's hand. 
Thou must not let thy courage fail, 
Though now and then things go wrong ; 
Who only can hope firmly in God 
Will remain an unsullied man. 

Cast thy burden upon the Lord, and He shall sustain thee: 
He shall never suffer the righteous to be moved. Psalm lv, 22. 

T. 

Fidelity is rare in these times 
And deceit is found on every hand ; 
Therefore guard thyself well, 
And be cautious in confiding. 
An attorney often leaves undone 
What is to thee most important, 
And no errand is so satisfactory 
As the one we attend to ourselves. 



TRANSLATION OF THE SCHRIFTEN 247 



Take ye heed every one of his neighbor, and trust ye not in 
any brother. Jeremiah ix, 4. 

U. 

Dissension and wrangling are fellows 

Which cause great wrath and anger. 

Folks swear and scold, 

Men are degraded, conscience dulled; 

Therefore, thou shalt flee from quarrel and dissension. 

Nor drag everything into court. 

Further, if thou art angry, 

Do nothing rash with mouth or hand. 

// it be possible, as much as lieth in you, live peaceably with 
all men. Romans xii, 18. 

V. 
Depend not upon the strength of men, 
For the flesh is but a weak thing ; 
"Who seeks protection in it 
Such a man will be accursed, 
But who depends upon God 
And submits himself wholly to Him, 
Will be blessed here in time 
And also in eternity hereafter. — Jerem. xvii, 5, 7. 

The name of the Lord is a strong tower: the righteous 
runneth into it, and is safe. Prov. xviii, 10. 

W. 
To be truthful and act righteously 
Is becoming to young and old. 
Avoid hypocrisy and false appearance, 
Let mouth and heart be together, 
The devil is the father of lies ; 
Therefore flee from them as from an adder. 
Truth will endure forever, 
Lies will perish. 



248 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

Wherefore putting away lying, speak every man truth with 

his neighbors: for we are members one of another. Ephes. 

iv, 25. 

X. 

Xantippe was in olden times 

A bad woman, scolding and quarrelling ; 

But Socrates, her wise husband, 

Accepted it as a pastime. 

Pray to the founder of marriage, 

"When thou wilt enter upon the marriage state, 

That He may be thy best support, 

Then will there be joy and blessing in it. 

Y. 

Exercise diligently and with pity 
Charity toward pious poor, 
Who giveth to the poor lendeth to God, 
And is protected from distress and ridicule. 
The wretched are not to be despised, 
God can alter thy affairs. 
Fortune is round, it loves unrest, 
Who builds on it builds on sand. 

Z. 

Finally, live so upon the earth 

That thou mayest become a citizen of Heaven. 

What thou seest here, far and wide, 

Is all pure vanity. 

Death will not forget thee, 

Keep it constantly in mind. 

Which perhaps to-day 

May hit thee with his arrow. 



Who would learn to read and write 
Must at first abide by A. B. C. 
And become well acquainted with this, 
Then learning will progress well. 



5U»-* 



j;^ I 



* c. 



^5 g^aCO^J^^ 

Tig ^^iV^n^-J s*>p%| ?? 




■*<& r<l 






1 *< 



^plsss^ :~^|^f1 !i^t|(; 



5. -^<s 



V^« 







'jqj 



TRANSLATION OF THE SCHREFTEN 249 

The copy has many good teachings 

For thee and me and others also. 

It is instructive. 

Employ it for thy instruction 

And the glory of the one God. 

Otherwise, none 

But God deserves the glory. 

For all the good that we have, 
By which we refresh body and soul, 
Comes from the Giver of good gifts. 
The good that we enjoy from God 
Must flow back into its first source. 

In heartfelt humility 
And childlike obedience 
To praise God at all times 
For His great goodness, 
Grace and mercy. 

Then our gifts remain pure 
When they flow back 
To the spring from which 
They came. 

Bless the Lord, my soul; and all that is within me, Mess 
His holy name. Bless the Lord, my soul, and forget not all 
His benefits. Psalm ciii. 

1768, July 18. 

Peace be to the brethren; love and faith from 
God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ. 

Let this mind be in you, which was also in Jesus 
Christ ; who being in the form of God, thought it not 
robbery to be equal with God. But made Himself of 
no reputation, and took upon Him the form of a 
servant, and was made in the likeness of men : And 



250 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

being found in fashion as a man, He humbled Him- 
self, and became obedient unto death, even the death 
of the cross. 

Wherefore God also hath highly exalted Him, 
and given Him a name which is above every name : 
That at the name of Jesus every knee should bow, 
of things in heaven, and things in earth, and things 
under the earth ; And that every tongue should con- 
fess that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God 
the Father. Wherefore, my beloved, as ye have 
always obeyed, not as in my presence only, but now 
much more in my absence, work out your own salva- 
tion with fear and trembling. For it is God which 
worketh in you both to will and to do of His good 
pleasure. (I Phil, ii, 5-13.) 

For consider him that endureth such contradic- 
tion of sinners against himself, lest ye be wearied 
and faint in your minds. Ye have not yet resisted 
unto blood, striving against sin. (Hebrews xii, 3, 4.) 

Repent 

Consider what thou must flee, that is, all sin; 
what thou must do, the commandments of God; 
what thou must fear, the cross, death and eternal 
damnation; what thou must desire and hope for, 
spiritual things in this life and eternal things in 
the life to come ; attentiveness in prayer, patience in 
misfortune, unity of heart and word, a good con- 
science with every act. Such a life stands the test 
before God and man. As thou believest thou livest. 
As thou livest thou diest. As thou diest thou f arest. 
As thou f arest thou remainest. 



TRANSLATION OF THE SCHRIFTEN 251 

Help then, dear Lord, that we so believe and 
live that we need not fear to die. Time passes away. 
Where does it lead our footsteps? Are we on the 
right path to the heavenly Canaan? A stork and a 
crane are prepared. They point to their time. Like- 
wise the swallow and the turtle-dove do not let 
themselves be robbed of their time. The little ani- 
mal and the like teach us a nice lesson, how we in the 
time of grace should gather for eternity. Motto 25. 
For one sees it and finds it recorded how great a 
factor time is. Therefore guard it well and be dili- 
gent in seeing how the same is spent in order that 
thou mayest enter into His rest. 

And when he had called the people unto Him 
with His disciples also, He said unto them, as fol- 
lows: Whosoever will come after Me, let him deny 
himself, and take up his cross, and follow Me. For 
whosoever will save his life shall lose it; but who- 
soever shall lose his life for My sake and the Gos- 
pel's sake the same shall save it. For what shall it 
profit a man, if he shall gain the whole world, and 
lose his own soul? Or what shall a man give in 
exchange for his soul % Whoever therefore shall be 
ashamed of Me and of My words in this adulterous 
and sinful generation, of him also shall the Son of 
man be ashamed, when He cometh in the glory of 
His Father with the holy angels. (Mark viii, 34, 35, 
36, 37, 38.) 

Oh, my Grod, help us to live a Christian life and 
to die a blessed death, for a Christian life and a 
blessed death are sufficient rewards here upon this 
earth. 



252 THE WOBKS OF CHEISTOPHEE DOCK 

To follow Jesus in precept and example merits 
the greatest gain, eternal life. 

Christ, our Head and King, we should follow 
obediently in word and deed. We should renounce 
our own unregenerated life and restrain it. We 
should take up willingly the cross of Christ and 
not be ashamed to follow Him. Oh, dear Jesus, sup- 
port us and grant us Thy spirit and power. Oh, 
help us to overcome all that would bind us to this 
world. What does it amount to if we achieve great 
success through which the soul is lost ? What does 
it amount to if we love the world with all its splendor 
and despise humility? This militates against the 
glory of Christ. It reaps its reward accordingly. 

But whoever in the time of grace feels his many 
short-comings, that he is heavily laden with sin, will 
enter with the lost son, in true penitence, the throne 
of grace. What heretofore was to him a joy, that 
now is for him a heartfelt sorrow and sadness. He 
will now gladly renounce the world and carry the 
cross for Christ. He who can thus surrender him- 
self to God, him will God help from death into life. 

Let God arise, let His enemies be scattered ; let 
them also that hate Him flee before Him. As smoke 
is driven away, so drive them away : as wax melteth 
before the fire, so let the wicked perish at the pres- 
ence of God. But let the righteous be glad ; let them 
rejoice before God: yea, let them exceedingly re- 
joice. (Psalm lxviii, 1, 2, 3.) 

Joy and love for each task, maketh light all effort 

and labor. 

Jacob Hakley. 

His signature, February 7, 1798. 




31 *%LM. z £j*-. * . * 2*. * * . *^_ $JL JL^ 



HYMNS 

WITH TRANSLATION 



HYMNS 

WITH TRANSLATION 



Ihr sunder kommt gegangen, 
Seht euren Jesum an, 
Wie sehmerzlieh er thut hangen 
Am harten creutzes-stamm, 
Ersehreeklich zugerieht, 
Sein gottlich angesicht, 
Mit blut ganz iibermahlet, 
Gleieh keinem menschen nicht. 



Vom haupt bis zu den f iissen 
1st Jesus ganz zerf etzt, 
Am ganzen leib zerrissen, 
All glieder sind verletzt ; 
Betrachts, o menschen kind, 
Das maehen unsre siind, 
Ja, ja, die siind alleine, 
Jesum ans creutze bind't. 



Seht Jesum f allt in ziigen, 
Der kraften ganz beraubt, 
Dem tod muszt unterliegen, 
Er neiget schon sein haupt ; 
Die sonn und auch der mond 
Verfinstert sieh auch schon ; 
Mit schmerzen thut er biissen 
Der siinden straf und lohn. 
255 



256 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 



Darum, ihr Christen alle, 

Bedenket diese zeit, 

Man tranket ihn mit galle, 

In seinem grossen leid ; 

Durch dornen, spott und hohn, 

Erwirbt er eine kron, 

Die tragen wir mit freuden 

Als eine beut davon. 



Ach Jesu, lasz dein leiden, 

Dein bittre todes-pein 

An mir, wann ieh musz scheiden, 

Nur nicht verloren seyn, 

Dein gnad sich zu uns wend, 

An meinem letzten end, 

Und wann ich geh von hinnen, 

So reich mir deine hand. 



Ach Jesu, lasz mir werden 
Ein solches tropflein blut, 
Das auf der blossen erden, 
Am creutz, dort liegen thut ; 
Dis rosenfarbig blut, 
Das komme mir zu gut, 
Wann sich einmal mein ' seele, 
Vom leibe scheiden thut. 



HYMNS WITH TRANSLATION 257 

1. 

Ye sinners come along, 
Your Jesus to behold, 
How He in pain doth hang 
Upon the cross 's cruel stem, 
Disfigured in a dreadful way, 
His godlike countenance 
With blood is sprinkled over, 
Unlike to any human creature. 

2. 
From head to foot 
Is Jesus mangled so, 
His body is wholly racked, 
All his limbs are wounded, 
Behold, oh child of man, 
This is due to our sins, 
Yea, yea, He through sin alone 
Upon the cross doth hang. 

3. 
See Jesus draw his dying gasps, 
Of powers all bereft, 
To death He must succumb, 
He now doth bow His head ; 
The sun and e'en the moon 
Are with darkness overcast ; 
In pain He now doth reap 
The penalty, the reward of sin 

4. 

Therefore, ye Christians all, 
Be mindful of this time, 
They moist His tongue with gall, 
In His great suffering ; 
Through thorns, scoffs and scorn, 
He wins the heavenly crown, 
These we shall bear with joy, 
A trophy of His victory. 
17 



258 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

5. 

Oh, Jesus, let Thy sorrow, 

Thy bitter pain of death 

On me, when I must part, 

Be not in vain. 

Grant to us Thy grace, 

When life's end draws nigh, 

And when I pass death's dark vale, 

Then lend to me Thy guiding hand. 

6. 
Oh Jesus, give to me 
Such a little drop of blood 
As there upon the naked earth, 
At the cross doth lie ; 
May this rose-colored blood, 
Come to me a sacred boon, 
When once this soul of mine, 
Shall leave behind this mortal coil. 



HYMNS WITH TKANSLATION 259 



1. 

Siisser Christ, 

Der du bist 

Meine wonne, 

Du bist meines herzens lust, 

Ich trag dich an meiner brust, 

du schone bimmels-sonne. 

2. 

Du hast dicb 

Ja f ur micb, 

Lassen todten, 

Und dein rosen-f arbes blut 

1st f ur meine seele gut, 

"Wenn sie kampft in hochsten notben. 

3. 

Drum, o sebatz, 

Lasz micb platz 

Bey dir finden, 

Hast du docb die seligkeit 

Aucb fur micb, dein kind, bereit, 

Und bezablt fiir meine sunden. 

4. 
Spricbst du nicbt : 
Dein gesicbt 
Blickt auf arme, 
Das ist, wie ein vater thut, 
Ueber das geplagte gut, 
Sieb zu recbter zeit erbarme. 

5. 
Ist nicbt kund, 
Dasz dein mund 
Dem verzieben, 
Der im tempel reue trug, 
Und mit web ans berze scblug ; 
Soil icb dann nun vor dir flieben. 



260 THE WOEKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

6. 
Nein, auf dich 
Grand ieh mich, 
Du kanst retten, 

Wenn mich gleich der blasse tod, 
Wenn mich holle, quaal und noth, 
Allbereit gefangen hatten. 

7. 
Nimm mich auf , 
Wenn mein lauf 
Wird geschlossen, 
Lasz in deiner seiten sehrein 
Meine seele sieher seyn, 
Weil dein blut fur mich vergossen. 

8. 
Fort, o welt, 
Mir gef allt 
Niehts auf erden, 
Leid ist in der eitelkeit, 
Lust ist in der seligkeit ; 
Jesu, lasz mich selig werden. 



HYMNS WITH TEANSLATION 261 

1. 

Delightful Christ, 

Thou which art 

My pleasure, 

Thou art the joy of my heart, 

I bear Thee in my bosom, 

Oh thou beautiful light of heaven. 

2. 
Thou hast Thyself, 
Tea, for me, 
Let be crucified. 
And Thy rose-colored blood, 
Is my soul's consolation, 
When it strives in greatest needs. 

3. 
Thus, O treasure, 
Let me find 
Boom with Thee, 
As Thou hast redemption free, 
E 'en for me, Thy child, prepared 
And paid the debt for all my sins. 

4. 
Say'st Thou not 
Thy countenance 
Beholds the poor ? 
Just as doth a father, 
Over his molested lot, 
Look betimes in pity. 

5. 

I can't conceive 

That only Thy tongue 

Spoke to him forgiveness 

Who repentance felt within the temple, 

And in sorrow smote his breast. 



262 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

6. 
Nay, on Thee 
I rely, 

Thou canst save, 
Even though blanched death, 
E 'en though hell, pain and torment, 
Me within their jaws hold fast. 

7. 
Take me up, 
When my life, 
Will meet its close, 
Let within Thy silken shrine, 
My soul rest in safety, 
For Thy blood for me was shed. 



Go, oh world, 
Me doth please 
Naught upon this earth, 
Sorrow lurks in vanity, 
Joy abounds in blessedness ; 
Jesus, grant me Thy salvation. 



HYMNS WITH TRANSLATION 263 



DAS GULDENE A. B. C, 

Mel. Psalm exxxiv. 



Allein auf Gott setz dein vertraun, 
Auf menschen Mlf sollt du nieht baun, 
Gott ists allein der glauben halt, 
Sonst ist kein glaub mehr in der welt. 

2. 

Bewahr dein ehr, hilt dich fur schand, 
Ehr is f iirwahr dein hochstes pf and ; 
Wirst du die schanz einmal versehn, 
So ists nun deine ehr geschehn. 

3. 

Clan 3 nicht zu veil, sodern hor mehr, 
Das wird dir bring 'n lob, preis und ehr; 
Mit schweigen sich verredt niemand, 
Claffen bringt manchen in stind und sehand. 



Dem grossen weieh, aeht dich gering, 
Das er dich nicht in ungluck bring ; 
Dem kleinen auch kein unreeht thu, 
So bleibst du stets in rast und ruhe. 



Erheb dich nicht mit stolzem muth, 
Wann du bekommen hast grosz gut ; 
Es ist dir nicht darum gegeb 'n, 
Das du dich dadurch sollt erheben. 



264 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

6. 

Frommig keit lasz gefallen dir, 
Vielmehr dann gold, das glaub du mir ; 
Warm geld und gut sich von dir scheidt, 
So weicht doch nicht die frommigkeit. 

7. 

Gedenk der arm'n zu aller frist 
Wann du von Gott gesegnet bist, 
Sorst dir das widerfahren kann, 
Was Christus sagt von reichen Man. 



Hat dir jemand was guts gethan, 
Da sollt du allzeit denken an ; 
Es soil dir seyn von herzen leid, 
An dis zu spiir'n undankbarkeit. 



In deiner jugend sollt du dich 
Zur arbeit halten neissig lich ; 
Hernaeh gar schwer die arbeit ist, 
Wann du zum alter kommen bist. 

10. 

Kehr dich auch nicht an jedermann, 
Der dir vor auger dienen kann ; 
Nicht alles geht von herzensgrund, 
Was schon und lieblicht redt der mund. 

11. 

Lasz kein unf all verdrieszen dich, 
Wann das gluck gehet hinter sich ; 
Anf ang und ende sind nicht gleich, 
Wie solches gar offt findet sich. 



HYMNS WITH TEANSLATION 265 



12. 

Maszig im zorn sey allezeit 
Nur klein ursach erheb kein streit ; 
Dureh zorn das herze wird verblendt, 
Das niemand recht damit erkennt. 

13. 

Nicht scham dich, rath ich allermeist, 
Das mann dich lehr waz du nicht weiszt, 
Wer etwas kann, den halt man werth, 
Der ungeschieht'n niemand begehrt. 

14. 

merk, so einer f iihrt ein klag 
Fur dir, dasz du so bald der sag 
Nicht glaubest, auch nicht richest fort, 
Sondern horest des audern wort. 

15. 

Pracht und hofrart meid iiberall, 
Das du nicht kommest in unf all ; 
Mancher war ein behaltner mann, 
Hatt 'er hoffart und pracht gelahn. 

16. 

Quat von niemand gedenk noch sprech, 
Dann kein mensch lebet ohn gebreeh ; 
Redest du all's naeh dienem will'n, 
Man wird dich bald wieder stillen. 

17. 

Ruf Gott in alien nothen an, 
Er wird gewisz bey dir stahn ; 
Er hilft ein jeden aus der noth, 
Der nur nach seinem willen thut. 



266 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

18. 

Sieh dich wohl fur, zeit ist bos, 

Die welt ist f alsch und sehr gottlos ; 

Willt du der welt sehr hangen an, 

Ohn schad und schand kommst nicht davon. 

19. 

Tracht stets darnach was recht gethan, 
Ob dich schon nicht lobt jedermann ; 
Es kans doch niemand machen so, 
Das jedermann gefallen thu. 

20. 

Verlasz dich nicht auf irrdisch ding, 
All seitlich gut verschwind gering; 
Darum der mensch gar weislich thut, 
Der allein sucht das ewig gut. 

21. 

Wann jemand mit dir hadern will, 
So rath ich das du schweigest still ; 
Und ihm nicht hilfest auf die bahn 
Da er gern wollt ein ursach han. 

22. 

Xerxes verliesz sich auf sein heer, 
Darab ward er geschlagen sehr ; 
So du muszt kriegen, Gott vertrau, 
Sonst allezeit den frieden ban. 

23. 

Ye lang'r je mehr kehr dich zu Gutt, 
Dasz du nicht kriegst des teufels spott ; 
Der mensch ein solchen lohn wird han, 
Wie er im leben hat gethan. 



HYMNS WITH TRANSLATION 267 



24. 
Zier all dein thun mit redlichkeit, 
Bedenk zum end den letzten b 'scheid ; 
Dann vor gethan und nach bedacht, 
Hat manchen in grosz leid gebracht. 



268 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

THE GOLDEN A. B. C. 

Mel. Psalm cxxxiv. 



Put thy trust in God alone, 
On the help of men thou shalt not rely, 
It is only God whose faith doth hold, 
No other trust is there on earth. 

2. 

Guard thine honor, avoid shame ; 
Honor is indeed the greatest gain ; 
If thou should 'st miss a single chance, 
Then wilt thine honor pass away. 



Talk not too much, but listen more, 
It will bring thee glory, honor, praise, 
With silence no one makes a slip, 
Gabbling leads many into sin and shame. 



To the great give way, be humble, 
That they bring thee not into trouble ; 
To the lowly also do no harm, 
Then thou wilt always be in peace and rest. 



Be not puffed up with lofty pride, 
If thou hast gained a great success ; 
It was not given with that intent, 
That thou should 'st thus exult thyself. 



HYMNS WITH TRANSLATION 269 



6. 



Let piety be thy satisfaction, 
It's more than gold, believe me true; 
Though riches and honor part from thee, 
Yet abideth still true piety. 



At all times, be mindful of the poor, 
If thou hast been blest by God, 
Or thou mayest have the fate 
That Christ ascribes to the rich man. 



If any one hath done good by thee, 
Of him shalt thou ever mindful be ; 
A heartfelt sorrow shall come to thee 
If thou shalt show ingratitude. 



In thy youth thou shalt keep 
Thyself at labor with all zeal ; 
Hereafter labor will be o 'erhard, 
When thou shalt be of ripe old age. 

10. 

Be not disturbed by every one 
Who claims before thine eyes to serve thee ; 
Not all proceeds from a true heart, 
However sweet and lovely speaks the tongue. 

11. 

Let not misfortune trouble thee, 
When success doth withdraw itself ; 
Beginning and end are not the same, 
As one hath often noticed this. 



270 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

12. 

Always be moderate in anger, 
Let no small cause create some strife ; 
Through anger the heart becometh blind 
That no one knows himself aright. 

13. 

Be not ashamed, is my best advice, 
If one doth teach thee something new ; 
Him who knows, one doth prize, 
The foolish all do despise. 

14. 

Oh consider, if one makes complaint 
Before thee, not to believe too soon, 
Nor pass a hasty judgment, 
But hear also the defendant's word. 

15. 

Pomp and arrogance avoid always, 
That thou may'st not fall into disgrace; 
Many a man was high esteemed 
If he disdained haughtiness and display. 

16. 

Neither speak nor think of any one evil, 
For no one lives without a break ; 
If thou shouldst speak without restraint 
One could soon put thee to silence. 

17. 

Call upon God in every time of trouble, 
He will indeed be thy help and strength ; 
He leadeth each one out of anguish, 
Who only doth His righteous will. 



HYMNS WITH TBANSLATION 271 

18. 

Provide for thyself, the time is evil, 
The world is full of deceit and godlessness ; 
Wilt thou cling to worldly things, 
Harm and shame thou canst not escape. 

19. 

Always seek to do what 's right, 
Even if not all do praise thee ; 
For no one can act in such a way, 
That each and all are pleased thereby. 

20. 

Eely not on earthly things, 
All temporal joy fades to naught ; 
Thus the man who wise would be, 
Seeks alone the eternal good. 

21. 

Should some one wish to strive with thee, 
I advise you keep in silence still ; 
And do not help him on the track, 
Or give him cause for acting thus. 

22. 

Xerxes put his trust in armies, 
Therefore he was beaten sadly ; 
If thou must strive, trust in God, 
Then always seek the paths of peace. 

23. 

The more thy days the more turn to God, 
Lest thou fall into Satan 's scorn ; 
Man will always have such reward 
As he in life in deeds hath done. 



272 THE WORKS OF CHRISTOPHER DOCK 

24. 
Deck all thy acts with probity, 
Consider ever the end of life ; 
Hasty acting and after thought, 
Have many men to sorrow brought. 



THE END. 



•VUY 16 1908 



o 









# 



v< 



x # .. </^^# ^T^# <>7^*# % * 
■i^% ^i^V o°^^% cP\*<£V% 




<fc. A* .^W* '. % # 



W 










■S? ^ % 




% ^ - 







V ^ ^ v* 

(PVi^.% ^^^S> &*]^,\ 




'Q*. y °* »■ 



W 



A^ ^ '0.^ # ^ 

y *a*°^^ v * < *»a ( % 








cS ^ 



///:7X 








?,<••'* 



<> 



^ ^ * <6V -i O.^ ^-6- ^"-4 ol>- 






°^A^ ^^fcj'% ^iiir-% ^ii^-% 



r^d* 



^ ^ 













9? \^" 






^ °^ 



% m 



\ V -< c> , Trf/ 88 \Xr * »Y" *^ 





5>\\L^O<e 



9?. y o • ». 

> ,. ^ * , -^ 





^.o^ 



4 ^ 



<£ ^ 

^ %• 



w 












9d . y o 



,> r ' 



tf 




W ;> 











&°* ° 






r^ V 






cV 



^0* 







^L 






^ 



Q^/'o 









^ ^ 






o°v; 



s -A* %'ov,* SF <b*'o.i+ <& 9^ 

V ^ Y * ° /• "% V> *, y * ° a ^ A ^ v * o , . ^JU 









V V> - u • *. o 




% ' ° " ^ 




